cael er ip ata SE ad) Bh A) a = . . un petbnbehe ina . eases - A Seats nein’ aed trastete od a ste — Rinacaceet ae a aha A naig emai oReil fe 9 heer Fo ekak afnied ys ni Sci 0 inter aaeeeHc8 “5 seerecapetie area's : nent teehee ase e hh Yon | a ham ey KP ont te ay ade mae em © WM ae ae ftp ee ena ih eine caeeee hee pore ae aie sanrinte tena li iat ” Keiunrtatot rst eS y ee a patente ; ee on Cz pete her F Lei UE . POs PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE AVOLOGICAL SOCLETY Oat O NEO ie 1920, pp. 1-194, with 5 Puares and 68 TEx'-FIGURES. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT ITS HOUSE IN RHEGENT’S PARK. MOND ONE MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CoO., PATERNOSTER ROW, Lapse OF THE COUNCIL AND OFFICERS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1920. Patron. His Masgesty Tue Kina. COUNCIL. His Grace Tor Duke or Beprorp, K.G., F.R.S., President. 'Tae Hon. Crecit Barine, M.A. ALFRED H. Cocks, Esq., M.A. Lr.-Cot. 8. Monckton Cops- MAN, M.D., F.B.S. CHARLES DrumMonp, Treasurer. Huen §. GuApstone, Esq., M.A., F.R.S.E. Siz Srpnry F. Harmer, K.B.E., M.A., Se.D., F.R.S., Vice- President. Pror. James P. Hit, D.Sc., FE.R.S., Vice-President. WiiiiAmM Huntsman, Esa. Pror. Ernest W. McBrips, D.Sc., F.R.S., Vice-President. Ksq., Cont. Str Henry McManon, | G.C.M.G., K.C.LE. E. G. B. Mreapre-Watpo, Esq., Vice-President. P,. CuauMers MircHe.u, Esgq., C.B.H., M.A., D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S., Secretary. THE Karu or Onstow, O.B.E. Magsor Arperr Pam, O.B.E. Aprian D. W. Pottock, Ksq. His Grac—E Tur DUKE oF Ruttanp, K.G. THE Marquis oF Srico, F.S.A., Vice-President. Masor RicHarp 8. Taytor. A. Trevor-Barrys, Esq., M.A. AntHony H. WINGFIELD, Esq., Vice-President. PRINCIPAL OFFICERS. P. Caatmers Mircuet., C.B.M., M.A., D.8c., LL.D., F.R.S., Secretary. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., F.L.8., Curator of Mammals and Resident Superintendent of the Gardens. D. Seru-Smiru, Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works. Epwarb G. BouLencEr, Curator of Reptiles. Miss L. E. Curusman, F.E.S., Curator of Insects. Prof. R. T. Lerper, D.Se., M.D., Director of Prosectorium. Dr. C. F. Sonnac, Ch.B., Anatomist. Dr. N.S. Lucas, M.B., Ch.B., Pathologist. Dr. G. M. Vuvers, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., Hon. Parasitologist. F, Martin Duncan, F.R.M.S., Librarian. F. W. Bonn, Accountant. W.H Cote, Chief Clerk, LIST OF CONTENTS. 1920, pp. 1-194. EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. Page Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the months of November AMC ECETMOET OAS foc. ..,. ares « CRP ates selene a wal 189 My. A. J. Etwes, F.R.S. Letter relative to the condition of herds of Moose in Yellowstone Park., ............... 190 Mr. D. Sera-Suiru, F.Z.8. Remarks on an interesting case of response of Sparrows to colour .................. 190 Mr. E. G. Boutencer, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a remarkable new Land-Tortoise (Zestudo OCCT UUGU) IN tacts eM, « 3-3. de SE CEE Oe 190 Mr. F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of Acari from the lungs of AU ASRETRENESS TAGS SES ROR BENE A 05 oe crea Sg OAR 190 Wes Das 5 ie Burne, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, some skeletons of feetal Mammals prepared by MACS ONES ede aes Cote oe sks os oe SME Selo e hehd cieeee aS cre a ISH Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of January, JOG Mert ic es see eat rcisie nlc. < 2 sto oe SRR ce oe ie eee cnet. 191 Mr. F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of a female Mole-flea (//ystri- CHO DSUUUG ACME DOAN ieick i ce cae RRR, oS Re at ranlciohe tact 1G), Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of February, 1920 lv Page Mr. E. G. Boutenaer, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a Frog with a duplicate foot ...................5 192 Prof. J. P. Hint, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an Embryo obtained from a Kangaroo recently living in, the Society's Menagerie ©) ...).8- 5.0.2.6. -2eeie tase tiee 192 Sir Frank Coryer, K.B.E., F.R.C.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of skulls of Macacus rhesus ... 192 Prof. H. Maxwett Lerroy, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photographs of Egret Farms in Sind... 192 Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., E:Z.S. Exhibition of, and “remarks upon, a series of Pig’s mandibles from the New. tHlelonidles cc abe eee cca gee eerie fearie eaiaie 193 Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, two Fournier’s Hutia (Capromys pilorides)...... 193, The Secrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March, 1920 ......... 193 Mr. Arruur Loveriper. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a collection of Snakes which he had obtained in Kast Africa during the wears T9ho = 9 holy eee. ca. nace 193 Miss L. KE. Curesman, F.E.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern-slides illustrating the life- history and habits of the Ichneumon-fly, Rhyssa DET SUMDSOTU: os wc athens os eae Wacies ested eee eee eee 194 Dr. P. Cuatmers Mircunii, C.B.E., M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photo- graphs of Abbot’s Duiker (Cephalophus spadix) ...... 194 Mr. D. Seru-Suiru, ¥.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, lantern-slides showing the display of a male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus impeyanus) .........++. 194 Mi. L, Hocsen, M.A., B.Sc. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Amblystoma ......-s..-..cs0+---- <0 194 es bo 10. PAPERS. A Revision of the Ichneumonid Genera ZLabium and Pecilocryptus. By Rowtanp E. Turner and JAmeEs Wearrrsrone 3 (Rext-foumresiel = 11.) Veice sees, eas Noe . Description of the Larynx and (isophagus of a Common Macaque (Jacacus fascicularis) exhibiting several abnormal Characters. By C. F. Sonwnrac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Auatomist to the Society. (INSTR AUC Te e5) GSTS) et Se Eo cic cio Gee a aor Some Australian Opiliones. By H. R. Hoae, M.A., ID Ziosiy Cede hates WU 19 nn eco pee eet anes eee . Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). By Sranuey Hirst. (GRexsG =m are Oe cee. ls «ns image eer eeeriee era Seek . On the Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes. By D. R. Buarracuarya, M.S8c., Department, Zoological The Muir Central College, Allahabad, India, U.P. (Plates VG Wi vand Next-figuresl os) see ceee. os. neces: On some Lizards of the Genus Chaleides. By E.G. Bouuencer, F.Z.8S. (Text-figures 1-4.) ............... . Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919. With Notes on Avian Enteritis. By Naruantet 8S. Lucas, M.B., F.Z.S., Pathologist to the Society. (With AC NA BUSS) Pee ie) aetna 2 oo 5s Sell Meso ela . An Apodous Ama calva. By Arnrnur Witievy, F.R.S., E.Z.S:, McGill University, Montreal .....0..........:. . On the External Characters of the South-American Monkeys. By R. I. Pococn, F.R.S. (Text-figures Ee) Meee ei nce he SY. Ss. 5k pa MM ee Rn a i The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammalia.—l. General Description of the Tongue. By OC. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B, F.Z.8., Anatomist Lowther Societys. (Vext-tiguressO=07.)) .20.0.0cessse.- ees Page i) 1 49 61 17 85 89 91 vi 11. Notes on East African Lizards collected in 1915-1919, with Descriptions of a new Genus and Species of Skink and new Subspecies of Gecko. By ArrHuR Lovertpen. (Text-figume wl S)het sored es aaa 131 12. On Abnormal Features in the Peritoneum of a Raccoon. By C. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. (Text-figures 18-19.) .................. 169 13. On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. By C. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. (Text-figure 20.).. 175 14. On the External Characters of the Ratel (d/ellivora) and the Wolverene (Galo). By R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., RO7AS. oo ( lext-figures 142185) tm ce mene reas Coc ee: 179 Alphabetical last ot Contributoncsnae teense rere Vil iindexcot Witistratrons’) 230 peepee en eee eee ee eee eee x1 AV Iie dele lex KOs IL) | JUiJL iS) a CONTRIBUTORS, With References to the several Articles contributed by each. (1920, pp. 1-194.) Page BuatracHarya, D., R., M.Sc. On the Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes. (Plates I. wand, Next one ures T—))\\\). 0). Wald eeeebe Aen ce as -. 61 Boutencer, EH. G., F.Z.S., Curator of Reptiles. On some Lizards of the Genus Chalcides. (Text- AVOWOMEES) ela) ) CRRA oie ea ale as0 xs ota is earn ee eee ey wa 17 Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a remarkable new Land-Tortoise (Testudo loveridgit) .......0.0.ecceseceee seen es 190 Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a Frog with a Clio ONIN 22) NOVO) Maile cet RIES SS do QA cay 6 OC Re 122 Burne, R. H., M.A., F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, some skeletons of foetal Mammals prepared by Tadpoles ........................ 1g Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of Pig’s mandibles from the New Hebrides ........................05. 193 CuEgEsMAN, Miss L. E., F.E.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern- slides illustrating the life-history and habits of the Ichneumon-fly, Rhyssa persudsortd ..,..ccecceeerene seers ees 194 vill Conver, Sir Franx, K.B.E, F.R.C.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of skulls of WIGCACUS TREGUS cn 3.2. ok cn ae Duncan, F. Martin, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of Acari from the lungs of Macacus rhesus ............0.00.0.4- Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photomicrographs of a female Mole-flea (Hystrichopsylla talpe) .................. Kuwes, A. J., F.R.S. Letter relative to the condition of herds of Moose in NWiellowstone Park: 25.2.2 een ey nae era Hitt, Prof. J. P., F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an Embryo obtained from a Kangaroo recently living in the Society’s Mienagerie *...... ci ii Ae ee ie En ester aie Hirst, STANLEY. Revision of the Engish Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). (Text-figures 1-5.) ...... Hoesen, L., M.A., B.Sc. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of AGTOUYSEOMUG oe via vosintek see eee nsf Roa oe Hoge, H. R., M.A., F.Z.S. Some Australian Opiliones. (Plates I.-III.)............ Lerroy, Prof. H. Maxwett, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photographs of Egret Farms DTD SSLIYEL. oo sash etae One Ree eee Page 190 191 190 192 49 31 1x LovERIDGE, ARTHUR. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a collection of Snakes which he had obtained in East Africa during the Bee tance) = LOH Otis ete ta. ss calc sists a ee RE eee ois Patches Notes on East African Lizards collected in 1915-1919, with Description of a new Genus and Species of Skink and new Subspecies of Gecko. (Text-figure 1.) ............ Lucas, Naruantet 8., M.B., F.Z.S., Pathologist to the Society. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens, 1919. (With AS CARESS) 2 bird ces'.k Soc ee See. OR eee: Lees MirceHELL, P. CHatmers, C.B.E., M.A., D.Sc, LL.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during themonthvot March, 1920 ives. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, photographs of Abbot’s Duiker (Cephalophus spadix) ........,.+.sceceseeeeee Pocock, Reecinaup I., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.Z.S., Curator of Mammals and Resident Superintendent of the Gardens. On the External Characters of the South American Monkeys (Rext-teures, L=3.)) (ie machete keenest. On the External Characters of the Ratel (J/ellivora) and the Wolverene (Gulo). (Text-figures 14-18.)......... Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of November and December, 1919 ... Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie duemoyune month of January, UOA0Meindss.coc esses -c..- Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie duriny) the month of February, [9209 3. .s-22:2-. 0: Exhibition of, and remarks upon, two Fournier’s Hutia ( (OOTOUS JOUUCTOGHES)) Corcepnencen osonadceeas -bcaber be aaccoeoaeece Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920. b 193 131 193 149 ok 179 189 191 x Seru-Smirn, Davin, F Z.8., Curator of Birds. Remarks on an interesting case of response of Sparrows to colour rr eC Exhibition of, and remarks upon, lantern-slides show- ing the display of a male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus OPO TAO KCOCIS) NAEBPBPSPRE BARD AB ice 56 0%48 ch bohene begsbeumbonddtednaT ce Sonnrac, Cuarues F., M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.8., Anatomist to the Society. Description of the Larynx and Csophagus of a Common Macaque (Macacus fascicularis). (Text-figures 1-5.) eee e ee Feet ere oo ree EOE HEE OE EY CELE EO Her Becesreseeseseseeeese The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammalia.—I. General Description of the Tongue. (Text-figures 6-17.) eee te tee ete we ee es eee essere eees see rtsees-ecsece On Abnormal Features in the Peritoneum of a Raccoon. (Text-figures 18 & 19.) cere eee seer eres eet ees eee eee On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. (Text-figure 20.) weet there eee essere esses sesees Turner, Rowianp E., and WaArTERSTON, JAMES. A Revision of the Ichneumonid Genera Zabiwm and Pecilocryptus. (Text-figures 1-11.) ee pest ese ereetsoce WarteERSTON, JAMES. See TURNER, RowLAnp E. Wittey, Arruur, F.R.S., F.Z.8. An Apodous Amia calva Se Page 190 194 27 169 175 INDEX OF Algidia cuspidata, P\. IIT, p. 31. Alouatta, pp. 93, 95, 105, 108. villosa, pp. 102, 105. Aotus, pp. 99, 99. Ateles, pp. 92, 95, 111. ater, p. 102. paniscus, p. 103. Cacajao rubicundus, pp. 92, 99, 105. Callicebus moloch, pp. 92, 98. wean - personatus, p. 110. Callimico goeldii, pp. 92, 95, 98, 110. Cebus, pp. 93, 95, 101, 105, 108, 111. Chalcides delislii, p. 79. —— guentheri, p.79. lineatus, p. 79. mauritanicus, p. 79. — ocellatus, pp. 79, 81. , var. botteg?, p. 83. , var. polylepis, p. 83. sepoides, p. 79. —— thierryi, p. 79. tridactylus, p. 79. Clarias magur, Pl. I., p. 61. Eutropiichthys vacha, Pl. L., p. 61, p- 64. Gulo, pp. 180, 183, 186. Hapale gacchus, pp. 105, 106, 111. Labium bivittatum, p. 9. ILLUSTRATIONS, Labiuin ferrugineum, pp. 14, 19. hohartense, p. 13. montivagum, pp. 2,9, 17, 18, 25. —— occidentate, p. 13. petitorius, pp. 8, 14. pilosum, p. 10. sculpturatum, p. 14. —— subequale, p. 18. —- vasseanum, p. 13. walker, p. 5. Lagothrie, pp. 93, 95, 108. infumatus, p. 101. Leontocehus rosalia, pp. 92, 105, 106, 111. Macacus fascicularis, pp. 27, 29. Macropsalis chiltoni, Pl. 1., p. 31. Mammalia, Tongues of, pp. 116-125, 2, NPAs), Mellivora, pp. 180, 182, 185, 186. Monoxyommea henlei, P\. I11., p. 31. trawli, Pl. WIL., p. 31. -—— tuberculata, Pl. I1I., p. 31. Nuncia smithi, P\. 11., p. 31, Oligonychus quercinus, pp. 51, 59. —- simplex, pp. 51, 59. —— ulmi, pp. 51, 59. ununguts, pp. 51, 59. Panda, p. 176. Pantopsalis gray, Pl. I., p. 21, X1i INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Pantopsalis halli, Pl. 1., p. 31. pococki, Pl. 1., p. 31. wattet, Pl. I., p. 3l. Pecilocrypius nigromaculatus, pp. 17, 20. Pseudeutropius garua, pp. 63, 65. Raccoon, pp. 170, 172. Rita buchanani, Pi. 1., p. 61. Saimiris sciurea, pp. 93, 95, 98, 105, 106, 111. » Scolecoseps boulengert, p. 159. Tetranychus carpini, pp. 51, 52. crategi, pp. 51, 53, 54. —— lintearius, pp. 52, 53, 54. populi, pp. 51, 58, 54. —— schizopus, pp. 51, 52, 53. talisee, pp. 51, 53, 54. -— telarius, pp. 51, 52, 53, 54. —— tiliarium, pp. 51, 52, 53, 54. Trienobunus acuminatus, Pl. 11., p. 31. Trienonyx cockayni, Pl, 11., p. 31. variegata, Pl. I1., p. 31. Wallago attu, Pl. I1., p. 61. INDEX. 1920.—Pages 1-194, [New names in clarendon type. Systematic references in italics. (z.8.1.) indicates additions to the Society’s Menagerie. | Ablepharus boutont, var. peronit, 157. wahlbergit, 158. Acanthopterygti, 71. Agama atricollis, 142. colonorum, 140. flavicauda, 141. lionotus, 141. vaillanti, 142. Agamide, 140. Ailie coila, 70. Algidia, gen. n., 46. cuspidata, sp. n., 47. Alouatta, 93, 94, 96, 97, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 112, 113. (Mycetes) villosa, 92. Amia calva, 89. Aniurus natalis, 89. Ammotraqus lervia, 198. Amphipnoide, 71. Amphipnous cuchia, 71. Amphisbenide, 145. Anabantide, 71. Anabas scandens, 71. Anelytropide, 160. Anguilliformes, 71. Aotus, 93, 94, 96, 100, 104, 106, 118. 103, ey, —— (Nyctipithecus) trivirgatus, 92. Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1920. | —— (Ouakaria), 93, 94, 96, 97, | Ateles, 91, 93, 94, 97, 100, 103, 109, 112, 118. ater, 92. Bagarius yarrellii, 70. Bulistes erythrodon, 72. stellaris, 72. Balistide, 72. Barbus sarana, 67, 70. tor, (2. Barilius bola, 70. Belone cancile, 71. strongylura, 71. | Berycide, 71. 104, Brachyteles, 91, 94, 103, 104, 112, 113. Cacajao (Brachyurus, Ouakaria) rubi- cundus, 92. 104, 112, 113. Calamoichthys, 89. 103, Callicebus, 93, 94, 96, 97, 100, 104, 106, Te Ws}. —~—- (Callithrix) moloch, 92. —— personatus, 107, 109. Callichrous macrophthalimus, 67, 70. c XIV Callichrous pabda, 67, 70. Cullimico, 94, 96, 97, 98, 100, 104, 109, 112, 113. goeldit, 92. Capromys pilorides, 193. Carangide, 72. Caranx atropus, 72. gallus, 72. Catarrhactes chrysolophus 192. Catla buchanani, 65, 67, 70. Cebus, 93, 94, 96, 97, 100, 103, 104, 106, 107, 112, 118. -—— albifrons, 92. apella, 92. Cephalophus spadia, 194, Chetodontide, 72. Chalcides, (7. ——- bedriage, 78. bottegi, 77, 80, 83. delislii, 80. —— guenthert, 80. lineatus, 80. — linose, 79, 80, 82. —— mauritanicus, 80. — occidentalis, 80. ocellatus, 77. polylepis, 80. ragazztt, 80, 82. (z. 8. L.); sepoides, 80. simonyi, 78. —— tiliqugu, 80, 82. — tridactylus, 80. —— viridanus, 78. vittatus, 80, 82. Chameleon biteniatus, 168. ——- dilepis, 160. tsabellinus, 168. -—— gracilis, 160. —— hehnelii, 163. jacksoni vauerescece, 163. melleri, 166. Chameleontide, 160. Channa orientalis, 90. Chasmorhynchus nudicollis, 191. Chatoessus chacunda, 71. * manminna, 67, 71. Chelys fimbriata, 190, Chirocentride, 70. INDEX. Chirocentrus dorab, 70. Cinnyris mariquensis (z. 8. L.), 189. Cirrhina mrigala, 70. reba, 70. Clarias magur, 70. Clupea alosa, 61. chapra, 71. — ilisha, 67. sindensis, 67. Clupeide, 71. . Clupeiformes, 70. Conepatus, 179, 184. Coronella amabilis, 189. zonata, 189, Cricetulus migratorius (z. s. L.), 189. Cuscus, 102. Cynoglossus quinguelineatus, 72. Cyprinide, 70. Cypriniformes, 70. Dipsosaurus dorsalis, 189. Licheneis naucrates, 72. Echeneidide, 72. Elasmodactylus triedrus, 140. Engraulis malabaricus, 71. telara, 67, 70. Ephippus orbis, 72. Equus pryevalskii, 189. Hremias spellti, 148. Esociformes, 71. Eurypyga hetias, 190. Eutropiichthys vacha, 67, 70. Felis caracal, 189. leo, 189, 198. —— tigris, 189. Feylinia currori, 160. Galeopithecus, 116. Galera, 179. Galietis, 179. Gastropholis vittata, 147. Gazella subgutturosa, 191. INDEX. xV Gazza equuleformis, 72. Geckonide, 132. Gerres filamentosus, 72. Gerride, 72. Gerrhosauride, 149. Gerrhosaurus flavigularis, 150. major, 149. nigrolineatus, 150. Gobiide, 72. Gobioides tenius, 72. Grisonia, 184. Gulo, 179, 181, 182, 184, 186, 187, 193. Hapale jacchus, 91, 97, 98, 104, 105, 106, 109, 112. Hemidactglus brookii, 134. citerntt, 132. —— mabouia, 133. ——- ruspolti, 134. —— squamulatus, 134. Histiophorus, 89. Holacanthus xanthurus, 72. Flolaspis guenthert, 149. Hystrichopsylla talpe, 191. Ichnotropis capensis, 148. Ictonyx, 179, 184, 187. Julis lunaris, 72. Labeo ceruleus, 70. calbasu, 70. diplostomus, 67, 70. rohita, 65, 70. Labium approximatum, sp. n., 21. —— associatum, sp. n., 20. bicoler, 24. —— bivittatum, sp. n., 8. —— brevicorne, sp. n., 6. — centrale, sp. n., 6. clavicorne, 19. Serrugineum, 19. -—— fulvicorne, sp. n., 22. —— hobartense, sp. n., 20. | Labium longicorne, sp. n., 23. | ——— montivagum, sp. n., 16. | —— multiarticulatum, sp.r., 23. —— occidentale, sp.n., 16. petitorius Wrichs., 7. , subsp. concolor, subsp. n., 8. ——- pilosum, sp. n., 10. | ——sculpturatum, sp. n., 14. —— spiniferum, sp.n., 12. —— subzquale, sp. n. 15. — subpilosulum, sp. n., 11. —— vasseanum, sp. n., 13. —— walkeri, sp. n., 4. , Key to the Species of, 3. Labride, 72. Lacerta vawereselli, 147. Lacertide, \47. Lagothri«x, 94, 96, 97, 101, 102, 108, 104, 106, 107, 112, 113. infumatus, 92, 109. -— lagotricha (=humboldti), 92. Laniatores, 36. Latastia johnstoni, 148. longicaudata, 147. Lates calearifer, 72. Leontocebus rosalia, 91, 105, 106, 109, 112. Lethrinus miniatus, 71. Lophophorus impeyanus, 194. Lutra maculicollis (z. s. u.), 189. Lygodactylus capensis (Smith), subsp. n., 135. Jischeri scheffleri, 136. —— grote, 136. — picturatus, 136. Lygosoma ferrandii, 157. sundevallii, 155. Lyncodon, 179. Mabuwia brevicollis, 152. maculilabris, 152. — megalura, 152. —— quinqueteniata, 153. striata, 153. varia, 103. Macacus fascicularis, 27. rhesus, 190 192. Xvi Macrones aor, 67, 70. ~— cavasius, 70. seenghala, 67, 70. Macropus bennetti, 191. Mamunalia, tongues of, 115. Martes, 179, 181, 187. Mastacembelde, 72. Mastacembelus armatus, 72. Meles, 179, 181. Mellivora, 179, 181, 182, 184, 185, 187, 193. Mephitis, 179, 184. Monopeltis colobura, 145. Monoxyomma heudei, sp. n., 44. spinatwm, 44. —— trailli, sp.n., 45, tuberculatum, sp. n., 44. Mugil corsula, 71, Mugilide, 71. Mugiliformes, 71. Murena macrura, 71. —— punctata, 71. sathete, 71. tessellata, 71. Murenide, 71. Mustela, 179, 181, 187. putorius, 184. Mydaus, 184. Myocastor coypus, 192. Myripristis murdjan, 71. Mystax midas, 91. mystax, 91, 96, 97, 98, 106, 109, 112. —— ursulus, 91, 109. Notopteride, 70, Notopterus chitala, 67, 70. kapirat, 70. Nucras emini, 147. Nuncia enderbe@i, 42. smithi, sp. n., 42. — sperata, 41. sublevis, 41. valdiviensis, 41, (Edipomidas, 96. edipus, 91, 94, 105, 106, 112. Oligonychus quercinus, 59, uli, d8. INDEX. Oligonychus simplex, 60. —- ununguis, 59. Ophichthys boro, 71. Ophiocéphalide, 71. Ophiocephalus marulius, 71. punctatus, 71. striatus, 71, 90. Otolithus ruber, 72. Palpatores, 32. Panda, Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young, 175. Pangasius buchanani, 70. Pantopsalis, 32. —— coronata, 33. —— pgrayi, sp. n., 35. — halli, sp. n., 34. Jenningst, 39. listeri, 33. -—— nigripalpts, 3o. —— pococki, sp.n., 34. tasmanica, 33. trippt, 33. —— wattsi, sp. n., 33. Pellona brachysoma, 71. elongata, 71. Percide, 72. Phalangiide, 32. Phascolarctos, 102. Phelsuma laticauda, 139. Pithecta, 91, 97, 112, 113. Platycephahide, 72. Platycephalus scaber, 72. Platyphotis fasciata, 139. Pleuronectide, 72. Plotosus arab, 70. Poecilocryptus nigripectus, sp. n., 24. -— nigromaculatus, 26. Pecilogale, 179. Polynemide, 71. Polynemus plebeius, 71. Polypterus, 89. Procavia capensis, 189. Psetiodes erwnet, 72. Pseudeutropius garua, 61, 62, 63, 67, 68, 70. Putorius, 179. INDEX. Raccoon, Abnormal features in the Peritoneum of a, 169. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919, 85. Rhanpholeon brevicaudatus, 166. kerstenit, 167. Rhyssa persuasoria, 194. Rita buchanani, 67, 70. Saccobranchus fossilis, 70. Saimiris, 94, 96, 97, 100, 104, 106, 107, 112, 1138. (Chrysothrix) sciureus, 92. Scatophagus argus, 72. Scelotes eggeli, 159. Sciena maculata, 72. Scienide, 72. Scienoides pama, 72. Scincide, 152. Scolecoseps boulengeri, sp. n., 159). Scombresocide, 71. Scombride, "72. Serranide, 71. Serranus angularis, 71. Sillaginide, 72. Sillago sihama, 72. Silundia gangetica, 67, 68, 70. Siluride, 70. Simia, 104. Sorensenella hicornis, 48. — prehensor, 43. Sparide, 71. — Stromateide, 71. Stromateus sinensis, 71. Symbranchiformes, 71. Synagris tolu, 72. Tanqua tiara, 145. Taurotragus oryx, 193. Taxidea, 181. Testudo loveridgii (z. s. u), 190, 191. XVII Tetranychus carpini, sp. n., 56. — cratezgi, sp.n., dl. —— populi, 52. schizopus, 50. —— talisiz, sp.n., 54. ——— telarius, 50. tiliarium, O7. -——, Key to the species (males), 49. Therapon jarbua, 71. Thynnus pelamys, 72. Trachynotus insidiator, 72. Triacanthide, 72. Triacanthus brevirostris, 72. Triznobunus acuminatus, sp. n., 36. Trienonyx aspera, 39. cockayni, sp. n., 39. coriacea, 39. rapax, 39. stewartius, 39. testaceus, 39. variegata, sp. n., 40. Trichiuride, 72. Trichiurus savala, 72. Umbrina russellii, 72. Ursus americanus, 191. arctos, 191. Varanide, 143. Varanus albigularis, 143, 192. — niloticus, 144. Vormela, 187. Wallago attu, 67, 70. Xiphias, 89. Zonuridx, 143. Zonurus derbianus, 192. --— tropidosternum, 145. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANUIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET S7REET, i ee ree ie) Si, a Vie | y LS PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY “< i ‘ EC 15 1999 \ oubongace 14, 14. Antennze more than 40-jomted ................0... 15. Antennz less than 40-jointed ........................ 18. 16. Mandibles bidentate; basal tergites narrowly margined with yellow ...................... L. hobartense, sp. n., p. 20. Mandibles simple ....... 16. 16. Dentiparal area unarmed, ‘areola, external area, and dentiparal areze smooth... tne ae eae L. longicorne, sp.n., 3, p. 23. Dentiparal area armed, the carine strongly raised forming small teeth at the outer angles........ 17. 17. Antenne 47-jointed; face yellow, closely ‘and Cha yr FOUUVCWORECL asco asec ist nano sect asdane ano ca: LL. approximatum, sp. n., 6, Antenne 43-jointed : face ferruginous, margined [p. 21. with yellow laterally, centrally rugulose ...... L. spiniferum, sp. n., p. 12. 18. Third and fourth antennal joints subequal ...... i), Third antennal jomt much longer than the fowtthy eee. Ea Mae ene 20. 19. Mandibles str ‘ongly ‘bidentate ; ; “hind femora shining, with Jar ee and rather sparse punctures. L. occidentale, sp. n., p. 16. Mandibles very obscurely bidentate; hind femora subopaque, very closely covered with minute punctures......... L. subequale, sp.n., p. 15. 20. Distance between the recurrent and second trans- : verse cubital nervures not equal to more than one-third of the length of the latter nervure ; nervulus very distinctly postfurcal ............... LL. clavicorne Morl., p. 19. Distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to at least half the length of the latter nervure ; nervulus interstitial or very ey post- WOKEN 5.6 oo Sb al 21. 21. Petiole black, ‘except ‘at the ‘apex ; “ mesopleure extensively black superiorly....... LL. montivagum, sp. n., p. 16. Petiole mainly dH Cus mesopleurze with very little black .. Won iccbeebtenecnoudacasazong 4a CISRYIXGHAEO HI, Oe Ts, 1) 240) Labium bicolor Brullé is not included in the Key, as we have not seen a specimen. It is described from a male, and has the hind femora black as in L. sculpturatum, to which, from the description, it appears to be related. LABIUM WALKERI, sp.n. (Text-fig. 2.) 3d. Niger; mandibulis, apice brunneis, labro, clypeo, facie, fronteque lateribus, genis, orbitis externis, scutello, basi anguste nigro, postscutello, tegulis, mesopleuris maculis duabus, epimeris, pedibus anticis inter medi sque, tarsis iIntermediis br unnescentibus, coxis posticis apice, trochanteribus posticis, genubus, tibiisque posticis dimidio basali, basi angustissime brunneo annulatis, flavis; antennis subtus rufescentibus ; femoribus posticis medio late rufescentibus, basi atque apicem versus nigrescentibus ; ealcaribus pallidis ; alis subhyalinis, venis fuscis: petiolo apice ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PGiCILOCRYPTUS. 5 in medio late testaceo, tergitis 2-5 brunneo-ferrugineis, apice anguste flavo-limbatis; tergitis apicalibus fuscis; sternitis quarto sequentibusque flavo-testaceis. Long. 6 mm. 3. Mandibles simple; clypeus distinctly separated from the face, convex; face smooth, subquadrate; vertex and temples smooth and shining. Antenne 28-jointed, third and fourth joints subequal, joints five to eight diminishing gradually, in the funicle the first fifteen joints are cylindrical. “Thorax shining, epimeral furrows crenulate throughout. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area complete, areola and external areze smooth; petiolar and adjacent arex, the apical two-thirds of the spiracular aree, and the dentiparal aree subrugulose ; pleural ares smooth, anteriorly crenulate, with five or six strong Text-figure 2. Labium walkeri Turn. & Wtrst. Wings. ruge in front of the coxa. Petiole without a subbasal tooth, but the spiracular area prominent; spiracles well behind the middle ; abdomen shining, smooth. Areolet (text-fig. 2) pentagonal, second abscissa of the radius shorter than either of the transverse cubital nervures, distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to nearly half the length of the latter nervure; second recurrent nervure only feebly bent in the middle, not abruptly angled as in other species of the genus. Discoidella missing; nervellus straight, not angled. Hab. Hobart, Tasmania; summer, 1891 (J. J. Walker). Very distinct im the neuration from the larger species of the genus. Probably this will eventually prove to be generically distinct, but in the present state of our knowledge it is hardly necessary to divide the genus. 6 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE LABIUM CENTRALE, Sp. li. 2. Fulvo-ferruginea ; mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo, facie, fronte, scapo, pedicello, propleuris antice, mesonoto lateri- bus anguste, seutello, sulco basali lateribusque nigris, postscu- tello, mesopleuris supra fasciaque infra, segmento mediano fascia lata postica, coxis anticis intermediisque, tibiisque posticis dimidio basali flavis; tarsis posticis articulo apicali, tibiisque posticis dimidio apicali intus fusco-ferrugineis; alis hyalinis, venis brunneis ; stigmate brunneo, macula basali flava. Long. 6 mm. ?. Mandibles simple; line between the clypeus and face distinct, less so in the middle than at the sides, the face and clypeus sparsely, but not very finely punctured, face broader than long; eyes rather strongly emarginate above the base of the antenne; vertex and front smooth. Antenne 27-jointed, third joint only a little longer than the fourth, twelfth funicular joimt quadrate, thirteenth transverse. Notauli short; middle lobe of mesonotum not prominent, rather coarsely punctured, the lateral lobes very sparsely punctured ; the sharp anterior edge of the mesopleure is rather short, extending about halfway towards the spiracle and just extending a little beyond the first longitudinal hollow ; epimeral sulcus crenulate throughout. Prepectus antero- ventrally crenulate. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area only indistinctly indicated laterally ; areola very broad, not clearly separated from the petiolar area, smooth, punctured near the sides; external area subrugulose, dentiparal and spiracular are a little more rugulose, the spiracular area tend- ing to be punctured anteriorly ; pleural area distinctly separated from the juxta-coxal on the posterior two-thirds, the carina obsolete anteriorly. Petiole with the lateral teeth between the spiracles and the base well developed. Hind coxe and femora smooth, with a few scattered punctures. Nervulus postfureal ; areolet pentagonal, distance between the recurrent nervure and second transverse cubital nervure equal to half the length of that nervure, second abscissa of the radius shorter than the secon transverse cubital nervure; nervellus angled far below the middle (at about three-fourths), discoidella represented only by a short stump at that point, entirely obsolete beyond the stump, without a vena spuria. Hab. Killalpanima, 100 miles E. of Lake Eyre (H. J. Hillier). LABIUM BREVICORNE, Sp. n. 2. Fulvo-ferruginea ; mandibulis, apice excepto, labro, clypeo, facie, scapo, pedicello subtus, fronte lateribus, scutello, post- scutello, mesopleuris maculis sub alis, tegulis, linea verticali supra coxas anticas, pedibusque anticis intermediisque, illius tarsorum articulo apicali excepto, flavis; antennis supra infuscatis usque ad articulam vicesimum, subtus omnino articulisque septem apicalibus ferrugineis; scutello fovea basali et Jlateribus, pro- ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PCCILOCRYPTUS. 7 pleuris antice, segmento mediano area juxta-coxali, tiblis posticis dimidio apicali, tarsisque posticis articulo apicali nigris. Long. 7 mm. Q. Mandibles simple; face and clypeus shining, very finely and sparsely punctured, the line between the clypeus and face distinct. Antenne 28- to 29-jointed, the third joint less than half as long again as the fourth, which is slightly longer than the fifth, the basal twelve joints of the funicle cylindrical. Vertex and front smooth and shining. Notauli shallow and short, middle lobe of the mesonotum not prominent anteriorly, smooth ; mesopleure shining, epimeral sulcus crenulated throughout. Median segment with the basal area very short, scarcely extending beyond the posterior edge of the sulcus separating the postscutellum and median segment, the apical carina only indicated laterally ; areola broad and smooth, sparsely punctured towards the sides, not distinctly separated from the petiolar area, which with the adjacent aree is longitudinally rugulose ; external area smeoth ; dentiparal area shining, but with a more uneven surface; spiracular area anteriorly moderately and posteriorly coarsely punctured; pleural area smooth, with a few scattered punctures, juxta-coxal area rugose. Petiole with a well-developed tooth between the spiracles and the base; spiracles prominent, the petiole rather abruptly widened behind the spiracles; abdomen shining. Hind coxe smooth, with at most a few scattered punctures beneath. Second abscissa of the vadius shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure, distance between the recurrent nervure and the second trans- verse cubital nervure equal to about three-eighths of the length of the latter nervure ; nervulus slightly postfureal. Hab. Swan River (Du Boulay); Yallingup, 8.W. Australia, November, 1913 (Turner). Lasium perirorium Hrichs. (Text-figs. 3 and 7 c.) Ichnewmon petitorius Evichs. Arch, f. Naturges. p. 255 (1842). Hab. KWaglehawk Neck, 8.H. Tasmania; February (Zurner). Common. This is distinguished from other species of the genus by the opaque, strongly and very closely punctured mesonotum and meso- pleure and the strongly developed teeth (text-fig. 3) of the denti- paral avez. The division between the clypeus and face is well marked, both clypeus and face closely punctured ; antenne of the female 42-jointed ; median segment with the apical carina of the basal area interrupted in the middle, external area smooth, denti- paral area coarsely and irregularly longitudinally striate, spiracular area rugose, juxta-coxal and pleural arez rugose-striate, postero- intermedia] and postero-external arez transversely striate, areola shining with a few large punctures, petiolar area indistinctly and irregularly transversely striated. Second abscissa of the radius and first transverse cubital nervure subequal, second transverse 8 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE eubital nervure slightly longer, the distance (text-fig. 7, c) between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to more than half of the length of the latter nervure. Antenne 42-jointed. Subspecies concolor, subsp. n. @. Differs from the typical Tasmanian form in having the scutellum and postscutellum ferruginous, only very slightly paler than the rest of the thorax, not yellow as in the typical form. The second abscissa of the radius is somewhat shorter than in the typical form and the two transverse cubital nervures sub- equal. Antenne with three or four joints less than in the typical form. Hab. Yallingup, 8.W. Australia ; October-December (Turner). Text-figure 3. \ i a TERZI—~ Labium petitorium Erichs. Propodeon. (a) dorsal; (6) profile; (ex) coxa of hind leg; (pé) petiole. To show outlines of the aree. Sculpture of arew not detailed fully. LAsiuM BIVITTATUM, sp.n. (Text-fig. 4, 6.) 2. Ochracea; labro, clypeo, facie lateribus, macula lineari sub alis, scutello postseutelloque flavis; vertiee late, propleuris dimidio inferiore, mesonoto fascia lata longitudinali utrinque, tergito primo apice, coxis posticis macula magna dorsali apicali, femoribus posticis basi et apice, tibiisque posticis dimidio apicali nigris ; alis hyalinis, venis fuscis; antennis fuscis, infra ferru- gineis, articulis 9 apicalibus fulvo-ochraceis, $. Femine similis; antennis articulis 7 apicalibus fulvo- ochraceis ; tibiis posticis parte basali minus late ochraceis quam in femina. Long., 9 10-11 mm., ¢ 8-10 mm. 2. Labrum and clypeus rather deeply but not very closely punctured, the face much more closely and finely punctured, face broader than long. Antenne 42-jointed, the third joint as

) of the hind tarsi much less robust than is usual in the genus; hind empodium very small, not elon- gate, only about one-third of the length of the unguis. Hab. Yallingup, S.W. Australia; September 14—October 31, 1913 (Turner). A good series taken. Very distinct from other species of the genus in the small empodium, less robust hind tarsal ungues, prominent median lobe of the mesonotum, and black markings. The antenne are also less strongly thickened to the apex than in most species of the genus. The groove between the face and clypeus is strongly marked, 10 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE LABIUM PILOsUM, sp. n. (Text-fig. 5.) 2. Ferruginea, fulvo-pilosa; antennis, scapo articuloque tertio subtus flavis, occipite, macula circa ocello, propleuris, scutello lateribus sulcoque basali, segmento mediano, femoribus posticis, tibiisque posticis apice nigris; tarsis posticis infuscatis ; capite, mesopleuris, scutello, postscutello, pedibusque flavo-ochraceis ; alis sordide hyalinis, venis fuscis. Long. 9 mm. @. The whole insect, except the dorsal surface of the median segment, sparsely clothed with pale fulvous hairs, which are denser on the pleurz, legs, the sternites, and the vertex than else- where. Labrum, clypeus, and face shining and sparsely punctured, Text-figure 5. Labium pilosum Turn. & Wtrst. In the front view the mandibles are partly concealed by the labrum. In the profile the cheetotaxy of vertex and antenna is not shown. the clypeus quite smooth apically ; face (text-fig. 5) much broader than long, the groove separating it from the clypeus obsolete (2. e., clypeus and face in the same plane). Occiput more closely and strongly punctured, front almost smooth. Antenne stout, 32-jointed, scarcely as long as the head, thorax, and median segment combined, the third joint as long as the fourth and fifth combined, the fourth distinctly longer than the fifth. Mesonotum shining, finely punctured, rather closely on the median lobe, much more sparsely posteriorly and laterally; the notauli very short, only visible anteriorly, a very faint indication of a longitudinal carina ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PCICILOCRYPTUS. 11 between the notauli. Scutellum and postscutellum smooth, almost impunctate; mesopleure rather coarsely and not very sparsely punctured on the anterior two-thirds, smoother pos- teriorly ; vertical groove between the episternite and epimeron crenulate on upper half, smooth ventrally. Basal area of median segment broad and very short, the carina separating 1t from the areola only indicated laterally, surface smooth; areola very broad, not distinctly separated from the petiolar area, smooth, with indications of transverse ruge posteriorly and with a few scattered punctures; external area smooth, with a few indistinct punctures ; dentiparal area coarsely, but rather sparsely, punc- tured; spivacular area and juxta-cosal area with numerous punctures, not quite as coarse as those on the dentiparal area ; aree bounding the petiolar area rugose next to the bounding carine. Petiole apically very broad, a little raised medially on the basal half; all the tergites shining, with numerous minute piliferous punctures ; second tergite fully twice as broad as long, third tergite fully three times as broad as long. Areolet long, second abscissa of the radius longer than the second transverse cubital nervure; distance between the second recurrent and second transverse cubital nervure equal to less than half the length of the latter nervure. Hab. 8. Australia. This is very distinct in the pilosity of the whole insect, the robust and broad abdomen, and the black and rather short antenne. LABIUM SUBPILOSULUM, Sp. n. @. Fulvo-ferruginea ; antennis omnino, mandibulisque apice nigris; capite, propleuris supra, tegulis, mesopleuris macula magna sub alis anticis, scutello, postscutello, coxisque anticis intermediisque flavis; tibiis posticis apice tarsisque posticis articulo apicali infuscatis; alis hyalinis, iridescentibus, venis fuscis. Long. 7 mm. 2. Mandibles simple; clypeus and face fused, without a dividing-line, sparsely punctured, with fine hairs springing from the punctures. Antenne 37-jointed, third joint distinctly shorter than the fourth and fifth combined, the joints becoming trans- verse about the twelfth. The emargination of the eyes is almost obsolete; front and vertex smooth and shining. Mesonotum shining, with a few sparse and very small punctures, the median lobe rather more closely punctured, not prominent; notauli short and shallow. Mesopleure anteriorly sparsely punctured on the upper half, closely punctured rugulose on the lower half, smooth posteriorly ; the epimeral sulcus crenulated on the upper half only. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area broadly interrupted in the middle; areola and petiolar area finely rugulose, not distinctly divided ; external area smooth and shining; dentiparal are rugulose, without spines; spiracular 12 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE and pleural arez finely punctured. Petiole with the basal teeth blunt and not very prominent, spiracles only feebly prominent. Hind cox and femora sparsely punctured. Apical tergites with sparse hairs. Second abscissa of the radius very little shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure, distance between the recurrent and second cubital nervures not quite equal to half the length of the latter nervure. Hab. Victoria (C. French). 1 @. In the fused condition of the face and clypeus this resembles pilosum, but is much less pilose, very different in colour and in the number of antennal joints. The antenne are very feebly thickened to the apex, but are not as stout in this species as in pilosum. LABIUM SPINIFERUM, sp. n. 2. Fulvo-ferruginea; antennis 43-articulatis, articulis 20 basa- libus fulvo-ferrugineis, 2i-34 infuscatis, 35-43 ochraceis ; labro facieque marginibus, orbitis internis, genubus, mesonoto antice lateribus angustissime, propleuris antice, coxis anticis, tegulis, macula sub alis anticis, macula parva sub alis posticis, mesopleuris macula magna mediana, macula magna ante coxas intermedias, mesonoto angulis posticis anguste, scutello, postscutello, sulco epimerali, segmentoque mediano fascia lata transversa apicali, aveaque pleurali flavis; alis leviter infuscatis, venis fuscis. Long. 10 mm. Q. Clypeus and face rather strongly punctured, the face in the middle rugulose longitudinally ; labrum very long, distinctly longer than the clypeus, more finely punctured; mandibles simple. yes distinctly, but shallowly emarginate a little above the base of the antenne; third antennal joint fully as long as the fourth and fifth combined, the eight basal joints of the funicle cylindrical. Front and vertex finely punctured; mesonotum shining, finely and evenly punctured, the median lobe promi- nent ; notauli well developed, not very short; pleure shining, almost smooth, the epimeral furrow crenulated on the upper half; scutellum and postscutellum almost smooth. Median seg- ment with the basal area not closed apically, the apical carina being obsolete; areola almost smooth, distinctly divided from the rugulose petiolar area; external and dentiparal ares finely and sparsely punctured, each produced into a small tooth at the external apical angle, that of the external area being stouter and less acute than that of the dentiparal; spiracular area finely punctured- rugulose; pleural area finely punctured, with larger punctures intermingled. Spiracles of the petiole prominent, a very feebly developed tooth on each side between the spiracles and the base. Hind cox finely punctured above, closely punctured-rugulose on the outer side and beneath. Second abscissa of the radius a little shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure ; the distance between the recurrent and second transverse cubital nervures ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PQECILOCRYPTUS. 13 equal to slightly more than half the length of the latter nervure. Hab. Yallingup, 8.W. Australia ; October (Turner). 1 2. Distinguished from other species by the minute, but distinct, teeth on the median segment. LABIUM VASSEANUM, sp. n. (Text-fig. 6, a, e.) 3. Fulvo-ferrugineus ; mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo facie, scapo subtus, pronoto macula parva laterali, mesopleuris macula magna, macula sub alis anticis, macula parva sub alis posticis, macula ante coxas intermedias, scutello, postscutello, segmento mediano macula magna apicali, areaque juxta-coxalli flavis; antennis nigris, apice haud ferrugineis; alis subhyalinis, venis fuscis. Long. 9 mm. Text-figure 6. (a) Labium vasseanum Turn. & Wtrst. Head, profile. (b) Labium hobartense ,, z Mandible. (c) Labium occidentale ,, = 5D (d) Labium subequale ,, x » (e) Labiwn vasseanum ,, » » 3. Mandibles elongate, acute (text-fig.6, e) at the apex ; labrum very long. Clypeus and face (text-fig. 6, w) shining, sparsely punc- tured, ihe face longitudinally rugulose in the ane fe. Antenne 36- jointed, third joint more than half as long again as the fourth, the fifth distinctly shorter than the fourth. eile conatiin shining, very sparsely and finely punctured, the median lobe rather promi- nent anteriorly and more closely punctured, notauli very short ; mesopleure shining, with a few scattered punctures ; epimeral sulcus crenulated on the upper half. Median segment with the 14 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE apical carina of the basal area broadly interrupted in the middle ; areola smooth, the carina dividing it from the petiolar area com- plete; petiolar area smooth ; postero-intermedial area with a few longitudinal striz ; external area with a few minute punctures ; dentiparal area smooth in the middle, with a few punctures on the sides and a minute tooth at the external apical angle; spira- cular area finely punctured-rugulose; pleural and juxta- coxal are not divided, smooth. Petiole narrow at the apex, without teeth between the base and the spiracles. Hind empodia not very long, not more than two-thirds of the length of the tarsal unguis. Both transverse cubital nervures somewhat oblique and longer than the second abscissa of the radius, the distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure less than half as great as the length of that nervure. Hab. Yallingup, 8.W. Australia; October, 1913 (Turner). Nearly allied to ZL. spiniferum, of which it may be the male, but the colour of the antennz and the number of antennal joints differ much, also the spines on the dentiparal and external aree are much more distinct in spiniferum. ‘The elongate mandibles are common to both. LABIUM SCULPTURATUM, sp. n. (Text-fig. 7, a.) 3. Niger; mandibulis, labro, clypeo, facie, scapo subtus, orbitis, pronoto lateribus anguste, linea supra tegulas, mesopleuris macula magna mediana, fascia sub alis anticis, sulco epimerali, scutello, postscutello, segmento mediano fascia apicali, petiolo fascia api- cali, pedibusque anticis intermediisque flavis; tergitis secundo sequentibusque, tibiisque trochanteribusque posticis rufo-ferru- gineis ; antennis supra nigris, subtus rufescentibus, articulis 13 apicalibus ferrugineis ; alis subhyalinis, venis nigris. Long. 11 mm. Text-figure 7. a Aveolet (right wing):—(a) Labium sculpturatum Turn. & Wtrst. (b) Labium Serrugineum Cam. (c) Labiwm petitorium Erichs. 3. Face much broader than long, face and clypeus sparsely but not very finely punctured. Antenne 42-jointed, third joint more than half as long again as the fourth, the fifth distinctly shorter than the fourth, the joints as far as the sixteenth longer than broad, those beyond transverse. Mesonotum with the middle lobe prominent; notauli short, but deep and crenulate; the median lobe densely punctured anteriorly, sparsely posteriorly ; ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PG@CILOCRYPTUS. 15 lateral lobes and the scutellum sparsely punctured ; mesopleure antero-ventrally closely and rather strongly punctured, smoother elsewhere; the epimeral sulcus coarsely crenulate throughout. Median segment with the basal area and areola confluent; areola smooth, with a few punctures, posteriorly rugulose ; petiolar area separated, transversely rugose, as also are the adjacent arew; ex- ternal area smooth, very bluntly raised at the external apical angle; dentiparal area coarsely rugulose, with a ‘small tooth at the external apical angle; spiracular area coarsely punctured ante- riorly, rugose posteriorly ; pleural and juxta-coxal aree strongly striate, with a few punctures between the striae. Hind coxe externally coarsely, hind femora much more closely and finely punctured. Second abscissa (text-fig. 7, a) of the radius barely longer than the second transverse cubital nervure; the distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure more than half of the length of the latter nervure. Petiole without a tooth between the base and spiracles, the latter very prominent; a carina beginning near the base and almost reaching the apex, the central raised area strongly marked, bearing throughout its length two parallel grooves. Hab. Yallingup, S.W. Australia; November, 1913 (Zurner). IG. Distinct in the strong sculpture, also in the black colour of the thorax, petiole, and hind femora, LABIUM SUBEQUALE, sp. n. (Text-fig. 6, 2.) 2. Fulvo-ferruginea ; antennis nigris, articulis 10 apicalibus ochraceis ; scapo subtus, mandibulis. labro, clypeo, facie, fronte lateribus, orbitis externis, genis, scutello, macula sub alis anticis, coxis anticis intermediisque, tibiis intermediis apice, tarsisque anticis intermediisque, articulo apicali excepto, flavis; pronoto antice, tegulis, area Juxta-coxall, tarsisque posticis articulo apicali nigrescentibus; alis subhyalinis, venis fuscis. Long. 9 mm. 2. Mandibles (text-fig.6, Z) obscurely bidentate, blunt, the second tooth indicated by an external sulcus; elypeus and face sparsely punctured, the line of division between them distinct, but not strong. Antenne 36-jointed, the third and fourth joints sub- equal, the third seen in profile slightly shorter than the fourth. Mesonotum smooth, with scattered punctures, the notauli rather long; propleure strongly crenulate in front ; mesopleure shining, closely and very finely punctured on the lower half; epimeral sulcus crenulate throughout, the lower crenulations more strongly developed than usual. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area interrupted in the middle; areola smooth, slightly rugulose at the sides; external area smooth ; dentiparal area rugulose; spiracular area coarsely punctured anteriorly, rugulose posteriorly ; pleural area striate-rugulose, separated from the juxta-coxal area by a carina reaching to one-half, the latter 16 MESSRS. R. E, TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE area rugose. Petiole with the lateral teeth between the spiracles and the base well developed ; spiracles prominent, obscurely striate between the spiracles, the remainder of the segment smooth and convex ; before the spiracles the raised area is distinct. Hind coxe closely and rather finely punctured, femora very finely punctured. Second abscissa of the radius about equal to the second transverse cubital nervure, the latter fully twice as ‘long as the distance between it and the recurrent nervure. Hab. Yallingup, 8.W. Australia; October and November, 1913 (Turner). LABIUM OCCIDENTAL, sp. n. (Text-fig. 6, ¢.) Q. Fulvo-ferruginea; antennis infra obscure ferrugineis, supra nigrescentibus, articulis 13 apicalibus rufo- _ferrugineis; scapo subtus, mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo, facie, orbitis externis, scutello, postscutello, macula ante tegulas, mesopleuris maculis duabus, macula sub alis posticis, macula supra coxas intermedias, segmento mediano fascia tramsversa obscura post medium, coxisque trochanteribusque anticis intermediisque flavis; fronte in medio, propleuris antice, mesopleuris antice et inter maculas flavas, scutello postscutelloque Jateribus, petiole dimidio basali, area juxta-coxali, tibiis posticis apice supra, tarsisque posticis articulo apicali nigrescentibus; alis subhyalinis. Long. 10 mm. 3g. Differt occipite, temporibus, mesopleuris, segmento mediano, notaulis, mesoncto lateribus, petiolo, apice excepto, coxis posticis basi et apice supra, femeribus tibiisque posticis apice, nigrescen- tibus; tarsis posticis infuscatis; pedibus anticis intermediisque omnino flavis. 2. Differs from swhequale in the strongly bidentate (text- fig. 6 c) mandibles, the upper tooth much shorter than the lower, in the much more strongly punctured face, in the generally stronger puncturation, and in the sculpture of the hind coxe and femora, which are Shimon with large punctures in occidentale, whereas in subequale the hind femora are subopaque and very closely covered with minute punctures. Hab. Yallingup, S.W. Australia; October (Z'urner). LABIUM MONTIVAGUM, sp. n. (Text-figs. 1, 4a, 8, 9, and 11a.) 3. Niger; mandibulis, apice excepto, labro, clypeo, facie, orbitis anguste, callis humeralibus, linea sub alis anticis, meso- pleuris macula parva mediana, macula parva sub alis posticis, scutello, postscutello macula mediana, pedibusque anticis inter- mediisque flavis; segmentis abdominalibus secundo Sequenti- busque, femoribus posticis, apice nigris, tibiis posticis, apice nigris, tarsisque posticis articulis quatuor basalibus rufo-ferrugi- neis ; antennis subtus (articulis tribus basalibus exceptis) arti- culisque 11 apicalibus supra, oehraceis; alis hyalinis, venis fuscis. ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PG:CILOCRYPTUS. ii% @. Differt scapo subtus flavo; thorace ferrugineo, flavo- maculato, propleuris infra, mesopleuris antice, scutelloque sulco basali nigris; segmento mediano, COXIS posticis, femoribusque posticis ferrugineis, apice nigro-maculatis; pedibus anticis intermediisque fulvo- ferrugineis. Long. 2 ¢ 9-10 mm. Text-figure 8. Wings :—(a) Pecilocryptus nigromaculatus Cam. (b) Labiwm montivagum Turn. & Wtrst. @. Labrum, clypeus, and face rather sparsely, but not finely punctured ; the dividing line between the face and clypeus rather indistinct, the face broader than long; mandibles simple. Antenne from 32- to 36-jointed, usually 35 or 36; third joint equal to the two following. Front shining, sparsely and finely punctured at the sides, rather more strongly below the ocelli, occiput finely and closely punctured. Thorax shining; the meso- notum sparsely punctured, more closely on the median lobe: notauli very distinct, but short, more or less crenulate; scutellum and postscutellum smooth and impunctate; propleur anteriorly rugulose, posteriorly crenulate, centrally slightly raised and rather sparsely punctured ; mesopleure ventrally rather closely Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. II 2 18 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE and not finely punctured, posteriorly smooth, the smooth area narrowing ventrally ; epimeral suleus entirely crenulate, with one or two large fover at its ventral extremity. Sternum shining, moderately closely punctured, one or two large fovez outside the intermediate coxe close to the extremity of the epimeral sulcus. Median segment coarsely sculptured; apical carina of the basal area broadly interrupted in the middle, the basal area smooth and shining ; areola and petiolar area fully separated, the former smooth, with one or two large punctures and rugulose towards the sides, especially posteriorly, petiolar area transversely rugu- lose; external areze nearly smooth, dentiparal and other dorsal aree rugulose, except the anterior portion of the spiracular area, which is coarsely punctured ; pleural (text-fig. 1) and juxta-coxal are rugulose above, and towards the coxee with strongly marked Text-figure 9. TERZI 3 b Labium montivagum Turn. & Wtrst. ¢ genitalia. (a) Stipes and in profile. (6) Entire apparatus—right stipes removed—dorsal view. (ce) Apex of volsella. ridges, so that anteriorly this area is crenulate. Spiracles of the petiole just behind the middle, much nearer to each other than to the apex of the segment, a well-defined tooth (text-fig. 11, @) on each side of the petiole, nearer to the base than to the spiracle ; the ceutral dorsal portion of the petiole basally distinctly raised, with a sulcus near each spiracle; gastrocceli distinct, finely punc- tured, abdomen otherwise smooth. Second abscissa of the radius a little shorter than the second transverse cubital nervure, distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure more than half as great as the length of the latter nervure. Externally the hind coxe and femora are sparsely but rather deeply punctured. Tarsal unguis etc., text-fig. 4, a. Hab. Mt. Wellington, Tasmania; January and February, 1913 (Turner). A long series. ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PCSCILOCRYPTUS. 19 The male has the face almost square, the sculpture is somewhat coarser, especially on the median segment. The sculpture of the areola in the male shows considerable variation; 1n some speci- mens there are coarse transverse ruge, which are only rather feebly indicated in others. The teeth on the sides of the petiole are remarkable, also the sexual colour differences. The female is the type. LABIUM CLAVICORNE Morl. Labiwm clavicorne Mor]. Revis. Ichneum. iv. p. 151 (1915). This species is allied to montivagwm in having a distinct tooth on each side of the petiole between the spiracles and the base and also in the sculpture, but differs in the almost entirely fulvous antenne, in the ferruginous colour of the front, vertex and propleure, and in the position of the second recurrent ner- vure which is received close to the apex of the areolet. This is very doubtfully distinct from ferruginewm Cam., but differs in the colour of the antenne. The other differences given + Text-figure 10. Labium ferrugineum Cam. Propodeon ; dorsal view. by Morley either fall within the range of individual variation or ave taken from one or other of the three males marked by him as co-types, one of which is certainly specifically distinct, not at all nearly related to the other two, in which the thorax is mostly black, having only the mesonotum and a patch on the meso- pleure ferruginous. These are probably the true males of clavicorne, which species probably takes the place of montivayum on the mainland. Hab. Victoria (Wrench). LABIUM FERRUGINEUM Cam. (Text-figs. 7 6 and 10.) Labium ferruginewm Cam. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) vii. paos0i(l9Ol)\s 59. This species seems to differ from elavicorne Morl. only in the eolour of the antenne, which are black above and brownish on the apical half beneath; the scape is yellow beneath in both forms. Cameron’s type is in a dirty condition. oe 20 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE The locality given is Australia, The nervulus i is distinctly postfurcal, not differing appreciably from clavicorne in this respect, in spite of Morley’s statement to the contrary. LABIUM HOBARTENSE, sp.n. (Text-fig. 6, b.) 2. Fulvo-ferruginea ; antennis supra nigro infuscatis, articulis 13 apicalibus ferrugineis; mandibulis dimidio basali, labro, clypeo, facie, fronte lateribus, coxis trochanteribusque anticis intermediisque, maculis duabus sub alis anticis, macula sub alis posticis, macula supra coxas intermedias, sulco epimeral, scutello, postscutello, segmento mediano fascia transversa post medium coxam posticam attingente, tergitisque fascia apicali angustissima. flavis; petiolo, area juxta-coxali, tarsisque posticis articulo apicali nigrescentibus ; alis subhyalinis, venis nigris. Long. 11 mm. @. Mandibles bidentate (text-fig. 6, 6), rather short; face shining, sparsely and finely punctured, broader than long. An- tennee 42-jointed, third joint a little shorter than the fourth and fifth combined. Very similar to montivagum in other respects ; differing in the yellow band on the median segment, in the yellow apical bands of the tergites, and the less prominent basal teeth of the petiole. Hab. Hobart, Tasmania; summer 1891 (/. J. Walker). Might easily be mistaken for montivagum, but the structural differences in the mandibles and antenne distinguish it at once. LABIUM ASSOCIATUM, sp. n. @. Fulvo-ferruginea ; mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo, facie, scapo subtus, orbitis, scutello, macula sub alis anticis, mesopleuris antice macula, coxisque trochanteribysque anticis intermediisque flavis; scutello sulco basali, tibiis posticis apice supra, tarsisque posticis, basi anguste ferrugineis, nigris; alis hyalinis. iridescentibus, venis nigris. Long. 8 mm. 2. Clypeus and face shining, very sparsely punctured, face much broader than long ; inandibles simple. Antenne 36-jointed, fulvous, somewhat infuscate above to beyond the middle, the third jomt about ‘half as long again as the fourth, the fifth distinctly shorter than the fourth. Eyes very feebly sinuate opposite the base of the antenne; front and vertex shining, almost smooth, witha few minute punctures, Mesonotum shining, almost smooth, the median lobe sparsely punctured anteriorly ; notauli, rather short ; .mesopleure smooth on the upper half, sparsely and finely punctured on the lower half; epimeral sulcus finely crenulate throughout. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area broadly inter rupted i in the middle; areola not separated from the petiolar area, the dividing carina only feebly indicated at the sides, areola georqoulh § in anes middle, finely ICHNEUMONID QENERA LABIUM AND PGCILOCRYPTUS. 21 rugulose at the sides, petiolar area with the same sculpture as the areola; the are adjacent to the petiolar area rugulose ;. external area smooth, dentiparal area subrugulose, a minute tooth at the external apical angle of both the external and dentiparal ares; spiracular area strongly rugulose, anteriorly punctured-rugulose ; pleural area superiorly rugulose with a few deep punctures, ventrally with three or four large complete ruge, which merge with thosé of the juxta-coxal area, the carina dividing the two are well defined to about one-half. Petiole with a well-developed tooth on each side between the base and the spiracles; the petiole with a rather stronger sculpture than is usual in the genus, behind the spiracles the surface in the middle subrugulose, before the spiracles the raised median area is very distinct. Hind coxe and femora smooth on the outside, with large irregular punctures. Second abscissa of the radius a little shorter than the distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure, and only a little more than half as long as the latter nervure. Hab. Mundaring Weir, W. Australia; March 18, 1914 (Turner). LABIUM APPROXIMATUM, Sp. 0. 3. Fulvo-ferrugineus ; mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo, facie, froute lateribus, scapo subtus, scutello, postscutello, meso- pleuris maculis duabus, macula sub alis posticis, macula supra coxas intermedias, segmento mediano fascia. dorsali transversa post medium, macula supra coxas posticas, coxisque trochanteri- busque anticis intermediisque flavis; antennis ferrugineis, supra nigris, articulis 15 apicalibus fulvo-ochraceis; coxis posticis apice supra, mesopleuris macula post coxas anticas, area juxta-coxali, petioloque ante spiracula infuseatis. Long. 12 mm. : 3. Mandibles simple; clypeus and face closely, evenly, and rather strongly punctured, the line between the face and clypeus very distinct ; malar space short, only half as broad as the hase of the mandible. Front smooth, with sparse punctures. Antenne 47-jointed, third joint almost as long as the fourth and fifth combined, the joints becoming transverse at about the 22nd or 23rd. Mesonotum shining, finely and rather closely punctured, the median lobe prominent aud more closely punctured; notauli long. Scutellum and postscutellum shining, finely punctured ; propleurz rather strongly punctured; mesopleure punctured on the lower half, the epimeral sulcus strongly crenulate. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal segment broadly interrupted in the middle; areola shining, with a few lateral punctures, its apical keel well defined ; external area finely and closely punctured ; dentiparal area rugulose, both the external and dentiparal arez with a small tooth at the external apical angle, and a minute tooth also at the inner apical angle of the dentiparal area; spiracular area anteriorly finely and closely 22 MESSRS. R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE punctured, posteriorly rugulose; pleural area rugulose-punctate ; juxta-coxal area with six or seven strong striz. Basal tooth of petiole blunt, not prominent, spiracles prominent; basal area of petiole indistinct. Hind cox and femora shining, externally closely and finely punctured. Second abscissa of the radius con- siderably longer than the second transverse cubital nervure ; distance between the recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to more than half the length of the latter nervure. Hab. Victoria (C. French). 1 3. This is one of the males selected by Morley as a co-type of his LL. clavicorne, to which it is not at all nearly allied. LABIUM FULYICORNE, sp. n. 2. Fulvo-ferruginea; antennis articulis apicalibus fulvo-ochra- ceis; mandibulis, apice excepto, labro, clypeo, facie lateribus, mesonoto margine laterali anguste, scutello, postscutello, propleuris infra, macula horizontali sub alis anticis ; suleoque epimerali flavis ; tarsis posticis nigris, metatarso apice solum nigro; alis sordide hyalinis, venis nigris, stigmate fusco-ferrugineo. Long. 10-12 mm, Q. Clypeus and labrum sparsely, face more closely punctured ; clypeus not on the same plane with the face, divided from it by a distinct groove, the face broader than long ; front smooth, occiput with a few small punctures. Antenne 46-jointed, more than three-quarters of the length of the whole insect ; third joint fully as long as the fourth and fifth combined. Thorax shining and almost smooth, the median lobe of the mesonotum alone distinctly punctured ; notauli short, only distinct anteriorly. Hpimerat groove very finely crenulated above, smooth below. Arez of the median segment smooth and shining, the external, pleural, and spiracular ares very finely punctured; petiolar area with a few scattered punctures ; basal area very short, the carina separating it from the areola narrowly broken in the middle, the areola completely divided from the petiolar and dentiparal aree. Hind coxe shining, very sparsely punctured, reaching as far as the apex of the petiole. Second abscissa of the radius longer than the second and nearly as long as the first transverse cubital nervure, the distance between the second recurrent nervure and the second transverse cubital nervure a little less than half as great as the length of the latter nervure. Hab. Yallingup, S.W. Australia; October and November, 1913 (Turner). In this and some closely-allied species the external area of the median segment is more distinctly sculptured than the dentiparal area, the reverse being the usual condition in the genus. The probable male of this species has the pleure and fore legs almost entirely yellow, also a broad transverse band at the apex of the median segment and the pleural aree. The number of joints in the antennz is 41-44. . These males are much smaller ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PGICILOCRYPTUS. 23 than the female, measuring from seyen to nine millimetres, and the hind tarsi are not black. LABIUM MULTIARTICULATUM, sp. n. Q. Fulvo-ferruginea ; flagello supra fusco, articulis 13 api- ealibus ochraceis, infra ochraceo ; scapo subtus flavo ; mandibulis, labro, elypeo, facie, propleuris antice, fascia sub alis, mesopleuris fascia lata maculaque arcuata supra coxas intermedias, scutello, postscutello, mesonoto fascia apicali areaque pleurali, coxisque anticis intermediisque flavis; alis subhyalinis, venis fuscis, stig- mate fusco-ferrugineo. ¢. Femine similis ; flagello articulis 10 apicalibus solum supra ochraceis ; mesonoto lateribus flavo-marginatis, mesopleuris fere omnino flavis, trochanteribusque anticis intermediisque flavis. Long. 9° 3 10-11 mm. @. Labrum long, rather narrowly rounded at the apex; face distinctly broader iiten long, face and clypeus shining, sparsely, but rather deeply punctured. Antenne usually from 51-. to 53-jointed (51 in the type 2 ), sometimes with one or two joints more or less; third joint a little shorter than the fourth and fifth combined ; front and vertex shining, almost smooth. Mesonotum shining, finely punctured, rather closely on the median, very sparsely on the lateral lobes, the median lobe not prominent, notauli short ; mesopleure shining, sparsely and finely punctured. more closely on the lower than on the upper half; epimeral sulcus crenulate on the upper half only, the striz oblique. Median segment with the apical carina of the basal area obsolete, except at the sides; areola shining, sparsely and finely punctured, the basal carina of the petiolar area well defined ; external arew finely punctured, dentiparal areze smooth and shining ; ; Spiracular area punctured ; pleural area very sparsely punctured, not separated from the smooth juxta-coxal area; petiolar and adjacent arez punctured. Petiole without any clearly-defined lateral teeth between the spiracles and the base, spiracles not prominent. Second abscissa of the radius very slightly longer than the second transverse cubital nervure ; the distance between the recurrent and the second transverse cubital nervure equal to about half the length of the latter nervure. Hab. Yallingup, 8.W. Australia; October and November, 1913 (Turner). Near jfulvicorne, but may be distinguished by the greater number of antennal joints. The third antennal joint is distinctly shorter than in fulvicorne and the antenne less clavate. The male of the present species is generally larger and more robust than that of fulvicorne. LABIUM LONGICORNE, sp. 0. 36. Fulvo-ferrugineus ; mandibulis, apice nigris, labro, clypeo, facie, scapo subtus, scutello, postscutello, propleuris antice, pro- sterno, mesopleuris maculis duabus sub alis anticis, suleo epimerali, 24 MESSRS, R. E. TURNER AND J. WATERSTON ON THE coxisque trochanteribusque anticis flavis; antennis ferrugineis, seapo pedicelloque supra leniter infuscatis; alis hyalinis, venis fuscis. Long. 9 mm.; antennarum long. 7 mm, 3. Very near LZ. multiarticulatwm, but differs in the colour of the antenne, in the absence of a yellow apical band on the median segment, in the distinctly shorter third antennal joint (in muléi- articulatum this joint is twice as long as broad, in the present species rather less than half as long again as broad), and in the smooth external area of the median segment. The antennse are 49-jointed. Hab. Swan River, W. Australia (Du Boulay). Lasium sicotor Brulleé. _ Labium bicolor Brullé, Hist. Nat. Insect. Hymén. iv. p. 316 (1846). o. Hab. New Guinea. This species, the type of the genus, is unknown to us. Genus Pacrtocryprus Cam. Pecilocryptus Cam. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) vii. p.527 (1901). Cameron’s description of this genus is good, and he is probably correct in connecting the genus with the Phygadeuonini, though, as he remarks, it has no near relationship with any other genus. Cameron only gives Australia as the locality for his species, which, however, we can now record from Tasmania, together with a new species described below. PacrLocryPrus NIGRIPECTUS, Sp. nN. 2. Flava; mandibulis apice extremo, antennis, articulis sex basalibus subtus flavis, fronte supra antennas, area circa ocellos, occipite, mesonoto fascia longitudinali lata antice, usque ad medium attingente, lateribus et margine postico late, mesosterno, scutello basi, segmento mediano basi, lateribus late, supra augus- tissime, tergito tertio, apice extremo excepto, tergito sexto, valvulis terebre, femoribus posticis macula magna extus intusque, tibiisque posticis apice nigris ; alis hyalinis, iridescentibus, venis fuscis. Long. 5°5 mm.; terebre long. 2°5 mm. @. Antennz 22-jointed, the basal joints very slender, the apical joints strongly thickened, the last seven broader than long, the five basal joints of the flagellum long and slender, joints 6 to 9 slightly thickened, from the tenth more abruptly thickened, attaining the greatest breadth at the fifteenth. Face longer than broad by at least one-third, with a short narrow suleus, which is medially enlarged and extends downwards to the middle of the face. Clypeus and face smooth and shining. Eyes | 3 ee ee ee eee ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PC@CILOCRYPTUS. Text-figure 11. (a) Labiwm montivagum Turn. & Wtrst. (b) Pecilocryptus nigro- maculatus Cam. 25 26 THE ICHNEUMONID GENERA LABIUM AND PC@CILOCPYPTUS. separated from the base of the mandibles by less than the breadth of the mandible. Front concave, the concave area‘extending as far back as the anterior ocellus, vertex smooth and shining. Thorax smooth and shining, notauli indistinct. Median segment very feebly punctured, rather dull, spiracles very small, oval ; basal area very small, transverse; areola quadrate, a_ little longer than broad, longer than the petiolar area; dentiparal area subquadrate and about as large as the areola: external area transverse; spiracular area divided by a keel arising from the side of the basal area just before the apex, and continued out- ward, touching the spiracle posteriorly ; of the two arez so formed the anterior one (containing the spiracle) is pentagonal, the posterior one is quadrate, about a third longer than broad ; both the postero-intermedial and the postero-external are appear to be defined ; the confluent pleural and juxta-coxal ares form a hexagon, Spiracles of the petiole before the middle; the base of the petiole with a raised median space bounded by definite edges, and extending backwards to the highest part of the petiole ; second tergite with the gastroceeli distinct, the segment rather longer than wide; sutures 2-5 rather deepand distinct. Surface of the abdomen dull to the middle of the second tergite, shining apically. Hind cox and femora distinctly intumescent. Areolet pentagonal, longer than high, the radial side equal to the inner and almost equal to the outer, but shorter than the two lower sides; second recurrent nervure strongly oblique. Hab. Mt. Wellington, Tasmania, 2300 ft., March 12-21, 1913 (Turner). The areolet is much shorter on the radius than in mgro- maculatus Cam., the face 1s much narrower and differently sculp- tured; there is no tooth at the apex of the dentiparal area, the basal area is much shorter, and in-nigromaculatus the carina between the spiracular and pleural are is anteriorly obsolete ; in nigripectus the spiracles of the petiole are nearer to the base than in nigromaculatus. P@cILOCRYPTUS NIGRoMACULATUS Cam. (Text-figs. 8@ and 115.) Pecilocryptus nigromaculatus Cam. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) vii. p. 528 (1901). @. The locality given for the type is merely Australia. Two females in the British Museum are from 8. Tasmania, Mt. Wel- lington, January 15—February 6, 1913 (Zurner), and Haglehawk Neck, February 12—March 3, 1913 (Turner). Unless indication to the contrary is given the types of the species described in this paper are females, and all are deposited in the British Museum. ON THE LARYNX AND G&SOPHAGUS OF A COMMON MACAQUE. 27 2. Deseription of the Larynx and Cisophagus of a Common Macaque (Macacus fascicularis) exhibiting several Ab- normal Characters. By C. F. Sonntac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. "Received January 10, 1920; Read February 10, 1920. | (Text-figures 1-5.) The specimen which forms the subject of the present com- munication was preserved among a series of tongues in the Society’s Prosectorium. When a disseetion was made, the rare conditions shown in text-fig. 2 were revealed, and the normal state is illustrated in text-fig. 1 for comparison. One of the Text-figure 1. Text-figure 2. Text-fig. 1—The normal tongue, larynx, and cwsophagus. A. Ridge of mucous membrane. C. Posterior surface of larynx clothed with mucous membrane. E. Recess. Text-fig. 2.—The abnormal tongue, larynx, and esophagus. B. Posterior car- tilaginous plate. A, C, Eas in text-fig. 1. 28 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE LARYNX AND conditions is unique, and raises problems for solution by the embryologist and physiologist. The soft palate and the posterior wall of the pharynx were divided in a vertical direction, but the posterior wall of the cesophagus was only divided from behind forwards and above downwards till the mucous membrane appeared. I did not divide any more, as I considered that it was better to preserve the abnormality of the cesophagus entire. In the normal state, however, the posterior wall of the cesophagus was divided completely and the two halves thrown outwards. By that means an uninterrupted view of the tongue, larynx, pharynx, and cesophagus is obtained. In the normal state the epiglottis has a notched border and a median fissure running vertically down the inner surface, so that the cartilage appears to be composed of two symmetrical halves. It slants upwards and forwards, and the upper aperture of the larynx is small. The aryteno-epiglottidean folds, with their contained cartilages of Wrisberg, are small, and appear globular. The posterior surface of the larynx is smooth. In the abnormal specimen the epiglottic border is devoid of a notch, and the cartilage stands up vertically, so that very little of its imner surface is visible. There is no vertical median fissure on that surface, so that it appears like an arc of a circle. The aperture of the larynx is capacious, and the aryteno-epiglottic folds with their cartilages are oval; they are more prominent than in the normal condition. Indeed, the whole larynx appears larger. Its postero-lateral aspects exhibit a number of ridges and sulei running horizontally round the upper part and ter- minating on a strong vertical median ridge. The cesophagus of the normal specimen appears as a wide space behind the larynx. Its walls are ridged vertically, and an unin- terrupted view of the back of the larynx, invested by transparent mucous membrane, is obtained. In the abnormal specimen a broad cartilaginous plate covers up the whole of the larynx below the pitcher-beak produced by the arytenoid cartilages. It in turn is, with the exception of its upper end, concealed | by a vertical partition of mucous mem- brane. It measures 1°5 em. long, 1 mm. thick, and *75 em. in vertical height at its mid point, but it tapers towards its extre- ities. It is convex backwards on its outer surface, and concave backwards on its inner one. Its left extremity runs into the end of a plate on the posterior surface of the larynx, but its right end fuses with the posterior surface of the larynx beyond the right extremity of the latter plate. As the anterior plate is convex backwards, the two plates fit into one another, and the orifice of the cesophagus is curved (text-fig. 3); it is tightly closed. The anterior plate is not so high as the posterior one, but extends further down the ceesophagus, and is firmly adherent to the cricoid cartilage. In text-fig. 5 a sagittal section has been made of the normal neck, and the simplicity of the structures can be seen. It oe ae ee (ESOPHAGUS OF A COMMON MACAQUE. 248) contrasts greatly with the abnormal state which is depicted in text-fig. 4. In the latter one sees the mucous membrane (A) reflected on to the posterior cartilaginous plate (B). Then comes the cesophageal opening. Before it are the anterior cartila- ginous plate (D), a small groove, and the posterior surface of the larynx (C). The folds of mucous membrane (A) merit attention. In the normal condition a vertical ridge runs down the lateral walls of the pharynx and cesophagus, beginning at the posterior faucial pillar at the level of the upper border of the tonsillar pit, and ending at the level of the middle of the larynx. At the level of the most expanded part of the larynx, several horizontal folds run round the entire circumference of the pharynx and ceso- phagus. The vertical ridge, the posterior pillars of the iauces, and the side of the larynx enclose a small triangular recess. Text-figure 3. Text-figure 4. Text-figure 5. 2. 2 (oF 2 OPENING OESOPHAGEAL OE£SOPHAGEAL OPENING Text-fig. 3—The cesophageal opening. Text-fig. 4.—Sagittal section of abnormal specimen. ‘Text-fig. 5.—Sagittal section of normal specimen. In these D is the anterior cartilaginous plate, and A, B, C are the same as in text-figs. 1 and 2. In the abnormal specimen a ridge runs horizontally round the cesophagus, beginning at the angles of the epiglottis, and it bounds a deep recess on each side of the larynx. The mucous membrane is reflected on to the posterior cartilaginous plate (text-fig. 4), thereby forming a small pocket. From the ridge horizontal folds turn out and run round the cesophagus. The special points which arise from a consideration of the above abnormality are :— 1. The origin of the cartilaginous ring. 2. The manner in which it affects the normal mechanism of deglutition. The great rarity of this condition, and the absence of specimens showing gradations between the normal and the cartilaginous ring described above, make all opinions as to its nature purely hypothetical. My own opinion is that the development of the cricoid cartilage has gone wrong, and the halves, or one of them, which fuse to close in the posterior part of the laryngeal cavity, have or has sent processes backwards; these have joined behind to form the catilaginous plate (text-fig. 2, B), or one has grown round and rejoined the cartilage again. The anterior plate text-fig. 2, D) is immovably fixed to the back of the cricoid 30 ON THE LARYNX AND GSOPHAGUS OF A COMMON MACAQUE. cartilage, and the entire ring is internal to the mucous lining of the csophagus. The structure round the cesophagus seems to have broken into it from the cricoid cartilage. If the tongue and larynx are moved by the observer as they do naturally when the animal swallows, the posterior part of the larynx comes up against the posterior plate (text-fig. 2, B) and obstructs the cesophagus. Of course, that probably does not occur in life. Again, the semilunar mouth of the esophagus is firmly closed by the cartilaginous plates, and one gets the appearance of a sphincter. ‘The specimen had been preserved too long to permit of a dissection of muscles which might move the posterior plate, so I must leave the problem of how this animal swallowed unsolved. Both the specimens described in this communication are now - preserved in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, London. re Py oZ SO ZO eh OGGra reese = ZZ = i ZEA \ AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. Pl. Ul. HOGG, 1920, PZ. 8: ag VV AAS ry UV7-Y iy Bale & Danielsson, Ltd. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. “SaNOMIdO NVINvaLsny ‘P}] ‘uossjaiueg g ajeg Hi id SOO OCGleS. 27nd ON SOME AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 31 3. Some Australian Opiliones. By H: R. Hoec, M.A. EZ. [ Received December 27, 1919: Read February 10, 1920. | (Plates I.-IIL.*) I am indebted to Dr. Charles Chilton of Canterbury College, Christchurch, New Zealand, for a large collection of Spiders and their allied orders, gathered over a seriés of years from most parts of New Zealand. Amongst them are a number of Opiliones, and these with a few others I am now recording. Of the three suborders Palpatores, Laniatores, and Cypho- phthalmi, the two former only are represented—Palpatores by the genera Macropsalis Sor. and Pantopsalis Sim. of the family Phalangiide Thorell, and Laniatores by the families Trisno- nychidee Sor. and Trienobunide Pocock. Only three species of the genus Macropsalis have been recorded— the type J. serritarsis Sor.r from Sydney, N.S. Wales; one collected by myself at Macedon, Victoria, described under my name by Mr. R. I. Pocockt; and Jf. chiltoni$ from Stewart Island, N.Z., described by myself. The New Zealand specimens of this genus sent to me at various times have all come from Stewart Island, the southern- most remnant of the now broken land, and none from the Main Islands, whereas Pantopsalis is widely distributed over both the North and South Islands. d/acropsalis was generally supposed to be an Australian form, and as Stewart Island lies in the belt of westerly winds which blow all the year round, and the genus has not been recorded from any other part of New Zealand, it may have been originally introduced from Australia after the sepa- ration of the islands. In the Stewart Island examples of this species (JZ. chaltont) the well-known apophysis at the distal end of the palpal patella varies in size individually, but the banding of the palp in yellow and white is always the same, and I look on the specimens as constituting but one species. Of Pantopsalis probably ten species may be taken as established. The curious difference in the length and shape of the man- dibles among the specimens of this genus is remarkable, and it has been a matter of uncertainty whether this difference is sexual, dimorphic in one sex, or specific. In the whole family the sexes are not easy to distinguish accurately without spoiling the specimens, and many of the species have been described from single examples. Judging from the specimens in this collection, added to the evidence hitherto available, it would appear that * For explanation of the Plates see p. 48. + “Opiliones,” W. Sérensen, in Koch & Keyserling, Arachn. Austr., Suppl. p. 55. £ “Some new Harvest Spiders,” R. I. Pocock, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. ii. p. 398. , : § “Some New Zealand and Tasmanian Arachnide,” H. R. Hogg, Trans. N.Z. Inst. vol. xlii. (1910), p. 277. oe MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME the males have the long mandibles and the females the short, but discrepancies have to be cleared up before this can be accepted for a certainty. It may be regarded as quite certain that the difference is not specific, both forms being found in members of the same species. White’s short description* of the type species P. listerz, and Simon’s note on the original types in the Paris Museum t, show that the specimens originally described had the long mandibles, but the sex was not determined. Mr. Pocock, judging from specimens, said to be females, in the British Museum, records P. listeri among those species with the shorter mandibles, thereby distinguishing it from his P. albipalpis, which had them long. Therefore, if his determination is correct, there are both long and short mandibles in that species. P. trippi Poe. with long mandibles, is a male. P. tasmanica Hoge Bae eo 3 a dried specimen, sex undeterminable. P. nigripalpis Poc. Pras san sf is a male. P. wattsi, sp. u. Q (from the shape of the genital oper- P. pococki, sp. n. § 2 ae 28 2 cula I take to be males. P. coronata Poe. with short mandibles, sex not recorded. P. halli, sp. n. seas 53 operculum broader and straighter in specimens with short mandibles. Mandibles long in specimens cer- tainly males. P. grayi, sp. n. sagas a operculum broader, female. On the other hand, Mr. Pocock first described his P. jenningst as having short mandibles and as a female, but later found it to bea male. Here, however, the basal segment of the mandible is twice as long as the palp, and the second segment six times as long as wide, which is hardly a short mandible when compared with that of the females recorded above. Mr. Pocock gives a synopsis of the species described (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. May 1903, p. 438), and this I supplement below :— Suborder PALPATORES. Family PHALANGIID. Genus PANTOPSALIS Simon. a. Patella, tibia, and distal joint of palpi white or yellowish white. @, Mandibles red-brown; carapace black; eye-tubercle SMMOOPM + sth.40 eeeb bee ssaece tec) UA areteepR eee ea each eens MILESCEMOMN abies a. A group of small spicules on front border ............ ? albipalpis Poe. 8. About half a dozen strongish spicules in front ...... trippi Poc. 61, Mandibles pale yellow-brown; carapace cream-colour, with dark patch in front of eye-tubercle spiculed in front; eye-tubercles smooth........................... watési, sp. n. * Adam White, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. vol. xvii. (1849), p. 6. + HE. Simon, C.R. Soc. Ent. de Belg. May 2, 1879, p. 16. CS AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 33 6. Patella, tibia, and distal joint of palpi dark brown, yellow- brown or deep yellow. a*, Kye-tubercle denticulated ; carapace dark brown. a3, Palpi black brown .............ccc00cceceeeeeceseereesenneee nigripalpis Pec. and subsp. spiculosa Poc. 68, Palpi pale yellow-brown ...................00eeeeeseeeess pococki, sp. n. 6°, Eye-tubercle smooth. a‘, Spiniform tubercles on frontal area; palpi uni- HorlAlly IDEVES, 6. ccdenanee noboncoe cbabhaesececeaDocacesoopane . GEOG SO A HOG: 6+. Carapace wholly smooth. a. A short spine on trochanter i.; palpi yellow, banded with brown; carapace tortoise-shell ... gray, sp. n. 6°. Trochanter 1. smooth. a®, Palpi yellow, blotched with grey; carapace dark yellow-brown .......... seccesees eee. tasmanica Hoge. 66, Palpi reddish brown; red and: grey stripes on rear segments of abdomen Seema coronata Poc. c®, Palpi orange; carapace callomeiarer. Ww ith brown patches; legs bright yellow-brown ... halli, sp. n. PANTOPSALIS LISTERI White. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1849, p. 6. Ty pe species. PANTOPSALIS NIGRIPALPIS Poc. Pocock, “Some new Harvest Spiders,’ Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. 11. p. 399; 2d., “Some new Tropical and Southern Opiliones,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, voi. xi. 1903, p. 438. A specimen with the eye-tubercle and surrounding portion of the carapace more strongly denticulated, Mr. Pocock has named as a subspecies of the above, P. spiculosa. PANTOPSALIS CORONATA Poc. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra, p. 436. PANTOPSALIS TRIPPI Poc. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra, p. 437. PANTOPSALIS JENNINGSI Poc. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra, p. 437. PANTOPSALIS TASMANICA Hogg Hogg, “Some New Zealand and Tasmanian Arachnide,” Trans. N.Z. Inst. vol. xlii. 1910, p. 279. PANTOPSALIS WATTSI, sp.n. (PI. I. fig. 3.) The cephalic area is dark yellow-brown in front over a median space as far as and including the eye-tubercle. This is bounded by a wide horseshoe belt of bright cream-colour, beyond which Proc. Zoot, Soc.—1920, No. II, 3 34 MR, H. R. HOGG ON SOME again as far as the side margin it is yellow-brown, but intruding at intervals into the lighter colour. The eye-tubercle is smooth, brown and yellow, with the eyes yellow. The abdomen is unfortunately partially broken but apparently brown. The mandibles are long, pale yellow-brown, strongly bespiculed in rather regular bands. ‘The palpi, remarkably long, are brown on the basal half of the femur, yellow on the distal half, and pale yellow on the remaining joints. The legs are banded alternately with brown and yellow, and are also very long. On the under side the cox, operculum, and mouth-parts are yellow-brown, dark in the two former and lighter in the latter. The space between the eye-tubercle and the front of the carapace is bespiculed. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 3, lat. 25 in front, 4 behind; mand. 20; palpus 82 ; Ist leg 374, 2nd 65, 3rd 373, 4th 453. This specimen, apparently a male, was collected at Hawera, in the North Island, N.Z., by Mr. G. 8S. Watts, and I have named it after him. PANTOPSALIS POCOCKI, sp. n. (Pi. I. figs. 3 a—d.) The cephalic part of the carapace is dark brown, the abdo- minal portion the same in the middle with pale yellow-grey at the sides, into which the darker colour runs in places. The posterior segments are grey, with transverse marginal streaks of black-brown: The mandibles are dark red-brown, long, profusely covered with rather large spicules, and are moderately thin until the thickening at the distal end. The femoral joint of the legs black-brown, the remaining joints red-brown. The palpi are uniformly yellow-brown till quite at their distal end, which is yellowish grey. The carapace, including the eye-tubercle, is almost wholly covered with small spicules. ‘The eyes are large and black. The under side, including the coxal and sternal area, is black- brown. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 27, lat. 33; abd. lg. 27, lat. 32; mand. 233; palpus 47; Ist leg 30, 2nd 56, 3rd 26, 4th 37. This specimen, collected on Mt. Dick, N.Z., by Mr. T. Hall, IT have named after Mr. R. I. Pocock, to whom the students of the Opiliones are much indebted for his valuable papers. PANTOPSALIS HALLI, sp. n. (PI. I. figs. 4 ad.) The sides of the cephalic part are mottled yellow and dark brown, a broad median area being paler yellow and light brown. The eye-tubercle is pale yellow-brown, rather darker in the median longitudinal streak ; eyes quite black. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 35 The dorsal abdominal part has a still paler median area, light yellowish grey, narrower in front and broadening posteriorly to a scolloped pattern near the rear end. This is bordered by a dark brown streak on each side, separating the median area from the bright yellow-brown sides. The mandibles and palpi are bright yellow, and the legs pale yellow-brown, except the distal end of femora 3 and 4, which is darker. The carapace and abdomen are both quite smooth and destitute of granulation, as are also the mandibles, which are of the quite short type, less than the length of the body. The coxee and under side of the abdomen are pale yellow- brown, quite smooth, and the segmental divisions almost obliter- ated, being just indicated by darker transverse streaks. The patellar joint of the palpi is slightly longer than the tibial, both joints broadening anteriorly and being profusely covered with short bristles. The genital operculum is thick and broad. The measurements (in millimetr ey) are as follows :— Ceph. Ig. 2, lat. 14 in front, 24 behind; abd. lg. 25, lat. 3.; mand. 32; palpus 6; Ist leg 18, and 423, 3rd 194, dth 29. Four specimens, much shriveled and without label, but from New Zealand. Three are males with long mandibles and the male- shaped operculum, and one is a fariale with seemingly broader and straighter operculum and short mandibles. Also one female, collected on Mt. Algidus, Rakaia Gorge, South Island, by Mr. T. Hall, to whom the species is dedicated. It is to his efforts that this large and valuable collection is mainly due. PANTOPSALIS GRAYI, sp. n. (PI. I. figs. 5 a-c.) The cephalic part of the carapace is bright yellow-brown. The abdominal part is rather darker brown in the median area, pale and dark mingled at the sides. The under side is pale yellow from the front to as far as the base of the genital operculum, brown on the abdominal segments. ‘he coxe are pale yellow, with a dark brown band on each at the end nearest to the trochanter. The legs are yellow, banded with brown. The mandibles pale yellow, blotched with brown. The palpi yellow, banded with brown on the femur and patella, more faintly on.the tibial and distal joints. The mandibles are of the short type, not so long as the body, and, though covered with short bristles, are otherwise smooth. The carapace is wholly smooth, but there is a short spine on trochanter i. The eye-tubercle is nearly in the centre of the cephalic region. The genital operculum is broad in front. The measurements (in millimetres, but legs mostly broken) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 24; abd. lg. 34; mand. 327; palpus 5; Ist leg 31. A single specimen, apparently a Peinalel collected at Hukanui, Waikaremoana, North Island of N.Z., by Mr. W. R. Gray, after 2% 36 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME whom I have named the species, was found in close proximity to a male specimen, which agrees closely with M. Simon’s description of the Paris Museum types of P. listeri White; but the two are very different in coloration. Suborder LANIATORES. Family TRI Z#NOBUNID® Poe. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. ii. p. 400. Genus TRIZNOBUNUS Nor. W. Sorensen in Koch & Keys. Die Arachn. Ausitr., Suppl. p. 59 (1886). Dr. Sdrensen described the type species of this genus 7’. bicari- natus from Sydney, and Mr, R. I. Pocock 7’. pectinatus from Tasmania. To these I have now to add a New Zealand form from the collection of Mr. T. Hall. In this the curious structure of the eye-tubercle is still more elaborated than in the other two, since it has four pairs of lateral branches. ‘There is, further; an apical spine, and the horns on each side of the base are more powerful. The whole creature is profusely bespined and granulated. Dr. Sdrensen (loc. cit.) merely regarded Triawnobunus as a second genus in the family Trienonychide, but Mr. Pocock very rightiy writes it down as a separate family. The quite different type of sternum, together with the smaller and weaker palpi, apart from the very remarkable development of the eye-tubercle, show that it has proceeded along considerably different lines from the above-named family. The form of the eye-tubercle is a specialisation of that seen in Hridanus Thor. and Phistobunus Poc. of M. Simon’s family Phalangodide. Synopsis of S'pecies. a. ye-tubercle having two pairs of lateral branches in front of the eyes. a}. Two longitudinal rows of spinous tubercles reaching from the base of the eye-tubercle to the anterior rear SECMMEM Ge erie eicicteveatepetahe onal mcciecetoamle arden eanen Meer b}. A single median longitudinal row of spinous tubercles reaching from the base of the eye-tubercles to the anterior rear segment .........ceeeeeeeeeeeeeersceeteeteeseeese pectinatus Poe. b. Hye-tubercle having three pairs of lateral branches in front of PIAGEWES: razubedsucecuateest ec Atte ace aac ae CESSES EES eR ET ECTRa eS bicarinatus Sor. acuminatus, sp. n. TRIZNOBUNUS ACUMINATUS, Sp. n. (PI. II. figs. 6 ad.) Colour. Upper side greyish yellow all over; the small tubercles forming a pattern on the back are rather yellow. The under side is more yellow all over, with two dark brown patches on each side of the anal segment. Both joints of the mandibles are so thickly covered with black network on yellow ground as to appear black. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. Bil The palpi are palish yellow, banded with black; the legs have the femur, patella, and tibia darker and greyer, the tarsal joint being quite ight yellow. One specimen, which I take to bea female, is much lighter and greyer above than the others, and on the under side pale yellow, without the black bands on the palpi. The genital operculum is more thickly covered with bristles and the sternum is corrugated, whereas in the others it is not. The spinous tubercles on the segments are more in number (about 14). Otherwise there is not much difference. As in Mr. Pocock’s 7’. pectinatus from Tasmania, which this seems to resemble more than Dr. Sérensen’s 7’. bicarinatus from Sydney, the dorsal carapace is decorated with longitudinal and transverse rows of small round tubercles, forming ringed areas smooth in the inside. There are four longitudinal and about five transverse rows of granules, but no median longitudinal row of larger granules. The very remarkable eye-bearing tubercle, rising and pointing ‘upwards and forwards from the front margin, is broadest at the base, and tapers to a point at the anterior end. ‘The eyes are situated one on each side, about half-way from base to summit. Just behind the eyes a pair of long, pointed tubercles jut out one from each side. ‘These are followed by three more similar pairs, and the whole is topped by one median tubercle ending in a sharp point. The intermediate space between these is filled up with small granular and pointed tubercles. On the front edge of the carapace on each side of the eye-tubercle are five spinous tubercles. Between the last row of small tubercles and the first of the rear segments is a pair of moderate-sized spinous tubercles rather wide apart. On each of the rear segments is a transverse row of long spinous tubercles, about nine in number in the males, but more numerous (about 12 or 14) and not quite so large in the female. On the under side the coxe of the palpi and first and second pairs of legs are profusely covered with granular tubercles, but the 8rd and 4th coxe are granular only along their margins. Each segment has a row of round tubercles rather larger than the above. The soft mouth-parts of the inner end of the palpal coxa form a very distinct upper jaw, divided longitudinally into two parts. The same parts of the coxa of the first pair of legs similarly form the lower jaw, each part lying on one side of a soft median lip. Coxa ii., on the other hand, ends in a flat chitinous piece, which, turning forwards, clasps the mouth-parts, and would appear to support and hold them together. Coxa lili. is similarly hard but black, and the pair seems to form “‘areuli genitales” on each side of the genital operculum and sternum. The end of coxa iv. is a narrow ridge of hard black substance, a continuation of the sides of the triangular 38 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME sternum. The latter is like the lower end of the sternum in Trienonyx, but without the narrow stem; consequently the operculum is brought much closer to the mouth-parts, as in genera so far removed as Stylocellus Westw. The head of the penis is bluntly triangular, and its upper and lower sheaths, as far as can be seen when not extended, are terminated in a transverse line. The mandibles ave shorter and weaker thanin 7riwnonya; the first joint does not reach as far as the end of the eye-tubercle. The palpi also are short and weak, and are not longer than the dorsal carapace, The legs are fringed the whole distance along the femora, patelle, and tibize with long spines ranged on each side of the respective joints. The measurements (in rol ipacilies) are as follows :— Ceph. ls. 1j, lat. 13; abd. lg. 22, lat.21; mand. 1; palpus 22; Ist leg 5, 2nd 8, 3rd 64, 4th 83. This species differs from 7. seniors Poe. in having a larger number of projections along the sides of the eye-tubercle, in’ having a larger number of spinous tubercles on the rear segments, and in being without the median row of larger tubercles on the dorsal carapace. I have four specimens, of which three are certainly males. They were collected by Mr. T. Hall near the Holliford River, L. Wakatipu district in the province of Otago. Family TRI#ZNONYCHID. Genus TRI#NonyxX Sor. W. Sorensen in Koch & Keys. Die Arachn. Austr., Suppl. p. 58. This genus, being now restricted to those species in which the eye-tubercle is marginal, includes, with new ones that 1 am now recording, only seven in number. These may be distinguished as follows :— a. ay coarsely granulated. . Transverse row of granules on carapace, and a pair of spinous tubercles at posterior end of same ............ 7. rapax Sor. b'. No spinous tubercles on carapace. a*, Carapace chocolate-brown ; rear segments orna- mented with round flat orange spots, with a short bristle on each .............0.....000ee000ee 2, cockayni, sp. n. 6. Carapace deep brown; a series of low tubercles, hut no bright spots on rear segments. a. Distal end of tarsus elongated..................... T. coriacea Poc.* (3. Distal end of tarsus nodular .................... ZZ. aspera Poe. * Mr. Pocock (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. May 1903, p. 445) refers to a species in this section under the name of 7. verrucosa. This I aim unable to trace the origin of, and he allows me to state that he was, he believes, intending to refer to the species named 7. coriacea. AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 39 6. Carapace smooth or finely granulated. a’, Carapace yellow-brown, with a dark brown rectan- gular pattern round the margins and a similar | pattern behind the eye-tubercle; yellow spots in the posterior area between the two patterns ......... T. variegata, sp. n. 63. Carapace orange, two black patches on the yellow eye- tubercle ; legs very pale yellow ; a row of fine spines on upper surface of each segment of abdomen ...... T. testaceus Hoge. e®. Carapace dark yellow-brown, a row of tubercles along its posterior border in front of first rear segment ; a longitudinal row of short bristles on the median Ihave 8 a ae ee eevee emery ce y's | Roopa a opty, TRLENONYX RAPAX Sor. W. Sorensen in Koch & Keys. Die Arachn. Austr., Suppl. 1886, p. 58. Locality. Fiji. TRLENONYX CORIACEA Poc. R. I. Poeock, “Some new Harvest Spiders,” Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. 11. p. 403. Locality. Auckland, N.Z. TRIZNONYX ASPERA Poc. Loe. cit. supra, p. 404. Mr. Pocock states that this species, only located as Austrahan, differs from other species in the formation of the end of the tarsal joint, which, instead of being elongated, has the last portion spherical or nodular. TRIENONYX TESTACEUS Hogg. ‘H.R. Hogs, “Some New Zealand and Tasmanian Arach- nide,” ‘Frans. N.Z. Inst. vol. xli. 1910, p. 280. Locality. New Zealand only. TRIBNONYX STEWARTIUS Hogg. H. R. Hogg, loc. cit. supra, p. 281. Locality. Stewart Island, N.Z. TRIHNONYX COCKAYNI, sp. n. (PI. II. figs. 7 a—d.) Colour, Male: orange, shaded in patches at the side, and in the middle line and on the eye-tubercle with brown; females browner all over. Transverse lines of round orange spots on the rear dorsal segments, the ventral segments yellow- -brown and smooth. The mandibles, and more faintly the upper sides of the palpi, have a brown network pattern; the legs are yellow, banded with brown. The dorsal surface is coarsely granulated. No raised tubercles on the segments, but a short bristle on each round spot and no spines on anterior margin of carapace. The eye-tubercle is marginal, straight in front, but sloping posteriorly. On the 40 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME ventral surface the oral segment of coxa ii. is well developed, pointing prominently forward, but is flat and does not stand up from the surface; the mouth-parts, on the other hand, of coxa i. and the palpal coxa stand up well above the surface-level. The mandibles are smooth, the basal segment 13 times as long as wide, with two small spines on the inner side of the anterior end. The palpi robust, the trochanter with three spines under- neath, in front, on the outer side; three powerful spines under the femur; two small spines under the patella; three long spines on each side underneath the tibia; three small spines on each side and a large terminal spine on the distal joint. The extended sheath of the male penis is bilobed, the penis itself terminated by fine bristles. The coxe of the anterior three legs are corrugated and tubercled, that of the 4th pair smooth. In the female the sternum between the third pair of coxee is | corrugated and narrow. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 2, lat. 3; abd. lg. 4, lat. 4; palpus 64; Ist leg 11, 2nd 14, 3rd 94, 4th 13. One male and four females were collected by Dr. Cockayne from Kapiti Isiand, off the S.W. coast of the North Island of New Zealand. TRIENONYX VARIEGATA, Sp.n. (PI. II. figs. 8 a-c.) Colour. Female: pale greyish yellow, with dark brown rect- angular pattern reaching from the eye-tubercle to the first rear segment, also a smaller and lighter coloured similar rectangle reaching from behind the eye-tubercle to the posterior end of the cephalic part, and transverse rows of yellow spots round on the carapace, oval on the segments; the under side is pale all over. The legs are pale yellow, banded with dark grey; the mandibles, and femoral and tibial joints of palpi are deep black, speckled with small yellow spots. The eye-tubercle yellow-grey in the middle, dark grey at the sides; eyes orange. The dorsal surface 1s smooth but coriaceous, the spots thereon flat, with short bristles, but the segmental spots slightly raised. The marginal eye-tubercle, rather high and conical, has a wide circular base, narrowing to a blunt point anteriorly, but there is nothing either spinous or tubercular about it. The eyes are at the side. There are no spines on any part of the carapace. The mandibles are smooth, without tubercles, the first segment about twice as long as wide. The palpi are rather slight, the usual spines on the under side little more than low tubercles, and none on the upper side. The sternwm between the 3rd pair of coxe is wide and corrugated, in the male, with an upper and lower division, and above this a rectangular lip between the prominent oral parts of coxe i. The oral portions of coxe ii. are hardly formed at all and in no wise raised, AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. Al The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Q. Ceph. Ig. 13, lat. 13; abd. Ig. 22, lat. 23; mand. 21; palpus 34; 1st leg 5, 2nd 8, 3rd 53, 4th 72. S. Ceph. Ig. 17, lat. 13 ; abd. lg. 23, lat. 24 ; mand. 12 ; palpus 32; Ist leg 5, 2nd 8}, 3rd 43, 4th 84. There are three females from the Holliford River and one young from Mt. Remarkables, L. Wakatipu. One from Mt. Oakden ; also six specimens from Paradise, L. Wakatipu, of which four are apparently males, with more prominent spines on the palpi and without the clear pattern on the back. They were all gathered by Mr. T. Hall. The males are, as mentioned by Mr. Pocock, generally more constricted in the cephalic part of the carapace than the females. The wide sternum and well-formed lip above it are features which might almest be held to be of generic importance, but I have not made them so in consideration of other resemblances the species shows to the genus 7’ricenonyx. Genus Nunera Loman. Nuneia J. C. C. Loman, Zool. Jahrb. Syst. xvi. 1902, p. 214. Nuncia R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. xi. May 1903, p. 440. * Following the limitations adopted by Loman and Pocock, we may assume that the species to be attributed to this genus have the ocular tubercle rising at a short distance from the front margin of the carapace, that it is smooth and rather low and without any prominence thereon ; the carapace itself smooth, the sternum in both sexes narrow, and the tarsal claws of the third and fourth pairs of legs with short side claws springing from near the base of the median claw. On this basis we have the following :— NUNCcIA SPERATA Loman. Dr. J. C. C. Loman, loc. cié. supra. From Stephen’s Island on the N. coast of the South Island of New Zealand. NUNCIA VALDIVIENSIS Sor. Trienonyx valdiviensis W.Sérensen in Koch & Keys. Die - Arachn., Austr. Nuncia valdiviensis R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. supra. From Chili. NUNCIA SUBL&VIS Poc. Trienonyx sublevis R. I. Pocock, Proe. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. ii. p. 404. Nuneia sublevis R. 1. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist, supra. Locality. Otago, 8. Island, New Zealand. 49 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME NUNCIA ENDERBHI Hoge. Trienonyx enderbei WH. R. Hogg, in Dr. Chilton, “ Sub- antarctic Islands of New Zealanc , Wellington, N.Z., 1909. This species, from the Enderby and Auckland Islands, clearly comes into the genus Vuncia. NUNCIA SMITHI, sp.n. (PI. II. figs. 9 a-c.) . Colour. Male: carapace rather deep red-brown, mingled with black patches and streaks, but hardly suggesting much of a pattern. The edges of the segments are marked in some cases with bright white transverse “lines. The mandibles are dark brown and the palpi bright yellow, with black network pattern on the lower portions of the femoral, patellar, and tibial joints. The under side is paler yellow-brown. The female is pale yellow with brown markings, and in both cases the legs are yellow with brown bands. The eye- ee rele 18 low (but rather higher in the male than in the female), slightly removed from the front margin of the cara- pace. The latter is finely granulated, and the dorsal surface is without warts or spines. The first joint of the mandibles is about twice as long as broad, with a bunch of short spines near the base; the fingers long and fine. On the basal part of the femur of the palp are one long spine and two short ones, and there is another half-way up. On the inner side is a row of short blunt tubercles with a bristle on each, and on the outer side a row of bristles ; on the tibial joint are two long spines on the inner side and two warty knobs. The true maxillary process of coxa ii, is flat, and clasps on each side the soft white mouth-parts of coxa i., but behind this is a large prominence standing up from the surface and pointing rather backwards. At the outer end of coxa iv., Just above the spiracle, are three short tubercles followed by a rather long club- shaped knob. The tarsal claws of legs iii. and iv. have each a pair of moderately large side claws springing from the base. The sternum is narrow, corrugated, with a triangular base and a spear-headed distal end. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 17, lat. 22; abd. lg. 33, lat. 32; mand. 37; palpus 1}; Ist leg 7, ond 102, 3rd 7, Ath 10. I have one male and one female collected by Mr. W. W. Smith at Hawkes Bay, North Island of N. Zealand, and two males by Dr. Chilton from Picton at the north of the South Island. Genus SORENSENELLA Poe. ; R. I. Pocock, “Some new Harvest Spiders,” Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1902, vol. 11. p. 409. The two species of this genus deseribed by Mr. Pocock have the eye-tubercle placed shortly behind the front margin of the AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. 43 carapace and bearing on its summit a short dentiform tubercle. The claws of the third and fourth pairs of legs have the side branches longer than the median claw in both sexes. I have a male and female which I am placing in the genus following (Monoxyomma), in which this type of claw appears in the male only, the female having the side claws shorter than the median. SoRENSENELLA PREHENSOR Poc. R. I. Pocock, loc. cit. supra. Locality. New Zealand (only), SORENSENELLA BICORNIS Poc. R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. xi. May 1903, p. 439. Male and female from Christchurch, N.Z. Genus MonoxyomMa Poc. R. I. Pocock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. x1. May 1903, p. 444. Mr. Pocock formed this genus for those members of the family Triznonychide in which the ocular tubercle, rising distinctly behind the anterior margin of the carapace, is protected by a ‘Jong suberect spine. He also gives as generic characters a pair of long spines on or about the third abdominal segment, and the dorsal valve or sheath of penis trilabiate. The pair of dorsal spines is far from being peculiar to this genus. It is present in a median bifurcated form in one case, and wanting in another, among the species which I am compelled to consider as belonging to this genus since they otherwise conform to the ty pe. The third character suffers under the disability of being a sexual one; and it is a matter of considerable difficulty, in the majority of cases, to ascertain whether it appertains to a par- ticular species or not. The following synopsis may help to distinguish the species below recorded :— a. Dorsal carapace roughly granular all over ......... M. tuberculatum, sp. n. 6. Dorsal carapace smooth or small granules only. a}, A pair of spinous tubercles near rear end of (CEAPROEXOSY 34) chocadeaduindeaad eee Bene Santen Eerisen 2005006 61. No pair of spinous tubercles near rear end of carapace. a*, A bifurcated spinous tubercle on median line; no spines on anterior margin ; palpi 15 times as long as body ...............-.-..-... ML. hendei, sp. n. 62, No spinous tubercles on carapace; a pair 0 short spines, one on each corner of anterior margin; palpi nearly twice as long as body. JM. trailli, sp. n. M. spinatwm Poe. 44 MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME MonoxyomMaA sPInatum Poe. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. loc. cit. p. 445. The type species, sent by Dr. Brown from Hill Grove, N.S. Wales. ; MoNoOXYOMMA HENDEI, sp.n. (PI. III. figs. 10 a-d.) Colour. The cephalic part is yellow-brown smirched with black- brown, chiefly at the sides. The thoracic part and segments almost wholly black-brown. The mandibles yellow-brown with a slight network of black, and the palpi the same but the network heavier. The under side of the carapace is very similar, yellow- brown and black being mixed up without much semblance of pattern. On the segments, however, the two colours are in transverse bands. On the legs the same mixture occurs, the pale being more in the joints. On the femur and tibia the two colours appear in longitudinal bands. The median area of the carapace is slightly convex, this part being circumscribed by a ridge in front, and at the sides with a flat streak between it and the margin. The surface is coriaceous, without spines or tubercles, except as below, either thereon or projecting from the margin. The eye-tubercle is situated on the inner side of the ridge above mentioned ; it is conical and rather tall, with the horn-shaped projection from its highest point bend- ing slightly forward. This is about the same height as the lower tubercle, from which it springs. Near the posterior end of the carapace there is a large bifid tubercle in the middle line, with two transverse rows of small single ones, each with a bristle in the middle, between it and the first of the segments. On each of the three abdomiual segments is a row of similar warty tubercles, rather larger than the above, each with a short bristle. The mandibles and palpi are fairly long and strong. On the femoral joint of the latter are two longitudinal rows of quite small spines; on the tibial and distal joints the usual longer spines. On the trochanter, femur, patella, and tibia of all legs are rows of small warty tubercles with short spines, and similar but smaller on the coxe. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Total length 22, breadth 2; mand. 2; palpus 4; Ist leg 63, 2nd 92, 3rd 7, 4th 93. One male from Hende’s Ferry, Central Westland, N.Z., which 1 have named after Mr. J. W. Hende, the collector. MonoxyoMMA TUBERCULATUM, sp.n. (Pl. III. figs. 11 a-c.) Colour. Males: a uniform dark yellow-brown over whole of carapace. The posterior edge of each rear segment is distinctly marked out by a pale transverse line; the mandibles and palpi AUSIRALIAN OPILIONES. 45, are rather bright yellow. The legs ashy grey. The under side is yellow from the front as far as the rear coxe; dark brown behind this on the sterna, which are bordered with paler edging. Two specimens, which I take to be females, are ashy grey above with pale grey spines and almost wholly yellow underneath, being there grey only at the extreme end; on the upper side there is a distinct rhomboidal pattern in pale grey on a dark ground. The cephalic part of the carapace is thickly covered with coarse granulations ; it is bounded posteriorly by a distinct depression separating it from the abdominal portion. The front border has one long median spine, flanked on each side by five smaller spines. The eye-tubercle takes its rise at a point well behind the front margin; it is roughly hemispherical, with the eyes looking upwards, and a median horn about equal to the height of the basal part on which it stands. Behind the suleus above mentioned the granulations form themselves more into longi- tudinal and transverse rows, but without achieving any very definite pattern. About midway between the dividing sulcus and the rear end are a pair of rather large spinous tubercles, and behind these four more, of which the middle two are the largest. The rear segments have regular rows of spinous tubercles, about ten on front row to four on the back row. The basal joint of the mandibles is thick and bulges upwards. On the basal part of the second joint are several spinous tubercles. The palpi are thick and powerfully bespined on all joints. In length they just equal the body. ‘hose of the supposed female are “slighter and less strongly armed. The “legs are covered with spinous granules « as far as the tibial joint, and the spaces between the trochanters of ii. and ili., and uli. and iv. are armed with three or four spinous tubercles. On the claws of tarsi 11. and iv. are two quite small side wings inserted about the middle of the claw. I have little doubt about the sexes, but on removing the oper- culum of one supposed male, there was nothing at. the bottom of a deep hollow but a granular mass. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 235 abd. lg. 33, lat. 32; mand. 23; palpus 5; Ist leg 77, 2nd 142, 3rd 11, Ath 1g, These are three males ‘and two females from Mt. AJgidus, Rakaia Gorge, South Island, N.Z. MoNoxYOMMA TRAILLI, sp. n. (PI. III. figs. 12 a-f.) Colour. Male: a black-brown border along the front edge of the carapace, along the sides, and the same colour over the rear seements; in the median area there is a large yellowish patch. On the segments large, round faint yellow spots in transverse VOWS. The mandibles are yellow, with a black network pattern AG MR. H. R. HOGG ON SOME on both joints. The palpi are orange, with dark blotches on the femur and inside of tibia. The legs are dingy yellow, ringed with brown. On the under side the whole of the cephalic part is orange, and the segments black-brown. In the female the pale area of the carapace is paler and more cream-colour than in the male, and the femur and patella of the palp are more continuously black-brown, otherwise the coloration is much the same. The carapace in both sexes is of a dull smoothness without granulations, and the only spinous tubercles are one at each front corner at the side of the trochanter of the first leg. The spots on the segments are slightly raised, with a bristle on each. The eye-tubercle is clearly removed from the front margin, and the portion between the eyes is produced forward into a peak about as high as the portion of the tubercle below the eyes. The mandibles are remarkably short, but the first joint bulges upwards above the base. On the other hand, the palpi are nearly twice as long as the whole body, the femoral joint bowed like the first joint of the mandible, and powerfully bespined both above and below. The other joints are similarly spined. The tarsal joint of legs 111. and iv. in the male has the modifi- cation of the claws which Mr. Pocock considered one of the points of his genus Sorensenella—viz., the side claws longer than the median; but in the female the claws are normal, the side claws being only half the length of the median, but springing from the base, thus showing that this character is only sexual in some cases. . The sternum in the male is of the narrow type, triangular at the base and spear-headed at the distal end, with the oral part of coxe ii. meeting above it and no visible lip; but in the female it is broad, as I have above described it in 7ricenonyx variegaia, with a well-defined lip in front. It would appear, therefore, as if this broad sternum, where it occurs, is a sexual character. I have re-examined the specimens I believe rightly taken to be males of 7’. variegata (indeed, in one of them the penis is exposed ) ; and, although the sternal depression is still wide, a slightly- formed narrow sternum is to be seen in the median line, and the lip is above it. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Male. Ceph. 1g. 22, lat. 31; abd. lg. 22, lat. 4; mand. 2; palpus 9; Ist leg 83, 2nd 14}, 3rd 9, 4th 13. Mr. W. Traill, after whom I have named them, sent the specimens, one male and one female, from Stewart Island. ALGIDIA, gen. nov. This genus differs from the others in the family in having the genital operculum, in both sexes, furnished with denticular tubercles, each with a short bristle at its apex, extending along the front margin and toa greater or shorter distance down the AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. A7 sides. The eye-tubercle, which is situated the length of its diameter behind the front margin of the carapace, bears wart- like protuberances in its median line, varying from one only to a row of three or four. The mandibles are short and weak. The palpi rather slight, but tuberculated and strongly bespined. The rear segments and trochanters are strongly bespined and the carapace profusely granulated. ALGIDIA CUSPIDATA, sp.n. (PI. IIT. figs. 13 a-e.) Colour. Male: carapace dingy yellow, with two dark, broad, longitudinal stripes, beginning one each side of the eye- tubercle and reaching to the level off the fourth trochanter, where it turns outwards to the margin. The mandibles and palpi are darker, the latter covered with pale wart-like protuberances and the former with black network pattern. The legs are yellow with dark grey rings; the under side yellow-grey. The female is paler on the carapace; the dark stripes not so conspicuous, but the warty pattern more regular. The legs, mandibles, and palpi about the same as in the male. The eye-tubercle is hemispherical ; the median row of warts three or four in the males, fewer in the females. The carapace in the male is strongly constricted behind the cephalic part, the sides straighter in the female. On the front margin in the male there are seven long spines in front of the eye-tubercle and three smaller behind each corner. In the female are three formidable spines in the centre, flanked by two small ones, and none at the side. The median area and sides of the carapace are thickly covered with warty pustules, but there are none on the darker stripes. On the abdominal portion in the male are four transverse rows of powerful spines, while in the female there are only a few large ones near the centre line, and a fewer number of smaller ones at wide intervals reaching to the sides. The trochanters of all the legs and the intervals between are strongly bespined. The legs themselves have small denticu- lations, with a short bristle on each as far as the distal end of the tibial joint. The metatarsal joints smooth, the tarsi with short hairs. The tarsal claws are weak; those of iii. and iv. with short side wings springing from about the middle. On the under side the coxe are all bordered with rows of warty prominences, the front margin of coxe i. having a row of sharp pointed black spines. The margin of the genital operculum is divided into about ten or eleven distinct scopulations or pustules, each terminated with a bristle. The mandibles are short and weak, and covered with short black beady pustules. The palpi are about the length of the carapace in the male, 48 ON SOME AUSTRALIAN OPILIONES. strongly bespined with sharp bristly points; those of the female are longer and rather slimmer, but equally bespined. The measurements (in millimetres) are as follows :— Male. Ceph. lg. 14, lat. 13; abd. Ig. 2, lat. 22; mand. 22; palpus 34; 1st leg 43, 2nd 8, 3rd 67, 4th 83. Female. Ceph. lg. 13, lat. 14; abd. lg. 24, lat. 2; mand, 12; palpus 43; 1st leg 54, 2nd 92, 3rd 83, 4th 103. The males are three from Mt. Algidus, Rakaia Gorge, and one from Mt. Remarkables, near L. Wakatipu. The females are one from Mt. Starve-all, near Nelson, and one from Canterbury. All these localities are in the South Island of New Zealand. There can be little doubt that they are all of the same species from the similar coloration of their parts. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Puate I. Fig. 1. Macropsalis chiltont Hogg. § with short mandibles. Underside showing mouth-parts, genital operculum, and coxe. . Macropsalis chiltoni Hogg. Profile of male. 3. Pantopsalis pococki, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view; (6) profile; (¢) Pantopsalis wattsi, sp. n., cepbalic part of carapace, dorsal view. 4. (a) Pantopsalis halli, sp.n., 6; (6) 2; (c) genital operculum of g; (d) genital operculum of g turned back showing organ. . Pantopsalis grayi, sp.n. 2. (a) Ventral view of carapace; (6) mandible ; (c) patella and tibia of palp. bo On Prats II. Fig. 6. Trienobunus acuminatus, sp.n., 6. (a) Dorsal view of carapace; (b) ven- tral view of carapace; (c) eye-tubercle enlarged; (d) genital operculum turned back, showing dorsal and ventral sheaths and organ—distal end only. 7. Trienonyx cockayni, sp.n. (a) Under side of cephalic part of 9; () under side of cephalic part of 6; (c) genital organ of g protruded from operculum—tront view ; (@) ditto—side view. 8. Trienonyx variegata, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of g ; (6) ventral view of 3 ; (c) ventral view of cephalic part of 2. 9. Nuncia smithi, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of carapace of 2 ; (6) ventral view, anterior portion of carapace; (c) tarsal claw of iv. Prarez III. Fig. 10. Monoxyomma hendei,sp.n. . (a) Dorsal view of carapace; (6) ventral view of carapace ; (c) profile; (d) tarsal claw of iv. 11. Monoxyomma tuberculatum, sp. n. (a) Dorsal view of carapace ; (0) ventral view of carapace ; (c) eye-tubercle from side. 12. Monowyomma trailli, sp.n. (a) Dorsal view of g3; (6) ventral view of cephalic part of ¢; (c) ventral view of cephalic part of 2; (d) eye-tubercle ; (e) iv. tarsal joint showing claws of 6; (jf) iv. tarsal jomt showing claws of 2. 13. Algidia cuspidata, gen. et sp.n. (a) Dorsal aspect of g ; (b) dorsal aspect of ¢ ; (c) under side of cephalic part of ¢ showing genital operculum ; (d) under side of cephalic part of 9 showing genital operculum ; (e) tarsal joints of iv. leg. ") ON THE ENGLISH SPECIES OF RED SPIDER. 49 4, Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). By Stanury Hirst. (Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.) [Received December 8, 1919: Read February 24, 1920.] (Text-figures 1-5.) The following note deals with the English species of mites commonly called Red Spiders, and is almost entirely based on material collected by the author, the coloration being described from living specimens. a *OULIV]AL ie alk as & “eprplousyog SaID.LINDUW SvaUayony ey ad *1oyVM-YsoLy us eS ee “ICOM to i sna sapr0ig0ey 5 i Fe i ‘i 4 sgptaqery [ooo suupuny sume 7; «“ « 8a «é & a te snsopuaUMyyf sa.a4) e) és ‘ fe & ‘ "eeyoyaayg) [vase 2c srusofeynnba v22z04) = ae ‘OULIT IN BG OG a (a4 | ee ee ee 1047 suubputig a *OULIVNYSE a 3 pur TOJVM-YSO.L yy ae Jl OG 4 “BPIOI2T [enn a ftapoqpa savy SI Pe & mit “ “ Lea cor: “ wopowypliva A « «ce “ie de cs “epigstpeg, | “= SLUD]IAIS Saysuog = “MOTIVE : ia] jepuep as cc OT cs KG “VpPTYGUBoviIay, | SULTSOLUVALNG SHYZUDIDULT, e “e « ay ‘ “ : ge taallgs ae Sees ae sigso snddvydy re “i «ce “tg re & CT ee vA Chiara snbip snboydoywag a & &“ Se ‘“ ee ‘Bprymopoy@ny | SHUN YZUDe siypUDODIOFL a « “ “ih ce ae Se] OMOMLTBIE|GIS) [Ee eee eco puunyrs obpyyug S cc «< S01 & 6c PORE en Noe ear cage HAQi.t SNYIVIOIC, S > na) a 2 ii Sect ee Se ag Wass DULLGUA 2 “OULIV NT ied ce bem ee rere ee DID NIDU DUBE “OULIvNy8O ‘poyVsto[y, pure 1oyvM-ysony ies “quesqy ‘tis h10}doyy aR vy “EG OU AOS) Dud saprouarwg ‘oZIS poonpeat tne “pourmexe Pah ee a . ea JO 10 payesuoje SECT ysy jo aenean ‘ropaloqnug “AT Ore seroedg iS SUT WIPE [Vs1o(y Youle] oro AORTIC LIGAMENT IN INDIAN FISHES. 73 powerful construction to be at all effective. For the suspended ligament to be of any use as a diagonal curtain, it is evident that the aorta, as part of the body, will have to undergo flexion, the curtain remaining taut and straight, but, curiously enough, comparison of the statements in the tables (pp. 70-72) shows that it is just in those fishes in which, owing to a deep thick body and envelopment by deeply grooved vertebral and stout hemal arches, the aorta cannot experience much lateral flexion, that the ligament exists, Text-figure 5. | r--\ -“g. dor. A diagrammatic representation of the position of the ligament inside the aorta during the lateral flexions of the body. aor., aorta; lig., ligament. On the other hand, the aortic ligament is absent or but feebly developed in all, or most of, those fishes in which the body is slender, and the median (especially the median dorsal) fins elongated in form, or the caudal region very much elongated narrow and tapering), 7. e., in just those fishes in which flexion of the body and therefore of the aorta must be most marked. This correlation of facts, founded on my examination of over 80 species of fishes, certainly does not appear to favour the hypothesis as to the mode of action of the aortic ligament suggested by Professor Stewart. Since I have no theory of my own to offer concerning the raison @étre of the aortic ligament, I will merely add that it is 74 MR. D. R. BHATTACHARYA ON THE evident that though the ligament is well developed in the Siluridze (a primitive group), yet it cannot be regarded as a primitive structure, seeing that it is not developed in many other primitive groups of fishes. As regards the development of the ligament, [ have not been able to study this for lack of material. It is, however, evident that the ligament must arise as a special development of the inner dorsal wall of the aorta (Plate IT. figs. 12, 13, 14), the elastic fibres of the middle and inner coats of the aorta becoming aggregated to form the continuous elastic ligament. This view is borne out by the fact that in the “sub-intervertebral ” regions of the aorta in Pita buchanani (Plate I. fig. 4), and also at the anterior and posterior ends of the aorta, the ligament pierces through its dorsal wall and runs through the middle coat of the aorta for some distance. Appendix: Methods of Preparation of Material. The marine specimens were fixed in 4 per cent. formalin, and the fresh-water specimens, which were available locally, were fixed in Potassium bichromate solution. The smaller specimens were decalcified in a solution of 3 per cent. nitric acid in 70 per cent. aleohol, which was changed every alternate day for from 3-5 weeks. Portions of trunk and tail region were imbedded in hard wax and sections 8 w thick were cut. The sections were stained on the slide, mostly in Delafield’s Hematoxylin, though I have also, at times, used Borax Carmine and Picro-indigo-carmine for differential staining with remarkably good results. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Prats I. Fig. 1. Dorsal aorta of Olarias magur (X 25). Note the absence of any trace of a ligamentous structure in the dorsal wall of the aorta. c.aoz., cavity of aorta; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta. . Longitudinal section through the vertebral column and dorsal aorta of Eutropiichthys vacha in the caudal region, showing the relative positions of the ,dorsal ligament and the aortic ligament (x 5). The aortic ligament in the caudal region is more closely attached to the dorsal wall of the aorta than in the trunk-region.’ d.lig., dorsal ligament; sp.c., spinal cord; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta; lig., aortic ligament ; v.2.a., ventral wall of aorta ; cav.a., cavity of aorta; s.v.m., sub-vertebral mass of connective tissue. . Transverse section through the sub-vertebral region of the dorsal aorta in Rita buchanani (X16). car., cartilaginous tissue; lig., aortic ligament. . Transverse section through the sub-intervertebral region of the dorsal aorta in Rita buchanani (X 16). lig., aortic ligament. . Anterior termination of the aortic ligament in Silwndia gangetica (X » nat. size). aor., dorsal aorta; lig., aortic ligament; a., anterior position of aortic ligament which, passing through the dorsal wall of the aorta, becomes attached to the basioccipital bone ; c., the point of origin of the anterior branch of the ligament after it perforates the aorta; 0., basi- occipital; par., parasphenoid; a.lig., anterior branch of the ligament ; a., the tibres of the ligament which spread out to form a thin sheet. Fig. 6. Ventral view of the skull and anterior vertebree in Wallago attw (nat. size). par. parasphenoid; bas.o., basioccipital; 1s¢ v., first vertebra ;. p.t., post-temporal ; 2nd v. second vertebra. eI da bo eat ee Sita) ad oO oO a AORTIC LIGAMENT IN INDIAN FISHES. 15 Puate IT. Fig. 7. A diagrammatic longitudinal representation of the position of the ligament inside the dorsal aorta in Wallago attu. The lateral wall of the aorta has been removed to show the position of the ligament. Jig., aortic ligament; sws.f., suspensory fold; 3rd v., third vertebra; 2nd v., second vertebra; 1st v., first vertebra; ba.o., basioccipital; d.w.a., dorsal wall of aorta; v.2.a., ventral wall of aorta: lig.per., the place where the ligment perforates through the dorsal wall of the aorta and becomes attached to the bone; cav.a., cavity of aorta; lig.a.’, anterior branch of the ligament running through the wall of the aorta; lig.a.’’, the place where the anterior branch of the ligament perforates through the most anterior dorsal wall of the aorta; lig.a.’/’’, the anterior branch of the ligament after it comes out of the aorta and runs beneath the basioccipital bone; eff:a., efferent arteries. Fig. 8. Transverse section through the aorta of Wallago attu in the region where the ligament perforates through the dorsal wall of the aorta. This section is supposed to have passed through A-B region of fig. 7 (X18). c¢.aor., cavity of aorta; d.2v.a., dorsal wall of aorta; lig.per., the place where the ligament perforates through the dorsal wall of the aorta and becomes attached to the bone. Vig. 9. Transverse section through C-D region of fig. 7. The ligament (lig.) here runs through the upper region of the dorsal wall of the aorta (X 18). Lettering as in fig. 8. Fig. 10. Transverse section through E-F region of fig. 7. The ligament here runs through the lower region of the dorsal wall of the aorta (xX 18). Lettering as in fig. 8. Fig. 11. Transverse section through G—H region of fig. 7 (x 85). d., adventitia ; e., cartilaginous tissue; 6., media; int., intima; q@., elastic fibres; Jig., ligament ; ba2., bundles of elastic fibres. Fig. 12. Transverse section through I-J region of fig. 7. A slight proliferation takes place inside the cavity of the aorta in the region where the ligament is situated (X16). car.c., cartilage-cells; lig., ligament; d.w.s., dorsal wall of aorta. Fig. 13. Transverse section through K-L region of fig. 7. The proliferation of the dorsal wall of the aorta containing the ligament grows deeper (X 18). Lettering as in fig. 8. Fig. 14. Transverse section through M—N region of fig. 7. The proliferation reaches nearly its maximum and the ligament acquires its characteristic shape. Posteriorly the ligament flattens out, being narrower dorso-ventrally than from side to side (X 18). Lettering as m He. 8. 0g ON SOME LIZARDS OF 'THE GENUS CHALCIDES. lan 6. On some Lizards of the Genus Chaleides. By E. G. Boutencer, F.Z.8 [Received February 4, 1920: Read February 24, 1920. | (Text-figures 1-4.) At a recent meeting of the Society a paper was read by Major Stevenson-Hamilton in which the subject of the geographical distribution of the varieties of various African mammals was touched upon, and it was pointed out that one would be justified in treating some of the varieties as distinct species were it not for the existence of intermediate forms. This paper brought to my mind some notes I had made about ten years ago on the classification and distribution of the Skink Chalcides ceellatus! a species inhabiting Southern Hurope, Northern and N.-Eastern Africa, and $.W. Asia, which presents an extraordinary amount of variation: in fact, the structural difference between the two extreme forms is so great that, were it not for the wonderfully complete manner in which they are connected, they could not possibly be denied specific rank. I have recently gone over again the material in the British Museum, and completed my notes on this subject, which I now have the honour to bring before the Society. In papers written nearly 30 years ago my father, dealing with the matter, came to the conclusion that this species could be divided into five distinct varieties or subspecies, characterized mainly by the coloration and by the number of scales round the body, which was found to vary between 24 and 40—a range of variation far greater than is to be found in any other lizard *. The five forms then described were the forma typica, and the varieties ragazzi, tiligugu, vittatus, and polylepis. To these must be added the var. occidentalis (Ch. simonyi Stdr.). The position of the nostril has been used as a specific character in the lizards of the genus Chalcides, the species viridanus, of the Canary Islands, and bottegi, of Somaliland, being regarded as specifically different from C. ocellatus, mainly from the fact that the opening is pierced in advance of the suture between the rostral and the first labial instead of exactly above it, as is normally the case in the typical C. ocellatus. C. bottegi was described from a single specimen preserved in the Genoa Museum, and was stated to be closely related to C. ocellatus, but differed, apart from having the nostril pierced in advance of the rostral and first labial, in the body being much more slender and the scales of the vertebral rows being more than twice as broad as * Boulenger. Ann. & Mag. N. H. (6) v. 1890, p. 144. Tr. Zool. Soc. xi. 1891, p. 138, ea Xvi. 53 Ann. Mus. Genova (2) xii. 1891, p. 12. a » Xvi. 1896, p. 581. Anderson. Zool. Egypt, Rept. p. 210 (1898). 78 MR. E. G. BOULENGER ON SOME long *. On examination of a large material since received at the British Museum, I find that this form cannot be accepted as a distinct species, the nostril being almost as often pierced above the suture in question as in advance of it; while in a number of specimens of the typical (. ocellwtus the nostril is pierced in advance of the rostral and the first labial. ‘The body of the form bottegi is, I find, not always more slender than in the typical C. ocellatus, in which there is considerable variation in this respect. The number of scales, however, is less than in the typical C. ocellatus, being as a rule 24, as in the var. ragazzii, but dropping sometimes to 22. The degree of enlargement of the two median rows of dorsal scales varies considerably both in the form in question and in the typical C. ocellatus. If the position of the nostril caunot in this genus be regarded as of specific value, the question arises whether C. viidanus, which apart from this character agrees so closely with C. ocellatus, must also be only allowed the rank of a variety to be added to the numerous other forms which are embraced in the specific conception of C. ocellatus. I find, however, that the head has a different shape, the snout being less convex—a difference which finds expression in the proportions of the upper labials, all or most of which are not deeper than long. There are two forms of (. viridanus—-the typical, from Tenerife, Gomera, and Hierro, with the sides and belly black and 26-32 (usually 28) series of scales; and the var. simonyi, from Gran Canaria, with the belly yellow, greenish white or grey, the head somewhat larger and better defined than in the preceding, and 28-34 series of scales. As pointed out by Steindachner, the Chaleides of Fuertaventura must be regarded as a variety (var. occidentalis) of C. ocellatus T. Great individual variation in form is to be found in the structure of these lizards, especially in the proportions of the limbs and body. In the var. bottegi the latter may vary to a very great extent, namely from 18 to 28 per cent. In the distance between the axilla and groin the variation is also often great. The variations show that little importance can be attached to the proportions of the body and limbs, there being an overlap, for instance, in the length of the limbs between the two species CO. ocellatws and OQ. bedriage. The latter lizard was described as differing specifically from C. ocellatus in the proportions of the limbs, and in the nostril being pierced in advance of the suture between the rostral and first labial. It has been shown that neither of these characters can be regarded as absolute. I have ascertained, however, that in C. bedriage the fourth labial normally takes the place of the subocular, and not the fifth, and * Boulenger. Ann. Mus. Genova (2) xviii. 1898, p. 719, pl. x. fig. 1, and (3) v. 1912, p. 330. + Lanzarote and Fuertaventura, waterless and treeless and nearer the African coast, differ greatly from the other Canary Islands in their fauna, which is nearly identical with that of the neighbouring Sahara.—Tristram, Brit. Assoc. 1893. LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. 79 that therefore it may, provisionally at least, retain its specific rank. In the small island of Linosa, between Tunisia and Malta, lizards similar to, but easily distinguishable from, the typical C. ocellatws are found, and have been regarded as the young of the var. tiligugu, which occurs in Tunisia and Malta. They differ from the typical form in the small size (the largest specimen measuring only 80 mm. without the tail), in having the gular Text-figure 1. ea Yi SERIES A. V4 a. Ch. ocellatus. b. Ch. sepoides. => c. Ch. delislii. d. Ch. mauritanicus. SERIES ]3. a. Ch. thierryi. y b. Ch. lineatus. c. Ch. tridactylus. " d. Ch. guentheri. b c d Reduction in the hind limb. region spotted, and in the under surface being slate-colour. They are dorsally brown, spotted all over with small black and white ocelli. An indistinct paler dorso-lateral band is sometimes pre- sent. The number of scales round the body is 30 in all speci- mens, the two median rows being enlarged. These lizards are undoubtedly distinct from all the other forms of the species ocellatus, and for them I propose the varietal name of linose. C. thierryi was originally described as a var. of C. bottegi: it is, 80 “MR. E. G. BOULENGER ON SOME however, a very distinct species, quite different from the nume- rous forms of C. ocellatus *. In its shorter not so unequal toes, in its large ear-opening, and in its long, thick tail, it approaches the groups including C. lineatus, tridactylus, guenthert; and my father has given it as his opinion, that, although derived from the same stock as C. ocellatus, it represents one of the pentadactyle forms from which the more degenerate types referred to above have been evolved ; whilst 2 continuous degeneration can be traced from C. ocellatus through C. sepoides to C. delisliti and C. mauri- tanicus. In all, therefore, we now have, apart from the typical form, seven varieties of the lizard C. ocellatws, and it is interesting from the evolutionary point of view that they are geographically connected, it being possible to trace every link in the chain from the short and stout variety with as many as 40 scales from Morocco, which must be regarded as the most generalized form, to the long and slender type with only 22 scales round the body from Abyssinia and Somaliland. The general reduction in the number of scales takes place as follows :— 1. var. polylepis (84-40 scales). Morocco. ,», occidentalis (80-32 ,, ). I. of Fuertaventura. », vittatus (80-34 ,, ). Tangier. - », chguern (28-34 ,, ). Sardinia, Sicily, Malta, S. Italy, Algeria and Tunisia, N.of the Sahara. 5. forma typica (26-32 ,, ). Arabia, Persia, Kgypt to Algerian Sahara, Syria, Cyprus, Greece, Eritrea. > oo bo 6. var. linose (30 5) ke dlhvor Ibreaesey. (ee ragazeru (2 a ae scall: 8. ,, bottegi (22-24 ,, ). Abyssinia, Somaliland. The following are definitions of the 8 forms into which C. ocellatus may be divided :— 1. Var. polylepis Blgry. 34-40 seales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; light brown above, with- out ocelli, but with a round yellowish spot on each scale, forming regular longitudinal series sometimes separated by dark lines: young with vertical black-and-white bars on the sides of the neck. Maximum length from snout to vent 155 mm. 2. War. occidentalis Stdr. 30-32 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; coloration as in the preceding, but the yellow spots less numerous. Maximum length from snout to vent 100 mm. * Ch. bottegi var. thierryi Tornier, Arch. f. Nat. 1901, p. 87. Ch. thierryi O. Neumann, Zool. Jahrb., Syst. xxi. 1908, p. 401. Ch. pulchellus Mocquard, Bull. Mus. 1906, p. 466. a en en en 81 LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. *$N7Y]]200 saproynyy JO NOINGLystp [eompdvadoar °Z OINSY-4X9q, “HIZZWOWe “SONI “SIIWLNAGID9N0° “SIdaTAI0Od” “SN LWLLIA* “19411048 ° "Monon sya [iil “WOIdAL Ss = Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1920, No. VI. 82 MR. E. G, BOULENGER ON SOME Text-figure 3. POLYLEP|S OGELLATUS lOCCIDENTALIS N i RAGAZZII BOTTEG} Relatienships and distribution. 3. War. vittatus Blgr. 30-34 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; brown above, without spots or ocelli, with a light dorso-lateral and a dark brown or black lateral band, both sharply defined, Maximum length from snout to vent 115 mm. 4, Var. tiligugu Gmel. 28-34 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not or but feebly enlarged ; olive or brown above, with black and white ocelli and a well-defined yellowish dorso-lateral band edged with black below. Maxi- mum Jength from snout to vent 150 mm. 5. Forma typica Blgr. 26-32 scales round the body, the two median rows not or but feebly enlarged ; yellowish or brown above, with black and white ocelli, sometimes confluent into irregular transverse bands; a light dorso-iateral band sometimes present. Maximum length from snout to vent 140 mm, 6. Var. linose,n. 30 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows not enlarged; dark brown above, ocellated all over, with or without a more or less distinct pale dorso-lateral band ; belly grey; gular region spotted with black. Maxi- mum length from snout to vent 80 mm. 7. Var. ragazzit Bler. 24 scales round the body, the two median dorsal rows feebly enlarged ; pale greyish brown above, with an ill-defined paler dorso-lateral band; no ocellar spots except on the posterior part of the body, the hind limbs, and the tail; crowded black spots form a lateral band from nostril to above axil, passing through the eye and above the ear-opening. Maximum length from snout to vent 75 mm. LIZARDS OF THE GENUS CHALCIDES. 83 Text-figure Ay Ch. ocellatus, var. polylepis. Ch. ocellatus, var. bottegi. 8. Var. bottegi Bler. 22-24 scales round the body. the two median dorsal rows more or less strongly enlarged; yellowish or greyish brown with black and white ocelli, with a dark, often black-edged dorsal band along the median 1ows of scales and a dark brown or black lateral band, the two separated by a sharply-defined pale area. Maximum length from snout to vent 150 mm. The two extreme forms are represented on text-figure 4. 6* ON DEATHS IN THE GARDENS IN 1919. 85 7. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919. With Notes on Avian Enteritis. By Naraanien S. Lucas, M.B., ¥.Z.8., Pathologist to the Society. [Received February 6, 1920: Read February 24, 1920.] (With 4 Charts.) The total deaths in the Gardens for the year 1919 amount to 926. The total is composed as follows :— MViteianiialsi 4. ce ssnaceee 299 IBHIRC Gy: TRE ERENT) ae 368 Reptiles, etc. .......... te 2408) JE) 117 22, 208 oe eee 50 In the following table are shown :— In column I. animals in Gardens at beginning of year ; _ I. “a added during the year ; vi III. total of animals in Gardens ; % IV. total of deaths ; % V. percentage of deaths. I. ROMMEL SUMAN) NR, IWIEWODNOTANIS on ccccsccsnccaseaece OUD 279 954 299 31% IE WINGIS assesses escneddospocsesen | AUZNG) 801 1947 368 19°75 Rep tilesys cat eeectucdete) 209) 658 937 209 22/°/, The large percentage of deaths among the mammals is to be accounted for by the high mortality among the macaques. The usual table giving the deaths from various diseases is not given, as no figures are available this year. The subject of Enteritis deserves special mention. The high rate of mortality from this disease is shown by the charts for 1919. These emphasize the importance of an attempt being made to deal with the disease. Enteritis is the name given to inflammation of the intestine. It begins as congestion and a consequent catarrh. The mucous membrane inside is pink, deepening to red, and the contents are liquid due to an excess of mucus and usually milky. The congestion deepens and hemorrhages occur, so that the whole gut becomes a deep red, and contents become blood-stained and eventually black from altered blood. . The final stage shows sloughing of the mucous membrane lining the intestines, so that the walls are thin and the contents dark and thickened by the destroyed cells. It can be acute or chronic. The final stage of sloughing is usually seen in this acute type. Often owing to the weakened 86 DR. N. S. LUCAS ON Chart No. I. 30 20 Other Causes. 10 Lnteritic, Chart No. IT. 20 10 Enteritic. Other Causes. Enteritic. Other 0 Causes, 20 10 Other Causes. Enteritic fo) In these charts the deaths caused by enteritis are shown in a continuous line, those due to all other causes in an interrupted line. The birds are grouped according to the food eaten, though in the last group the chief point is that these birds live mostly in the open and their food is scattered on the ground and not placed in a receptacle. Enteritis is less prominent in this group, on the whole, and most prominent in Group II., where the food is of the sort which forms a good culture medium for bacteria and is almost always put into receptacles, DEATHS IN THE GARDENS IN 1919. 87 state of the bird bronchitis or pneumonia slips in and finishes the illness. ~The cause of the inflammation is irritation, and this may be either mechanical or toxic. The mechanical source would be foreign bodies in the intestine, e.g. grit. This appears a less likely cause. The toxic cause may be either bacterial in origin or brought about by poisons from unsuitable or decomposed food. Which of these causes is the true one or which the prepond- erating one is the subject of the investigation which has now to be made. 2 =) , ; h ’ , a *, Co : Ff t Ne ; , a, ae! i er 5 mee! is ; : hey i a a 7h 2, j rie J \ en ea i ‘ oD + wat so @ ony . Tae te BA 4 ht te. BTA : £ . a ‘ ‘ . 7 a 4 ’ ° MR. A. WILLEY ON AN APODOUS AMIA CALVA. 89 8. An Apodous Amia calva. By Anraur WILLEY, F.R.S., F.Z.S., MeGill University, Montreal. {Received March 13, 1920: Read April 13, 1920.] It is known that a good many interrelated genera of fishes differ from each other by the presence in one and absence in the other of ventral fins. Perhaps the classic and primitive example of this contrasting condition is that of the Crossopterygian fishes, Polypterus and Calamoichthys, upon the theoretical interest of which Gegenbaur (1895) laid some stress. Calamoichthys is a Crossopterygian eel, the Mastacembelide are Actinopterygian eels (Giinther), the Murenoids are Malacopterygian eels—all lacking ventral fins. A far-removed contrast of the same kind is found in the Swordfishes: Histiophorus with ventral fins, Xiphias without ; and this may serve as a sample of the rest. Only in a few species has the absence of ventral fins been noted as a rare mutation. Brindley (1891) recorded the capture, in the River Cam, of a White Bream without ventral fins. Ten years later, EKigenmann and Cox (1901) described a specimen of the Yellow Catfish (Amiurus natalis) from Turkey Lake, Indiana, showing absence of all trace of ventral fins. Some further references will be found in Gemmill (1912). Last November (1919) a male Ama calva, which had been caught in the Richelieu River on the south side of the St. Lawrence in the province of Quebec, was purchased from the market in Montreal. Its length was twenty inches and it was in perfect condition except for one strange defect, the utter absence of the ventral fins. The specimen is preserved in the Peter Redpath Museum, McGill University. The addition of Amia to the meagre list of occasional apodous mutants should contribute towards the ultimate evaluation of the phenomenon. Its rarity and incidence show that the absence of ventral fins from fishes which normally possess them is no ordinary malformation, though there is at present no means of testing its behaviour as a unit character experimentally. Gegenbaur gave reasons pointing to the ventral fins of recent ganoids and teleosts having lost at least part of their original function and being consequently in a state of flux and retro- gression. In most teleostomes they seem to persist because they have been inherited, rather than for any particular use they may be to the animal. Accordingly their loss would not react in- juriously upon the organism, but might be an advautage to it. Bateson (1894) made no attempt to deal with this remarkable variation, doubtless through lack of corroborative data. With the increase of instances it seems likely that it will take its place as a standard illustration of natural mutation amongst fishes, 99 MR. A. WILLEY ON AN APODOUS AMIA CALYA. especially since it falls into line with ascertained anatomical relations. According to Giinther (1880), fishes living in limited localities or concealing themselves in mud are apt sometimes to lose their ventral fins. One of the local names for Amia is Mudfish, another is Beaver-fish (poisson castor), a third is Bowfin. The last of these may have reference to the rounded arcuate shape of the caudal fin, like a stretched bow. Wherever it occurs it frequents marshy places, and its habits resemble in many ways those of. the oriental Tankfish (Ophiocephalus striatus), known in Southern India as the “ murrel” and in Ceylon as the ‘“Jula.” This species has ventral fins, but the closely-related Paddy-field fish (Channa orientalis) is without them. The Swordfishes and some other pelagic and deep-sea fishes show that. the presence or absence of ventral fins does not depend on one class of habits alone. There are certain other wavering characters in Teleostean fishes, which, taken in conjunction with the admitted decadence of the ventral fins, suggest the hypothesis that the presence or absence of such deep-seated characters is linked up with their use or disuse, and that they do not necessarily dwindle away to vanishing point, but may simply drop out of the factorial system. REFERENCES. . A. C. L. Gunrusr, 1880.—The Study of Fishes, p. 615. . H. H. Brinptey, 1891.—“ On a Specimen of the White Bream (Abrams blicca Bloch) without Pelvic Fins.” Proc. Zool. Soc. pp. 108-9, pl. x. . W. Bareson, 1894.—Materials for the Study of Variation. . C. GecenBAur, 1895.—“ Das Flossenskelet der Crossopterygier.” Morph. Jahrb. xxii. pp. 119-160, 5 figures. 5. C. H. Ergrnmann and U. O. Cox, 1901.—‘‘ Some Cases of Saltatory Variation.” Amer. Nat. xxxv. p. 33. 6. J. F. Gemmit, 1912.—The Teratology of Fishes, p. 55. Glas- cow, Ato. bo H> OO a a ree _— EXTERNAL CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 91 . On the External Characters of the South American Monkeys. By R. I. Pococx, F.RB.S. [Received February 23, 1920: Read March 16, 1920.] (Text-figures 1-13.) ContTENTs. Page 1 set tieZoVa NOGA CON eM il SMI me Feehan ha ob ita) iL “Me INfostiilse 08. cjekce eco sassuid ovecssnitesnh cece reek eee eee i Mheshan! Gee RCAC HOM ARES heer serait) Quen iat deena Feet. 1 KA DO ee een pera 47 The Tongue ..... ophl gtinas Sasa OAs The External Genigalea ae eS Male Peer sence ee ote a3 UNS) The External Genitalia of the Hemalen ee a iscokon 105 ET ayy Cee WRN 5 aloes Sen ee ee RS Oman ee eee JI) Introduction. The observations recorded in this paper are based mainly upon the Platyrhine Monkeys that have died in the Zoological Gardens during the past ten years* ; and the subject-matter is treated on the lines adopted in my paper-on the Lemurs and Varsius (P.Z.S. 1918, pp. 19-53). Since I described the hands and feet and the ears of the Hapalide in 1917 (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) xx. pp. 247-258), my notes, so far as that family is concerned, are in the present case restricted for the most part to the external genitalia, the species examined being Hapale jacchus, Mystax ursulus, midas and mystav, Edipomidas aedipus, and Leontocebus rosalia. Of the Cebide, I have seen examples of all the admitted genera, except Pithecia and Brachyteles ; but 1 have not seen both sexes in all cases, and in many instances immature specimens only have been available. These defects are regrettable, since the external genitalia promise to yield valuable diagnostic characters for the genera. The immaturity of specimens also makes their specific identity doubtful. Very little indeed appears to be known of the range of variation in colour and structure within specific limits. It is not an uncommon event, for instanee, to receive in our Zoological Gardens immature examples of The Nostrils. Contrary to the current belief, all the South American Monkeys are not, strictly speaking, Platyrhine. There is great variation in the shape and situation of the nostrils. Typically both in the CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 93 Hapalide and the Cebide the internarial septum is wide, greatly surpassing In width the longest diameter of either nostril, and the nostrils look outwards and shightly forwards, but so slightly in some cases as to be only just visible when the face is viewed from the front, as in Cebus, Ateles, Cacajao (Owakaria), and Oalli- cebus (text-figs. 1 & 2, A-C). But in two of the genera—dAotus, Text-figure 2. y = ee a A. Nostrils of Cebus. B és Lagothr Be Cc Saimiris sciurea. TD. Side - y lew of muzzle of Aofus. E. Half protile view of the same, enlarged. ©. Nostrils of the same. G. Nostrils of Alouatta. H. The same from above. I. Side view of muzzle of the same. x He as recorded by H. O. Forbes, and Alcwatta—the nostrils *are less ieee are visible to a areat extent from the front, ‘and are éparated by a septum ahieh hardly exceeds the long diameter 94 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL of either. According to H. O. Forbes’s account, the nostrils of Brachyteles seem to resemble those of Alowatta. (Text-fig. 2, D-I.) The nostrils also vary in shape in a very interesting manner. In Callicebus they are practically civeular, and nearly so in Cacajao. In Cebus they are longitudinally ovate. In Ateles the upper edge has an *S?-like curve, the posterior portion of the orifice being a narrow slit, owing to the presence of the down- wardly projecting lobe which constricts the nostril behind. This Icbe is also present in Alowatta, but it is relatively larger in Aotus than in any member of the Cebide. In that genus, indeed, the nostrils with their comparatively narrow septum and well- developed posterior lobe are of a more primitive type, and more resemble the nostrils of the Strepsirhine Primates (Lemurs) than do those of any genus of the Haplorhine Primates, including even Tarsus. To sum up—the nostrils are typically platyrhine in Hapalide, Callimico, Callicebus, Saimiris, Cebus, Cacajao, Lagothria, Ateles ; and stenorhine in dotus, Alowatia, and, it is alleged, in Brachy- teles. The Kars. In my paper on the genera of Hapalide, the ears of Hapale, Mystax*, Leontocebus, and Gidiponidas were described, and it was pointed out that Gidipomidas may be distinguished by the suppression of the free edge of the pinna from a point just below the level of the upper portion of the antitragal thickening. In the Cebide the pinna of the ear generally resembles that of the Hapalide, showing variations in suppression analogous to those of that family. In the majority of cases (Aotus, Callicebus, Alouatta, Cacajao, Cebus, and Callimico) the pinna is provided with a freely projecting laminate margin, which terminates inferiorly just beneath the antitragal thickening as in all the Hapalide except Gdipomidas. In the ear of Cebus, which will serve as well as another as typical of the group, the intertragal notch is bordered in front by a comparatively small tragus and behind by an enlarged, prominent antitragus, which has a well-developed ridge on its inner surface and is defined behind by a notch from the strong ridge of -the antihelix, which curves upwards and forwards, dividing above into two branches—one, less well-defined, passing forwards and upwards towards the upper edge of the pinna in front, the other, which runs horizontally forwards, constituting the well-defined and shelf-like supratragus (plica principalis). Che anterior end of the supratragus is overlapped and concealed by the backwardly folded edge of the antero-superior portion of the pinna; but this backwardly folded edge is carried only a * The only example of Hapalide examined by me since that paper was written was a specimen of Mystax mystax. In this the ear resembles that of IZ. midas. 5 a ~~ he i CHARACTE&RS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS, 95 very short distance below the supratragus, which is set high above the middle of the ear, there being a long space between the inferior termination of the back wardly folded edge and the Text-figure 3. Hana M4 No \S \ 1 WON \ aN yy aes NSN We Ly a ae VN EARS. A. Cebus. B. Aotus. C. Saimiris. WD. Callicebus, E. Callimico. F. Alouatta. G. Ateles. H. Ateles (with rim overfolded). I. Lagothrix. ‘ a. Point where free edge of rim ceases, xe tragus. Between the curved elevation, formed by the antihelix, and the edge of the pinna there is a semicircular fossa, extending from the antitragus, where it is deep, up to the fossa above the 96 : MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL supratragus. The upper edge of the pinna is always folded ; but the posterior edge may be unfolded, partly folded, or folded throughout its extent. In the latter case the fossa behind the antihelix is especially well defined. Sometimes the upper edge of the pinna shows an angular projection, sometimes it 1s evenly rounded; but I have not worked at the variation of the ears with a view to their possible systematic value in the determination of species. (Text-fig. 3, A.) The ear of a specimen of Alowatta resembles that of Cebus, except that the antitragus is less well developed and the semi- circular fossa behind the ridge of the antihelix does not extend so far beneath the antitragus. The entire edge of the pinna is folded, (Text-fig. 3, F.) In a specimen of dotus the shape of the pinna recalls that of Mystax. The antero-superior portion of the edge is the only part that is folded. There is no definite fossa behind the ridge of the antihelix except inferiorly behind the massive antitragal thickening. The posterior edge is convex below, concave above. At the summit of the concavity it runs out into a short, obtusely angular point, above which the edge extends obliquely upwards and backwards to the rounded top of the ear. (‘l’ext-fig. 3, B.) In Cacajao the ear is very like that of Cebus, but the inferior portion of the submarginal fossa does not extend so far forwards below the antitragus. The posterior and inferior edges of the pinna are unfolded. There is nothing in the ear of Callimico that calls for particular notice. The tragus is hardly developed, but the antitragus is massive; the superior edge of the pinna is folded to a slight extent, the posterior edge being flat, and the postero-inferior portion is not so prominently rounded as in typical members of the Cebide. (Text-fig. 3, HE.) In Oallicebus and Saimiris the postero-inferior portion of the pinna is somewhat reduced, its free margin ceasing at a point below the notch defining the posterior margin of the antitragus, and the fossa behind the antihelix, which is very shallow in Saimiris, falls short of the antitragus inferiorly in both genera. This partial suppression of the free margin of the pinna inferiorly foreshadows, in a measure, the condition seen in the two genera to be considered next. (Text-fig. 3, C, D.) The above-mentioned genera have normally formed and nor- mally developed pithecoid ears; but in Ateles and Lagothrix the ear is modified in a manner similar to that of @dipomidas in the Hapalide. In Ateles the upper portion of the pinna is as well developed asin Cebus, with the anterior edge folded and the upper and posterior edge folded or flat; but the inferior portion of the pinna has no free margin below a point approximately on a level with a line half-way between the supratragus and the antitragus, there being no postero-inferior laminate lobe and no fossa impressing the antitragus or the area just behind it. For the vest, the ear is normal, the tragus, antitragus, supratragus, Pa. * CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 97 and the ridge of the antihelix being well developed. (Text-fig. 3, G, H.) In Lagothrix the ear shows similar suppression of the lower half of the margin of the pinna; but the upper portion is also reduced and stands away from the head to a comparatively small extent, being fleshy and thickly covered with hairs. (Text- fig. 3, I.) By the structure of the ear, therefore, the genera of Cebide fall into two groups :—(1) comprising Ateles and Lagothrix, in which the inferior portion of the pinna has no freely projecting laminate margin; (2) comprising Alowatta, Cucajao, Saimiris, Callicebus, Cebus, and Callimico, in which the free laminate margin extends right round the pinna inferiorly to a point below the intertragal notch. Dr. Boas (Ohrknorpel etc. der Siug. 1912, pp. 199-206, pl. 23) describes and figures the ears of several species of Cebus, of Alouatta, Ateles, Saimiris, Mystax, and Hapale. So far as my observations on these genera extend, they agree completely with those of Dr. Boas. The Hands and Feet. In a paper upon the genera of Hapalide or Marmozets (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) xx. p. 249) I pointed out that the hands and feet of Leontdcebus differ from those of Hapale, Mystax, and (dipomidas in the elongation of the palm and sole, and that the hand further differs in the presence of webs tying the second digit to the third, and the third to the fourth, the latter web being of considerable depth, so that the two digits in question are only separable from a distance a little on the proximal side of the joint between the first and second phalanges. I have since found that this character does not always hold, for in an example of Mystax mystax, subsequently examined, I found the third and fourth fingers of the right hand webbed almost to the same extent as in Leontocebus ; while the left hand hardly differed in that respect from the hands of examples of other species of Mystax, and of all specimens of Hapale and of Gdipo- midas examined. In this connection it is interesting to recall that W. A. Forbes recorded in the case of Pithecia satanas a similar abnormal instance of interdigital webbing, the third and fourth digits of both hands being tightly tied together to the bases of the claws (P. Z. 8. 1882, p. 442). The hands and feet of the Hapalidee differ from those of all the other South American Monkeys, except Callimico, in two partic- ulars :—(1) The hallux is extremely reduced in size, so that when it is turned forwards its apex falls short of the distal margin of the plantar pad ; (2) the nails of all the digits, except the hallux, are converted into strongly compressed, curved, pointed claws like those of a Squirrel. The capacity of these claws for maintaining a secure hold on the rough bark of trees compensates for the loss of grasping power in the foot, due to the feeble development of Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. VII. 7 98 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL the hallux. I believe the Marmozets to be specialised Cebide, derivable from them by reduction in bodily size, by the loss of the third molar above and below, and by adaptation of the hands and feet for holding to the roughnesses of bark in the way above described. Text-figure 4. . Right hand of Callimico goeldii, adult, approx. nat. size. . Right foot of the same. . Right hand of Saimiris sciwrea, adult. X 3. . Right foot of the same. X 3. ‘ . Right hand of Callicebus moloch, young. X a a . Right foot of the same. A B C D E KF The hands and feet of Callimico need no detailed description, since they resemble in all important points those of Hapale or Mystax. (Text-fig. 4, A, B.) a 99 CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. Text-figure 5. “a, aa 2 yz Ly A. Right hand of Cacajao rubicundus, from below. ght foot of the same. B. Right foot of the same. C. Right hand of Aotus, from below. D. Ri il 32 x 7* 100 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL The hands and feet of the typical Cebidw while exhibiting an interesting range in structural variation—e. g., in the develop- ment of the pads, the relative lengths and spacing of the digits as described below under the different genera—have certain features in common, which may be briefly referred to by way of introduction. The talons are always narrow and compressed and not infre- quently acuminate, but are never so strongly compressed, curved, and pointed at the tip as in the Hapalide and Callimico. As in the Hapalide, the pollex, when present, is a short edition of the other fingers, and is never truly opposable to them even to the extent that it is in the Old World Monkeys, being set much closer than in the latter to the base of the second digit, although the space between them varies to a certain extent according to the genera. The hallux is typically well developed, although somewhat reduced in Aéeles. It can be extended at right angles to the long axis of the foot, and it projects approximately from the middle of the side of the latter, nearly half-way, that is to say, between the second digit and the tip of the heel. The digits of both hands and feet, apart from exceptional cases, are free from webbing—that is to say, they are separated almost down to the plantar pad when viewed from the lower side. Digits 3 and 4 both on the hands and feet are frequently sub- equal; and since they are occasionally subequal in Lemurs and in the Catarhine Monkeys, there is in this respect a complete gradation between the Lemurs, in which digit 4 typically sur- passes 3, and the Catarhine Primates, in which digit 3 typically surpasses 4. The plantar and digital pads are as a rule not well defined, but in Aotus they are especially well developed, and they surpass the average in Saimuris. In Cebus the palm of the hand is tolerably long and digits 2, 3, 4, and 5 are subequally spaced; digit 1 (the pollex) is com- paratively long, and a little further removed from digit 2 than the latter is from digit 38. The foot is much longer than the hand. (Text-fig. 6, A, B.) The hands and feet of Callicebus do not appear to differ materially from those of Cebus. (Text-fig. 4, H, F.) Saimiris has the pads better defined than in either of the preceding, and the palm of the hand is relatively broader. (Text-fig. 4, C, D.) In Aotus the hand is also relatively broader than in Cebus and Oallicebus, and the pads are exceedingly well developed and coarsely striate. It seems probable that the exceptional develop- ment of the pads and sensory striz in this genus is an adaptation to the nocturnal habits of this Monkey, the specialised tactile sense compensating for imperfect nocturnal vision*, (Text-fig. 5, CD») * W. Kidd (‘The Sense of Touch,’ pp. 84-38, 1907) has figured and described the hands and feet of Hapate, Saimiris, and Cebus from the point of view of the sensory ridges. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 101 In Cacajao the length of the hand as compared with the foot is about the same as in Cebus; but in the former genus the pollex is shorter and the interval between digits 2 and 3 is a Text-figure 6. - Right hand of Cebus, from below. . Right foot of the same. . Right hand of Lagothri« infwnatus, from below. . Right foot of the same, with abnormal basal webbing between digits 2 and 3. A B C D x 2 approx. little greater than between 3 and 4 or 4 and 5, thus foreshadow- ing the more marked inequality in spacing that obtains in Alowatta and Lagothrix. (Text-fig. 5, A, B.) 102 MR. R. I. POCCCK ON THE EXTERNAL In Alouatia and Lagothri« the hand is relatively larger and its digits are longer as compared with the foot than in the genera previously mentioned, and the space in the hand between digits 2 and 3 is markedly greater than between digits 1 (pollex) and 2 or 3and 4. The hands are thus in a sense zygodactylous, like Text-figure 7. A. Right hand of Alouatta villosa, young. B, Right foot of the same. C. Extremity of tail of Ateles ater. xe the paws of Phascolarctos and of Cuscus amongst the Marsupials, there being a grasping interval between digits 2 and 3 instead of between digits 1 and 2 as in Lemurs and Catarhine Monkeys *. * From a photograph of a living Pithecia pithecia I judge that there is a wide space between digits 2 and 3 in that genus also. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. 103 Both in Alouatta and Lagothria the pollex is normally developed for the family, being perhaps a little shorter relatively than in Cebus but longer than in Cacajao. The hallux is also of normal length and strength*. (Text-fig. 6, C, D, and text-fig. 7, A, B.) In Afeles, as is well known, the hand differs from that of other genera of Cebide, except Brachyteles, in having the pollex func- tionless and at most forming a small excrescence on the side of the palm ; and it is noticeable that digits 2, 3, 4, and 5 are evenly spaced as in Cebus, Callicebus, etc., and that there is no grasping space between digits 2 and 3 as there is in Alouatta and Lago- thric. The hand of Ateles is therefore not derivable from the type of hand seen in Lagothrix, but from the more primitive type of hand seen in Cebus for example. (Text-fig. 8, A, B.) Text-figure 8. Y A. Right hand of Ateles paniscus, from below. B. Right foot of the same. G3 A S: S, Wi SNVipasatid f a G Ne VE Oe 2 External Generative Organs. . Callicebus personatus, ° ad., from behind. . The same, from the side. . Callicebus personatus, § ad., from behind. . The same, from the side. . Tip of penis of the same, from the front. ¥. The same, from behind. G. Callimico goeldii, $ ; penis and scrotum from behind. Hoan eS a., anus; 7., ischial prominence; cl., clitoris; /., labium of yulva; p., penis s., scrotum. CHARACTERS OF THE SOUTH AMERICAN MONKEYS. G ABH Rune OOW Text-figure 13. External Generative Organs of males. Rear end, with tail raised, of Hapale jacchus. . Tip of penis of the same. Naked area round penis of the same. . Side view of extended penis of the same. . Tip of penis of Leontocebus rosalia. . Side view of extended penis of the same. Lower view of extended penis of Saimiris. . Side view of same with bristle passed through urethra. Lower view of scrotum and extended penis of Cebus. . Side view of extended penis of Afeles. . Side view of tip of penis of A¢eles (another specimen). . Tip of the same. . Tip of penis of Cebus. a@., anus ; 7., ischial prominence ; s., scrotum ; 0., orifice of penis. stil IW) MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL these genera is the organ provided with a baculum (os penis). In Cebus, however, the terminal portion of the penis is strengthened with a baculum as in the Catarhine Monkeys, and the tip of the baculum forms a small prominence in the middle of the subcir- cular terminal area of the penis, thrusting the orifice to the right of the middle line. For the rest the penis of Cebus differs from that of Ateles in the gradual expansion of its distal portion up to the truncated tip. (Text-fig. 13, J, N.) The Tait. I have no new facts to add to those already recorded about the tails of South American Monkeys. In the four genera of Hapalide (Hapale, Mystax, Cidipomidas, and Leontocebus) and in six of the genera of Cebide (Callimico, Callicebus, Saimiris, Pithecia, Cacajao, and Aotus) the tail is evenly bushy or hairy throughout and not prehensile. Only in Cebide of the genera Cebus, Lagothrix, Brachyteles, Ateles, and Alowatta is it prehensile. Since, therefore, the tail is prehensile in only fifty per cent. of the genera of South American Monkeys and in a minority even of the Cebide, the prevalent idea, derived from the text-books, that caudal prehensility is characteristic of Platyrhine Primates is indefensible. In nearly all the species of Cebus the tail, although prehensile, is evenly hairy to the tip above and below. Only in the Central American form (C. capucinus) is the end naked below. In this genus practically the only modification of the tail is the develop- ment of the flexor muscles at the expense of the extensors, so that the organ is normally curled in its distal half. So far, there- fore, as the tail is concerned, Cebus bridges the interval between such genera as Saimiris or Aotus, for example, and the genera Lagothrix, Brachyteles, Ateles, and Alowatta, in which the prehen- sile power and tactile sensibility of the tail reach a maximum. In the latter genera the distal portion of the tail is highly mobile and sensitive, with the skin of its lower side naked and trans- versely ridged, like the underside of an Elephant’s trunk (text- fig. 7,C). It serves, indeed, the purpose of an additional hand not only for climbing, but for grasping objects beyond the reach of the arms*. Iam unable to satisfy myself, however, that this special modification of the tail is proof or even strong evidence of attinity between the genera that exhibit it. Ateles and Brachy- teles are probably closely allied; but Lagothrix and 1 ripe. aaa Penpsrtentieeds fe wilt aEeh VRaNe ep But tets? Gi? ® ‘ ‘i wie Pets aes Nay ahs a La ee ghee Cutan, Gig ee meer Vee eu te ; ON THE ANATOMY OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA, WLS 10. The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammalia.—I. General Description of the Tongue. By C. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. [Received January 22, 1920: Read March 16, 1920.] (Text-figures 6-17.) A considerable body of literature dealing with the development and histology of the tongue has appeared in recent years, and a number of individual tongues and groups have been described. No one has, however, taken the various structures and shown how they vary in different animals in exactly the same manner as I have described here. It is the object of my series of papers to fill this gap, and show how the tongue is of value for purposes of classification. In this paper I have indicated the different directions in which the various structures can be modified, and I have defined the terms used in the sueceeding ones. The tongue is a muscular organ enveloped in mucous membrane except at the base and the posterior part of the inferior surface where the muscles, nerves, vessels, and lymphatics enter and leave it. On the dorsum and inferior surface the mucosa differs, being firmly adherent in the former situation and_ loosely attached to the subjacent tissues in the latter. On the dorsum, jateral border, and, iff most cases, on a bownding zone of the inferior surface it is covered with innumerable papille which make these parts rough to the touch. The roughness reaches its greatest degree of development in the Felids, in which the individual papille stick imto the finger hke so many pins. In the non-papillary part of the inferior surface, the mucosa is smooth, but it may have ridges and fissures. These do not, however, affect the smoothness. Shape. Mammalian tongues differ greatly in shape, being oval, conical, spatulate, triangular, or vermiform, but these forms are not of any value for comparative purposes. Size. Two sets of measurements must be made—the greatest width, and the length—and the latter is divided into two—the lengths of the oral and pharyngeal parts. In most cases the greatest, width is situated at the attachments of the anterior faucial pillars to the dorsum, but in spatulate tongues it may lie farther forwards. The length is measured from the apex to the mid point of the glosso-epiglottidean fold. The oral part extends from the apex to the median circumvallate papilla, when there is one, or to Qe 116 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY the point where the lateral rows of papilla would meet the mid line if produced backwards and inwards; the pharyngeal or glandular part stretches from that point to the glosso-epiglottic fold. Sometimes the smooth mucous fold from the tongue to the epiglottis is regarded as a third zone (Owen) *. The relative proportions which these two divisions bear to one another differs, but the former is always the larger. Of all the tongues which I examined, the greatest disparity between them existed in the Indian Fruit Bat, in which the oral part measured 4-7 cm., whereas the pharyngeal part was only -4cm. long. The Apex. The apex may be round, flat, or pointed, and it may be entire or notched, the latter being small, narrow and deep, or wide and shallow. It always bears papille, but these are not always visible to the naked eye. In the Red-fronted Lemur, the papillae are conical and connected to a brush-like set of fine ridges on the inferior surface. In the Californian Sea-Lion, the long conical papille lining the broad apical notch are very | noticeable. In the Tantalus Cercopitheque, the apex is closely set with prominent fungiform papillee. Text-figure 6. eR SERN INDIAN ABYSSINIAN FRUIT BAT CERCOPITHEQUE ae pas a oe ” MLIFORMIAN BROWN TANTALUS GALEOPITHECUS 524 LION LEMUR CERCOFITHEQUE c The different forms exhibited by the apex of the tongue. Note also the median fissure taking the form of a line of separation between two lateral masses of conical papillee in the Californian Sea- Lion. In Galeopithecus, and some of the Cetacea, the apex is lobu- lated, and the lobules are fine in the former, but large and prominent in the latter. From the notches between the lobules in Galeopithecus, fine fissures pass backwards and inwards across the inferior surface of the tongue. Such an arrangement is of value for cleaning the posterior surface of the incisor teeth. It is difficult to discover the function of the large lobules on the tongues of the Cetacea, however. In some tongues—e. g., the Capromys—the apex bears numerous follicular apertures. When the tongue is protruded in most animals the apex is seen, but the Elephant’s apex is bound down to the floor of the * Sir Richarl Owen, ‘The Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrata,’ vol. tit. p. 201. OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA. 117 mouth, and a piece of the anterior part of the dorsum appears to take its place. Median Fissures and Ridges. A median fissure may extend backwards over the dorsum. for a variable. distance from the apex, and it may be continuous or interrupted. It may be merely a line of separation between two lateral masses of conical papille, as in the Californian Sea-Lion, or it may indent the mucous membrane to a variable depth. In the Negro Tamarin and the Stoat, the tongue is small, and the median fissure, which is deep, especially in the former, is a marked feature. The median fissure may be restricted to the front, middle, or back of the tongue, and it may be narrow throughout, or widen from before backwards. In some of the Lemurs, Marmosets, and Carnivora, there may be a median ridge instead of a sulcus. Text-figure 7. LAA MACAQUES ‘SPOTTED (AVY HANGAROO AYE -AYE Different forms of mesial furrows and ridges on the inferior surface of the tongue. Fissures are shown in the Macaques and Spotted Cavy, and ridges im the Kangaroo and Aye-Aye. The inferior surface, like the dorsum, may possess a median fissure or ridge, but either is restricted to the free part. The muscles prevent it going any farther back. It is narrow and deep, or broad and shallow, and it may end abruptly, or open into a triangular depression into which the frenum passes (text-fig. 7). In Galeopithecus, and the Spotted Cavy, small transverse fissures pass horizontally out for a variable distance from the posterior extremity of the median furrow. Again, the tongue of Galeopithecus has small lateral fissures passing inwards from the marginal lobulations. In the Kangaroo, as in other Marsupialia, there is a firm, hard median ridge passing back from the apex to the frenum, and, in the Aye-Aye, a median ridge runs along the surface of the sublingua, but it is not the same as that described above. It represents the lytta. Transverse Ridges and Fissures. Transverse ridges and fissures are of two kinds—artificial and real,—the former appearing in preserved spccimens as the 118 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY result of contracture of the muscles. It is necessar , therefore, to examine fresh material if one desires to study these characters properly. Speaking generally, the real fissures are regular and symmetrical, or nearly so. They are complete or incomplete, the former extending right across the dorsum, and the latter stretching only from the median fissure to the edges of the tongue. ‘They may be straight or curved, with their convexities forwards. In the Lemurs and Marmosets, they are shallow, broad, and curved ; there are one or more complete ones behind the apex, and several incomplete ones behind these on both halves of the dorsum. In the Stoat, the fissures are narrow and deep, and they pass in straight lines obliquely forwards and outwards from the median fissure to the lateral borders of the organ. The arrangement of the papille on these fissures and ridges varies. In the Stoat they are only on the ridges, but in the Lemurs and Marmosets they are on either. Text-figure 8. LEMURS STOAT Different forms of transverse fissures and ridges on the dorsum of the tongue. Intermolar Hlevation. In many animals the posterior part of the oral division of the dorsum is elevated, thereby producing the posterior lobule or intermolar elevation, so-called from its situation. In the Ornitho- rhynchusit appears as a broad and expanded part of the dorsum, and it bears two triangular processes, or lingual teeth, on its anterior border. These are of value to the animal when it catches its food while swimming in the water, for they direct the insects into the cheek-pouches, whence they can be removed for eating when the animal is at leisure. The Rodentia have well-developed elevations, which offer a marked contrast to the low-lying anterior part of the dorsum. Hach of these divisions has a different function to perform. The papillose anterior part is gustatory, whereas the posterior lobule raises the food up to the molar teeth. The elevations differ in the abruptness in which they rise up from the posterior end of the anterior division. The Lingual Papille. The lingual papillee are of three kinds—circumvallate, fungiform, and conical. At the sides there are a number of fissures and OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA. 119° intervening lamine termed folate papille, or, more properly, lateral organs. In this series of papers they will be described as such. The Circumvallate Papille. The circumvallate papille, also known as the fossulate or wall papille, or, briefly, vallate papille, vary in number from one to twelve, and the numbers may vary in different individuals of the same species. They are the largest and, in most cases, the fewest in number of all the papille. They are usually disposed in a single row on each side, but there are two in the Binturong. In the Capybara they appear as slits and ridges. Text-figure 9. ROO FELINE DOUROUCOULI BLACK HOWLER CERCOPITHEQUES TREE KANGA MONKEY 6 7 WHITE-NOSED COATI DESERT FOX RUFFED LEMUR COMMON BADGER CHIMPANZEE BINTURONG CAPYBARA The different types of arrangement of the circumvallate papille. Details in text. Arrangement.—When there is only one papilla, it lies in the mid line; when there are two, there is one on each side, and they are described as right and left lateral, the tongue being held with the apex away from the observer. If there are three, they are grouped in the form of a triangle, and the individuals are described as the posterior and right and left lateral papille. In most cases the apex of the triangle is posterior, but in the 120 DR. CG. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY Tree Kangaroos it is anterior. When there are more than three papille, they are arranged in chains, giving the appearance of the letter V, Y, T, or U. Structure.—Each papilla has a cylindrical or club-shaped body rising from the bottom of a cylindrical depression, and the space between the body of the papilla and the wall of the depression is termed the fossa, the bottom of which is termed the fundus. The papilla may stand up higher than, be flush with, or recessed below the surrounding dorsum, and the protruding Text-figure 10. 17 18 The different macroscopic appearances presented by the circumvallate papille. Details in text. form is the commonest. When it is recessed, as in the Mono- tremata and Marsupialia, the object attained is protection. Poulton* showed how the vallate papilla of the Ornithorhynchus consists of a ridge of delicate cells deeply recessed, and the vallum ean contract over them to shelter them from noxious influences, These variations are shown in text-fig. 10, nos. 1, 2, 3. The fossa may appear as a mere slit round the papilla, or it may be patulous, especially when the tongue is fresh. In the Rhesus and Common Macaque Monkeys, the fosse of the two lateral vallate papille exhibit recesses at the anterior and posterior papillary poles (text-fig. 10, no. 4). When the tongue has been preserved these recesses close up, however. * Poulton, EH. B., Proceedings of the Zoological Society of Londen, 1883, p. 599. ee OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA. 121 Each fossa may contain one or more papille (text-fig. 10, nos. 5-9). When there are two, they appear as separate cylinders, or as two halves of the same oval. Moreover, the several cylinders may be the same or of different sizes. The papilla may be round, oval, or keeled, and its surface may be smooth, polished, and glistening, or granular. When it is granular, it may appear finely dotted, or covered with coarse tubercles. Sometimes there is a central depression or umbilicus (text-fig. 10, nos. 9-12). The granules may represent secondary papillee. The vallum may slope and appear as a mound on which the papille are set prominently, but that is not common; it occurred in the Indian Muntjac. It usually takes the form of a zone round the papilla and fossa, and it may be smooth, furrowed, lobulated, or covered with conical papillae. When it is lobulated, the divisions may be round, oval, rhomboidal. There may be two rows—an inner one of round, and an outer one of reniform elements. Text-figure 11. LL.CP. OQ yy BLOB The blood-vessels of the vallate papillary region of Macacus rhesus. i.L.C.P. and R.L.C.P., right and left lateral papille; P.C.P., posterior vallate papillee. The tongue of the Common Badger exhibits an interesting form of vallate papillary region. It is coloured brown, and the papillae appear as if they are beneath the surface, and shine through the mucous membrane, which looks as if it is composed of transparent mosaics. The different forms of vallum are shown in text-fig. 10, nes. 13-20. If the tongue is removed soon after death, the blood-vessels supplying the vallate papillary region may be seen injected with blood. In the Rhesus and Common Macaque Monkeys, two arteries pass forwards in the middle line, and, when they reach the papillary region, they divide into two branches-—a mesial and a lateral one. The mesial branches pass between the posterior papilla, and the lateral ones pass to the outer sides of their corresponding papille, whenee they can be traced running out to 122 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY the lateral vallate papillae. When veins are visible, they pursue the same course as the arteries (text-fig. 11). The fresh papillee look like delicately tinted glass balls, but the preserved ones are dead white in colour. The Fungiform Papille. The fungiform papille, which have a bright red colour in the fresh tongue, are more numerous than the circumvallate and fewer than the conical papille, and they do not exhibit the same diversity of types as the other forms. ‘They vary in appearance, number, and arrangement. They are small globular bodies lying in depressions of the mucous membrane, and are sessile or pedunculated. They project for a variable distance above the surface of the dorsum. In most eases the projecting part is hemispherical, but the complete pedunculated papilla is seen in Man, the White-collared Man- gabey, the Chimpanzee, the White-nosed Coati, and others. Text-figure 12. ’ The different macroscopic appearances presented by the fungiform papille. Details in text. In Man and the Mangabey, the pedunculated papillz lie close to the attachments of the faucial pillars to the dorsum; in the Chimpanzee they are at the back of the tongue, and in the Coati they take the place of the apical vallate papilla. The papilla has a smooth, granular, or umbilicated surface, and the umbilicus may be present in the sessileand pedunculated type (text-fig. 12.). The different forms are not, however, charac- teristic of any order of the Mammalia, and transitional types are to be seen between them and the conical papille. Fungiform papille are present on the dorsum, lateral borders, and, in many cases, on the bounding papillary zone of the inferior surface. They are absent in Galeopithecus and the Arctic Fox, and difficult to see in the Dog. As a rule they are situated at the apex, lateral parts, and posterior division of the dorsum, and scanty or absent on the central part. They are clustered behind the apex ; in the middle third of the dorsum they are in transverse rows, and, at the OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA, 123 posterior part of the lateral part, they are in oblique chains passing forwards and outwards parallel to the rows of vallate papille. Those in the middle of the dorsum, in front of the vallate papillary zone, are arranged in clusters as in Man, the Macque Monkeys, and some of the Lemurs and Marmosets. In the White-collared Mangabey, a V-shaped band of fungiform papille meets with the lateral organs on each side, and partitions off the oral division of the dorsum from the pharyngeal part (text-fig. 13). On the lateral borders of the tongue, the papille are arranged in a chain, and they may be prominent or insignificant. On the inferior surface they may either have no definite arrangement, or they may be disposed in rows, of which the inner one is of large, and the outer one of small elements. Text-figure 13. MACAQUES MANGABEY The arrangement of the fungiform papille. The fungiform papille may be covered with secondary ones and possess taste buds. ‘The histology will be described in the future papers of this series. The Conical Papille. The conical papille are the most numerous, and they vary more than any other group in distribution, size, and form. In some of the Primates they are restricted to the oral part of the dorsum, but in most animals they are on both oral and pharyngeal parts. When they are present on the pharyngeal part, they are more discrete than those on the oral division. Moreover, the character of the papillae on the two parts may be so different that the tongue can at once be referred to the family to which the animal belongs. In the Felide, for example, the large recurved conical papille on the oral part of the dorsum are pathognomonic, but the Canide have small and medium-sized papillae on the oral part, and long and shaggy ones on the pharyngeal part. Arrangement.—In most animals the papille are aggregated into clusters behind the apex; they are disposed in transverse rows in the middle third of the dorsum and in oblique rows in the posterior third. They are, therefore, disposed in the same manner as the fungiform papille, but they are dotted over the whole of the dorsum. 124 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY There are exceptions to the above arrangement, however: in the Indian Fruit Bat the arrangement in transverse rows is maintained right up to the apex, and in the Stoat there are no transverse rows at all: they are oblique almost to the apex, and there is a small cluster of papille behind it. In the Abyssinian Cercopitheque the papille are closely set and not arranged in rows at all. These various forms are shown in text-fig. 14. Size.—The papille behind the apex are small in size, and their true character can only be made out after magnification. As a general rule they increase in size from before backwards, and the central members of the rows are larger than the lateral ones. In some of the Felide, and in the Indian Fruit Bat, there is a central area with large papille, and a bounding zone con- taining small ones. In some animals there is a marginal fringe of long hair-like conical papille. Text-figure 14. COMMON TYPE STOAT The arrangement of the conical papille. The papille are cornified to a variable extent and confer a rough feeling on the dorsum. In the Felide, the roughness is so marked that the sharp cornified papille stick into the examining finger like so many pins; this arrangement must be of the greatest value for removing flesh from bones. The roughness may vary in different species of the same genus. No contrast could be greater, for example, than that which exists between the tongues of the Abyssinian and Preuss’s Cercopitheque. In the latter the tongue is comparatively smooth, but in the former it is very rough, and, when it is examined with the hand lens, the conical papille look like a field of long grass. The shape and size of the papille, and the number of points, exhibit many variations, but very few types are characteristic of any order. The different kinds can be arranged in groups, but there are transitional forms linking them together. In the first, or filiform group (text-fig. 15, nos. 1-4), the papilla is long and coarse, or fine, and a cluster may arise from a single point. Sometimes the papilla gives off a bundle of hairs from its trunk, or, as in some of the Marsupialia, they come off in the form of a ring. These were called coronate papille by Poulton. The filiform group is linked to the cylindrical (text- OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA. 125 fig, 15, nos. 6-9) and fusiform types (text-fig. 15, no. 10) by the papilla shown in text-fig. 10, no. 5. Cylindrical papille may be long or short, and bear one or more points (text-fig. 15, nos. 9, 25, 26). Piekeasme may be recurved, and have an entire or divided — apex (text-fig. 15, nos. 11-13), and the base from which it springs may be smooth or granular; also the point may be rounded and umbilicated (text-fig. 15, no. 14). Text-figure 15. 24 WT 29 30 5 The different macroscopic appearances presented by the conieal papille. Details in text. The triangular group may have straight, serrated, or curved sides, and the apex may have one, two, or many points (text-fig. 15, nos. 15-18). | The members of the oval group may have plain or pointed sides, and the most complex form resembles the calyx and corolla of some flowers (text-fig. 15, nos. 19-23). In most animals the points of the papille in the centre of the dorsum are directed backwards, and those at the sides look 126 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY backwards and inwards. In many of the Ruminantia, however, there is an area at the back of the oral part of the dorsum on which the papille, which are large, point in all directions. The papille on the edges of the tongue give these a serrated appearance, the points being directed backwards, and the dis- position is in vertical chains. On the inferior surface of the tongue the papille are small, but the Banded Mongoose has large discrete ones arranged in trans- verse rows with the points directed backwards and outwards. The functions of the papille are numerous, but taste is not one of them. They are tactile, retentive, or mechanical, and the nature of the mechanical action differs in different animals. In the Felide it is rasping, and in the Bats it may be suctorial in virtue of the action of muscle-fibres near tne apex. They are assisted in their work by the shape of the mouth, the nature and strength of the lingual muscles, and the co-existence of ridges and tubercles on the palate. Hard insects can, for example, “be crushed between the cornified papilla and the palatal tubercles. The conical papille may overlap the fungiform and vallate papill, or there may be a non-papillary zone between them (text- ise, IPA, sao / teh; 8) The Lateral Organs. The lateral organs, or foliate papille, consist of a number of fissures and elevations at the posterior extremity of the free part of each lateral border of the tongue. In most cases they extend for a variable distance on to the pharyngeal part of the dorsum each side. Both organs may be identical, or one may be more pronounced and exhibit a greater degree of development. The fissures may be long or short, and they may be curved with the convexity forwards, sinuous, or straight. They may be described as primary or complete, when they separate two adjacent ridges, or secondary or incomplete, when they lie in the middle of a ridge and partially divide it into two. Many tongues have both forms. They vary greatly in number, the greatest which I detected being fifteen in the Spotted Cavy. Both organs may have the same number of fissures, or there may be more in one of the two in any animal. The ridges may not protrude above the surface of the dorsum, as in the “Spotted Cavy, or they may appear as a series of ov al bodies arranged in a straight line or a curve. The linear arrangement is sgen in the Macaque and Cercopitheque Monkeys, and the curve in the Brown Lemur and some other animals. Again, the bodies may be grouped in pairs, as in the White- collared Mangabey and the Bald-headed Ouakari. These modifi- cations are shown in text-fig. 16. Sometimes the lateral organs appear as distinct bodies which are oval, lozenge-shaped, vermiform, or wedge-shaped (text- fig. 16). Their margins may be serrated or plain, and their OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA. 127 upper limit may be bordered with conical papille or lymphoid nodules. Both organs may be identical in size, but there may be disparities in size, distinctness, and number of ridges and fissures. Text-figure 16. Te 717 7 RN 789) SPOTTED CAVY RHESUS and CommoN BLACK HOWLER MACAQUE MACAQUE MONKEY Joo \o\ (Go) aallalo) BALD-HEADED ; WH/TE-COLLARED WH/TE -FRONTED MOLOCH QUAKARI MANGABEY CAPUCHIN TEETEE 144 ; Cini = “=< (dave RED-FRONTED RING-TAILEO NEGRO TANTALUS LEMUR LEMUR TAMARIN CERCOPSTHEQUE The different forms of lateral organ. Details in text. To sum up, the lateral organs may consist of :— A. Fissures and flat laminze, as in the Spotted Cavy. B. Fissures and protruding lamine, as in the Macaques and Mangabeys. C. Definite organs, as in the Ring-tailed Lemur, Kabbit, etc. These organs are richly supplied with taste-buds. The Lymphoid Tissue and Glands. Several papers dealing with the glands of the tongue have been written by J. B. Haller * and others. I will not, therefore, enter into a description here, but I will refer to it in the systematic papers. I will only point out here that the orifices of glands are not visible in all tongues, even when the tongue is examined with the hand lens. The Inferior Surface. The inferior surface presents for examination a papillary border, a mesial furrow or ridge, a frenum, the openings of the sublingual glands, and the sublingual plate or its remnant the plice fimbriatee. The papillary border of the tongue may run completely round it, or it may be broken at the apex. Its antero-posterior length * Haller. J. B., Archiy fiir Mik. Anat. 1909, p. 368. 128 DR. C. F. SONNTAG ON THE ANATOMY and breadth vary, and the papille on it are conical alone, or both conical and fungiform; but it never bears fungiform papille alone. The various arrangements and degrees of aggregation have already been described, and attention has been paid to the ridges and furrows. Wharton’s Ducts open at the root of the frenum. In Man and some of the Anthropoids, they open on the sublingual papille, or caruncule sublinguales, which are overlapped by folds of mucosa or sublingual plicee. In many monkeys, the ducts open on the apex of a triangular body (text-fig. 17) which has plain or serrated sides and a bifid or entire apex. Also, the inferior surface may have small pointed processes, as in Preuss’s Cercopitheque. In the Saki the apex is rounded and entire, and the body bears lateral lobes ; in the Squirrel Monkey there is a round entire apex, but the body is not lobulated; in the Moloch Teetee the whole body is lobulated ; and in the Black Howler Monkey the apex is bifid and the halves are rounded. The sublingual-duct body is set astride the frenum. Text-figure 17. ol ome A MAN PREUSS 5S MANGA REI CERCOPITHEQUE aL BLACK SQUIRREL MOLOCH HOWLER MONKEY TEETEE The different forms exhibited by the openings for Wharton’s Ducts. Details in text. The above body is not to be confounded with the sublingua which is characteristic of the Lemuroidea, and represented by the plice fimbriate of the Anthropoidea. These folds extend backwards for a variable distance along the lateral aspect of the inferior surface from the apex. The sublingua has already been fully described by Poeock *. The frenum extends from the posterior end of the free part of the inferior surface to the floor of the mouth. It originates from the plane surface of the tongue, or from the bottom of a triangular depression. It varies greatly in length. Structures for cleaning the Teeth. Some animals have structures for cleaning the teeth, and these may be apical, as in Galeophithecus, or lateral as in the * Pocock, R. I., Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, 1918, p. 19. OF THE TONGUES OF THE MAMMALIA. 129 Ruminantia. In the Red-fronted Lemur it takes the form of a number of long apical conical papille, but in Galeopithecws ib appears as a number of apical lobules. In the Slow Loris it is on the apex of the sublingua. Apparatus for Purposes of Suction. In some of the Bats, theapical conical papille can be arranged in the form of a suctorial ring by means of muscular contraction. Pigmentation of the Tongue. The fresh tongue has a pink colour with fine dark red dots in most animals, but some animals have peculiar pigmentation, which may even be so characteristic that the species to which they belong can be told at once. The Moloch Teetee has a black tongue; the Grizzled Spider Monkey has a brown tongue with a white cross on the dorsum; the Common Badger has a brown vallate papillary area; and the Giraffe and Aurochs have tongues of a leaden hue. The disposition of the pigment varies in different members of the same species, but the differences are not of great value for comparative work; in the Moloch Teetee, for example, I have seen one specimen with a completely black tongue, but another had a wedge-shaped area devoid of pigment at the base. The Litta. On the under surface of the tongue, and sometimes within its substance, there is a remnant of the glosso-hyal cartilage, known as the litta, which varies in situation and character. It lies below the tip of the organ in the Dasyure, but it is absent in the Phalangers, in which it is replaced by a thickening of the frenum. It is salle apical in the Rhinoceros. In the Carnivora, it is developed, especially in the Dog, in which it is termed the worm. It is elastic and assists in lapping. In the Kinkajou, it is large, ligamentous, and ensheathed, and in the Aye-Aye it takes the form of a nodulated and hooked crest on the ventral aspect of the sublingua. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. TX. 9 sabe syne yh? weyy ep) ewe AE aR 4 ies pee f hieghage! any) ae oO) eg a Se ne oes}? eR ee w Thon? 6 RANA a 9D 8 Ng eas" : ey Phi tie a p Bebe ns ane ae paiell Wee se i inti! ah si ft Hea y aie yf $a ibid } z Ohi A os ae u 7 Bice P enue weed! he fi ee Fi 4h he cebt! iA ah ahh ee: : aki Pe ait at ‘ Pea J Esai bie Syay RAMONE i HRS ayant ; ie Rha ies vile eHlds a he ‘ i Fi f ; k x oe faethe oh bet ef if Ate af pues kee ale iti bike Wie ieee Real) ce bid ebeS Ny a4 Pe cee «ee Rade Aedt. c? eee ¥4 € ii f(s Pe ! i ent bares: aay wagadyt* ob? zi y > elk a i i Li iid Ms enadds wetoe, Wak wi gilak i OG. SLs 4 : { : : icy A re oh Ate e es big C0 i i : Po iy be TAREE OPE EY Ae < ie ve _ J z ws 5 i. +4 3 Th ha a ft & rs | eee © i { nts Ps ‘i a ea Mata Pe le a ee : d TR MAS Te ok oa ; Sd ON EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 131 11. Notes on Hast African Lizards collected 1915-1919, with Description of a new Genus and Species of Skink and new Subspecies of Gecko. By Arraur LOVERIDGE. [Received March 5, 1920: Read March 30, 1920. ] (Text-figure 1.) The following notes are based on a collection of 900 lizards and chameleons collected by the writer during the campaign in Kast Africa. Over a theusand specimeus were collected, but one box containing lizards frem Kerogwe, Handeni, etc., and handed to the 8. & ‘I’. for transmission to the base, never reached its des- tination. Another bex containing half-a-dozen jars of lizards and chameleons was lest en route for England. Besides these there are a good many specimens in the Nairobi Museum collected by the writer which were net breught home, and therefore were not available for study for the present paper. Representatives of all the families of Kast African lizards were taken, more than half the genera and about one-third of the recorded species. The numbers are distributed as follows :-— Number of Family. Genera. Species. specimens. Geckonidaes.0.9./.0.). we 12 255 PAvGarTIGeDs mera ee eet sth 1 5 55 Pommansiders Wy. ite eke: ] ] 12 NWiamreiatilach (5. Jeene Comer Ss 1 2 13 Amphisbeenide ............ ] 1 i bacertidesr: AU Ay. eee: 5 6 69 Gerrhosauride ............ i 2 46 Scimeidcen twee. saat 12 330 Anelytropidz ............ 1 1 1 Chameleontide............ 2 9 112 ot lee 900 The most representative collection was made in Ex-German Hast Africa, where the writer spent two and a half years. Six months were spent in Portuguese Hast and one and a half years in British East Africa. The field-notes are not so extensive as would have been the case had cenditions not been so adverse. For nearly twelve months all specimens had to be carried on the saddle until camp was made, and an opportunity arose to send them back to the base on the returning supply lorries. The principal localities mentioned in the foliowing pages are :— British Hast Africa: West Mt. Kenia, Mt. Siswa, Mt. Margaret, Kedong Valley, Thika, Nairobi, Kabete, Kagiado, Bissel, Voi. Mbunyi, Mombasa. g* 2 MR, A. LOVERIDGE ON ; Ke-German Hast Africe: West Mt. Longido, Aruscha, Moschi, Kahe, Palms, Tsame, Gonya, Mikomasi, Mombo, Kerogwe, Han- deni, Lukigura, Makindu (Msiha River), Ngeri-Ngeri, Mikesse, Mkuyuni, Matombo, Duthumi, Tabora, Dodomo, Kongwa, Moro- govo, Dar-es-Salaam. Zanzibar. Portuguese East Africa: Lambo (on mainland 3 miles from Mozambique), Delagoa Bay. The identification was eirried out at the British Museum at South Kensington, where I had the advantage of examining the types of a oveat many of the species referred to in the following pages, as well as large series for comparison from many localities, ‘The notes were afterwards worked up at home. I should like to take this opportunity of thanking Mr. G. A. Boulenger for the great kindness which he showed me. Not merely by according me free access to his papers and the collec- tions in his care, but at all times so readily giving advice, examining specimens, or making lengthy translations from the German text. Without his kindly oversight 1 should never have completed these notes, or, if completed, should without doubt have made many blunders. It is with the object of showing my appreciation for the help so freely given that I have associated Mr. Boulenger’s name with the only new lizard found in the collection, an interesting limb- less hurrowing Skink described in the following pages. Only one local race has been given a subspecific name, though on colour grounds the Mombasa (Frere Town) form of Lygo- dactylus pictur atus, the Dodoma specimens of Agama lionotus, and the Longido specimens of Mabuia brevicollis might be con- sidered by some as meriting formal names. Measurements are given to the nearest eighth of an inch, followed by the exact measurements in millimetres of the length of head and body followed by the tail length when intact. IT am indebted to Mr. H. A. Baylis for identifying the parasitic worms found in many species of lizards. Some of these are pos- sibly new, and as the descriptions have not yet been published, only the generic names are given in the following pages. GECKONID!. HEMIDACTYLUS CrtERNII (Blgr.). Blgr. Ann. Mus. Gen. (3) v. 1912, p. 329. A single male was collected at Nairobi on 3.iv.15. It was found beneath a stone on the hillside. Total length 27 inches (38°35 mm.). The type locality of this recently described species is in Somali- land. The type is in the British Museum, and the above speci- men was identified for me by Mr. Boulenger. This new record shows the species to be widely spread. BAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 13333 HEMIDACTYLUS MABOUIA (Gray). Blgr. Cat. Liz. i. 1885, p. 122. This is undoubtedly the commonest of the East African Geckos. Seventy-one specimens were collected. In British East at Voi ; in German East at T'same, Mkomasi, Kerogwe, Lukiguva, Makindu, Amani, Kongwa, Morogoro, Dar-es-Salaam, and Du- thumi; in Portuguese Hast at Lumbo and Delagoa Bay. It is commonly found in houses and out-buildings, but is almost as common on trees. The coloration is very variable. Those taken in the burnt-out interior of trees were practically black, others hiding in crevices of Paupau-trees were a pale straw-colour; some of the very largest were found on trees at Lukigura and Makindu, where their darkly barred and mottled skins by accentuating the small tubercles led me to suppose them to be a distinct species. ‘Those found in houses, particularly where the walls were whitewashed, were pale flesh-colovr or almost transparent. The change of colour may also be influenced by their feelings apparently, for on one occasion I witnessed two of them fighting—the victor was pale grey and the pursued brown-black. The largest specimens were taken at Morogoro. Both male and female measured 73 inches (86°102 mm.). It was curious that both these large specimens should be in the same propor- tions of head and body to tail, for the tail of the male was a reproduced one, while that of the female was intact. An extraordinary percentage of the Morogoro specimens had regenerated tails, no fewer than twenty out of the thirty-one collected. It occurred more frequently in males than in females, and I attributed this to the combats that take place, which are presumably amongst the males. In an outhouse I saw a speci- men with bifid tail, but did not succeed in catching it. At Kerogwe I caught seventeen specimens without one dropping its tail; eleven of these had their original tails, five males and one female had secondary growths. I put one of these Geckos into a vivarium with an Underlined Sand-Snake (P. subteniatus); the rapidity with which the snake gave chase was almost incredible ; the weather being hot, the snake darted and doubled about the case. The Gecko dropped its tail, but the snake, undeceived by the wriggling of the severed tail, shortly after seized the Gecko, and when the latter became limp from the poison—swallowed it. The eggs of this species are almost globular except for a flattening at the point of attachment; they are soft and sticky when laid, and thus adhere to the bark, in whose crevices or beneath which they are deposited. Two are produced at a time ; in diameter they are from 10 to 12 mm.; the shell soon hardens and becomes very brittle, so that it is difficult to detach them from the bark without breaking them ; the surface of the shells is finely granulate and the colour is opaque or bluish-white. Eggs were taken on July 29th at Makindu, on March 9th and 134 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON December 20th at Morogoro, on October 16th at Lumbo. The last-mentioned hatched out the same day; the emerged young one measured just under 22 inches (31°31 mm.), which is extra- ordinary when one considers the size of the egg. Two eggs collected upon some books at Mombasa on November 17th, 1919, also hatched out within a few days, so that the species probably breeds at any time of the year. Flies and spiders are their usual food, but I have also taken small beetles, and one particularly gorged specimen had a big brown cockroach 40 mm. long in ifs stomach. This species is particularly liable to small red acarine parasites, which generally are found scattered about the ventral surface. HEMIDACTYLUS SQUAMULATUS (Torn.). Tornier, Thierw. Ost-Afr. Rept. 1896, p. 10. Two males only, collected at Morogoro, the first under an ox- hide on 8.v.17 measured just under 22 inches (33°26 mm.), but the tail was reproduced, the second on 9.iv.18was 3% inches (42:42 mm.). Compared with specimens in the Biitish Museum from Voi, Tsavo, Samburu, and Kitui. HEMIDACTYLUS BROOKU (Gray). Blgr. Cat. Liz. i. 1885, p. 128. Thirty specimens were collected at Morogoro, Duthumi, and Lumbo; at the former place they were mostly to be found in grass-huts and among rubbish heaps, but at the other localities they were all found on trees. The largest male measured 3} inches (40°40 mm.) and was from Lumbo; the largest female measured 34 inches (54°33 mm.), though the tail was reproduced: it was taken at Morogoro. Female with eggs taken 14.11.17. ‘The types of this species from Borneo and Australia in the British Museum were examined, as well as the fine series from African localities. A. brookii has a wonderfully wide distribu- tion in Kast Africa from Somaliland to Portuguese Hast ; it also occurs on the West Coast. HEMIDACTYLUS RUSPOLIL (Bigr.). Bler. Ann. Mus. Gen. (2) xvii. 1896, p. 6. Seventeen specimens, of which three were from Mbunyi, B.E.A.; one from Longido West; twelve from Morogoro; and one from Duthumi, G.E.A. The Mbunyi and Longido specimens were taken from fissures and crevices of thorn-trees, the Morogoro ones beneath stones and dug out of an earth-bank, where they lived in holes. Six of these were males, of which the largest measured 5 inches (67-60 mm. regenerated), from Mbunyi. By far the largest of ee neghiee 9 EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS, 135 the eleven females was from Duthumi; this specimen measured 63 inches (77°82 mm.). In both of these the tail was repro- duced and carrot-shaped ; the female was strikingly so, measuring 17 mm. across at the base and tapering to a point; the body only measured 23 mm. across. In life these Geckos have an orange- colour, much brighter on the tail; this was so as regards the Morogoro specimens, but I did not notice it at Mbunyi. The following is a note from my diary of the colour of a living Morogoro specimen :—‘‘ The head and back are of a very dull orange-colour; a black stripe passes through the eye; three pairs of rather indefinite ocelli on the sides are connected by black saddle-like markings bordered with whitish granules; the tail is brilliant orange ringed with black, the rings becoming less distinct on the lower surface; throat, belly, and under-surface of legs transparent white.” LYGODACTYLUS CAPENSIS MOSSAMBICA, Subsp. nov. Blgr. Cat. Liz. 1885, p. 160. Fifty specimens of a Gecko were collected at Lumbo, P.E.A., which agreed with the description of L. capensis (Smith) in all particulars, with the exception of the scaling on the underside of the tail. In ZL. capensis the underside of the tail is covered with large imbricate scales except in regenerated tails, where occa- sionally one finds broad transverse scales in a median series. In all the specimens collected at Lumbo this transversely dilated median series was a constant feature both in the original and renewed tails. There is an exceptionally fine series of LZ. capensis in the British Museum, and specimens were examined from the following localities :—South Africa; ‘Transvaal (Zoutpansburg, Rusten- burg, De Kaap Goldfields); Natal (Lower Unkomaas River) ; Rhodesia (Mazoe); Zululand (Indukuduku, Ngoye Hills) ; Portuguese Gazaland (Jiku, Kurumadzi River); Portuguese Kast Africa (Delagoa Bay, Shire Highlands); Mashonaland (Mt. Chirinda) ; Tanganyika: French Congo( Benito River): Nyassa- land (Fort Johnson, Zomba); Angola (Chiyaka District); Ben- guella (Interior); South Somaliland (Lush). All these agree with the original description. Specimens from Beira and Cogano, P.K.A., however, were intermediate between the typical L. capensis and the Lumbo race, one or two of the Beira specimens being practically indistinguish- able from those collected at Lumbo. In view of the large series of specimens collected and the constancy of the character, I propose to designate this local race as a subspecies under the name of mossanbica. The largest male measured 22 inches (35:31 mm.), and the largest female just over 23 inches (35°22 mm. regenerated). These specimens I regard as the types. The average length of nineteen males was 61 mm, (30°31 mm.), and of thirty-one 136 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON females 57 mm. (29°28 mm.); a few specimens with regenerated tails are included in these averages. Coloration from notes made from the living Gecko, as follows :— ‘“Grey or olive-brown above, darker or lighter according to. habitat. Black lateral lines spotted with cream commence at nostrils and disappear at, or on hind legs. A pair of dorso- lateral lines bordered on their inner edge by fawn-coloured lines commence on frontal region and vanish on tail. In some speci- mens these lines were broken into a series of dots, in others they were very indistinct. Whole dorsal surface much mottled with darker and lighter spots. Throat pure white, bespeckled in males; rest of under surface yellowish-white. Regenerated tails plumbeous.” Eggs two in number, pure white, more bird-shaped than most Gecko eggs. Measured7 mm.x6mm. Laid in crevices of bark. Eggs collected on 27. vii. 18 hatched on 16.x.18. Newly emerged young measured 24 mm. (13°11 mm.). Blue-bottle fly, large beetle larva, and small brown beetles were found in stomach. On one occasion I saw a young Gecko seize a small staphylinid beetle and drop it quickly, shaking its head vigorously as does a person after taking a nauseous draught. The type specimens and others have “heen given to the British Museum. Co-types have been donated to the National Museum of Wales, Manchester Museum, American Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institute, Prof. Barbour at Harvard University, and Nairobi Museum, British Hast Africa. LYGODACTYLUS FISCHERI SCHEFFLERI (Sternf.). Sternfeld, Ergebn. Deutsch. Zentr. Afr. Exp. 1918, iv p- 206. Two males taken on thorn-trees at Mbunyi (15.v.16). The larger measures 27 inches (26°30 mm.). LYGODACTYLUS GROTEI (Sternf.). Sternfeld, §.B. Ges. Naturf. Berlin, 1911, iv. p. 245. Twenty-one specimens in all were collected—nine males, nine females, and three immature young. Localities—Morogoro, Msiha, Duthumi. The favourite haunts of this species were the banana-palms and paupau-trees, on whose stems they disported themselves in the sunshine; occasionally they were found on shrubs, stumps, or low bushes. The largest male measured 2? inches (32°38 mm.), the largest female 22 inches (33°37 mm.). On February 24th, 1917, a pair were seen ti coitu on a spray of mimosa thorn. It was about 8 a.m., and the sun was causing the heavy dew-drops to glisten. LycopactyLus PicturAtus (Peters). Blgr. Cat, Liz. i. 1885, p. 161. Forty specimens available for present paper; large series from EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. ey Kerogwe and Handeni were lost. in transit. Seen at Mombasa Island, Zanzibar, Mombo, Palms, Ngeri Negeri. Collected at Kerogwe, Handeni, Morogoro, and Dar-es-Salaam. A purely arboreal Gecko living on tree-trunks; the following notes were made at various localities :— Zanzibar (30. xi1.14). Was disappointed in not securing a Gecko, whose body was bark-colour but whose head was like a patch of yellow lichen. Handeni (26. vi. 16). Caught sight of a small grey Gecko with a yellow head similar to those seen at Palms a few days ago. They frequent large trees and come down within a couple of feet of the ground ; should anyone approach, they glide round to the opposite side of the trunk and then hasten towards the top. On two trees the yellow heads of these Geckos rendered them con- spicuous, but on a third, which was overgrown with tufts of grey and yellow lichen, the yellow head broke up their outline and rendered them inconspicuous; this seems to be the probable explanation of their somewhat peculiar coloration. By far the most interesting thing about them was the tip of the tail, upon which were transverse lamelle similar to those on digits of most Geckos. This arrangement serves them as a fifth foot, thus pro- viding additional grip. Handeni (27. vi.16). Hunted most of the likely trees for Geckos similar to the specimen. taken yesterday; most of them were too quick for me, save those on one stump not more than ten feet high. In passing this, I fancied seeing something glide round, so dodged to and fro until I caught sight of a retreating tail. Having broken off all the smaller twigs, I put my arms around the stump near the ground, then ran them up to a height of five feet, where I tied a white handkerchief loosely around to keep them from coming down. Then swarming up, I broke off all the remaining branches, raised the kerchief within a foot of the top, and then captured one by one the male and two female Geckos which were there. The male was very handsomely coloured, with a velvety-black throat merging into a bright yellow stripe along the centre of the belly. The grey and yellow of the back and head (upper surface) were also much more vivid than in the specimen taken yesterday. The females possess the power of changing colour with great rapidity, bemg quite brown when first sighted, but changing to a dull imitation of the male when pursued. Kerogwe (5.vii.16). The Yellow-headed Geckos are very abundant here, almost every third tree is inhabited by them. Several pairs of their hard-shelled eggs were found under the bark of the trees. Morogoro (2.11.17). Yellow-headed Geckos very abundant hereon the trunks of the Acacia-trees, which border many of the roads ; these Geckos are always to be found on the sunny side of the tree-trunks during the mornings. The male is handsome blue-grey with a brilliant yellow head, which fades in spirit, so 138 MR, A. LOVERIDGE ON that only some longitudinal dark striations or mottlings are to be seen in the preserved specimen. The chin and throat in adult males only are velvety black, extending back as far as the fore legs ; immature specimens have unmarked throats or like those of females. ‘The rest of the under-surface as far back as the vent is orange, whilst small yellow patches mark the underside of the legs. The tail is grey beneath. The throat of the female is white mottled with a network of black lines; the upper surface of the head in adults is pale yellow, barred or mottled with yellow; the back is brown or greyish, with indistinct darker markings. When struck sharply on the back with a cane so as to be instantly killed, this Gecko frequently falls over backwards, and remains attached to the tree by the sucker-apparatus of the tail tip. Lang, in his field-notes on Lygodactylus picturatus gutteralis *, speaking of this tail, writes: ‘but the really unique feature distinguishing it from all. other Geckos is the adhesive pad on the tip of the tail”; this is evidently a slip, as this is a generic character +. The largest males taken measured 33 inches (43°43 mm.) and largest female 33 inches (3841 mm.). It is very unusual for this species to drop its tail, and most of the specimens taken had intact tails. At Morogoro (1.1.17) a pair were seen courting. ‘ After recent heavy rains the sun came out bright and fresh this morning, and almost every tree in the avenue had a pair of Yellow-headed Geckos in brilliant colour on its sunny side. A pair were courting, the female chasing off the male every time he approached. He arched his neck in an unusual manner and ex- posed his throat, presumably to exhibit the velvety-black patch peculiar to the male.” Eggs were found at Morogoro on 1.11.18, at Dar-es-Salaam on 11.iv.18 (in one group of three it is just possible that two Geckos had laid together; two eggs being the usual number), and at Kerogwe on 5. vii. 16. In the ‘Catalogue of Lizards’ the colour of L. picturatus is given as “head and anterior part of body bright yellow, with dark brown or black lines and spots.......” At Frere Town, which is situated on the mainland opposite Mombasa Island, from which it is only separated by a channel not more than 500 yards across, is a very distinct form whieh has no yellow head, nor yellow on any part of the body. When first seen I thought it was a distinct species, but after a careful examination T can detect no structural difference between it and picturatus, which I have seen on Mombasa Is. though never collected. In the British Museum is a specimen of the Frere Town form, labelled ‘‘ Mombasa,” and collected by A. Blayney Percival, Esq., * Schmidt, Bull. Amer. Mus. of Nat. Hist. xxxix. 1919, p. 465. + Mr. Schmidt points out to me that the lamelle on the tail are not even a generic distinction, as they are also found in Diplodactylus palmatus Mocq. EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 139 which conceivably may have been taken on the adjoining main- land. In the Nairobi Museum are two specimens collected at Jilore, Giriama, and presented by Mr. T. B. Nair, which are also the Frere Town form. Unfortunately the colouring of the head does not remain in preserved specimens. The coloration of the Frere ‘Town form in life is as follows : Male: Head white, transverse black band across supra-ocular region, a second in parietal region; three longitudinal black lines unite these two to form a gridiron pattern; a third cross- band on nape. A double row of large black spots, sometimes united to form transverse bands, on back from nape to base of tail ; there may be as many as eleven pairs of spots. A black stripe commencing at nostril passes through eye and over fore- limb, where it ends above axilla. Very narrow black line borders tips of upper and lower labials, continues below ear- opening and on to the fore-limb, where it disappears before reaching elbow. Nine to twelve vertical black stripes of irregular shape along each side. Throat black, not extending beyond an imaginary line drawn from ear to ear, except for two narrow line-like continuations, only a couple of scales in width, which extend back to fore-limbs. Belly white, projecting for- ward into black throat like the arms of the letter ‘‘U.” Female as in male, except for white throat, which has an inner and outer chevron-shaped black marking. Fourteen specimens were collected. of which the largest male measured 2% inches (36°36 mm.) and female 3 inches (36°38 mm.). PLATYPHOLIS FascraTA (Blegr.). Blgr. P. Z. 8. 1890, p. 80. Two males and a female taken on thorn-trees at Mbunyi. Largest male 4 inches (64°37 mm.),and female 5 inches(80°45 mm.). Both specimens had reproduced tails. Two ovules 2 inch diameter in females. The type specimen on which the genus was founded as well as the species was collected at Mombasa; another specimen in the British Museum which was examined came from Maziwi, which the label states is between Mombasa and Kagiado, therefore not very far distant from Mbunyi. Yet another specimen has been recorded by Boulenger from Upper Ganali, Juba River. PHELSUMA LATICAUDA (Boettg.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. i. 1885, p. 215. Two males taken at Dar-es-Salaam (10.xi.18) measure 43 inches (59-53 mm.) and 42 inches (59:60 mm.). I should not have got these specimens, which dwell in the tops of the lofty palms, had I not been passing as some natives were cutting branches for thatching ; three specimens were seen but only two captured. These differ from one another in several respects : the first has a median cleft on rostral, absent in the second ; it 140 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON has 9 upper and 8 lower labials. It has three scales: between naso-rostrals, and the dorsal scales are distinctly keeled; in both of which points it differs from the other specimen, which has two scales between the naso-rostrals, and the scales unkeeled on the dorsal surface of tail. Colour-notes in life are: ‘‘ Dark green colour, finely freckled with red on back and base of tail.” It has been previously reported from Nossi Be, Johanna, Farquhar Is., Zanzibar, Comoro Is., Madagascar, but not from the mainland of East Africa. ELASMODACTYLUS TRIEDRUS (Bler.). Blgr. Rev. Zool. Afr. ii. 1913, p. 104, pl. v. fig. 2. Two specimens of this rare Gecko were taken—a male from Kongwa (21.iv.17), measures 53 inches (70°67 mm.); and a female whose locality is somewhat uncertain, though I believe it was taken in the neighbourhood of Morogoro, measures 44 inches (57°57 mm.). AGAMID4. AGAMA COLONORUM (Gray). Blgr. Cat. Liz. i. 1885, p. 356. Thirty-four specimens were obtained at Thika, Gonya, Kongwa, Morogoro, Mkuyuni, Duthumi, and Lumbo. The largest Morogoro male measured 9% inches (121-111 mm., tip of tail missing). largest Morogoro female 11 inches (105°175 mm.), seventeen specimens were collected at Morogoro. Of fourteen specimens coilected at Lumbo the largest male measured 13 inches (116 213 mm.), and female 12 inches (104°204 mm.). Coloration was very variable; the following note was made on a Lumbo male :—‘* Dirty cream or pale grey, with dark brown vermiculations. Dorsal crest pale blue, particularly bright on neck. Head dark brown above, vermiculated with same on sides ; indistinct red stripe from eye to eye: irregular line of a fine brick-red colour originates behind ear and is lost in a large patch of same colour just above fore-leg. Chin vermiculated with rich blue, converging to a blue patch on throat. Belly and under- surface of tail dirty white.” A female was killed at Morogoro on 14 i1.17 with 12 eggs in ovary measuring 15x10 mm. Another was killed on 1.iv.18 with 10 eggs 18x10 mm. Ants of several species, including the fierce little cock-tail species, beetles, large cricket, and millipedes were found in stomachs. Physaloptera was taken in the stomach of this species. This species is very arboreal; if found upon the ground it is usually not far from a tree, to which it flies for refuge. A very large specimen was found partly digested in the stomach of a Hissing Sand-Snake (Psammophis sibilens) at Lumbo (Get S)INS)))5 EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 141 Many specimens are infested with a small acarid (Pterygosoma agame) beneath the ventral scales. A new nematode (Oochoristica agame) * was found in several. AGAMA FLAVICAUDA (Werner). Wern. Zool. Anz. xx. 1897, p. 264. Agama caudospina Meek, Field Mus. Nat. Hist. vii. 1910, No. 11, p. 407. Several specimens in the Nairobi Museum were collected by the writer at West Kenia (23. xi.15). A large male measures 83? inches (100°120 mm.). These specimens were taken in the thatch of a pig-sty, and in an isolated pinnacle of earth where they had taken up their abode in the holes excavated by Sand-Martins, as well as in natural crevices. There are also specimens in the Museum collected by Mr. Allen Turner at Kegamaia, near Mt. Elgon. There can be no doubt that Agama caudospina recently deseribed by Meek from Elementeita, B. E. A., should be relegated to the synonymy of this species. Werner’s s description was based on a single male of unknown locality. Both names are very - descriptive of this species, which is quite unlike any other Agama collected. : AGAMA Lionotus (Bler.). Bler. P. Z.8. 1896, p. 214, pl. viii. Thirteen specimens from Voi, Mbunyi, Longido West, and Dodoma. Was also seen at Kahe and Kongwa; there are specimens in Nairobi Museum collected by the writer near the Kedong Valley. The type specimen from 8.E. of Lake Rudolph, as well as specimens from Mt. Kenia and Ngaya (south of Lake Victoria), B.E.A., which are in the British Museum, were examined. Arranging the specimens geographically from the type locality southwards one finds a marked increase in the scale-rows. Rudolph. M. Type. 65 scale-rows round mid-body. Voi. NevwiGamelG: 03 . Mibmnyis Mor ye. 75 ioncado: wee Mey eel 16.’ 80 iDedomany Mia 7 Sqxa18.). 79 9 F. be) 78 33 39 99 ” M. ” 80 ” ” 5 9 Bp ” 82. ” ” ”? i M. : 87 I draw attention to this for a purpose. These Dodoma speci- mens are strikingly different in life to those collected elsewhere. The throat of the males from other localities was invariably # Baylis, Parasitology, x1. 1919, p. 409. + 3 males examined. 142 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON scarlet in the breeding adults. J was at once struck by the hand- some throats of the Dodoma specimens as they bobbed their heads up and down upon the rocks where they basked in the sun. The throat of these males has a pear-shaped scarlet patch 14 scales wide and 30 to 32 scales long; it is surrounded by a rich navy- blue border 9 scales in width; outside the posterior part of this is a semicircle of scarlet commencing narrowly at base of jaws and widening on the throat. ‘These males are tar larger than the type or any collected elsewhere. Both the largest males measured 114 inches (140150 mm., tails missing), the largest female measured 112 inches (112:°173 mm.). There appear to be no scale characters whereby the Dodoma specimens can be distinguished ; they have a far larger number of scale-rows round mid-body than the type, but as the cross- country series show an intergradation in this character, it appears to be a pity to multiply local races by giving them names. A couple of notes made on Longido specimens are interesting, as they show something of the chameleon-like possibilities of this Agama :— 28. i. 16. ‘‘ Was successful in shooting one of the scarlet- headed, blue-bodied Agamas. As soon as it was put in formalin allthe bright colouring departed, and it became a study in browns.” 2.11.16. “ A brown Agama was basking on a rock, and I killed it very suddenly with a smart blow across the back, causing it to fall over with a little quiver, its back evidently broken. I placed it in a black bag, and on my return to camp was surprised to find its head of a brilliant scarlet and the body bright blue, exactly the reverse of what occurred with a shot specimen a few days ago. It appears probable that all the Agamas hereabouts are only colour variations of the one species.” Of a male shot in the Kedong Valley I wrote, 19. vii. 15: “Shot a brilliantly coloured Agama, head rich brick-red, and the body, more particularly underneath, a vivid ultramarine blue.” All the specimens were found upon rocks and the same type of sandy thorn-bush country. The two Dodoma females contained eggs, the larger having 8 and the smaller 7, measuring 20 x 12 mm. (8. xii. 18). AGAMA VAILLANT! (Blgr.). Blgr. Ann. Mus. Civ. ser. 2, vol. xv. 1895, p. 12. Five specimens in all were obtained, two being from Mbunyi and three from Voi. One of the Mbunyi specimens measured 85 mm. in body, but the tail was mutilated. The largest Voi specimen measured 93% inches (80:170 mm.). Found on reddish sandy soil, their colouring rendering them inconspicuous, AGAMA ATRICOLLIS (Smith). Bler. Cat. Liz. i, 1885, p. 358. Specimens in the Nairobi Museum were collected in the neigh-_ bourhood, where it 1s very common on trees. Two specimens EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 143 collected at Dodomo on thorn-trees appear to belong to this species. They are very small if so, the largest measuring 9 inches (90°140 mm.). Both are males with vermiculations on the throat, which has a blue patch on the basal portion. A female taken at Nairobi (3.iv.15) had 10 eggs in ovary, 20 x 10 mm. ZONURIDS. ZONURUS TROPIDOSTERNUM (Cope). Blgr. Cat. Liz. ii. 1885, p. 252. A single specimen was taken at Makindu (Msiha River) and eleven at Morogoro. ‘The largest male (Morogoro) measured 7s inches (90°90 mm., tip of tail missing), the largest female (Makindu) measured 6? inches (95°75 mm.). These specimens entirely bear out the remarks made by Nieden* after an examination of nineteen specimens from many localities in G.H.A. All the specimens agree with Z. tropido- sternum in the roughness of the head-scales, sand the granular interstices between the flank-seales. All except two agree with tropidosternum in that the fronto-nasal scale is in contaet with the rostral. In these two the nasals separate the fronto-nasal from the rostral, which is the key character for Z. cordylus. No reliance can be placed on the arrangement of the head-scales in this genus as a guide to specific character under these circum- stances. It is rather interesting to note that one of these specimens in which fronto-nasal and rostral are not in contact was taken on the same day with a normal male and female, and not only so, but within a few yards of them, two of the three were seen to emerge from a hole at the base of a wall; the third was killed at the same wall only a short distance from the hole. Two specimens were found in a half-drowned condition in road- side gutters, having evidently been washed out of some retreat by the heavy rains. The favourite haunt appeared to be hollow trees, into whose interiors they would retreat and from which it was difficult to get them. The Makindu female was brought into camp in a hollow log which had been cut for fuel; she had remained while it was chopped down. She had four large eggs in the ovary. Termites were taken from the stomachs of four of the specimens. Parasitic worm (Oocharistica zonuri) proved to be new +. VARANID4. VARANUS XANTHEMATICUS ALBIGULARIS (Daud.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. 11. 1885, p. 307. The only specimen of the White-throated Monitor met with * Nieden, Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berlin, 1913, vii. p. 71. + Baylis, Parasitology, xi. 1919, p. 406. 144 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON was found preserved in a German house at Morogoro. I do not believe it was collected in the neighbourhood. ‘Total length 28 inches (300°410 mm.). VARANUS NILoTICUS (Linn.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. ii. 1885, p. 317. Met with at Gonya, Msiha, Morogoro, Dar-es-Salaam, Duthum1, and Lumbo. At the last-mentioned place I did not see it myself, but heard of it several times, and the probability is that 1t was this species and not the white-throated. The following are the measurements of those obtained :— M. Head and body 554mm. Tail 850mm. Morogoro. 19.1.18. » » 460 », 850 8.1.17. 39 M. ‘ » 407 pH OV Dar-es-S’m. 15. vi. 18. M. at ey watt », 490 Morogoro. 1. iv. 18. F. 3 » 3870 » Oe ee Liv. 18. M. 3 » 230 > oO 35 13.11.18. No} HS “, 1653 » 235 a Q7. iii. 18. It, \ » 142 » 240 Gonya. 29.v. 16. M. a Pe 5 lee 5, 190 Morogoro. 10. iv. 17. M. 5 pp, dlPA0) py LL 7/) 55 liv. 18. 2 . ao ,» 170 i 1. xi. 16. Skin. ,, » 435 » Gal Msiha. 14. yi. 16. In some of the foregoing the tail was missing at the tip. Along the river-bank at Morogoro they were very common, though more often heard than seen. The first intimation that one was in the vicinity would be a rush through the undergrowth followed by a splash. If you were fortunate you might be in time to see the creature emerge on the opposite bank and crawl into its hole. At other points along the river where the banks were high and cliff-like they might be seen basking on some ledge or drawing themselves up with the aid of their powerful claws. A good many were captured alive. The usual procedure was for me to wade down the river, with a native walking through the undergrowth along either bank a little im advance. On the Monitor taking to the water, I remained quiet and watching where it emerged and marked down its hole. We could then dig out the hole until the creature was located at the terminus. The hole would then be closed with the shovel till only a small opening remained, large enough for its head to come through, but not to let the body pass if it madearush. As soon as the head made an appearance, a widely-forked stick would be placed on it by a person standing above and the animal held to the ground. The spade would be pulled away, and a few exciting moments followed as the creature struggled, scratched, and lashed about with its tail. As soon as a favourable moment occurred the tail would be seized with one hand, and with the other (wrapped in a cloth for preference) the Monitor would be securely grasped by the neck and transferred to a sack, EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 145 It is a most awkward creature to handle; not only can it give a severe bite, but a ash from the tail of even a small specimen is severe, owing to it turning the dorsal keel over sideways as it strikes. It makes good use of its claws to scratch when seized, and on this account alone I have dropped Monitors which I had securely by the neck, Hearing that a couple of very large Monitors paid a daily visit to the cook-~house, which was situated at the edge of a bank or slide which sloped steeply down to the river nearly 200 ft. below, I walked along the opposite bank of the river one day. A bell was rung at 12 P.M. each day, and from 12.30 to 1.30 P.M. all is quiet. It is then that the reptiles came up for scraps. Whether the ringing of the bell had any significance for them it would be difficult to say. Whilst walking along the opposite bank I descried one of the lizards lying just below “the top near the cook- house, but hidden from view from anyone on that bank. After crossing the river I scrambled up thirty foot or so of the slide, and found that the Monitor had disappeared. Even as I looked, however, its head appeared over the top of the bank, and I fired at it with a*22 Winchester. The bullet caused it to bound over the bank where it lay quiet, for as it heard the bullet whistle past, if imagined the danger came from above. In its new position it exposed its whole length to me, and I put three bullets into it as fast as I could load; after each it gavea jump, but kept under the bank. Someone, hearing the firing, came to the edge of the bank and looked over, thus disturbing the Monitor, which fled down the bank like a great dog, disappear- ing into some bushes on the brink of a cliff that rose shear from the river forty feet below. I feared that it had gone over this, but my boy retrieved it from the very edge. It was not in the least spoilt by the three bullet-holes, and I had to give it a tremendous dose of chloroform to kill it. The creature was a male and measured 55 inches over all. Its stomach contained meat from the cook-house and crabs. Crabs’ claws on the partly submerged rocks in the river are generally a sign that, Monitors are in the neighbourhood. In the stomach of another specimen I have found the remains of a toad. As is well known, they often come to fowl-houses for the eggs, which seems to be one of their favourite articles of diet. Ticks are commonly found about the anal region of Monitors. A worm, Tanqua tiara (v. Linst), was found in one specimen at Morogoro (6. iv. 18). AMPHISBHZNIDA. Monore.tis cotopura { Bler.). Blgr. Ann. 8. Afr. Mus. v. 1910, p. 495. Of the ten species of Amphisbeenide found in East Africa this was the only one met with by the writer. his is its first record Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1920, No. X. 10 146 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON from the East African coast I believe, as it was described from three specimens collected in Barotseland by the Rev. L. Jalla. Type in the British Museum. A male and half-a-dozen females were taken at Lumbo, P.E.A., between August 20th and October 31st, 1918. The male measured 151 inches (346°44 mm.) and the largest female 192 inehes (440-50 mm.). By Europeans and natives alike this strange creature was called a snake. It is decidedly more like a flesh-coloured worm than a lizard. In life the skin is loose and moves freely over the body ; it is so transparent that one may see the pulsation of blood in the blood-vessels. The scales, which are almost square in out- line, are united in rings around the body. The eye is barely distinguishable as a small black speck. ‘The little white tongue is continually extruded from the mouth after the manner of snakes. he mouth is situated on the lower surface as in bur- rowing snakes (Lyphlops), but not so pronouncedly as in sharks. The rostral shield is enormously developed and spade-like. The tail is abruptly truncated, ending in a bone-like knob or shield, doubtless developed for the same purpose as the terminal shield characteristic of the Indian burrowing snakes of the family Uropeltide. ; Two specimens taken at the end of August contained 4 eggs each; these measured 35x10 mm. and 35x 9 mm. respectively. Another specimen laid 4 eggs either during the night or in the early morning of September 20th. No two of these eggs were of the same size; their measurements in millimetres were as follows :—35 x 8, 32x 8, 309, 26x 9. No trace of food was found in the stomachs of any of the specimens. At 2.15 in the afternoon of September Ist I was called to catch a “snake”; the sun was beating fiercely upon the sand at the time. The “snake” proved to be one of these lizards, which had come to the surface and was wriggling about on the scorching sand. On drawing out the last few inches of the creature which still remained in the sand, the cause of its appearance upon the surface at such an uncongenial hour was apparent. Its vent and tail was smothered in ants of a subterranean species, which I have previously noted will eat a dead body from beneath, but appears to hate the light. At 3 p.m. on September 20th I obtained another specimen under precisely similar conditions, though in this case the lizard was wriggling along the surface of the ground, leaving a trail of ants behind it, while only a few were still clinging tenaciously to its tail. The following morning yet another was brought to me. It had severe hemorrhage in the intestinal region, and died during the day. As it was found above ground, I have no doubt that it was also a victim of the voracious ants. EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 147 LACERTID &. GASTROPHOLIS VITTATA (Fischer). Blgr, Cat. Liz. 11. 1887, p. 7. Two specimens of this scarce lizard were obtained ; both were females, and neither specimen had the long tail intact. The larger was found bottled without data in a German house at Morogoro. Head and body measured 37 lage (83°? mm.). The smaller was taken at Lumbo, and measured 23 inches (67-? mm.) in head and body. Type from Zanzibar in Brit. Mus. LACERTA VAUERESELLI (Tornier). Torn. Zool. Anz. 1902, xxiv. p. 701. Two specimens were obtained. One was shot at Ngong high up on a tree-trunk; as this specimen is in the Nairobi Museum at time of writing I am unable to give its sex or measurements. Ngong Forest edge, 20.1x. 15. The other is a male caught at Parklands Forest edge on 28.ix. 15. It measures 6% inches over all (60°96 mm.) The tail is possibly regenerated. ‘The frontal scale is of equal width along its length, not broader anteriorly. It has nineteen femoral pores on the right leg and eighteen on the left. Nucras Emini (Blgr.). Blgr. Ann. & Mag. N. H. (7) xix. 1907, p. 488. Three specimens were caught in B.E.A. and G.K.A. In each case they were running about in sandy paths or places. Their measurements are as follows :— Male. Kagiado, 28. xii. 15. 6 inches (68°80, regenerated). Female. Bissel, 4.1.16. Gree, ald? Ss arnsem Female. Longido West, 1.11.16. 63 ,, (65. 106 mm.). LarasTIA LONGICAUDATA (Reuss). Blgr. Cat. Liz. ii, 1887, p. 55. Seven specimens in all. A young one at Voi, 17.vi.16.; a half-grown one from Mbunyi, 15. v.16; and five adults, of which four were females, from Dodoma, 8.xii.18. At no other place did I see such fine specimens of this handsome lizard as at Dodoma. Adl three localities were sandy with scattered thorn- bush, beneath which the lizards quickly took cover ; owing to their agility i in so doing. only a few specimens were taken, though the creature was abundant at Dodoma. The largest male measured almost 12 inches (100-202 mm.) anil the largest female 124 inches (95°220 mm.). The male’s tail appears to be intact. One of the Dodoma females had ten eggs In the ovary. Remains of beetles were common in their stomachs ; : one had a grasshopper, whilst another had gorged on a false- spider (Solifugid), and the remains of a false-spider’s jaws were Lo* 148 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON found in yet another lizard. How they manage to eat such an unpleasant mouthful as a false-spider is difficult to comprehend. LATASTIA JOHNSTONI (Bler.). Blgr. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) xix. 1907, p. 292. Sixteen specimens taken in shambas and open patches of waste ground at Morogoro. As Hrenvias spekii was found in the same spots, I had a little difficulty in distinguishing the species when they were running about. JL. johnstoni has a trick, however, of rushing in one direction and then facing about with a little leap, so that it is looking in the direction from whence it came. The tail is also noticeably longer, and has an illusory semi-transparent pinkish effect which disappears after death. It was not nearly so comion as //. spekii and more difficult to catch. Colour notes made during life are as follows :—‘ Ground-colour pale brown. Four parallel cream lines commence at parietals, the outer pair extending forward along outer bordex of parietals to the eyes, posteriorly they converge to form a single dorsal line on anterior portion of tail, An upper pure white lateral line arising in the sub-ocular passes over ear and is lost on tail. A lower pure white lateral line commences in upper labial region, passes through ear and over fore-limb, is interrupted by hind-limb, but re-commences after and merges into the white on underside of tail. Six or more yellow spots on side between upper and lower lines whose continuity they may break, alternating black bars and red blotches on sides. 4th to 8th upper labiais yellow. Throat and underside of body china-white, with a good deal of yellow towards the sides. Limbs mottled and striated.” Largest male 8 inches (64140 mm.), largest female 77 inches (60-140 mim). ICHNOTROPIS CAPENSIS (Gray). Bler. Cat. Liz. 11. 1887, p. 84. One specimen taken at Delagoa Bay, 24.xi1.14. They were not uncommon, darting about the reddish sandy soil among the thorn-bush. Eremias spext (Ginther). Bler. Cat. Liz. ii. 1887, p. 84. Forty specimens were collected at Mt. Siswa (19. vii. 15), Mt. Margaret (21. vii. 15), Voi (17. vi. 15), Duthumi (20. ix. 16), and Morogoro (v. d.). The coloration of this species was as follows :—-‘‘ Ground-colour pale brown. ‘Two cream lines starting from parietals converge to form a single dorsal line just behind an imaginary line uniting the fore-limbs where they join the trunk. This line is Jost on the tail. Single dorso-lateral line commences at posterior border of eyeand merges into the white underside of tail. Single pure white lateral line originating in the sub-ocular and upper labial region EAST AFRICAN LIZARDCS. 149 passes through ear and ends at hind-leg ; in some specimens this line is broken up into short white dashes. Black bars and dashes unite this parallel series of lines, and are also seen to a lesser extent on the anterior part of tail. Sides marked with pale green blotches. Upper and lower labials and under surface of body are china-white.” On December 13th, 1917, four eges were found in a female. A Gerrhosaurus major lizard in captivity was seen to seize and eat one of these Hremias, and while it was so occupied, a Gerrho- saurus flavigularis in the same case came up and tried to take it away. Specimens of this lizard were also found in the stomach of a Harrier (Cirews macrurus), Morogoro, 28.11.18, and in a Kestrel (Cerchneis tinnunculus), Morogoro, 4. xii. 17. In both in- stances there were also lizards of other families in the stomach. HOLASPIS GUENTHERI (Gray) 2 Blgr. Cat. Liz. 111. 1887, p. 118. During an action at Matombo, 3.ix.16, I saw what I believe to be this hzard coming down the trunk of a large tree. It was a handsome creature with a blue tail and good deal of blue about the back. On breaking camp two days later I again passed this tree, and left the road to inspect. As I rode upI caught sight of the lizard running up the trunk. As no specimen was collected I cannot be sure of the species, however. GERRHOSAURIDS. GERRHOSAURUS MAgoR (A. Dum.). BlersCaty lize, LSS oso. (21 Seven specimens inall were collected; their variations can best be shown in the following table: Index 7 : Measurements : ‘ é bei letter, ©X- Locality. “T° ¢ B., Tail. Colour, Scale characters. (a)... M. Lumbo. 240-315 Fulvous brown. Fronto-nasal not in cou- tact with rostrat (0) ceo 295 3 240-235 3 3 in contact with rostral. (c) ... M. Morogoro. 175-250 3 os rb " (@) coo NE . 200-267 Dark brown, on not in con- spotted yellow. tact with rostra:. (je Ee A 200-260 a r ees Gane KF, ” 142-172 29 tb) oH) by) F Dodoma. 210-217 2 cE) 7) 23 (9) «.. Tt will thus be seen that all the specimens with the exception of “b” and “c” disagree with one of the specific characters of G. major in that the fronto-nasal scale is not in contact with the rostral. The Lumbo specimens were taken at almost the same 150 MR. A, LOVERIDGE ON spot, and are obviously the same species. All the specimens agree in having 10 longitudinal ventral scale-rows, 17-19 longitudinal dorsal seale-rows, and 34 transverse dorsal scale-rows. The colour and scale-character key given by Schmidt * breaks down for the specimens (d) to (y), which, according to the key, would fall under Gerrhosaurus grandis (Blgr.) of Zululand, Both the Lumbo specimens were taken from holes in termite heaps; m one instance two mungoose (Herpestes ivori) were occupying the same burrow, all three creatures being found huddled together at the end of the hole. Nearly all the Moro- goro specimens were taken among the rocks bordering the river at the south side of the town. The Dodoma specimen was taken on a rocky kopje in desert country. The examination of the stomach of one of the Lumbo specimens revealed small beans and grass with a single leg from a_ beetle. As already mentioned, one captive specimen seized and ate a lizard (Hremias spekii). From one of the Lumbo specimens five tapeworms were removed, each about a foot long. GERRHOSAURUS NIGROLINEATUS (Hallow). Bler. Cat. Liz. iii. 1887, p. 122. Specimens possibly belonging to this species, and certainly referable to it according to the key and descriptions in. the ‘Catalogue of Lizards,’ have been placed under G. flavigularis (Gray) for veasons stated below. GERRHOSAURUS FLAVIGULARIS (Gray). Blgr. Cat. Liz. iii. 1887, p. 122. A large series of Gerrhosaurus of this group were collected at Nairobi, Moschi, Morogoro, Mkuyuni, Dar-es-Salaam, and Lumbo. Also seen at Gonya, Handeni, and Kerogwe. In his admirable paper on the ‘‘ Herpetology of the Belgian Congo,” Schmidt? suggests that all South and East African species of this group should be known as flavigularis flavigularis ; whilst he proposes to retain the name of nigrolineatus for the West African ferms which have a preponderance of nigrolineatus characters, these to be known as flavigularis nigrolineatus. The key which he applies for the distinguishing of the two races is as follows :— CC. Tympanic shield narrow; a dorso-lateral stripe ; dorsals in 5A—64, trANSVEISe LOWS ©2000. 22.000 -ccececereereretteter sees. jfravigularis. D. Dorsal scales in a transverse row 20-26, mode 22 (South and TBhaeie UNGAR) casopassnadoces oppmac sg oon ioder save soaccacweses | MOS IDs sana MUEH IS: DD. Dorsal scales 24-28, mode 26 (Angola, Lower Congo). subsp. nigrolineatus. In our series of thirty-nine specimens only three have 24 scale- * Schmidt, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. xxxix. 1919, p. 519. AA be EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 151 rows, twenty-six specimens have 22 scale-rows, and ten have 20 scale-rows. This character of flavigularis seems, therefore, a good one by which to differentiate Hast African forms. In twenty-nine specimens examined by Nieden he found only three specimens with more than 24 dorsal scale-rows. If we apply the relative position of the head-scales to the present series thus, Preefrontals in contact forming a long suture ....... icsseeee. Nigrolineatus, Przfrontals separated, fronto- nasal touching frontal cee flavigularis, we find no less than twenty-nine of the ee would be referable to nigrolineatus, only five to flavigularis, whilst five are intermediate in that the prefrontals are only barely in contact. As has just been pointed out in the case of Gerrhosaurus major, the relative position of these head-scales as a specific character is of but little use in this genus. If the character of the number of femoral pores be applied, Hemoraliporese) Axor miOne es a seeee eee. ce: senor eeeeeenee see eee ee nILeO RO LUILEILALS isiterrnvonen| jayoueelss 1S} OP MAIS 35 aco ong snaceodea sen onnsne sanceodsass sos0ss00;s00 jen BCeICHGTROR, we shall again find that the large majority of the lizards are referable to nigrolineatus. Not having had the opportunity of going into the matter more thoroughly or examining Central and West African series of these lizards, I do not like to express an opinion, but where both nigrolineatus and flavigularis ave found overlapping in ‘so many localities it seems a pity not to unite them as a single species. The largest: male taken measured 183 inches (156°311 mm.,), the largest female 172 inches (137°305 mm.). The coloration of the young specimens was generally more vivid than in the adults. The following colour notes were made on capturing a young speciman at Lumbo :—- “ Centre of back occupied by broad chocolate-brown band, bordered on either side by a black line one scale in width, on the outer side of which again. is a sea-green or yellowish line. Both lines disappear about half-way along tail. Sides vertically streaked with black and sea-green, usually two of the former to one of the latter. Belly white with er eamy tinge. Fore-legs brown, mottled black and sea-green, hind-limbs spotted with pale yellow. Tail brown with indistinet markings except on the basal portion where the markings of the back persist.” Adult males show a great deal of red or pink laterally on body and tail ; this disappears usually in preserved specimens. At Morogoro (4.1.17) a female was taken with four white egos in ovary; these measured % inch long. A young male 83 inches in length was taken at the same place (19.1.17). Of this specimen a note was made:—‘“ No gaudy markings; the yellow lines are pale almost to whiteness and the black marks are unnoticeable except by close examination.” ‘ 152 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON Grasshoppers were the chief article of diet ; there was the one interesting attempt to take a lizard (Hremias spekii) out of the mouth of its larger relative (G@. major) already noted. At Morogoro (7.1.17) an 18-inch specimen was eaten by a Sand-Snake (Psammophis sibilans). At the same place (28.1. 18) a young one was taken from the stomach of a Harrier (Circus macrurus). At Dar-es-Salaam (24. vi. 18) a Kingfisher (Halcyon orientalis) was shot, in whose stomach was found a Gerrhosaurus measuring 91 mm. in length. ! ScINCIDA. MABUIA MACULILABRIS (Gray). Blgr. Cat. Liz. 111. 1887, p. 164. Only four specimens of this lizard were taken. One from Mombasa, two from Morogoro, and one from Duthumi; the latter measured 9% inches (73°178 mm.), whilst the larger Moro- goro specimen measured 94 inches (89°152 mm.). MABUIA BREVICOLLIS (Wiegm.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. ii. 1887, p. 169. Six specimens taken at Kagiado (28. x11. 15) and Longido West (1.16). Of these, the Longido specimens were all young ones, which 1 caught one by one as they emerged from their refuge in a termite heap. They measured 44 plus 41 mm., 43 plus 43 mm., 43 plus 40 mm., 43 plus tail (injured). In these young specimens the markings are very distinct and the side stripes are continued across the back, uniting with their fellows on the opposite flank. In a half-grown specimen from Kagiado measuring 65 plus 71 mm. there is an interruption by an unmarked scale-row along the dorsal median line. In the adult from the same locality the markings have receded to the flanks, where they are just distin- guishable. This specimen measures 8% inches (130°83 mm., tip missing), and is an almost uniform dark brown. Both the Kagiado specimens were taken on the same termite heap from whose openings they emerged. The adult is infested with acarines on the ventral scales. MABUIA MEGALURA ( Ptrs.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. iii. 1887, p. 195. A large number were collected at Nairobi, one at Longido West, and sixteen at Lumbo. Of the latter. the largest male measured 8 inches (55:145 mm.) and the largest female just over 112 inches (65°235 mm.). Colour during life as follows :— “‘ Above pale bronze. (97°80 mm.). 5, probably reproduced. % 55 5 7t ,, ( 95°90 mm.). PING te A an Female 74 ,, (10684 mm.). », probably reproduced. Average of 50 Lumbo specimens 52 inches (80°61 mm.). Tails intact and reproduced. The 50 Lumbo specimens consisted of 23 males and 27 females, so that the proportion of the sexes is fairly equal; all were collected in an area under 300 square yards. The variability of the coloration of this species almost bafiles description. The tendency in Morogoro specimens was to be heavily spotted with black on a ground-colour of purplish brown, a very handsome form. The Lumbo specimens inhabiting a sandy soil were more often of a light brown colour. Notes made at the time read: ‘“ Very variable. Usually plumbeous above and dirty white below. Underside of tail as often mottled as not. Some specimens mottled all over upper surface with black and white; black spots oblong, white spots round or oval. Others again are plain above, but mottled on the sides and tail.” The uniform dirty white of the under surface is noticeable in these Lumbo specimens when compared with those obtained at Moro- goro, which are generally mottled on the under surface of head and body as well as tail. Three females were found with developing eggs :—(i.) 2 eggs 7x6 mm; (ii.) 4 eggs 12xX8 mm.; (ill.) 4 eggs 15x8 mm. All Lumbo (three very young specimens taken) :—(i.) Morogoro, 1.11.18, 76 mm.; (ii.) Lumbo, vii. 18, 85 mm.; (i1.) Morogoro, Ib mn Ike, DIL sean Freshly emerged bluebottles were more often found in their stomachs than any other food; specimens from the incinerator afore-mentioned were particularly well fed on these. Bluebottle pupee were also found. Pupz and ordinary flies (Muscide), beetle, lizard’s tail, lizard’s scales. The two specimens found with lizard remains in their stomach had probably been feeding on Ablepharus wahlhergi, which was abundant in the same patch of ground. Natives always kill these inoffensive creatures, supposing from their snake-like aspect that they are poisonous. EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. We7r LycGosoMA FERRANDII (Bler.). Blgr. Ann, Mus. Gen. (2) xviii. 1898, p. 718. Seven specimens in all; six of these from Longido West have been examined by Mr. Boulenger and referred to this species. The measurements are as Rolla cs: though almost all the speci- mens have reproduced tails :— Dodoma. Female 91:36 mm. Longido. Male 56:46 mm. Longido. Male 90:40 mm. as oO) mm. Re $ 62°62 mm, A Bag ASS miagine _ oe 59°59 mm, The 118 mm. specimen was caught under rather unusual conditions. After a night of heavy rain I was summoned at 6 A.M. to the tent of one of the sergeants to see a small snake (Lycophidium jacksoni) labouring to swallow this Skink. It was the only snake of this species captured. Another man told me that he had killed a snake with tiny legs in his blankets; on the battered remains being produced it proved to be this species. The other specimens were all obtained under stones. These Longido specimens are of a uniform nut-brown colour above, creamy or yellowish beneath. ABLEPHARUS BOUTONI Var. PERONII (Coct.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. 111. 1887, p. 347. Seventy-one specimens collected at Mombasa, Dar-es-Salaam, and Lumbo. This little lizard has adopted a marine life; it is a remarkable sight to see it running over the rocks, which a moment before were washed by waves; for company it has the peculiar fish Periophthalmus and crabs of many species. It flies before the incoming wave and presumably manages to avoid a wetting. It seeks refuge when pursued in the many crevices of the rock. It is extremely agile and difficult to capture. Measurements of the largest specimens from each locality :— Mombasa. Male 3 inches (42°35 mm.). Tail regenerated. es Female 43 ,, (43°60 mm.). Dar-es-Salaam. Male 43 ,, (45°70 mm.). i Female 43 4, (47°65 mm.). Lumbo. Male 42 ,, (4862mm.). Tail regenerated. Female 3¢ = ,, (50°46 mm.). Coloration very variable. Some Lumbo specimens, both young and old, almost black, but underlying markings usually dis- tinguishable on close examination. Greenish or olive- bronze ; two light lateral (almost dorsal) stripes start at nostril. Upper surface of tail marked with white dots in lines; these were absent on regenerated tails. The Dar-es-Salaam specimens were much more brown or copper y> and with the markings more distinct than in the Lumbo specimens. Five females collected at Dar-es-Salaam (11.iv.18) had each dr 99 be) 158 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON two eggs in ovary; four of these batches were in an early stage of development and almost round, measuring 5 mm., 5 mm., 9 mm., and 11 mm. in diameter; in the fifth were developing embryos, which measured 11 x 6 mm., and were oval in shape. Sea-slaters 10 mm. in length were found in the stomach of a 102-mm. specimen ; sandhoppers 9 mm. in length in the stomach of a 107-mm. specimen. It seemed extraordinary that the lizards could swallow such large prey. Flies were found in the stomachs of a good many. A Tapeworm measuring 32 min. in length was found along with the sea-slaters in the stomach of the 102-mm. specimen just referred to. ABLEPHARUS WAHLBERGII (Smith). Bler. Cat. Liz. ui. 1887, p. 350. Eighty specimens were collected at Nairobi, Longido West, Morogoro, Mkuyuni, and Lumbo. The largest male was from the last locality, measuring 4 inches (40°59 mm.), though another specimen with renewed tail measured 2 mm. longer in the body. Largest female was from Mkuyuni and measured 42 inches (43°67 mm.). The coloration of Lumbo specimens was as follows :—‘ Pale copper above, reddish tinge on tail. Dark copper band commen- cing at nostril, passes through eye, above fore-legs, and along side to hind-legs, where it disappears. A few irregular white lines in region of ear originating in white upper labials. Belly and under- side of tail a transparent brick-red.” This reddish appearance of tail was only seen in specimens collected after the middle of September; it may be a sign of the breeding-season or again of locality, for most of the specimens collected between July and September were collected at a different spot. The Nairobi and Morogoro specimens were much darker in colour, bronze rather than copper. The species frequents grassy places, particularly where there is much garbage or fallen leaves. They apparently prefer moist spots beneath trees ; large numbers were discovered in uprooting stumps and clearing the ground for making camps. Two females collected in Oetober 1918 at Lumbo had each two eggs measuring 6 X 2 mm. in ovaries. ‘Two females collected at Mkuyuni (1.ix.16) and Morogoro (1.11. 18) had each six eggs measuring 7 x 4 mm. and 9x 5 mm. respectively. Principal food was white ants; a fly, beetle larva, and field cockroach were also taken from the stomachs of specimens. A specimen caught at Handeni (27.vi.16, lost in transit) by the neck whirled its tail round very rapidly, and then making it suddenly rigid, caused it to break off; the tail exhibited con- siderable vitality, wriggling and jumping about for some time. One of these lizards was found in the stomach of an Egret (Bubuleulus ibis) at Morogoro (14. x11.17); as already mentioned, EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 159 seales and a tail fragment, probably belonging to this species, were taken from the stomachs of two Skinks (Lygosoma sunde- valli). Three were found in the stomach of a snake (Chlorophis neglectus), Nairobi (17. vii. 18). SCELOTES EGGELI (Tornier). Torn. Zool. Anz. xxv. 1902, p. 700. Eight specimens of this Skink which was described by Tornier from Usainbara, G.H.A.,were taken at Lumbo in July and August 1918. The coloration during life as noted at the time was as follows :—‘‘ Copper-coloured above, becoming plumbeous on tail ; dirty bluish white below; the two separated by a very dark brown or blackish lateral band, well defined above but merging into the bluish white below. Throat sometimes spotted.” Largest male measured 332 inches (63°32 mm., tail short and regenerated), largest female 44 inches (67°38 mm., also regene- rated). Smaller specimens with uninjured tails show that the tail should equal the length of head and body. In ovaries of two females taken at Lumbo in July 1918 were each two eggs measuring 7 X 5 mm.’ Text-fioure 1. oO Scolecoseps boulengeri. . SCOLECOSEPS, gen. nov. Among the lizards collected at Lumbo were seven specimens of a limbless burrowing Skink referable to no known genus. Generic description. Characters as in Melanoseps, but nostril pierced in the very large rostral, with whose posterior border it is connected by a horizontal cleft, as in Acontias. ; Locality. South East Africa. SCOLECOSEPS BOULENGERI, sp.n. (Text-fig. 1.) Specific diagnosis. Snout conical, strongly projecting, length of the rostral a little more than one-fifth that of the head. Internasals in contact, sometimes very narrowly, separating rostral from fronto-nasal, which is twice as broad as long. Frontal equal to or but little larger than fronto-nasal. Interparietal 160 MR. A, LOVERIDGE ON sub-cordiform, notch towards snout, larger than any other head- shields. Parietals narrow, band-like, narrowly in contact behind apex of interparietal. Two supra-oculars, no supra-ciliaries. Five or six upper labials, first largest, third entering the orbit. Hye distinguishable. Mental very large, its posterior border corresponding with the suture between rostral and first upper labial, Scales hexagonal, broader than long, in eighteen longitudinal rows at mid-body, in thirteen rows at base of tail. Anal divided. Tail less than half the length of head and body, ending in obtuse point. Body flesh-coloured, with eighteen longitudinal brown stria- tions corresponding with the scale-rows. Snout paler above and beneath, more or less free from mottlings. Tail darker by reason of convergence of thirteen striations, in some specimens almost blue-black. Reproduced tail-tips flesh-coloured or white and extraordinarily like snout. Type locality. Site of British camp at Lumbo, which is situated on the mainland three miles from Mosambique Island, P.H.A. Measurements of specimens collected :— (a) Male. 90°16 mm. ‘Type in British Museum. (6) Female. 65°25 mm. Type in British Museum, (c) Male. 80°20 mm. (d) Female. 95°-41mm. 4 eggs in ovary, 11. vu. 18. (e) ry 95:25 mm. (Ff) 39 92-43 mm. (9) ees 61-24 mm. ANELYTROPIDA. FEYLINIA CURRORI (Gray). Bler. Cat. Liz. 11. 1887, p. 431. A single specimen of this aberrant Skink was found in a bottle in a German house at Morogoro. It measured 4 inches (92:10 mm.). CHAM ZLEONTIDA. CHAMALEON GRACILIS (Hallow). Bler. Cat. Liz. 11. 1867, p. 448. A single male from Longido West (22.11. 16) measures 7? inches (100-96 mm.). Colour during life:—“ Pale green, with dark green saddle-like markings bordered by black spots.” Jmmediately after death “pale green became dark, dark green became pale, black spots turned orange.” The creature was blind in one eye when found, having suffered some accident to the eye. CHAMLEON DILEPIS (Leach). Bler. Cat, Liz. 111. 1887, p. 450. Collected at Voi (6.v.16) and Mbunyi (10. v.16) in B.E.A,, EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 161 at Gonya (29.v.17) and Morogoro (1916-1918) in G.H.A., and Lumbo (1918) in P.H.A. Specimens which I believe to belong to this species were taken at Tsame, Handeni, and Msiha in G.H.A.., but were lost in transit. Over 90 specimens were collected in all. Many of the Morogoro specimens might be referable to Ch. dilepis isabellinus (Giinther), but as there is a good deal of intergradation, and sub-specificity of isabellinws is somewhat doubtful, I refer them all to Ch. dilepis. The following are some of the measurements :— Female. Voi. Snout to tail 73 in.(142:115 mm.). Female. Mbunyi. pe 9F5 ,, (130°100 mm.). Male. Gonya. %, 65 ., (90°80 mm.}, Male. Morogoro, r 133 ,, (largest of 23 speci- mens). Male. 55 © ll ,, (138°144 mm., average of 23 specimens). Female. A 3s 143 ,, (largest of 26 speci- mens). Female. a: i 123 ,, (158-161 mm., average of 26 specimens). Both sexes. ye ‘3 111 ,, (148°153 mm., average of 50 specimens). Female. Lumbo. . 113 ,, (145-140 mm., average of 13 specimens). At Morogoro the sexes were very evenly balanced, but at Lumbo no males were taken at all; thirteen females were taken between July and October. The number of eggs produced at a time is enormous. The Voi specimen (6.v.16) contained 44; the Mbunyi female (10. v. 16) 28; at Morogoro between end of February and early in March the largest number of eggs found were 48, 44, 43, and 40 respectively. These eges when nearly ready for laying are almost spherical, and measure from 9-10 mm. in diameter. On January Ist, 1917, after very heavy rains, the sun shone out brightly. I took two very young chameleons on shrubby growths not more than a foot from the ground and quite half-a- mile away from each other. These young have a ridiculous appearance, the head being out of all proportion to the body ; the occipital lobes are scarcely developed ; their coloration was much brighter than in the adult. Both measured less than 3 inches; other very young ones were taken in February and March. Oviposition takes place between March and June apparently, which coincides with the rains; no enlarged ovules were found after April at Morogoro, or in the thirteen Lumbo females which were collected between July and October. The chief diet of the species is grasshoppers; I have also seen a captive specimen take a large black field-cricket. The following have been found in their stomachs :—Cockroaches, a praying Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. XI. a 162 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON mantis, flies, bluebottles, rose-beetles, a fairly large scarab, remains of many species of smaller beetles, and a millipede. Other finds which can scarcely be classed as articles of diet include portions of the chameleon’s own cast skin, half a nutshell which was pro- bably too bulky to pass out, and in a specimen which was found dying there were four fragments of mica—three pieces measured 8x9 mm.and one 8x11 mm.; doubtless all had split off from one piece which had adhered to the chameleon’s tongue when it was feeding. During a shortage of insects I fed strips of Bulbul flesh toa chameleon ; it took them readily enough, but afterwards disgorged them again. I rarely found these chameleons on bushes, but usually met with them crossing the road ; several of them were taken ascending the trunks of trees. Their movements are sedate, and each step appears to be well meditated before being taken. They sway gently from side to side when walking. When molested or picked up, it assumes the policy of frightfulness: the occipital lobes are raised, the mouth gapes widely to show the red interior, the throat is dilated so that the orange-coloured interstitial skin is seen between the black scale-rows, and a startlingly sudden lunge forward is made—sometimes an actual bite if the creature is sufficiently enraged. The teeth are blunt and conical, and only once on the many occasions on which I have been bitten have I known this species to draw blood. The native has a holy horror of them, and even boys who will capture and handle the most venomous snakes, cannot bring themselves to touch an uncanny chameleon. “It spits at you,” they say, “and cannot you see it has a bad eye?” This superstition is shared by the uneducated Dutchman. JI recollect on. one ‘occasion, when the column halted for ten minutes one day, I picked up a chameleon, which truly horrified a young Dutchman beside me: he implored me to putit down. His argument was: “‘ They are poisonous, because if you put some pipe-oil in their mouths they will die. You can always tell a poisonous snake by this test, for the harmless species are not affected by the oil.” He told me he knew of a woman who died from a chameleon bite. I put my little finger into the chameleon’s mouth, and let it chew vigorously for a few seconds so that its teeth marks could be plainly seen. He said it was evidently a young one, and was not the least disturbed in his beliefs. Their only enemies at Morogoro as far as I know were the Boomslangs (Dispholidus typus). On four occasions I found or heard of these snakes falling out of trees with a chameleon: the chameleon is evidently an awkward mouthful. I fed chameleons to captive Boomslangs and the snakes took them, but not before there was a contest between them; the chameleons went through the frightfulness tactics already mentioned, which caused the snakes to start back. A large brown Boomslang was shot at Lumbo with a chameleon in its stomach. EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 163 No parasites were found in the stomachs of any of the speci- mens examined. CHAMELEON DILEPIS ISABELLINUS (Giinth.) ? Giinther, P. Z. 8. 1892, p. 556. As already stated, many of the Morogoro specimens might be referred to this subspecies ; so it is with considerable hesitation I apply this name to a female from Gulwe (28.iv.17) measuring 101-101 mm. and a female from Dodoma (8. xii. 18) measuring 105°106 mm., which, while typically isabellinus, I believe might find their counterpart in the long series of seventy specimens collected at Morogoro. CHAMELEON BITENIATUS (Fisch.). Blgr. Cat. Liz. i. 1887, p. 452. Hight specimens were collected at Longido West (ii. 16) and on the Longido-Moscehi trek. Colour in life:—“ Light brown or khaki; a light lateral stripe commencing at the eye disappears towards the base of the tail; a lower stripe commencing on the upper labials continues along the side to the hind-leg; two small saddle-like markings on anterior part of back were of an ochre tint, and there were three blotches of the same colour connecting the upper and lower stripes.” Six of the eight specimens were females, the largest measuring 64 inches (88°78 mm.), largest male 52 inches (75:68 mm.). Four of the females contained eggs, from seven to tenin number. The largest were 7 mm. in diameter. Probably they would be laid in March. a CHAMELEON H@HNELII (Steind.). Steind. Sitz. Ak. Wien, 1891, p. 307. There are several examples in the Nairobi Museum of this chameleon which were collected by the writer at Kabete (20. ii. 15) and West Kenia (23.xi.15). The largest male from the last- named locality measures 85 inches (110-100 mm.) and the largest female 52 inches (73°63 mm.). The size of the casque in these ‘Specimens varies a good deal. CHAMZLEON JACKSONI VAUERESCECE (Tornier). Torn. Zool. Jahrb. Syst. xix. 1903, p. 176. This is the common Three-horned Chameleon of Nairobi; it differs from Ch. jacksoni (Blgr.) in that the females are three- horned like the males. A very large series was collected at Nairobi in 1915 and 1919. Unfortunately these are not avail- able for the present paper as they are in Nairobi, except four specimens and some notes made on a few of the others. Ly 164 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON Meek, in his paper on the “ Batrachians and Reptiles from British East Africa,’ makes reference to this subspecies under the name of Chameleon jacksoni (Blgr.). He refers fifteen specimens collected in Lukenya Province to this species, yet says: ‘The males are easily distinguished by having the rostral and two occipital horns of about equal length. These cephalic projections on the female are short; the occipital ones are usually very short, in these specimens never more than half the length of the rostral horn.” This is then followed by a table of measure- ments in support of the theory. By occipital he means pre- orbital horns. There is nothing to support this in the series collected at. - Nairobi, of which measurements were taken. Only the measure- ments of eleven specimens are given below, as there is no doubt about the sex of these specimens; measurements were taken of twice this number, but not being available for sexing, they are not taken into account :— Register Number. 379. 6129. 3534. 238. 61381. 6130. 232. 333. 3809. 3253. 4563. Sexdoek eee 3s M. Mey Mee iis as = BN BYR Rs ae Length of head and THOGKF sidcctucdeoodce MUS} HO). Bh 90 65 132 118 117 116 100 £75. Length of rostral 1NVOHIN) by jnoe eoB BMG 00 Ly Wp a7 We ff NK I. Alby BR 1S 5 Length of pre- orbital horn ... 18-17 18 18-17 17 7 Gg) Hs) Das BE 1s Where two lengths are given for the pre-orbital horns it is. because they are of unequal length, and the measurement of the right horn is then given first. It will be seen that the greatest variation is found in the respective horn lengths. In two of the females the rostral and pree-orbital horns are of the same length, as is the case in most males; in one specimen (3809) the preae- orbital horns are much longer than the rostral, whilst in another (4563) the pre-orbitals are like tiny thorns only 1-5 mm. long. One sometimes finds specimens with injured horns apparently in process of being regenerated. Natives are, I believe, often responsible for this condition of affairs. They are very afraid of these reptiles, and so, if a young man has courage enough to seize one of the creatures and cut off its horns with a knife, it is counted greatly to his credit. I believe this is done so that the horns. may be presented to his lady-love to thread on her necklace as proof of his devotion. The largest specimen taken was a female 14/ inches long (132:128mm.). This specimen had also the largest number of eggs, no fewer than forty being found in the ovary; these measured 20x20 mm. (17. vii.19). Thirty-six were found in another EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 165 specimen, whilst the lowest number found was eleven measuring 4x4 mm. (10. v. 15). Most specimens were found during the early rains of March- April 1915, when the following notes were made of the use of the horns in fighting, ete. :— March 31st, 1915; Nairobi.—I have half-a-dozen live chame- leons on branches of Hucalyptus, which are tied to the cords of the electric lights and about five feet from the ground. Whilst sitting at the table writing, I hear d the sound of a moth flapping its wings, and, glancing round, saw a large yellow under- wing (Meenas fullonica 2), twice as large as the common English Yellow Underwing, in one of the Euealyptus branches. Supposing it to have got caught in a spider's web, I seized a killing-bottle ; on reaching the spot, however, I found that it was caught by the right-hind wing by one of the chameleons. Being large and strong it flapped vigorously: the chameleon, biding its time, eulped it down in the intervals between its str uggles until only a small portion of the body of the moth remained to view. Meanwhile, the second chameleon on that branch had been eyeing its companion with evil intent. As soon as it perceived that the captor was in difficulties, it hurried across the intervening twigs, and pausing only to take aim, shot out its tongue and caught’ one of the now feebly flapping wings; having fot this into its mouth, it commenced a tug-of-war jow] to jowl, and thus succeeded am wrenching the whole moth from its companion’s jaws. The poor moth’s “fur” was flying in the air, and the first chameleon’s mouth was woolly with it—this was all the share of the spoils that it was destined to receive. There are three electric-light cords with branches tied to them, and on each are two of these chameleons. More than two are not tolerated; introduce a third, and the two original inhabitants hurry towards it open-mouthed, striding along faster than on any other occasion. As a preliminary to fighting, the opponents face one another, swaying their bodies from side to side; and if the intruder does not turn tail at this and cast himself to the ground, as is generally the case, he is at once attacked. One of the chameleons was very ingenious, placing his chin to the branch, which was of course vertical, so that his rostral and pre-orbital horns point directly downwards; he thus advanced upon the foe as it were with fixed bayonets: by this means he generally succeeded in sweeping his opponent off, but sometimes the latter would seize one of the horns with its fore: foot, and a tussle would begin. They would bite each other hard. and in one instance the one chameleon mounted the other’s back, and digging its claws in continued the attack from this vantage point. So strong was its grip that I had the greatest difficulty in separating the com- batants. Several times have I seen one seize the other’s “arm” in very human fashion, and then butt in with its armoured head. 166 MR. A. LOVERIDGE ON This use of the horns interested me greatly, as I had hitherto regarded the horns as an extravagant growth such as is common in beetles. One chameleon in throwing itself off the branch was injured, and lay on its side; the hind-limbs and tail were paralysed. When put on the branch, it dragged them after it very helplessly. In one minute from the time of its fall the tail and hind-limbs and posterior part of the body were almost white, the rest of the body being dark green verging on black. As it did not recover I chloroformed it three minutes later. April 1st, 1915.—Another of the chameleons fell or threw itself down and was killed; the posterior half of the body went white immmediately, and the creature never stirred again. Sometimes one will jump down six or more times in a single morning, and so I conclude that these two accidents occurred through the ehameleons falling on their backs. When given a grasshopper one of the chameleons held the kicking fore-legs in its “hands” ; another, which was given five ant- lions in succession, made use of its “ hands” in very human fashion for pulling off the gauzy wings which were flapping about its Jaws. uM CHAM#LEON MELLERI (Gray). Bler. Cat. Liz. iii. 1887, p. 472. Two specimens of this giant chameleon were taken. A female at Mkuyuni (31. viii. 17) measured 21 inches (273-261 mm.), and a male at Morogoro (1. x. 18), tail mutilated, 238mm. Hxtruded tongue measured 17 inches. My attention was drawn to the female by the horse-guard, who found it wandering in the grass; its colour then was yellow and green, pale and dark shades of both. Placed under a pot it. became dark green, and then almost black with wrath. Suspended by the tail it would turn, and grasping its hind-legs with its fore- legs, climb up its own tail. Its claws were sharp enough to make my bare arm bleed as it crawled up to my shoulder. The second specimen was brought by a boy who caught it in the hills behind Morogoro; it led well enough in a large cage until a Lemur was introduced into the same cage, which already contained a 12-ft. Python. During the night the Lemur chewed the chameleon’s tail to a rag; the second night I caught it doing the same thing, so chloroformed the chameleon. I was surprised that a creature like a Lemur could tackle so big a chameleon whose bite must be pretty severe. RHAMPHOLEON BREVICAUDATUS (Mats.). Matschie, Sig. B. Ges. Naturf. 1892, p. 107. A female was taken at Morogoro (28. xi.17) measuring 2+ inches (40°16 mm.) over all. It contained five eggs of oblong EAST AFRICAN LIZARDS. 167 shape measuring 9x5 mm. In captivity it took bluebottles readily. RHAMPHOLEON KERSTENII (Peters). Blgr. Cat. Liz. 111. 1887, p. 175. Two females, the largest, Voi (19. vi. 16), measuring 33 inches (62:28 mm.). ‘The other, collected at Gonya (29. v.16), measures just over 3 inches (51:26 mm.). ta stownot vd babulssa een sia Dora: th vanaly siadé Saad dell, (etiee. ‘i dasgsdidone | Letdoivored vids quaviadks gettel add .bebrilase assed bed: wart bane So) le Meleperbi os ooatink add) eroal, ttt) aean ae ae vail eget) ai Duns! paceman: hlvaten % ary wes 1 Fee ae oe) ie sik pederncsitie m0 sevnepuiey bres eaonrh aie “a asia: arse Bi Locnonitaganyabaset ton anad Lay ne, ~ieq sarod gonhltoaet: tadte * noiaee aye. ast voit * Tae waomodenge Premios ara, }? dud :“ilkeqe of yimeasnore ae wRaoney Yo asiteban ior “ie : Paltncres 08 soitibs soo 8 coe eshitieih, Ware ¢ ae outlet vigdites \ ; rea es i ee ‘oak iia ARS ianaens ie alt aw: ytedin obrahesr oii, aobioqes Mreeitae? (aceasta “dB! at esha ire Mata lamebonh-oxor Bate Hts cacy Nigval gk “4 “sabi oniins oct to honest Bus ty adinkey omy att donat’ ot telgir ait oad fine a ce rae eae ahi raiht: Kina’ de sete boven "SAT SUMMERS ASST ELS ath ett ae. basi facet tileix cae F ein ae ah ne Fue 2G Rats initia Sly i Se pe ny: nlseisbane Te ae ORR ABs sitio abe Lies % aye eee oni xs “phresion® A mraneel ; Pia. 8 ee bat dttiais: ‘Bits +45 Ro ee aiion Ww ber au an dots: ei i safings ath y ee Ca ake” atts) oiht) is the A ny Pak: pipiencd Reba hi 1 ‘ f ; f 1} . | at 5. Sarin ek ¢ ru ‘ ? eye ed, is a hi EXTERNAL CHARACTERS OF THE RATEL AND WOLVERENE. 179 14. On the External Characters of the Ratel (JJellivora) and the Wolverene (Gulo)*. By R.I. Pocoog, F.R.S., HZ: [Received April 13, 1920: Read April 13, 1920.] : (Text-figures 14-18.) ConTENTS. Page Bat rear liVi POV Soecanneec conan eee a NPR a eC ese Secon ace Boar LTD Hxternal form Ao OPER ONERE REE nedctotcanaueinc. lel: Meg alent se aoa neler a Een aes ance ICEL The Feet .. Rr ieee nctobon wd tol The Anus and the External ‘Genitalia, Oo aah 2 eee 184 Conclusion .. q PER sna oes, fey Introduction. Writing on Jellivora in 1902 (Zool. of Egypt, Mammalia, p- 245), de Winton remarked :—‘ A glance at the generic names mentioned in the synonymy of the African species will show that great uncertainty has existed as to the true relationship of the animal. Even in the latest text-books it has been placed among the badgers, while in truth it is nothing but a giant weasel modified for digging and quite closely related to /ctonym.” Without admitting the truth of the last proposition, it is unquestionably the case that the majority of authors, judging from the structure of the feet and the general form of the body, followed Gray in ciassifying Mellivora in the group, family, or subfamily, as the case may be, typified by dZeles. De Winton, on the contrary, rejecting the external characters and relying upon the teeth and skull, placed it in the subfamily Musteline, which comprised the following genera :—ZJephitis, Conepatus, Galera, Galictis, Mellivora, Ictonyx, Mustela (now Martes), Putorius (now Mustela), Peecilogale, Lyncodon, and Gulot. It would have been very dificult to define the Musteline, as thus constituted, and de Winton, perhaps wisely, made no attempt to doso. That question does not concern me now. The point to which attention may be drawn is the placing of Jellivora in the same group as Gulo. Although no authors appear to be very clear about the precise position of Gulo, its kinship with Mustela and Martes has been generally admitted. The latest opinion on the subject is that of Mr. G. 8. Miller, who proposed to make it the type of a distinct subfamily, Gulonine, equivalent to the Musteline, Meline, and Lutrine, these four subfamilies comprising the genera of Mustelide of Western Europe (Cat. Mamm. Western Europe, pp. 341 and 432, 1912). * The facts recorded were based upon the examination of fresh material in the Society’s Prosectorium. y+ Weber (Die Saug. p. 537, 1904) followed de Winton in classifying Mellivora and Gulo in the Mustel: ine. LOK 180 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS Text-figure 14, A. Side view of head of Galo. B. Front view of rhinarium of the same. C. Piece of the pinna of the same, showing the bursa, with its anterior lamina (a) turned forwards and its posterior lamina (7) turned back- wards. T). Side view of head of Mellivora. EK. Front view of rhinarium of the same, All figures, except.C, X 3. OF THE RATEL AND THE WOLVERENE. 181 The claim of Gulo to rank as a subfamily may be set aside for the present, but it appears to me that Miller’s guess at the affinities of the genus with J/ellivora, expressed in the following passage, is very wide of the mark. He wrote (op. cif. p. 433) :— “The subfamily Gulonine, consisting of the genus Gulo alone, is well characterised by its peculiarities of skull, teeth, and external form. Though usually regarded as a near relative of the Musteline, the genus more probably finds its true affinities in the African genus Mellivora.” This means that in Muiller’s opinion Gulo is more nearly allied to JMellivora than it is to Mustela or Martes. The main purpose of this paper is to refute that idea. External forn, Apart from being heavily and powerfully built and provided with comparatively short tails, the two genera are quite unlike in shape. Afellivora essentially resembles Meles or Taxidea, beng low on the legs, plantigrade, broad across the back and flat along the spine, the body being rather depressed than com- pressed. The form is that of a terrestrial fossorial beast, without power to leap and with running capacity reduced almost to the Carnivore minimum. ‘The hair is everywhere short, sleek, and coarse. Gulo stands comparatively high on the legs, is digitigrade, comparatively narrow across the back, and arched along the spine, the body being compressed rather than depressed. The form is that of a terrestrial and arboreal beast, capable of running at some speed and of leaping to a moderate extent. ‘The hair is everywhere, except on the face, soft, furry, and mixed with wool. The Head. The top of the head in JMellivora is high and arched ; in Gulo it is low and flat. (Text-fig. 14, A, D.) The tufts of facial vibrisse are alike in the two genera in the sense that they are the same in number and _ position as in typical predatory Carnivores like the Canide, Viverride, Mungotidz, and most Mustelide. (Text-fig. 14, A, D.) The rhinariwm of Mellivora recalls that of Jeles in having a well-defined area encircling the nostrils below and laterally, although this area is considerably shallower than in that genus. Also it is not continued inferiorly as a philérwm dividing the upper lip. In Gulo the rhinarium is like that of Canis, being continued inferiorly as a distinct philtrum dividing the upper lip, and the nostrils are encircled laterally by an area of naked nm) skin continuous with the philtrum in front. (Text-fig. 14, B, E. The external ear in Mellivora has been described as absent The truth is that there is no definite laminate pinna standing away from the head, the cavities of the ear being merely 182 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS surrounded above and behind by a thickening of the integument. The supratragus (plica principalis) is a simple oblique ridge, the tragus, antitragus, and other inferior ridges are hardly apparent and there is no trace of the bursa (text-fig. 14, D). In Gulo the ear is quite normally developed, the pinna standing away from the head as a mobile lainina. The cavity of the ear is larger than in Mellivora, the supratragus is a larger ridge with a semiglobular thickening, the tragus and antitragus and the normal ridges in- ternal to them are well defined, and the bursa is well developed, its posterior wall consisting of a semioval lamina arising behind the margin of the pinna (text-fig. 14, A, C). The Feet. The fore foot of Mellivoraw is provided with long, powerful, blunt fossorial claws The digits are short and unevenly spaced, Text-figure 15. A. Lower side of right hind foot of Mellivora. B. Lower side of right fore foot of the same. xz the distance between 1 and 2 being considerably greater than the distances between the others. Digits 2, 3, and 4 are rather tightly tied together by webbing, which extends more than half- way along the digital pads. Digit 5 has more freedom of movement. ‘The plantar pad isa large, irregularly semicircular mass, with its four elements ill defined. It is followed by two carpal pads separated from it by a deep groove. The external carpal pad is a large mass; the internal is much smaller and Text-figure 16, OF THE RATEL AND THE WOLVERENE,. 183 differs in its smoothness from the rest of the pads, which are coriaceous. The whole of the under side of the foot back to and including the carpal pads is hairless. (Text-fig. 15, B.) =/ Zig Ss NO BF SZ G Yl: ZG Z seas YP yi fff, LL Ly Cy SEZ The hind foot, allowing for its greater length, greater narrow- ness, and short claws, is very similar to the fore foot; but the pads of digits 3 and 4 are fused proximally, and there is a single large metatarsal pad, narrower behind than in front and extending along the middle line half-way between the plantar B. Lower side of right fore foot of the same. A, Lower side of right hind foot of Gulo. Xt. x}. 184 MR. R. I, POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS pad and the heel. Its posterior edge is ill defined and the integument of the foot behind it is naked and wrinkled. (Text- fig, 15, A.) The feet* of Gulo are totally different. Except that the fore foot is shorter and broader and is provided with carpal pads, the two are very much alike and may be described together. The digits are longer than in J/edlivora, and are tolerably evenly spaced and widely separable; the pollex and halluxsare relatively less reduced than in Mellivora and the webs tying the digits together are wide, and the middle of the edge of each is approximately on a level with the proximal end of the digital pads, which are well defined, oval in shape, and, like the plantar pads, coarsely striate. The claws are alike in size and shape on the two feet, being moderately long, curved, and sharp. The plantar pads are much reduced antero-posteriorly. The four so-called interdigital elements are well defined and connected by narrower strips, the whole forming an irregularly shaped, curved, transverse band, the concavity of the curve facing the carpus and tarsus. The median largest element of this pad has its anterior edge emar- ginate. Some distance behind the plantar pad on the fore foot there are two small, reniform, carpal pads, the outer as large as a bean, the inner as large as a pea. The digital and plantar pads are to a great extent overlapped by hair and the carpal pads are entirely concealed; but there is no trace of a metatarsal pad on the hind foot. Except for the pads the whole of the under side of the feet is covered with hair, which on the digits and webs and behind the plantar pad is soft and woolly; but on each side of the carpus and along the inner side of the metatarsus the hairs are coarse and form a stiff bristly brush. (Text-fig. 16, AG Be) The Anus and the External Genitalia. The anus in Mellivora is sunk in the centre of a circular area of radially corrugated skin which folds over it and conceals it, the upper and lower margins of this area meeting to forma transverse rima—the condition very closely resembling that of the Mungotide. The two anal glands are of great size, and discharge copiously a suffocating fluid exactly as in the Skunks (Mephitis, Conepatus), Zorilles (Ictonyx), Grison (Grisonia), and Teledu (/ydaus) (text-fig. 17, A, B). In Gulo the anus is super- ficial and not insunk, being merely surrounded by an area of naked skin as in Canidee, Felidee, and the majority of Carnivora. The anal glands are of normal size+, and discharge a yellow fluid, the odour of which is musteline, but not so pungent as in the Polecat (ustela putorius). The anal and genital region in Mellivora is naked or scantily hairy ; in Gulo it is thickly furred. Gulo. * Boas (Zool. Anz. xxxiv. p. 532, 1909) figures the hind foot, stripped of hair, of + Gray’s statement that they are absent is wrong. OF THE RATEL AND THE WOLVERENE. 185. Text-figure 17. A. Anal area of Mellivora 3, with the root of the tail above, showing the closed orifice of the anal sack. B. The same partly dissected to show tbe anal glands. a.s., anal sack spread open with a bristle passed through the duct of the anal gland and emerging at the side of the anus; a.g., anal glands, on the right side entire, on the left side opened to show the reservoir and the bristle; sc., scrotum. The penits.—In both the genera the prepuce, as in all Mustelide, is situated far in advance of the scrotum, and the penis is pro- vided with a long stout baculum. In Mellivora the baculum * * This bone was described by Gilbert (Morph. Jahrb. xviii. p. 817, 1892). I redescribed and figured it in 1918 (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9) i. p. 311, figs. c-m p. 309). The baculum of Gulo was figured and described by Pohl (Jena Zeitschr. xlv. p. 385, 1909). 186 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS is relatively short and stout, very thick at its proximal end, and grooved throughout its length below. The apex is sharply upeurled and transv ersely expanded. into a hollowed, somewhat basin-shaped disk, the rim of which is interrupted in front by a channel, which is continued as a groove down the front of the upeurved termination of the bone. This structure is perfectly symmetrical in all its parts. (Text-fig. 18, B, E.) Text-figure 18. A. Anal and genital area of Gulo 9; a., anus with orifice of anal gland on each side; v., vulva. B. Lateral view of penis of Mellivora. C. The same of Gulo. D. Front view of the tip of the baculum of Gulo. EK. The same of Vellivora. In Gulo the baculum is relatively long and thin, without any thickening at its proximal end and grooved beneath only at its distal end, where it is gradually and lightly upcurled and decidedly compressed. The apex bears a short, moderately high, com- pressed, longitudinal crest, beneath which is a pair of short, condyle-like processes separated by a deep cleft continuous with the groove behind them. These processes are not symmetrical and the crest is not upright. (Text-fig. 18, C, D.) OF THE RATEL AND THE WOLVERENE. 187 The vulva.—I have no notes on the female generative organs of Mellivora; but in Gulo the vulva is a naked piriform pro- minence a little below the anus, from which it is separated by a band of hair, and the orifice is a vertically elongated slit. (Text- fig. 18, A.) Conclusion. From the characters above described it is evident that there is no particular resemblance in any respect between JMellivora and Gulo. The differences, on the contrary, are profound. Miller’s suggestion, therefore, of kinship between the two genera must be dismissed, and it appears to me that the evidence on _ this head supplied by the skulls confirms that of the external characters here discussed. To what genera of Mustelide, then, are Gulo and Mellivora related? Gulo, in my opinion, might be described broadly but with much truth as a gigantic heavily-built Marten (J/artes). I can find nothing in thestructure of the skull and teeth opposed to the view that these two genera are related, and tolerably closely related*. There are also no differences of moment between them in the structure of the ear, of the rhinarium, of the upper lip, of the anus, and of the external genitalia ; and the feet of Gulo are little more than broad, short editions of those of Martes tT, the claws, pads, disposition of the digits, hairiness of the soles, etc., being strikingly alike in the twoanimals. Finally, it does not appear to me that Gulo differs much more from Martes than Martes differs from J/ustela or Vormela, the three genera which constitute the subfamily Musteline as defined in Miller’s volume. If this be true, the subfamily Gulonine can hardly be considered a defensible group. Mellivora is much more difficult to classify. The position assigned to the genus by authors will depend upon their views regarding the plasticity of the skull and teeth as compared with the plasticity of the ears, feet, and other external organs described in this paper. I cannot agree with de Winton that the genus fs closely related to Jctonywx, and I doubt its near affinity with the South American genus Galera; and although the feet and rhinarium and general form are very like those of Meles, and the pouched anus occurs in both the genera, the structure of the skull and teeth should, I think, exclude Wellivora from a place in the Meline, despite the heterogeneity of that subfamily as constituted in the current text-books. The best way of dealing with the genus at present seems to me to follow Gill in making it the type and sole representative of a special subfamily, the Mellivorine, * The tip of the baculum is also asymmetrical in structure in Martes and Charronia as it is in Mustela. + For figures and descriptions of the feet and ears of Martes martes and M. foina, see my paper on these two species (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1914, pp. 1062-1068). ko Siitinaiiht odd Yo ceniodd Rempenmernts add cl a nlf iia Tey eC eRe rire f EP TTP or see hu xt i 8) nether’ pr *y ‘¥ pers Oe Lc Sa diate Ty th ies he a | R mPR PE 1V5e ‘7 i : Y PAILT GPS aL TT Tee 4 , Ais tape “ ‘ ‘ My et? i 4 r ‘ by ; Pete ef : : Y Ah eet) ‘ | ‘ rhe ‘ ’ a O47 ME RT } uf ’ lynriit, taal Reseeyfe wd ia “peohetigo vi ve er: My aoigell, that ‘Se | | ber ident dere: Bis » ioe! hea Those Slt to Saige ad i ey tbeagt iui a ) Ddinlet ote tere WoW. 2 taht OES ae matt tT. haar Be tay es ae Wb me iit .* Thee ae le isk diay eration bv ped ies | We au Hi mods fe suaitthe Mode haeed Ae erod of 4il 6% Y to, ana: P aerial igi wt Te ie ea ee hy: Bhat awa! lent), valwtten got elt at oye MAAR IY voted! roe ifoutd wiettihe ole) dapla Mateo sae. 2on : yew Er ait ike 7) x ah Lease wy arent gait byt > Lb rarity i iy af Ri ether fa rhty iver twa ‘wits “aah noo a Vik ava " within vinta nad, quit’ inaf sit t)) oat A yeit ; ste LEY 4 aldhaagtah pn het bie be iia ett cig ttf Aca ch oa ios thh: ‘TOM, Asarei ari areiy tiodt moan hesobeliien avorktyie “prt ari igtht ey re craven tr AE ELKY oH toes Diy ia ‘tae ‘eri % wi dogs pd gail x ‘ . ib Aang Lacintes rie brensd toes} rite vot 1 Becaiaes oth bi) vA Mirieay acd tadd aadil “7 aly Dlg age doxterns I acacy aid, an ol dtive ytiah Leet St ae peal kL da Peon OF ‘wil a ia daa ath. dutoddly howe A a) Aili” see tat A ee: {6 elt fian seule fh, looqaarbt ell eat d psa ascot leevouvoy fete see Pantene ali to auintodrits aths eA TR dels. iLicet tH giser HMA EER Hradopiae at i ory fy Fe AEE Wy eh sah 13 at aa Ke: tobe wh tT rd eh rand fetsiy’ tue et Cctbetdige debt. de vith aogu: mee walt ae y iho: op witthtety to saw dead ad Po lofted dgor'or Sit aRF int a tiotdae ast Tt watloPod fin OP atone Hivkorey diy tee Sa we etnies faiigegh # Ty rin atmo HE, Hitya ts ) hy af Bae Leta ae beo We ad Cacafomade eo, alah j ia teh: nid yg) fesgih lith, , “etl tite Gather £ fa er) Piss : 2 grey Ta hws te 1). ree arn ot Bast: aa NCH ROS pg ol iP TRAN rel) eae oe” ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 189 EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. February 10th, 1920. Prof, KE, W. MacBripz, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., read the following Report on the Additions made to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of November and December, 1919 :— NOVEMBER. The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of November were 170 in number. Of these 83 were acquired by presentation, 37 were deposited, 11 were exchanged, 35 were purchased, and 4 were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— 1 Mongolian Wild Horse (Hquus prjevalskit), deposited on November 5th. 1 Lion (felis leo), from Senegambia, purchased on November 8th. 2 Cape Hyrax (Procavia capensis), from §, Africa, purchased on November 10th. A collection from India, including 1 Axis Deer, 5 Indian Porphyrios, 1 Sarus, 2 Common Cranes, 3 Burmese Peafow], presented by David Ezra, on November 4th. A collection of Reptiles from California, including a Desert Iguana (Dipsosaurus dorsalis), a Red-Ringed Snake (Coronella zonata), and a Western Ring-necked Snake (Coronella amabilis), all new to the Collection, presented by Dr. Cecil E, Reynolds. DECEMBER. The registered additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of December were 96 in number. Of these 38 were acquired by presentation, 36 were deposited, 18 were purchased, and 4 were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— 2 Tigers (Melis tigris), $ 2, and one Caracal (Felis curacal), 3, from India, presented by Alfred Hzra, Esq., V.P.Z.S., on December 30th. 1 Spotted-necked Otter (Lutra maculicollis), new to the Collection, from Sierra Leone, purchased on December 23rd. 4 Migratory Hamsters (Cricetulus migratorius), new to the Collection, from Kazvin, N. Persia, presented by P. A. Buxton on December Ist. 6 Mariqua Sun-birds (Cinnyris mariquensis), new to the Collection, from 8. Africa, deposited on December 21sé. 190 PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF ACARI. 2 Sun-Bitterns (Hurypyga helias), from South America, pur- chased on December 16th. 1 Matamata Terrapin (Chelys jimbriata), from the Rio Negros, presented by Dr. A. Bremner. Mr. A. J. Euwes, F.R.S., communicated a letter relative to the condition of the herds of Moose in Yellowstone Park. Mr. D. Seru-Smiru, F.Z.8., read a letter from Messrs. Tullis, Russell & Co., drawing attention to an interesting case of response of Sparrows to colour, in which the birds appeared to be peculiarly attracted to a Paper-making machine when paper of a dark blue tint was being run off. Mr. E. G. Boutencer, F.Z.S., Curator of Reptiles, exhibited living specimens of a remarkable new Land-Tortoise, Zestudo loveridgii, recently discovered by Mr. A. Loveridge in the neigh- bourhood of Dodoma, East Africa, and described by Dr. G. A. Boulenger, F.R.S. This Tortoise differs from all previously described Lind-Tortoises in the carapace being quite flat, in the so-called “shell” being perfectly soft, and in the complete absence of ribs, costal and neural bony plates. Mr. Boulenger stated that quite young examples differed from the specimens exhibited, their carapace being dome-shaped and possessing ribs and all other bones present in previously described Tortoises. In referring to its habits, it was stated that the animal, having been deprived of the protection of a bony “shell,” had taken to living much after the manner of a Lizard, inhabiting holes in the rocks, and that, according to Mr. Loveridge, great difficulty is experienced in extracting the Tortoise from these holes, owing to its habit of distending itself, and thereby wedging itself firmly in the rock-cavity. Mr. F. Marvin Duncay, F.Z.8., exhibited and made remarks on a series of photomicrographs of Acari from the lungs of Macacus rhesus, illustrating the larval, nymph, and adult stage of the Acarid. He stated that both young and adult Rhesus Monkeys appeared to be infected, but so far as his observations had gone, the presence of the Mites in the lungs had in no case been the cause of death. So far eggs had not been observed in the vesicles formed by the presence of the Mites, though serial sections of adult Acarids had shown the egg in an advanced state of development, pointing to the probability of this stage being to) completed within the body of the female. PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF A FEMALE MOLE-FLEA, 191 Mr. R. H. Burne, F.Z.8S., exhibited some skeletons of fcetal Mammals prepared by ‘Tadpoles, and drew attention to the possible advantage of such a method over the more laborious process by hand. February 24th, 1920. A. Smita Woopwarp, Hsq., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., read the following Report on the Additions made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of January 1920 :— The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of January were 109 in number. Of these 24 were acquired by presentation, 17 were deposited, 61 were purchased, 5 were received in exchange, and 2 were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— 2 Hybrid Black and Brown Bears (Ursus americanus 3 X U. arctos 9), born in the Menagerie on January Oth. 1 Persian Gazelle (Gazella subgutturosa 9 ), from Mesopotamia, presented by the Ist Battn. lst Highland Light Infantry. 5 Bennett’s Wallabies (Macropus bennetti, 3 $, 29) (Tas- mania), received in exchange on January 31st. 1 Naked-throated Bell-bird (Chasmorhynchus nudicollis), from Brazil, purchased on January Ist. 2 Soft-shelled Land-Tortoises ( V’estudo loveridgii), from Dodoma, E. Africa, presented by Arthur Loveridge, January 26th. Mr. F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.8., exhibited photomicrograplis of a female Mole-Flea (Hystrichopsylla talpe), and drew attention to the presence of two spermathece, a feature in the anatomy of the genital organs of this flea which appeared to have hitherto escaped notice. Several specimens had been submitted to him, and in all the females this characteristic feature was present. He also pointed out that clinging to the abdomen of the flea, by means of their sucker-discs, were a number of hypopial nymphs of one of the Tyroglyphide. He had not at present been able to determine to which species they belonged, but it was inter- esting to note their attachment to the flea inasmuch that it was occasionally taken in the nests of Wild Bees, and might act as a dispersal agent of the Acari. eee 192 ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. March 16th, 1920. Prof. E. W. MacBripg, F.R.S8., F.Z.8., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. J. Pocock, F.R.S., read the following Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of February 1920 :— The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of February were 92 in number. Of these 16 were acquired by presentation, 19 were deposited, 52 were purchased, 1 was received in exchange, and 4 were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— 2 Golden-crested Penguins (Catarrhactes chrysolophus), from South Georgia, new to the Collection, purchased on February 10th. A collection of 8. African Reptiles, including 4 White-throated Monitors (Varanus albigularis) and 2 Derbian Zonures (Zonurus derbianus), purchased on February 25th. 3 Beaver-Rats or Coypus (M/yocastor coypus), born in the Menagerie on February 6th. 1 Spotted Cavy (Calogenys paca), born in the Menagerie on February 29th. Mr. E. G. Boutencer, F.Z.8., exhibited and made remarks on a Frog with a duplicate foot. Prof. J. P. Hitu, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on an Embryo obtained from a Kangaioo recently living in the Society’s Menagerie. March 30th, 1920. A. Suita Woopwarp, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Sir Frank Cotyrer, K.B.K., F.R.C.8S., exhibited and made remarks on a series of photographs of skulls of Macacus rhesus, showing pathological conditions of the teeth. Prof. H. Maxweti Lerroy, F.Z.S., exhibited photographs attesting the existence of Egret Farms in Sind. ON SNAKES FROM EAST AFRICA. 193: Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.8., exhibited a series of Pigs’ mandibles from the New Tye bails, showing overgrowth of tite lower tusk owing to removal of the maxillary tusk. April 13th, 1920. A. Smita Woopwarp, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. I. Pococs, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on two- specimens of Fournier’s Hutia (Capromys pildrides), now living in the Society’s Menagerie. Mr. R. I. Pococn, F.R.S., gave an exhibition, illustrated by lantern-slides, to show the differences in external characters. between the Ratel (Mellivora) and the Wolverene (Gulo). He pointed out that Mr. Gerrit Miller’s suggestion that the two genera were related was unsupported by the facts. April 27th, 1920. A. Smita Woopwarb, Hsq., LL.D., F.R.S8., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1920 :— The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March were 106 in number. Of these 20 were acquired by presentation, 64 were deposited, 15 were purchased, 3 were received in exchange, and 4 were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— 1 Lion (Felis leo), from Sennar, presented by the 8th Battn. of the Hampshire Regt., on March 24th. 1 Eland (Zaurotragus ory#), born in the Menagerie on March 15th. 2 Barbary Sheep (Ammotragus lervia), from Morocco, presented by H.M. The King, on March 16th. Mr. Artuur LovertpGe exhibited and made remarks on a collection of Snakes which he had obtained in East Africa during the years 1915-1919. Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1920, No. XILI. 13 194 ON A SPECIMEN OF AMBLYSTOMA. Miss L. E. CuresMan, F.E.S., exhibited and described a series of lantern-slides illustrating the life-history and habits of the Ichneumon-fly, Rhyssa perswasoria. Dr. P. Cuatmers Mircuett, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on a series of photographs, taken by Sir H. A. Byatt, K.C.M.G., in German East Africa, of the rare Abbot’s Duiker (Cephalophus spadiz). Mr. D. Suru-Smuirn, F.Z.S., exhibited a series of lantern-slides showing the display of the male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus impeyanus). Mr. L. Hoesen, M.A., B.Sc., exhibited a specimen of Ambly- stoma, the metamorphosis of which had been brought about by one month’s feeding with Ox thyroid, and drew special attention to the precocious transition to the Amblystoma-type of pigmen- tation during the metamorphosis. No. 199. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* February 10th, 1920. Prof. E. W. MacBrips, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., read a report on the Additions made to the Society's Menagerie during the months of November and ~ December, 1919. Mr. A. J. Etwes, F.R.S., communicated a letter relative to the condition of the herds of Moose in Yellowstone Park. Mr. D., Seru-Smuirn, F.Z.S., read a letter from Messrs. Tullis, Russell & Co., drawing attention to an interesting case of response of Sparrows to colour. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on two photographs of a Chinese Serow (Capricornis argyrochcetes). Mr. E. G. Bounencer, F.Z.S., Curator of Reptiles, exhibited living specimens of a remarkable new Land-Tortoise, Testudo loveridgit, recently discovered by Mr. A. Loveridge in the neigh- bourhood of Dodoma, East Africa, and described by Dr. G. A. Boulenger, F.R.S. This Tortoise differs from all previously * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payabie in advance. 2 described Land-Tortoises in the carapace being quite flat, in the so-called “shell” being perfectly soft, and in the complete absence of ribs, costal, and neural bony plates. Mr. Boulenger stated that quite young examples differed from the specimens exhibited, their carapace being dome-shaped and possessing ribs and all other bones present in previously described Tortoises. In referring to its habits, it was stated that the animal, having been deprived of the protection of a bony “ shell,” had taken to living much after the manner of a Lizard, inhabiting holes in the rocks, and that, according to Mr. Loveridge, great difficulty is experienced in extracting the Tortoise from these holes, owing to its habit of distending itself, and thereby wedging itself firmly in the rock-cavity. Mr. F. Marvin Duncan, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks on a series of photomicrographs of Acari from the lungs of Macacus rhesus, illustrating the larval, nymph, and adult stage of the Acarid. He stated that both young and adult Rhesus Monkeys appeared to be infected, but so far as his observations had gone, the presence of the Mites in the lungs had in no case been the cause of death. So far eggs had not been observed in the vesicles formed by the presence of the Mites, though serial sections of adult Acarids had shown the egg in an advanced state of development, pointing to the probability of this: stage being completed within the body of the female. Mr. R. H. Burye, F.Z.S8., exhibited some skeletons of fetal Mammals prepared by Tadpoles, and drew attention to the possible advantage of such a method over the more laborious process by hand. Dr. C. F. Sonnvaa, Ch.B., F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks on a series of black-board drawings and Jantern-slides illustrating several unusual features in the peritoneum of a Raccoon. Mr. H. R. Hoge, F.Z.8., read a paper entitled “On some Australian Opiliones,” and pointed out that the genera and species described belonged to the suborders Palpatores and Laniatores—the Palpatores being represented by the genera Pantopsalis and Macropsalis of the family Phalangiide and the Laniatores by genera of Triwnobunide and Tricwnonychide. In the case of the Phalangiide he had been able to establish that long mandibles were a male and short mandibles a female character. Dr. C. F. Sonnrac, Ch.B., F.Z.S., communicated a paper on the “ Larynx and Cisophagus of a Common Macaque, exhibiting several unusual Features.” 3 In the absence of the Authors, Messrs. Rownanp E. Turner and James WATERSTON, their paper on “ A Revision of the Ichneu- monid Genera Labiwm and Pecilocryptus” was taken as read, The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, February 24th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— The SECRETARY. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of January, 1920. E. G. Boutencer, F.Z.S. On some Lizards of the Genus Chalcides. N.S. Lucas, M.B., F.Z.S. eS a ee oe Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919: with Notes on BRickets and Avian Hnteritis. Srantey Hirst, F.Z.8. Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). The following Paper has been received :— CG. Forster Cooper, M.A., F.Z.8. ede eed elon eau eee The Anthracotheriide of the Dera Bugti Deposits in Baluchistan. The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed, and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. 4 Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to | P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society oF Lonpoy, Recent’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. February 16th, 1920. No. 200. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,.* February 24th, 1920. A. Smita Woopwarp, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. I. Pococn, F.R.S., read a Report on the Additions made to the Society's Menagerie during the month of January, 1919. Mr. R. I. Pecocx, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on a photograph of a young Pigmy Hippopotamus, and drew attention to the striking difference in the shape of the ear, which is lenger and narrower than in the adult animal. Mr. F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.8., exhibited photographs of a female Mole-Flea (Hysirichopsylla talpe), and drew attention to the presence of two spermathece, a feature in the anatomy of the genital organs of this flea which appeared to have hitherto escaped notice. He also pointed out that clinging to the abde- men of the flea by means of the sucker-discs were a number of hypopial nymphs of one of the Tyroglyphide. Mr. E. G. BouLencer, F.Z.8., communicated a paper dealing with the geographical distribution and classification of some * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoolocical Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subseribe to the Publications ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sex Shillings per annum, payable in adyanee, 6 Lizards of the genus Chalcides. Chalcides occellatus was stated to be divisible apart from the typical form into seven varieties or subspecies. It was of interest from the evolutionary point of view that these forms were connected in such a manner that. it was possible to trace every link in the chain from a stout type with 40 scales round the body from Morocco toa slender type with only 22,scales from Abyssinia. Dr. N.S. Lucas, F.Z.8., read a Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919, and made some observations on Rickets and Avian Enteritis. In the absence of the Author, Mr. Stantey Huirst’s paper on “The Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus),” was taken as read. Professor W. N. F. Woopnanp gave a résumé of Mr. D. R. BHATTACHARYA'’s paper on “The Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes.” The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, March 16th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— R. I. Pococx, F.R.S. On the External Characters of South American Monkeys. C. F. Sonntag, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S. The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mam- malia :—I. General Description of the Tongue. — d The following Paper has been received :— Ue See ED OND BLS. On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed, and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society or LONDON, ReGENtT’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. March 2nd, 1920. if, ee No. 201. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* March 16th, 1920. Prof. E. W. MacBripg, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. My. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., read a Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of February, 1920. Mr. E. G. Bounencer, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks on a Frog with a duplicate foot. Prof. J. P. Hit, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on an Embryo obtained from a Kangaroo recently living in the Society’s Menagerie. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., read a paper, illustrated by lantern- slides, on the external characters of the South American Monkeys, and showed the variations in the range of structure of the ears, nose, hands, and feet and external genitalia. Dr. C. F. Sonntac, F.Z.8., communicated his paper on “The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammalia,” and, having first outlined the plan which would be followed in his series of comparative studies, proceeded to describe the different divisions of the tongue and the physical characters of each. He demonstrated by diagrams and lantern-slides the different forms * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent posi-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 10 which the papillz and openings of Wharton’s Ducts can assume among the Mammalia, and exhibited specimens illustrating the shapes and colours of the tongue, and arrangements for cleaning the teeth. The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, March 30th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— Sir Frank Coryer, K.B.E., F.R.CS. Exhibition of skulls of Wacacus rhesus. ©. F. Sonnac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S. On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. ArtHur LOVERIDGE. Notes on East African Lizards collected 1915-1919, with Descriptions of a new Genus and Species of Skink, and a new Subspecies of Gecko. A. M. ALtTson. The Life-history and Habits of Two Parasites of the Blowfly. The following Papers have been received :-— Arraur WILEY, F.R.S., F.Z.8. An Apodous Ama calva. H. A. Bayuis, M.A., and Ciayton, Lane, M.D. A Revision of the Nematode Family Gnathostomide. W. J. Daun, D.Sc., F.Z.8. The Onychophora of Western Australia. 11 The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. ‘This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed, and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society or Lonpon, ReceEnt’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. March 23rd, 1920, No. 202. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* March 30th, 1920. Dr. A. Suir Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Sir Frank Cotyrer, K.B.E., F.R.C.S., exhibited and made remarks on a series of photographs of skulls of Macacus rhesus, showing pathological conditions of the teeth. Prof. H. Maxwenut Lerroy, F.Z.S., exhibited photographs attesting the existence of Egret Farms in Sind. Mr. R. H. Burne, M.A., F.Z.8., exhibited a series of Pigs’ mandibles from the New Hebrides, showing overgrowth of the lower tusk owing to removal of the maxillary tusk. Dr. C. F. Sonnrac, Ch.B., F.Z.8., read a paper on “ Abnor- malities of the Abdominal Arteries of a Young Panda.” In the absence of the Author, Mr. A. Loverince, his paper on “ Kast African Lizards collected in 1915-1919, with Descrip- tion of a new Genus and Species of Skink and a new Subspecies of Gecko,” was taken as read. * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the * Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sta Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 14 The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, April 13th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— ArtHur WILEY, F.R.S., F.Z.S. An Apodous Amia calva. H. A. Bayuis, M.A., and Crayton Lang, M.D. A Revision of the Nematode Family Gnathostomide. W. J. Dakin, D.Sce., F.Z.S. The Onychophora of Western Australia. A. M. Autson. The Life-history and Habits of Two Parasites of the Blowfly. The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed, and be limited as far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society oF Lonpon, Recent’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. April 6th, 1920. No. 203. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. April 13th, 1920. Dr. A. Suira WoopwarbD, LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on two specimens of Fournier’s Hutia (Capromys pilorides), now living in the Society’s Menagerie. Mr. R. I. Pococs, F.R.S., gave an exhibition, illustrated by lantern-slides, to show the differences in external characters between the Ratel (Mellivora) and the Wolverine (Gulo). He pointed out that Mr. Gerrit Miller’s suggestion that the two genera were related was quite unsupported by the facts. In the absence of the Author, Prof. ArtHurR WIittey, F.R.S., his paper on “ An Apodous Amia calva” was taken as read. Mr. H. A. Baytis, M.A., and Lt.-Col. Crayton Lanz, M.D., gave a résumé, illustrated with lantern-slides, of their paper on “A Revision of the Nematode Family Gnathostomide.” Prof. H. Maxweti Lerroy, F.Z.S., communicated a paper by Mr. A. M. Aurson on “The Life-history and Habits of Two Parasites of Blowflies.” * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent’s Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sar Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 16 The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, April 27th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— F. F. Larpuaw, M.A., F.Z.S. Contributions to a Study of the Dragonfly Fauna of Borneo. Part IV.—A List of the Species known to occur in the Island. R. Broom, M.D., D.Sc., C.M.Z.8., F.RB.S. On some new Therocephalian Reptiles from the Karroo Beds of South Africa. The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society or Lonpon, ReceEnt’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. April 20th, 1920. No. 204. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* April 27th, 1920. Dr. A. Suirq Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Sucrerary read a Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1920. Mr. Artur LoverimpGe exhibited and made remarks on a collection of Snakes which he had obtained in East Africa during the years 1915-1919, Miss L. K. Currsman, F.E.S., exhibited and described a series of lantern-slides illustrating the life-history and habits of the Ichneumon-fly, Rhyssa persuasoria. Dr. P. CHAuMers Mircyett, F.R.S., exhibited and made remarks on a series of photographs, taken by Sir H. A. Byatt, K.C.M.G., in German East Africa, of the rare Abbot’s Duiker (Cephalophus spadiz). * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 18 Mr. D. Srers-Smitg, F.Z.8., exhibited a series of lantern-slides showing the display of the male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus Impeyanus ). Mr. L. Hoasen, M.A., B.Sc., exhibited a specimen of Ambly- stoma, the metamorphosis of which had been brought about by one month’s feeding with Ox thyroid, and drew special attention to the precocious transition to the Amblystoma-type of pigmen- tation during the metamorphosis. In the absence of the Author, Mr. F. F. Larptaw, M.A., F.Z.S., his paper on ‘‘ Contributions to a Study of the Dragonfly Fauna of Borneo.—Part IV. A List of the Species known to occur in the Island,” was taken as read. Dr. C. W. AnprREws, F.R.S., gave a réswmé of Dr. R. Broom’s paper ‘‘On some new Therocephalian Reptiles from the Karroo Beds of South Africa.” The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, May 11th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— W. J. Daxtn, D.Sc., F.Z.8. Fauna of Western Australia.—III. Further Contributions to the Study of the Onychophora. C. Forster-Coorer, M.A., F.Z.8. Chalicotheroidea from Baluchistan. W. T. Catman, D.Sc., F.Z.S. Notes on Marine Wood-boring Animals.—I. The Shipworms (Teredinide), 19 The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOoLocicaL Socrery oF Lonpon, ReGENt’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. May 4th, 1920. Sek pe eculncks cb in Exhibitions and Notices (continued). ‘ : age Miss L, E. Curzseman, ¥.E.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern-slides illustrating the life-history and habits of the Iehneumon-fly, Rhyssa persiasoria .... 194 Dr. P. Cuaummrs Mircnury, O.B.E., M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., ¥.R.S. Exhibition of, and Yemarks upon, photographs of Abbot’s Duiker (Cephalophus spadix) .............. 194 Mr. D. Sera-Surrn, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, lantern-slides showing the display of a male Monaul Pheasant (Lophophorus impeyanus) .....0 eee rvecsces 194 Mr. L. Hoesen, M.A.,B.Se. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Amblystoma. 194 PAPERS. . A Revision of the Ichneumonid Genera Labiwm and Pecilocryptus. By Rowianp E. — Turner and James Warerston. (Text-figures 1-11.) 1.2... .....ceeseceerecers 1 2. Description of the Larynx and Cisophagus of a Common Macaque (Macacus fascicu- laris) exhibiting several abnormal Characters. By Dr. C. F. Sonnrag, Ch.B., F.Z.S8., Anatomist tothe Society... (Vext-figures 1-5.) 0... ccs cs cua devs dwatecs ce 27 3. Some Australian Opiliones. By H. R. Hoce, M.A., F.Z.S. (Plates I-III.) ........ 81 4. Revision of the English Species of Red Spider (Genera Tetranychus and Oligonychus). PIP OTANM AYERS Dr CL Oxt-MaUees t=O.) “Fae aia'os «a yi Ha ae Weave uae eat ie se aa he ns 49 5. On the Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes. By D. R. Buarracnarya, M.Sc., Zoological Department, The Muir Central College, Allahabad, India, U.P. (Plates I. & II. and Text-figures 1-5.) ...... She Ah SB DEIR IAG Ciena Bic 55-45 oatah ooR uae 61 6. On some Lizards of the Genus Chalcides. By E. G. Bourmncer, F.Z.8. (Text- HERO ee ee I ON cet vepist cs cir ence seen rs lg. 'c: wky! win: fn jas 0" Olgcy aves Mauna aoe ee deren smear eoea ae: 77 7. Report on the Deaths in the Gardens in 1919. By Narnaniet 8. Lucas, M.B., F.Z.8., Hashologish to the Society. .(Wibh.4-Charts.) 2/0. «s/s as melee ces eben oe eee © 85 8. An Apodous Amia calva. By Artuur Wruuny, F.R.S., F.Z.S., McGill University, IN IAB Sey Ame peter BN 2s ee el cara bs cla wht acgnene: xiao pea en a SEEN CASE eee etic) 9. On the External Characters of the South-American Monkeys. By R. I. Pocock, RBS er = (ext toured a petatet fore wcaaio eiiays tel arelejel o eetatentyatane Bes Screen Mee RCI 91 10. The Comparative Anatomy of the Tongues of the Mammalia.—I. General Description of the Tongue. By Dr. C. F. Sonntac, M.A., Ch.B., F.Z.8., Anatomist to the Society. (Gilet trotme ssl le) ances cetera (ornlasietaiis sive x co) sitavers vatshav a alompregete ve tabsbetamemeesceelsvcncie sare. coo scl: 115 11. Notes on Hast African Lizards collected in 1915-1919, with Descriptions of a new Genus and Species of Skink and new Subspecies of Gecko. By Arravur Loynrinesr. (exch str enuinen lye ree auaices cesta olin tian at'+/eaia s/o sieve’) hele ecoleln ounfopehelatematedaysitsver sici'c's lee on siete 131 12. On Abnormal Features in the Peritoneum of a Raccoon. By C. F. Sonnrac, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. (Text-figures 18-19.) .................. 169 13. On Abnormalities of the Abdominal Arteries of a young Panda. By C. F. Sonntag, M.D., Ch.B., F.Z.S., Anatomist to the Society. (Text-figure 20.) ............65.. 175 14. On the External Characters of the Ratel (Mel/ivora) and the Wolverene (Gulo). By Rel. Pocock, B-Rus., F.ZiS,)-° (Vext-figures 14-18.) eee eles eo ee ce cee ee 179 Alphabetical List of Contributors ..-..... ... SEES CoS 08 3 one eee Goa ie wht bndiars @E IMMER NON = aie ok Seo eee eIG. etic Do Ot Clb Oo Bee eeane eae Sere xi PLATES. 1920, Pars I. & II. (pp. 1-194). Plate Page Hoge: it Tie} Australian Opiliones) 22): <2 v.00 ss ne == ae eet 31 III. het ones a | Aortic Ligament in Indian Fishes ............ 61 NOTICE, The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in four parts, paged consecutively, so that the complete reference is now P. Z. 8, 1920, p.... The Distribution is usually as follows, but on account of abnormal conditions Parts I. & II. are issued together :— Part I. issued in March, ale % June. eae b bb “3 September. Vis rte December, ‘ Proceedings,’ 1919, Parts III. & IV. (pp. 227-499), were published together on February 25th, 1920. The Abstracts of the ‘Proceedings,’ Nos. 199-204, are ‘contained in this Part. PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE AQVOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1920, pp. 195-656, with 14 Puatres AND 143 TEx'r-FIGURES. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT ITS HOUSE IN REGENT’S PARK. LONDON: MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO, PATERNOSTER ROW. Las 8 OF THE COUNCIL ANID OPE LC Ris OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1920. Patron. His Masgesty Tur Kina. COUNCIL. His Grace Tat Duke or Buprorp, K.G., F.R.S., President. Tue Hon. Cecit Barina, M.A. ALFRED. H. Cocks, Esq., M.A. Lr.-Cot. S. Monckton Copr- MAN, M.D., F.R.S. Cuartes Drummonp, Esq., Treasurer. Hues §. Guapsrone, Esq., M.A., F.R.S.E. Sir Srpney F, Harmer, K.B.E., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Vice- President. Pror. James P. -Hitu, D.Sc., F.R.S., Vice-President. WitiiAM Huntsman, Esq. Pror. Ernest W. MacBrips, D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S., President. Vice- Cou. Sir Henry McManon, C26. MiGs Ke@ alan: K. G. B. Mrapr-Watpo, Esq., Vice-President. P. Cuatmers MircHe.y, Esq., ©. BE. MAS I Scr Tape E.R.S., Secretary. Te Haru or Onstow, O.B.E. Major Arserr Pam. AvpRIAN D. W. Poutocr, Esq. His Grack THe Duke or Ruttanp, K.G. Tue Marquis oF Stico, F.S.A., Vice-President. Masor RicHarp 8. TAytor. A. Trevor-Barrve, Esq., M.A. AntHony H. WinGcrIELD, Esq., Vice-President. PRINCIPAL OFFICERS. P, Coaumers Mircneut, C.B.M., M.A., D.Se., LL.D., F.B.S., Secretary. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., F.LS., Curator of Mammals and Resident Superintendent of the Gardens. D. Seru-Surru, Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works. Epwarp G. BouLtencrer, Curator of Reptiles. Miss L, KE. Curesman, F.H.S., Curator of Insects. Prof. R. 'T. Lurper, D.Sc., M.D., Director of Prosectorium. Dr. C. F. Sonnac, Ch.B., Anatomist. Dr. N. 8. Lucas, M.B., Ch.B., Pathologist. Dr. G. M. Vevers, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., Hon. Parasitologist. F. Martin Duncan, F.R.M.S., Librarian. F. W. Bonn, Accountant. W. H. Coun, Chief Clerk. LIST OF CONTENTS. 1920, pp. 195--656. EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. The Secrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April, 1920............ Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a mounted specimen of a pale variety of the White-bearded Gnu (Connochetes albojubatus) ...... Miss Joan B. Procrer, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living epecimen of the tailed Batvachian | Spelerpes fuscius Bonaparte ............2:000eecceccnreateeds Prof. J. E. Duerpen, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of lantern-slides illustrating the sexual display and nesting habits of the Ostrich ............... Prof. R. T. Lerrer, D.Se., M.D., F.Z.S. Exhibition of lantern-slides illustrating the experimental trans- mission of some Helminth infections.................,+.. Dr. P. Cuanmers Mrrcwett, C.B.E., M.A., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S. An Account, illustrated with lantern-slides, of his recent Aeroplane Trip from Cairo to Tabora... The Sucrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May, 1920............ Prof. J. E. Durrpen, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks mponwarseriesiol Ostrich CoP... aqaeereea- ocr a Dr. R. J. Tinuyarp, M.A., F.L.S. An account of the Life- hisbomyotsthie: Diya omilliy: rsa yaeeusci-eeeeer eis. healer The Secrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, AMG MSCS UMSTEAD! fe. .vbic slc\veereis cedueemtqeeetnn < 200. 14. Photomicrograph of section through vesicula seminalis, showing sper- matozoa and spermatogenesis. 15. ‘Transverse section. First part of vas deferens. >< 200. 16. Median part of vas deferens, with mass of spermatozoa. X 200. 17. Terminal thick-walled part of vas deferens. X 200. 18. Longitudinal section. Ductus ejaculatorius. > 200. 19, Diagrammatic transverse section in plane of last pair of legs. X 24. DX Bw 20. Diagrammatic transverse section in plane where vas deferens crosses below - nerve-cords posteriorly. X 24. 21. T.S. Part of wall of anal gland of male. X 240. 22. Diagram showing connections of receptacula seminis with oviducts, and _ ovaries. X 200. 23. 'T.S. Infundibular region of oviduct. X 200. 24. L.S. Wall of ovary and oviduct. X 240. 25. T.S. Duct of receptaculum seminis. X 280. | Ae An.Gl. ‘Ci. R. Coe. Coll. Ves. Cr.Gl. CrGl/ Cr.G1.”” Crur.pap. ONYCHOPHORA OF WEST AUSTRALIA. 389 EXPLANATION OF LETTERING. Anus. Anal gland. Ciliated portion of nephri- dium. Ccelomic cavity. Collecting vesicle. Crural gland. Crural gland of Ist leg. Crural gland of last leg. Crural papilla. Cuticle. Epidermis. Heart. Position of leg. Nerve cord. Nephridium. Ditto of 4th and 5th legs. Or. Pap. Oy. Ovid. Ph. Rec.Sem. Rect. Oral papilla. Ovary. Oviduct. Pharynx. Receptaculum seminis. Rectum. Salivary gland. Salivary gland duct. Seminal vesicle. Slime gland. Spermatozoa. Testis. Uterus. Vagina. Vas deferens. . Vas deferens of right side. Vas.def.1. Ditto of lett side. iS) (or) * pe a ae sii Baas } i. Ane as Senta Bee ee | om KAY tA" | ia: | 1 meat ee sibel We Dh i l ; ee ; HALE VGH ny ’ i Hi iat hen : Biot i ih By ort Fiend A Regn ee | Vi skid: Dooney tani eta id ns kei canae LL Cat ead f eis ‘na ee ate iz | | | atime! ; aan shies ras 9) Fg a 4 A a me ala? bf A ae mr S ft Py ih wba wag 3 fi i Auf ihig: HOE Meh BPN 4 ‘ if t iy i u 4 ‘ ‘ a Hi eo é ON MARINE WOOD-BORING ANIMALS. 391 Notes on Marine Wood-boring Animals.—I. The Ship- worms (Teredinide). By W.'T. Cauman, D.Sc. (Submitted for Publication by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.) [Received April 27, 1920: Read June 1, 1920.] (Text-figures 1-11.) The specimens discussed in this paper were collected, for the most part, on behalf of a Committee appointed by the Institution of Civil Engineers to inquire into the deterioration of structures exposed to sea-action. This Committee, at my suggestion, re- quested its correspondents at various seaports to send in speci- mens of animals damaging the timber of harbour works. The result has been to get together a collection of very considerable importance, both from the point of view of the practical engineer and from that of the scientific zoologist. A set of the specimens will be placed in the Museum of the Institution of Civil Engineers, and the remainder have been presented by the Committee to the British Museum (Natural History). I desire to express my sense of obligation to the members of the Com- mittee, more especially to the Chairman, Sir William Matthews, K.C.M.G., and the Secretary, Mr. P. M. Crosthwaite, as well as to the various harbour engineers named below, by whom the specimens were collected and preserved. In dealing with the Teredinide I trespass with reluctance on the domain of the malacologists. It is only the impossibility of finding a student of Mollusca ready to undertake the description of the collection that leads me to publish these notes, to which, however, the very accurate figures drawn by Miss G. M. Wood- ward may give some permanent value. I am indebted to my colleagues, Mr. B. B. Woodwazd and Mr. G. C. Robson, for much guidance Avil help in exploring the literature and in examining the Museum collections of Mollusca. Many writers have commented on the difficulties that stand in the way of a systematic study of the Teredinide. The lack of agreement as to the characters to be regarded as generic is strikingly shown in the recent synonymy of several species, while the inconstancy of specific characters drawn from the valves of the shell was commented on long ago by Forbes and. Hanley (Hist. Brit. Mollusca, i. p. 87 (1848)). These dithiculties I cannot pretend to have solved, but some general considerations suggested by study of my mater ial may be worth recording. The changes in form of the shell-valves during growth seem to have received little attention, although several writers mention the obvious fact that the number of the striz on the anterior and antero-median divisions of the valves increases with age. Together with this, however, there goes on a resorption of the \ 392 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON posterior margin, beginning on the dorsal side, just behind the hinge-knob, and extending downwards. The rapidity and extent of this erosion appears to differ in different species. Incon- spicuous, as a rule, in 7’. navalis*, it becomes very marked in certain tropical species. For example, in many specimens of Teredo mannii, mentioned below, the auricle and nearly the whole of the postero-median area have been removed, while the antero- median (vertically striated) area occupies the greater part of the surface of the valve. It may be suggested as a possibility that the absence of extensive erosion in most specimens of 7. navalis: is due to the fact that this is a short-lived and indeed almost an annual species, the individuals rarely surviving the winter, while the much larger 7’. mannii may be longer lived, the individuals perhaps surviving for several years in the warmer waters which it inhabits. From the practical point of view it would be very important to ascertain the duration of life and the rate of growth in the different species. Genus TEREDO Linn. Hedley (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. Wales, xxiii. 1898, p. 92} regarded the presence of a ‘‘cup-shaped mantle which ...... surrounds the bases of siphons and palettes” as the chief distinctive character of a genus to which he applied at first the name Calobates of Gould, and later (Mem. Austral. Mus. Sydney, iii. 1899, p..508) Nausitoria (i. e. Nausitora) of Wright. Hedley states that the type of the genus Teredo, “according to the figures of Forbes and Hanley and other writers,” entirely lacks this structure. ‘The accompanying figure (text-fig. 1, A) is taken from a well-preserved specimen from the estuary of the Thames, for which I am indebted to Dr. W. M. Willoughby, Medical Officer of Health for the Port of London. This specimen appears to be referable, without doubt, to the typical 7. navalis Linn. It will be seen that the base of pallets and siphons is surrounded by a fleshy collar or fold of the mantle, entirely similar to that found in Zeredo mannii and various other species which Hedley refers to Vausitora or Calobates. TEREDO NAVALIS Linn. (Text-fig. 1.) Teredo navalis Linneus, Syst. Nat. ed. x. 1758, p.651; Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. i. 1848, p. 74, pl. 1. figs. 7, 8, pl. xviii. figs. 3,4; Gatliff and Gabriel, Proc. R. Soc. Victoria, EXViil. (n.s.) 1915, p. 117. ? Teredo pedicellata Quatrefages, Gwyn Jeffreys, Brit. Conch. ili. 1865, p. 174, and v. 1869, pl. liv. fig. 3. * Gwyn Jeffreys’ description of the “var. divaricata” of T. norvagica, the “var. occlusa”’ ot T. navalis, and the analogous varieties of other species, as well as the specimens named by him in the Norman collection, suggest that these varieties. are based on unusually old specimens, in which the antero-median area occupies a much larger portion than usual of the surface of the valves while the auricle has been almost completely removed. b) MARINE WOOD-BORING ANIMALS. 393 Locality.—Simon’s Town, South Africa. Specirnens forwarded by Lieut. L. H. A. Shadwell, R.N.V.R., Officer in charge of Works, H.M. Dockyard. From Blue Gum timber, Ordnance Jetty, E yard; from Pitch Pine, Old Ordnance Jetty, E yard ; and from creosoted Danzig, A, No. 3 slip. Remarks.—Teredo navalis and T'. pedicellata have both been recorded by Gatliff and Gabriel from Victoria, but, so far as I know, neither has been recorded from South Africa. Some of our South African specimens agree very closely, as regards the structure of the pallets, with specimens from Alderney in the Norman collection determined, apparently by Gwyn Jeffreys, as 7’. pedicellata. Jeffreys himself remarks that Text-figure 1. Teredo navalis Linn. A. Siphons and associated structures in a specimen from the estuary of the Thames at Gravesend. ‘The fleshy collar at the base of the siphons has peen divided and reflected, showing the imsertion of the right pallet from the inner side. 3B. Pallet of a specimen from Simon’s Town. Actual length about 5 mm. “this is not a satisfactory species,” and the identification of his specimens with the form described by Quatrefages appears to be largely conjectural. Quatrefages’s description (Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool. ser. 3, xi. 1849, p. 26) contains little to suggest it except the statement that the pallets are coloured dark brown. In the Alderney specimens and in some of those from South Africa (text-fig. 1, B). the stalk of the pallets may be as long and less than one-fourth as wide as the blade. The blade is flattened on the inner and convex on the outer surface, with the basal half calcified, white, and nearly opaque. The distal half is mostly 394 DR. W. 1. CALMAN ON composed of a more or less translucent horny material varying in colour from yellowish to dark brown, within which the distal ead of the calcified part is seen to project as a rounded cone. On the outer surface, the central area of this horny part is occupied by a calcified plate, rectangular or irregularly rounded in outline, which reaches the distal but not the lateral margins. ‘The distal end of the pallet is concave or notched, with a more or less deep central conical pit. The structure described above is most easily seen in the smaller specimens from South Africa, measuring about 40 mm. in length of body and having the pallets about 5 mm. long. The Alderney specimens are a good deal smaller. In some South African specimens of about the same size, however, the distal calcified plate cannot be seen, and in some larger specimens the basal calcification, instead of penetrating into the interior of the horny part, extends up along its lateral margins. In the largest specimen of all, in which the body is a foot long, the pallets are wholly calcified, with the distal portion slightly yellowish but not horny. This large specimen does not appear to differ in any but the most trivial details from Huropean specimens referred to 7. navalis. The valves of the shell afford no distinctive characters. In the absenee of any more satisfactory definition of the oe species 7’, pedicellata, all our South African specimens may be referred to 7. navalis. TEREDO NORVAGICA Spengler. Teredo norvagicus Spengler, Skriv. Nat. Selsk. Kigbenhavn, il. H. 1, 1792, p. 102, pl. i. figs. 4-6, B; Forbes and Hanley, Hist. Brit. Moll. i. 1848, p 66, pl. 1. figs. 1-5; (norvegica) Calman, Marine Bor‘ng Animals, Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist. Economic Series, No: 10; L995 p.95 fig. 2, pda tigeo: Teredo bruguierti Delle Chiaje, Memorie &e. iv. 1829 (1830), . 32, pl. 54. figs. 6.12, 13; Suter, Manual N. Z. Moll. 1913, Oe OSE jalls Thy figs. 7 a-d; Gatliff and Gabriel, Proc. R. Soe. Victoria, XXViil. (n.s .) 1916, p. 118, pl. xi. figs. 9 & 12. Remarks.— Suter recorded this species from Auckland, where, however, he considered that it was in process of being displaced by Xylotrya saulit (i. e. XY. australis). It is therefore of interest to note that the latter species alone occurs in the collection which we have received from Auckland. Suter has adopted Delle Chiaje’s name for this species on the ground that Spengler’s was “not binomial,’ and he is followed by Gatliff and Gabriel. It is true that, in the part of Spengler’s memoir which deals with the genus Zeredo (but not in that dealing with Pholas), the specific name is followed by a comma, not by a full stop. Those who consider this an adequate reason for displacing a name long in use and widely known will, no doubt, continue to refer to this species as 7’. bragwierit. MARINE WOOD-BORING ANIMALS. 395 TEREDO MANNII Wright. (Text-figs. 2 & 3.) Kuphus mannii Wright, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxv. pt. 3, 1866, p. 565, pl. lxv. figs. 1-8; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus. ii. 1899, p. 134. Nausitoria manni Hedley, Rep. Austr. Ass. Adv. Sei. viii. 1901, p. 248. Locality.—Brisbane, Queensland. Specimens forwarded by Mr. H. A. Cullen, Engineer for Harbours and Rivers. From Jetties &e. in river 5 or 6 miles from Moreton Bay, in Ironbark (Zucalyptus paniculata) and Pine (Araucaria cunningham). Remarks.—Of this species, already recorded by Hedley from Cooktown, in the north of Queensland, the holotype, from Singapore, is in the Museum collection. Unfortunately, it has been allowed to dry, but it has been possible, by soaking it in water, to extract the valves and pallets and to restore the siphons Text-figure 2. Teredo mannii (Wright), from Brisbane. A. Outer, 3. Inner surface of pallet. C. Siphons and associated structures. The fleshy collar has been divided and the right pallet removed. to something like their original form. In all the characters thus ascertained the specimens now recorded from Brisbane show a close resemblance to the holotype. The most characteristic feature of the species is the form of the pallets (text-fig. 2, A & B). . The blade or expanded portion is roughly erescentic in shape. The concave distal edge has a convexity in the centre, giving it somewhat the outline of a cupid’s bow, and the convexity is usually, but not always, incised by a/ narrow median notch. The inner surface of the blade is flat, the outer excavated distally; along the margin of the excavated area is a border of dark brown horny substance which is continued along the distal margin of the inner surface. The 396 DR. W. 1. CALMAN ON remainder of the surface of the blade is chalky white, and the material composing it envelops the distal end of the more trans- lucent stalk and ends in a sharp irregular line*. The valves of the shell in all the specimens J have examined show, to an unusual degree, the effects of secondary absorption already referred to. This is marked, not only in the dorsal region, posterior to the articular knobs, as in the valves of more normal Teredinide, but along the whole of the posterior margin as far as the ventral articular knob. In most specimens the whole region of the auricle has disappeared and the greater part of the postero-median region. In some specimens, as in the Text-figure 3. Teredo mannii (Wright), from Brisbane. Valves of shell. A. Right, B. Left valve of a spec!men in which the eroded area (seen in B) only occupies the upper margin, while the lower part of the auricle still persists. C. Right valve of a specimen of about the same sizé in which the erosion extends down the posterior margin as far as the lower point of the shell and the auricle has been entirely removed. holotype, this latter region is represented by a narrow border along the greater part of the hind margin; in one of the specimens figured (text-fig. 8, C) it has been entirely removed * The extremely close resemblance, pointed out by Wright, between the pallets. of this species and those of Kawphus arenarius as figured by J. E. Gray is very surprising, if the statements as to the widely different habitat of the last named species are correct. ee ee MARINE WOOD-BORING ANIMALS. aoT except for a small piece near the ventral angle. In another specimen (text-fig. 3, A, B), in which the lower part of the auricle still remains, it extends only a very little below the level of the anterior division of the valve; on the inner surface it is not defined anteriorly, passing with quite unbroken surface into the postero-median division. The siphons (text-fig. 2, C), of which the ventral, or inhalent, slightly exceeds in diameter the dorsal, or exhalent, are separate quite to the base. The fleshy collar which surrounds them is of considerable size, and, in the contracted state of the preserved specimens, conceals the siphons for about half of their length. Genus Xytorrya J. E. Gray. Xylotrya (Leach MS.) J. E. Gray, Proc. Zool. Soe. 1847, p. 188, Whatever Leach’s XYylotrya may have been (the reference by Menke, Syn. Méth. Moll. 2nd ed. 1830, p. 121, and the description by J. E. Gray, Syn. Brit. Mus. 44th ed. 1842, p. 76, suggest that it was the genus now known as Xylophaga), the name appears to have acquired validity only when Gray in 1847 referred to it the Teredo bipalmulata of Lamarck. The species of the genus are for the most part sharply differentiated from those of Zeredo by the segmented blade of the pallets. This blade is composed of a series of hollow cones successively ensheathing one another and arranged on a central axis forming a continuation of the stalk. The only approach to a transition between the two genera that I have seen is found in Nausitora dunlopei Wright, in which the ensheathing cones are very numerous and closely set, and appear, in the solitary type- specimen which I have examined, to be partly consolidated on the inner surface. They thus come to resemble the lamine of which the blade is built up in some, at least, of the species of Veredo, differing from them, however, in their more regular arrangement *. Many of the species referred to this genus have been only 1m- perfectly described, and still more imperfectly figured. Possibly the two species to which new names are applied below may be identical with forms already named, but they are certainly distinct from any in the Museum collection. XYLOTRYA AUSTRALIS, sp.n. (Text-figs. 6, 7, & 8.) Calobates saulii Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, xxi. 1898, p. 94, figs. 7—9. Nausitoria saulii Hedley, Rep. Austr. Ass. Adv. Sci. vii. 1901, DeLeon plac Tesi. * Cf. Fischer, Journ. Conchyl. v. 1856, p. 131. 398 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON Leredo (Xylotrya) saulii Suter, Man. N. Z. Moll. 1913, p. 1021, pl. lv. fig. 8, a, 6; Gatliff and Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (n. 8.) xxvill, 1916, p. 121, pl. xiii. fig. 11. Nec Nausitora saulii Wright, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxv. 1866, p. 067, pl. Ixv. figs. 9-15. Localities.— Brisbane, Queensland. Specimens forwarded by Mr, EK. A. Cullen, Engineer for Harbours and Rivers. From Jetties &e. in river 5 or 6 miles from Moreton Bay, in Ironbark (Lucalyptus paniculata) and Hardwood (£. maculata). Auckland, New Zealand. Specimens forwarded by Mr. Hamer, Engineer to the Auckland Harbour Board. From Kauri and Black Butt timber. Remarks.—Wright states that the type-specimens of his Vausitora saulii, which were presented to the British Museum by Miss Saul, came from Port Phillip, Australia, and it is perhaps this statement rather than any very exact correspondence with his description or figures that has led Australasian naturalists to apply the name to the species common in Australian and New Zealand waters. It appears, however, that Wright’s statement was in error. The specimens in the Museum collection labelled as “Types” and presented by Miss Saul are stated, on the label and in the Register of Mollusca, to be from Callao, Perut. It is true that none of the valves or pallets can be definitely recognised as the original of any one of Wright’s figures, but there are two characters in which these specimens agree closely with his account; the auricle shows, on the inner surface, a series of conspicuous curved ridges indicated in Wright’s pl. Ixv. fig. 10, and several of the pallets have the outer surface worn away so as to expose the ‘‘central core-like body” mentioned in the description (p. 568) and shown in pl. Ixv. fig. 15. These type-specimens, however, appear to me to be specifically distinct from those I have examined from Brisbane and Auckland, which undoubtedly belong to the species called WV. saulii by Hedley and other Australasian naturalists. The chief differences may be briefly stated as follows :— XY. saulii (Wright) (text-figs. 4 & 5). Dorsal outline of valve sloping steeply without break into the upper margin of the auricle, which exceeds half the total depth of the valve and descends on the hind margin for more than half the distance from the anterior notch to the ventral edge. The auricle is marked with rather widely spaced lines of growth which, espe- cially on the inner surface, appear as strong curved ridges. The anterior border of the auricle on the inside overlaps as a narrow band and is closely appressed to the inner surface. The pallets (text-fig. 5) have the segments strongly calcified and closely set, the average interval being estimated at not more than one-fifth * Suter (Man. N.Z. Moll. 1913, p. 1022) mentions Callao among the localities for the species, but states that the type is from Port Phillip. 1 do not know the source of his information. MARINE WOCGD-BORING ANIMALS. 399 of the width. The distal edges of the segments are acutely V-shaped (this may be partly but not altogether due to their being worn away), and no trace of serration can be seen in any of Text-figure 4, Aylotrya saulii (Wright). Syntype from Callao. A. Right, B. Left valve of shell. Text-figure 5. Xylotrya saulii (Wright). Syntype from Callao. Pallet. Text-figure 6, Xylotrya australis, sp. n. Syntype from Auckland. A. Right, B. Left valve of shell. the specimens. The stalk is smooth, The soft parts are un- known. The valves measure up to 7'3 mm. in length and a little less in depth. 400 DR. W. I. CALMAN ON X. australis, sp. n. (text-figs. 6, 7, & 8). Dorsal outline form- ing a distinct angle or concavity at the base of the auricle, which is not more than half the total depth of the valves and descends on the hind margin for not more than half the distance from the anterior notch to the ventral edge. The lines of growth on the auricle are much more closely set and less prominent, and are not at all conspicuous on the inner surface. The anterior border of the auricle on the inside overlaps as a broader band which is Text-figure 7. Xylotrya australis, sp.n. Syntype from Auckland. A, External surface of pallet. B. Single segment of the pallet, further enlarged. generally slightly raised from the inner surface. The pallets (text -fig. 7) have the segments thin and fragile and more widely spaced, the average interval being estimated at about one-third of the width. ‘The distal margins of the segments are concave or obtusely V-shaped, with a delicate membranous border, at the base of which the calcified portion shows a series of coarse and somewhat irregular serrations which become very conspicuous in dried specimens. The stalk is smooth and shorter than thre- MARINE WOOD-BORING ANIMALS. 401 ‘times the width of the distal part. The siphons (text-fig. 8) are adherent for two-thirds of their length in preserved specimens. Text-figure 8. Xylotrya australis, sp.n. Syntype from Auckland. Siphons and associated structures from the right side. The fleshy collar has been divided and reflected, the pallets remaining attached. Text-figure 9. Xylotrya capensis, sp.u. Syntype from Simon’s Town. A. Right, B. Left valve of shell. The largest complete specimen (from Auckland) is about 35 em. long in the preserved state. The valves measure up to 13°5 mm. in length and about the same in depth. 402 DR. W. T. CALMAN ON XYLOTRYA CAPENSIS, sp. n. (Text-figs. 9, 10, & 11.) Locality. Simon’s Town, South Africa. Specimens forwarded by Lieut. L. H. A. Shadwell, R.N.V.R., Officer in charge of Works, H.M. Dockyard. From Blue Gum timber, Ordnance Jetty, E yard, and from Pitch Pine, Old Ordnance Jetty, E yard. Description.—Valves of shell (text-fig. 9) with dorsal outline not steeply sloping posteriorly, where it is defined from the auricle by a shallow concavity. The auricle is very deep, exceed- ing half the total depth of the valve and extending downwards Text-figure 10. Aylotrya capensis, sp.n. Syntype from Simon’s Town. A. Distal portion of pallet. DB. Stalk of pallet. C. Single segment of pallet, further enlarged. for about half the distance from the anterior notch to the ventral edge. The lines of growth on the auricle are rather closely set and not conspicuous on the inner surface. The anterior border of the auricle on the inside overlaps as a broad band, which is distinctly raised from the inner surface. The pallets (text-fig. 10) have the segments thin and fragile and closely set, the average interval being estimated at one-sixth of the width. The distal margins of the segments are regularly crescentic (on the outer surface) with a broad striated membranous border but without MARINE WOOD-BORING ANIMALS. 403 any trace of serration. On each side the border is produced as a long filament which extends beyond three or four segments in front. The stalk is minutely roughened and, in the specimen measured, nearly five times as long as the width of the distal part. The siphons (text-fig. 11) are adherent for at least five- sixths of their length in preserved specimens. The largest complete specimen is about 30 em. long in the presen ae state (excluding the pallets). The valves measure 12°5 mm. in length by 11°5 mm. in depth. The pallets are about 46 mm. long. Text-figure 11. ) va \\ )y) vi Aylotrya capensis, sp.n. Syntype from Simon’s Town. Siphons and associated structures from left side. The fleshy collar has been divided and reflected, the pallets remaining attached. Remarks.—In the structure of the pallets, especially in the elongated peduncle, the broad, closely-set segments, and the long lateral filaments into which they are produced, this species differs from all those of which I have seen specimens. Blainville’s USSU of the pallets OP AC pennatifera, with the segments ‘pourvues de chaque cdté d’un long cil” suggests a comparison with our species. Specimens in ihe Museum collection referred to XY. pennatifera, however, differ widely, having the segments but little wider than the stalk and bearing a fringe of filaments in place of the striated membranous border. pS) =I Proc. Zoo, Soc,—1920, No. XX VII. we “wel Ao is aie 4 ' posit ‘deadaiite ay Ws Pr Bt ON ENTOZOA FROM ANIMALS WHICH DIED IN THE GARDENS. AO5 22. Report on Entozoa collected from Animals which died in the Zoological Gardens of London during Hight Months of 1919-1920. By G. M. Vuvurs, M.R.C.8., L.R.G.P., F.Z.S., Beit Memorial Research Fellow, Demonstrator in Heiminthology at the London School of Tropical Medicine, and Honorary Parasitologist to the Zoological Society of London. [Received June 1, 1920: Read June 1, 1920. | During the past eight months I have made an attempt to examine systematically for Entozoa all animals dying in the Gardens, and have attended post-mortem examinations of four hundred animals for this purpose. Before the body was actually opened, a microscopical exami- nation of the feeces was made, whenever practicable, for ova and embryos of Entozoa which would give some indication of the parasites harboured, and would direct attention to the particular regions for special search. Whether this preliminary investigation gave a positive or negative result, a subsequent search of all organs was carried out. I have also applied this method of diagnosis to living animals in the Gardens, and these examinations have in some cases given positive results. On the death of the animal the diagnosis has been confirmed by the discovery of the adult parasites; for example, the Cylichnostomes recorded from the Grevy’s Zebra in the accompanying chart were detected in this manner. Of the four hundred animals examined 76 or 19 per cent. were found to harbour parasites. The Entozoa found fall into the following Phyla and Classes :— Number of Species Percentage. found. Cestodne eer ie 21-40 PLATYHELMIA. { TM ReITHAEHHOC EY Scekcasecene of 10-00 Nematode. ssseaea se: 45 64:40 NEMATHELMIA. { Acanthocephala ...... 3 4-20 Sot ile 70 100:00 Tn all cases of Nematoda and Acanthocephala there was a pre- ponderance of female forms. In four eases females only were found. ‘There were 13 animals which harbouzed more than one species of parasite. In a Leopard Cat (Hels bengalensis) as many as five different species were found. The material afforded a valuable opportunity of determining 27° 406 MR. G. M. VEVERS ON ENTOZOA FROM ANIMALS the length of life of parasites of various groups in their hosts. Very little reliable information has been gathered on this im- portant point. The evidence given by the incidence of parasites which have intermediary hosts is, of course, more trustworthy than that of forms which have a simple life-cycle. Im the latter, infection is accumulative, and may either be acquired in the paddock or be brought into the Gardens on food: thus nine examples of Gastrodiscus egyptiacus were found in a Grevy’s Zebra which had been in the Gardens for six years. This parasite normally occurs in Africa, and requires as an intermediary host a freshwater molluse (Cleopatra bulimoides) which has not been recorded from Europe. There can be no doubt, then, that the specimens found had actually lived in the Zebra since it came from Africa, and were, therefore, over six years old. In the same Zebra were a number of species of Bursate Nematodes, some of which have been recorded both trom Afriea and Kurope. The life-cycle here is a simple one. That it is not possible to draw trustworthy conclusions in such a case is well illustrated by the findings in an Onager (Zquus_ onager) which died quite recently. A number of the same species of parasites which occurred in the Zebra were found in this Onager, which had been born in the Gardens. Two of the species of Cylichnostomes in the Grevy’s Zebra had not been previously recorded, and it is possible that these were originally imported, but the infection may have been renewed in the paddocks. In this connection it is noteworthy that a Chapman’s Zebra which died last year, after nine years in the Gardens, had only species of Bursate Nematodes which occur in European Horses. We have, as another example of the contaminative group which might accumulate in the Gardens, an apparently unrecorded species of Atractis in the Elephant. Many specimens of this Nematode were found in the Indian Elephant which died in December last and which had been in the Gardens for twelve years. Recent examination of the feces of the Elephant living in the next paddock showed that this one also is heavily infected, The minute but fully mature females of Atractis are passed from time to time in the feces, and these contain embryos so far advanced as to have the adult form. If these embryos are discharged by the mother worm in the intestine of the host, it is yonesive ble that they might attain sexual maturity almost immediately, and would then provide an exception to the general rule that parasitic worms do not produce a second generation of adult forms within the body of their definitive host. The following points of especial interest were noted in individual species of Parasites :— Two specimens of Gnathostoma spinigerum were obtained from the stomach of a Leopard Cat (Felis bengalensis). A dissection of the head-parts of a still living worm showed that the neck- elands are hollow and contractile, ‘and contain a fluid which plays WHICH DIED IN THE ZOOLOGICAL GARDENS, 407 a part in altering the size of the head, thus supporting the view, as to the function of the ‘ ballonets,” recently put forward in a paper read before this Society by Baylis and Lane*. A microscopical examination of the feeces of the same Leopard Cat showed many minute Nematode embryos. A similar exami- nation of the stomach contents gave the same result, but no adults could be found in this or any other of the neighbouring organs. However, in the mucosa of the cesophagus and naso- pharynx the same embryos were present, but here each was coiled up in an exceedingly thin membranous shell. ‘The pre- sence of these viviparous eggs in the nasopharynx led to the discovery of the adult worms in a most unusual position, for the frontal sinus was next explored, and here large numbers of a species of Synthetocaulus were found. So far as we have been able to ascertain, this species is new to science, but it is closely allied to S. rufescens, which occurs occasionally in the lungs and air-passages of the Sheep in Europe. It is of interest to note that for some time before death the animal suffered from “ fits” and was often seen to lose its balance and fall. These “ fits,” and loss of equilibrium were no doubt due to the presence of Synthetocaulus in the frontal sinus. Further examination of the feces from the same showed many Trematode ova, which were recognized as those of Paragoniinus westermanni. The lungs were then searched, and four specimens of the adult fluke found. The number of eggs in the feces was exceedingly large considering the few adults which gave rise to them. IT am indebted to Professor R. IT. Leiper for his invaluable assistance and advice on a number of the more intricate points arising in the course of the above inquiry. aninal List of Parasites found, with their Hosts. TREMATODA. Length of Genus. Species. Host. time in Gardens. +Gastrodiscus aeyptiacus Grevy’s Zebra. 6 years. (Cobbold, 1876). (Africa.) Railliet, 1898. +Notocotyle triserialis (2) Netta rufina. 1 week. (Diesing, 1839). (India.) Diesing, 1850. Paragonimus westermanni Felis bengaleusis. 6 months. (Leuckart, 1889). (India.) Stiles, 1900. Platynosoma _illiciens Khai phastos 3 months. (Braun, 1901). erythrorhynchus. Looss, 1907. (S. America.) * P.Z.S. 1920, p. 245. + Denotes that this Parasite has not been recorded before from this Host. 408 MR. G. M. VEVERS ON ENTOZOA FROM ANIMALS Genus. Species. Macrodera formosum Nicoll, 1911. naja (Rud. 1819). Looss, 1899. Host. Length of time in Gardens. Zamenis flagelliformis. (S. America.) Tropidonotus natrix. (Britain.) CrsroDA. Cyclophyllidea. Tenia Davainea Davainea Davainea Davainea Davainea Davainea Davainea Hymenolepis Hymenolepis (Echinocotyle. Hyracoteenia Oplnotenia Tetrabothrius crassicollis Rud. 1810. goura Fuhrmann, 1909. paucitesticulata Fuhrmann, 1909. sp. Inq. sp. Inq. sp. Inq. sp. nov. sp. 10V villosa (Bloch, 1872). Wolfth. 1899. sp. ing. ) procavize Beddard, 1912. sp, ing. cylindraceus (Rud. 1819). Diesing, 1850. Pseudophyllidea. Dibothriocephalus sp. inq. Ascaris Ascaris Ascaris Genetta genetta. (Spain.) Goura coronata. (New Guinea.) (2) Calcenas nicobarica. (Nicobar Islands.) Fringilla celebs. (Britain.) Schizorhis concolor. (S. Africa.) Caccabis chukar. (Syria.) Casuarius uniappendiculatus. (New Guinea.) Casuarius uniappendiculatus. (New Guinea.) Tetrax tetrax. (Britain.) (4) Quelea quelea. (S. Africa.) Procavia capensis. (S. Africa.) Crotalus atrox. (Cent. America.) (2) Larus glaucus. (Europe.) Conepatus proteus. (Argentine.) NEMATODA. osculata Otaria californiana. Rud. 1819. (North Pacitic Ocean.) holoptera (8) Testudo ibera. Rud. 1819. (S. Europe.) sp. ing. Casarea casarca. (Europe.) 7 months. 5 months. 6 months. 1 week. 6 months. 3 months. 10 months. 6 months. 6 months. 9 months. 4. months. 3 months. 5 months. 7 years. 2 years. 6 months. 1 year. 5 years. + Denotes that this Parasite has not been recorded before trom this Host. WHICH DIED IN THE ZOOLOGICAL GARDENS. 409 Length of (Rud. 1819). (Esophagostomum apiostomum Willach, 1891. Ancylostomum conepati Uncinaria Uncinaria Hemonchus Syngamus Solanet, 1911. criniformis (Goeze, 1782). sp. ing. contortus (Rud. 1803). bronchialis (Muhlig, 1884). Cylichnostomum imparidentatum (Poteriostomum). +Cylichnostomum goldi Quiel. Boulenger, 1916. +(@sophagodontus robustus Giles, 1892. +Triodontophorus intermedius Sweet, 1909. (S. America.) (7) Macacus rhesus. (India.) Conepatus proteus. (Argentine.) Vulpes vulpes. (Britain.) Felis lynx. (Thibet.) Hippotragus equinus. (Africa.) , Casarea casarca. (Europe.) Chapman’s Zebra. (Africa.) Chapman’s Zebra. ( Africa.) Chapman’s Zebra. (Africa. ) Chiapman’s Zebra. (Africa.) Genus. Species. Host. time in Gardens. Ascaris sp. inq. Spheniscus demersus. 3 weeks. (S. Africa.) Belascaris mystax Felis bengalensis. 6 months. (Zeder, 1800). (India.) Leiper, 1907. Toxascaris sp. inq. Vulpes lagopus. 2 weeks. (Syria.) Porrocecum crassum Grus communis. 9 years. (Deslongchamps, 1824). (Hurope.) Raill. et Henry, 1912. Contracecum — spiculigerum Phalacrocorax carbo. 4 months. (Rud. 1819). (Britain.) Raill. & Henry, 1912. Oxysomatium brevicaudatum Anguis fragilis. e (Zeder, 1800). ( Britain.) Heterakis vesicularis Phasianus torquatus. 2 weeks. (Dujardin, 1845). (China.) Heterakis vesicularis Ceriornis satyra. 7 years. (Dujardin, 1845). (India.) +Cucullanus microcephalus Chrysema seripta rugosa. 1 month. (Dujardin, 1845). (West Indies.) Gnathostoma spinigerum Felis bengalensis. 6 months. Owen, 1836. (India.) Ascaridia sp. Inq. Centropus rufipennis. 10 days. (India.) Ascaridia lineata (2) Ocyphaps lophotes. 4 years. (Schneider, 1836). (S. Atrica.) Physaloptera _— retusa ‘Tupinambis teguexin. 1 month. 18 months (approx.). 2 years. 5 months. 1 week. 5 years. 9 years. br} + Denotes that this Parasite has not heen recorded hefore from this Host. 410 on ENTOZOA FROM ANIMALS WHICH DIED IN THE GARDENS. Length of Genus. Species. Host. time in Gardens +Strongylus edentatus Chapman’s Zebra. 9 years. Looss, 1901. (Afvica.) Stronvgylus vulgaris Chapman’s Zebra. 3 Looss, 1901. }Probsmayria vivipara Grevy’s Zebra. 6 years. Ransom, 1907. +Cylichnostomum nassatum var. parvum Strongylus Strongyloides Synthetocaulus Oxyuris Oxyuris Filaria Setaria Diplotrizna Trichocephalus Trichocephalus Dispharagus yAtractis Yorke & Macfie, 1918. vulgaris Looss, 1901. intestinalis Grassi, 1883. sp. Inq. equi Schrank, 1788. longicollis Schneider, 1866. gracilis Dujardin, 1845. sp. 1nq. tricuspis (Hedschenko, 1879). Raill. & Henry, 1909. affinis Rud. 1801. dispar Rud. 1801. squamatus (v. Linstow, 1883). sp. noy. Grevy’s Zebra. Grevy’s Zebra. Felis bengalensis. (India.) Felis bengalensis. (India.) Chapman’s Zebra. (Atrica.) Testudo graca. (Europe.) Ateles grisescens. (S. America.) Hippotragus equinus. (Hast Africa.) Acridotheres ginginianus. (India.) Ovis vignei. (India.) Macacus rhesus. (India.) Phalacrocorax carbo. (Britain.) EHlephas indicus. (India.) AGANTHOCEPHALA. Kchinorhynchus claveeceps. Echinorhynechus) sp. ing. J ) ST q gen. Inq. (Echinorhynelius) sp. ing. gen. inq. Chrysema scripta rugosa. (America.) Callicebns moloch. (S. America.) Leontocebus ursulus. (S. America.) 3) 6 months. 9 years. 6 months. 2 months. 1 week. 6 years. 13 months (approx.). 4, months. 12 years. 1 month. 33 3 weeks. + Denotes that this Parasite has not been recorded before from this Host. ON TATLLESS BATRACHIANS FROM EAST AFRICA. 411 23. On a Collection of Tailless Batrachians from Hast Africa made by Mr. A. Loveridge in the years 1914-1919. By Miss Joan B. Procrer, F.Z.S. [Received May 19, 1920: Read June 15, 1920.] (Text-figures 1-4.) This collection, made during the war, consists of examples of 33 species, two of which are new, representing the families Ranide, Hngystomatide, and Bufonide*. Mr. Loveridge has presented the types of Rappra platyrhinus and Megalixalus loveridgii to the British Museum, together with specimens of the little-known species . In the male of J/eles the hairy scrotum is situated just below the rim of the circumanal sac, which, except in the middle line, is covered with short hairs. The baculum has been figured and * Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, viii. pt. i. p. 408 (1839). + Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. Siam, i. no. 4, p. 253 (1915). From the passage quoted it appears that the secretion of the glands of Arctonyx is much stronger in smell than that of Meles. Meles has the habit, observable in Mongooses and Civets, with analogous glands, of rubbing the secretion on objects so that the scent is dis- seminated. 430 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS described by Blumenbach* and Pohl?. It is about 4 inches long and slightly inerassate at the base, flattened and grooved beneath throughout its length and carinate above in its proximal half, then flattened and depressed, with a median dorsal groove up to the tip, which is straight or slightly upturned and expanded laterally into a roughened dise with semicircularly curved free margin. ‘This apex is perfectly symmetrical, and an elongated slit perforating the bone behind the tip suggests that the latter results from the fusion of two short terminal processes. In the female the area around the genitalia is smooth; the genital orifice is a little below the naked rim of the circumanal sac, and opens at the summit of an inferiorly expanding groove, which ends in an angular prepuce, forming a glandular space round the small clitoris, which is strengthened with a small bone, In Taxidea there is no trace either of the deep pouch imme- diately beneath the tail or of the shallower depression in which the anus is sunk. The anus, on the contrary, is protuberant, and in profile view stands away from the base of the tail above and from the perineal region below like a hemispherical mound #. The anus opens just below the centre of this elevation, and the two anal glands, about the size of a hazel-nut, open within the orifice, the ducts traversing a definite papilla as in Mephitis. The secretion is colourless with a sweetish, not unpleasant musteline odour. Below the anal prominence there is in the female a long naked perineal area, terminating inferiorly in a piriform prominent vulva, with the orifice above and a somewhat acuminate clitoris below. On each side of the vulva, a little below the level of the orifice, there is a glandular pocket about 6 mm. deep, from the bottom of which arise a few sete, each planted in a shallow pit. Thus the anal and genital areas of the female Zaxidea differ profoundly from those of Jeles §. T have had no opportunity of examining a male Zawidea; but, * Handbuch vergl. Anat. 1824, p. 476. + Jena. Zeitschr. xly. p. 385 (1909). + Coues’s statement (tom. cit. p. 267) that “the perineal region shows, imme- diately beneath the root of the tail, a large transverse fissure leading into the peculiar subcaudal pouch of the Meline”’ is erroneous; and the error arose probably trom the examination of dried skins, which were apparently all the material available for examination, judging from the bottom paragraph on p. 68 of the volume cited. § It is possibie, however, that the ditference in the size and situation of the genital orifice in the specimens examined may be more apparent than real. The examples of IMJeles were wild caught animals, one of which was known to have produced young before capture. ‘The example of Tawidea, on the contrary, was received from New York as an adult specimen in 1910, and died, when an old animal, in Dec. 1918. Of her history previous to her arrival in London I know nothing, but she never bred nor was seen to pair with the mate after coming to the Gardens; and it may be that the small size and low position of the genital orifice and the consequent length of the perineal area are attributable to failure of copulation and parturition, OF THE EUROPEAN AND AMERICAN BADGERS. 431 according to Coues, there is a well-developed baculum. He describes it as “4 inches long, clubbed at one end, compressed, and with a shallow sulcus in the continuity ; the other end bent Text-figure 22, So NG oe F A. Rear end of Meles meles, female, with the subcaudal and anal sacs closed. xe. B. The same of Taxidea americana, female. X 5. C, Lateral view of ano-genital area of Tavidea, female, showing the prominent anus and the clitoris with its lateral glandular pit partly opened. X $. D. The lateral gland of the clitoris of the same, opened to show the set at the bottom. KE. Clitoris of same, elevated to show the glandular pits closed. F, Anus of same, spread open to show the papille of the anal ¢lands. 432 MR. R, I, POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS nearly at a right angle, abruptly and irregularly flattened and grooved ” (tom. ct. p. 269). This description is not very intelligible, and it is doubtful if the describer knew either the proxim: al from the distal extremity or the dorsal from the ventral surface; but I infer that the bone is compressed, grooved throughout its extent below, thickened at the base and hooked at the apex, but whether the curvature of the hook is directed upwards or downwards does not appear ; and whether the apex is symmetrical or asymmetrical is also unknown. Skull and Teeth. The skull of Meles meles was fully described and illustrated by Miller; that of YVaaidea was figured and described by Coues. Text-figure 23. aaacat fg A. Upper view of the skull of Taxridea. X 3 approx. B. The same of eles. Elliot also reproduced photographs of it *, and Baird pointed out some of the differences between the two genera in the crania and teeth. * Wield Columb. Mus, ii. p, 320 (1901). OF THE BUROPHAN AND AMERICAN BADGERS. 433 In the following table the principal differences are placed side by side for comparison :— MELEs. Muzzle Zygomata “Blongated, comparatively uar- |Stronely salient behind orbit | row, with prominent pre- Treille! Intraorbital fora- men large. above the anterior portion of the upper molar and behind the carnassial. Short and broad, TAXIDEA. with short premaxille. | Infraorbital foramen small, above the the posterior base expanded laterally and posteriorly con- siderably beyoud glenoid. | anterior portion of the | upper carnassial. Moderately salient behind orbit; its posterior base not expanded laterally and pos- teriorly beyond glenoid. Brain-case.....)... Occipital area ... | Upper surface sloping posteri- orly ; lateral walls rounded, converging behindzygomata. Sagittal crest high. Much narrower than zygomatic width. Mastoids compara- tively narrow and elongated, aes downwards and for- rards beneath the auditory meatus and lower than the| glenoid. — Basioecipito-sphe- | noidal plane inclined up- wards from foramen. | Moderately inflated, ssarcely below the plane of the occi- pital condyles and uot ex- tending torwards to the glenoid. Upper surface hardly sleping posteriorly; lateral walls gradually divergent from orbits to occiput. Sagittal crest LO or absent. Almost as wide as zygomatic width. Mastoids greatly expanded but short, not projecting below auditory meatus and about on a leve’ with the elenoid. Basiocci- pito-sphenvidal plane hori- zontal. Much inflated, a long way Lelow the plane of the occi- pita! condyles and abutting against the glenoid. Rr OTAMINGE 2.2 ...2.. | For. vot. concealed and open- ing alongside fur. lac. ant. ; for. ov. considerably in ad- vance of fur. lac. med. For. vot. not concealed, open- ing separa'ely from and be neath for. lac. ant.; for. ov just in front of for lac. med. Teeth | Upper carnassial comment, tively small. le-s than 3 area of melar, Molar irregularly four-sided, with two roots imbedded in cheek and two large cusps exposed in lateral view of skull; crown with one median longitudmal ridee of cusps. Te car- nassial with heel ahout as large as the anterior portion, and hollowed im the middle with two external and two iniernal but no median cusp; in the anterior portion of the tooth the anterior cusp is smaller than the main cusp, which is well im ad-|} vance of the inner cusp. Upper carnassial enormous. larger than molar. olay equilaterally triangular. with one root imbedded im cheek and one cusp exposed in lateral view of the skull. Crown with two BES WISIENK rows of tubercles. Lowe carnassial with eel about 3 the area of the anterio portion, with one external one inedian, and one pos: terior cusp forming a trans verse line; in the anterio portion of the tooth th. anterior cusp Is as large a: the mam cusp, which is m the same transverse line as the inner cusp. 434 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS Text-figure 2 Taxides. A. Posterior view of the skull of Tawidea. X % approx. C. The same of eles. B. Inferior view of posterior portion of skull of Tawidea (f.0., foramen ovale). D. The same of Jfeles. Conclusions. Tn view of the nature and number of the differences between Meles and Tawidea in skull and teeth, it seems no exaggeration to say that the resemblances between the genera in those particulars are only such as entitle them to a place in the family Mustelide. Unquestionably the skull of Z'aaidea presents a greater likeness to that of Mellivora than to the skull of J/eles ; but it is, in my Pee ee ee OF THE EUROPEAN AND AMERICAN BADGERS. 435 opinion, by no means certain that this likeness involves close aftinity, since the two genera differ considerably in the structure of the two posterior maxillary teeth and in the development of the pinna of the ear, of the pads on the feet, etc. Text-figure 25. A. Posterior maxillary teeth of Taxidea. Nat. size. C. The same of Meles. B. Posterior mandibular teeth of Tawxidea. D. The same of eles. Pending an examination of Mydaus and Helictis*, which I have not seen, I propose to restrict the subfamily Meline to the genera JJeles and Arctonyx. With these limitations the JJeline * This genus, as already stated, was severed from the Meline both by Gray and Gill. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. X XIX. 29 436 ON THE EUROPEAN AND AMERICAN BADGERS. may be briefly distinguished as follows from the Taxiidine, a new group which, for the present, contains Taaidea alone :— a. A well-developed subcaudal pouch; rhimarium with very deep infranarial area ; plantar pads wide, carpal and metatarsal pads comparatively large, the latter on a naked area behind the plantar pad; upper carnassial much smaller than quadrilateral molar; lower ecarnassial with enormous heel etc. .................. MWeline. b. No subcaudal pouch; rhinarium with shallow infranarial area ; plantar pads narrower; carpal pads much reduced, hind foot hairy down to plantar pad, metatarsal pads suppressed ; upper carnassial larger than triangular molar; lower carnassial with Govier memnnrely SoMa WES Ss —soaonscoosooseaannonnsabonaacanqnanssoocns LleBgaidorGe SEXUAL DISPLAY AND NESTING-HABITS OF THE ostricn. 437 EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. May 11th, 1920. Prof. J. P. Hitt, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April, 1920 :-— The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April were 118 in number. Of these 39 were acquired by presentation, 15 were deposited, 28 were purchased, 32 were received in exchange, and 4. were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— 1 Chimpanzee (Anthropopithecus troglodytes), from West Africa, purchased on April 21st. 2 White-handed Gibbons (Hylobates lar), from Rangoon, received in exchange on April 15th. 2 Barbary Sheep (Ammotragus lervia), born in the Menagerie on April 11th. 1 Milky Eagle-Owl (Bubo lacteus), from Rhodesia, purchased on April 19th. 1 Banded Rail (Hypotenidia striata), from India, new to the Collection, purchased on April 28th. 1 Five-banded Lizard (Mabuia quinqueteniata), from Rhodesia, new to the Collection, deposited on April 18th. On behalf of Messrs. EB. Gerrard & Sons, Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., exhibited » mounted specimen of a pale variety of the White-bearded Gnu (Connochetes albojubatus), shot by Capt. Keith Caldwell, R.A., F.Z.S., in Masailand, and pointed out that apart from the general pale yellowish-brown tint, the variation affected different parts of the body in different ways, the neck- mane, the long hairs on the face, and the tail-tuft, which are normally black, being dirty white, whereas the bands on the body, making the brindled pattern, which are also normally black, were brownish red. Miss J. B. Procrer, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks upon a living specimen of the tailed Batrachian, Spelerpes fuscus Bonaparte, born on May 8th, 1920. Prof. J. EK. Durrprn, F.Z.8., exhibited and made remarks upon a remarkable series of lantern-slides illustrating the sexual display and nesting-habits of the Ostrich. 438 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS 'lO THE MENAGERIE, June 1st, 1920. Sir Srovny F, Harmer, K.B.E., F.R.S., Vico-President, in the Chair. In the absence of Prof. R. 'T. Lerpsr, F.Z.8., his exhibition of Jantern-slides illustrating the Experimental transmission of some Helminth infections, was deseribed by Dr. Vevers. Specimens of Schilbe mystus, Olarotes laticeps, and Tilapia ailotica infected with encysted trematode Jarve, and found near Cairo, were shown. By feeding young wolves, bred in captivity, with these fishes Prof. Leiper sueceeded in rearing the adult worms in enormous numbers. The cysts of Schilhe mystus gave rise to Hemistoma (Alaria) alatun of the dog, and those of Clarotes laticeps to Monostoma pumilio Looss, i. pwmilio, which would appear to be more closely related to Zocotrema than to Monostoma, is normally a parasite of the Pelican and Kite in Kgypt. That it can be reaved in enormous numbers in Wolves undermines the conception of “ plysiological species” applied by Looss to certain trematode infections. Dr. P. Coatmers MrrcHext, F.R.S., gave an account, illustrated with Jantern-siides, of his recent Aeroplane Trip from Catro to Tabora, and deseribed the character of the country passed over and the birds and mammals seen. June 15th, 1920. Prof. EK. W. MacBrips, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May, 1920 :— The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May were 398 in number. Of these 63 were acquired by presentation, 188 were deposited, 130 were purchased, 4 were received in exchange, and 13 were born in the Menagerie. The following may be specially mentioned :— MAMMALIA. 1 Cheetah (Cynelurus jubatus), from Kilosso, Tanganyika Territory, presented by C. MacMahon, Esq., Assistant Political Officer of Kilosso, on May Ist. 2 Capybaras (Hydrocherus hydiocherus), bred in England, purchased on May 12th. 1 Arabian Oryx (Oryx lewcorya), from Central Arabia, depo- sited by H.M. The King on May 14th. ON THE LIFE-HISTORY OF THE DRAGONFLY. 439 AVES. 2 Somali Ostriches (Struthio molyidophanes), purchased on May 8th. 2 White Rheas (Rhea americana), purchased on May 12th. 1 Kagu (Rhinochetus jubatus), from New Caledonia, purchased on May 4th. 4 Long-tailed Shrikes (Urolestes melanoleucus) and 1 Black- collared Barbet (Lybius torquatus), from South Africa, deposited on May 22nd. New to the Collection. 4 Isabelline Turtle-Doves (Zurtur isabellina), 2 Rosy-grey Turtle-Doves (Turtur vroseigrisews), € Dongola 'Turtle-Doves (Turtur decipiens), from North-East Africa, deposited on May Ist, and 2 Spotted-bellied Francolins (francolinus spilogaster), pre- sented by Major Maurice Portal, F.Z.S., on May Ist. All new to the Collection. REPTILIA. 1 Siamese Crocodile (Crocodilus siamensis) and 2 Tentacled Snakes (/erpeton tentacultwm) from Siam, the latter new to the Collection, presented by Dr. Malcolm Smith, F.Z.8. Prof. J. H. Durrpen, F.Z.8., exhibited and made remaiks upon a sertes of Ostrich eggs. broke do. Tmovarp, M.A. D.Sc, Fos) bsi.S:, gave an account, illustrated by lantern-slides, of 'The Life-history of the Dragonfly, with special reference to Australian forms Dr, Tillyard dealt first with the structure of the female ovipositor, and showed the correlation between the habit of laying eggs in the tissues of plants and the elongated form of the eggs, on the one hand, and that of laying them freely in the water, the eggs in this case being of a much more rounded form, ‘I he develop- ment of the embryo and the hatching of the larva were next dealt with; the creature that hatches from the egg is not an active larva, but a sheathed pronymph, whose existence lasts but a few seconds, and from which the active young larva emerges in its turn, representing actually the second larval instar of other insects. The various types of larve found in the two suborders Anisoptera and Zygoptera were next shown, and a series of slides dealt with the interesting larval specialisations in the gizzard, the prehensile labial mask, and the rectal and caudal ells. wie No. 205. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* May 11th, 1920. Prof. J. P. Hitt, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read a Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April, 1920. On behalf of Messrs. HE. Gerrard & Sons, Mr. R. I. Pococr, F.R.S., exhibited a mounted specimen of a pale variety of the White-Bearded Gnu (Connochetes albojubatus), shot by Capt. Keith Caldwell, R.A., F.Z.S.,in Masailand, and pointed out that apart from the general pale yellowish-brown tint, the variation affected different parts of the body in different ways, the neck- mane, the long hairs on the face, and the tail-tuft, which are normally black, being dirty white, whereas the bands on the body, making the brindled pattern, which are also normally black, were brownish red. Miss J. B. Procror, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks on a living specimen of the tailed Batrachian, Sipelerpes fuscus Bona- parte, born on May 8th, 1920. * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent’s Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Hellows who subscribe to the Publications ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 22 Prof. J. E. Durrpen, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks on a remarkable series of lantern-slides illustrating the sexual dis- play and nesting-habits of the Ostrich. Dr. W. J. Daxry, F.Z.8., communicated his paper on “ Fauna of Western Australia.—lII. Further Contributions to the Study of the Onychophora”; and illustrated his remarks by lantern- slides and microscopic specimens, showing points in the structure of Peripatus. Mr. C. Forstzr-Coorrer, M.A., F.Z.8., gave a résumé of his paper ‘‘ Chalicotheroidea from Baluchistan,” illustrated by speci- mens and lantern-slides. The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, June Ist, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— Dr. G. M. Vevers, F.Z.S. Report on the Entozoa collected from animals which died in the Gardens during the past nine months. Prof. R. T. Leper, F.Z.S. Exhibition: Experimental transmission of some Helminth infections. Dr. W. T. Catman, F.Z.S. Notes on Marine Wood-boring Animals.—I. The Shipworms (Teredinide). The SECRETARY. Notes on an African Trip, with lantern illustrations. 23 The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society OF Lonpon, Recent’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. May 18th, 1920. ‘ ae \; ; Mth at at's Oe Ba Part ah a 7] ia al EE An i, \ t ) ¥ We S00 8 ree a, A bt 087) ’ r oy ‘ a) ‘ 4 ae YoY Set ‘ PPLARaa Cody Py ha iba 4 . 5 j Kige} the ees oe Le , T a> “i . - i A : be | Wy ° i os ‘ : } . . ' ‘ ; BS j f ¥ x = a Ld . i = uf +. i LEARN i eal \ : ye ’ 4 5 R x, * mi ‘ as # H : ‘ i a AY be N = ' t t un : int ! Me 4 < j uv . No. 206. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* June ist, 1920. Sir Sripney F. Harmer, K.B.H., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. Dr. G. M. Vevers, F.Z.S., communicated his “‘ Report on the Entozoa collected from Animals which had died in the Society’s Menagerie during the past Nine Months.” In the absence of Prof. R. T. Lerprer, F.Z.S., his exhibition of lantern-slides illustrating the Experimental transmission of some Helminth infections, was described by Dr. VEVERs. Dr. W. T. Cauman, F.Z.S., gave a résumé of his paper ‘“‘ Notes on Marine Wood-boring Animals.—I. The Shipworms (Tere- dinidee).” Dr. P. Coatmers MitcHet1, F.R.S., gave an account, illustrated with lantern-slides, of his resent Aeroplane Trip from Cairo to Tabora, and described the character of the country passed over and the birds and mammals seen. * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offiees, Zoological Gardens, _ Regent’s Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance, 26 The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, June 15th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m., when the following communications will be made :— The SECRETARY. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May, 1920, Prof. J. EH. Durrpen, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remark on, Ostrich eggs. Miss Joan B. Proctsr, F.Z:8. 1. On a Collection of Tailless Batrachians from East Africa made by Mr. A. Loveridge in the Years 1914-1919. 2. On the Type-Specimen of Rana holsti Boulenger. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., F.Z.S. ‘On the External and Cranial Characters of the European Badger (J/eles) and the American Badger (Tuaidea). R. J. Trtyarp, M.A., F.LS. The Life-History of the Dragonfly. The following Papers have been received :— J. H. Luovp, M.Sc., F.Z.8. Some Observations on the Structure and Life-History of the common Nematode of the Dogfish (Scylliam canicula). ‘ Wm. A. Cunnineton, M.A., Ph.D., F.Z.8. The Fauna of the African Lakes ; a Study in Comparative Limnology, with special reference to Tanganyika. W.N. F. Wooptanp, D.Sc., F.Z.S. On some Results of ligaturing the Anterior Abdominal Vein in the Indian Toad (Lu/o stomaticus Lutkin). 27 The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed, and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZOOLOGICAL Society or Lonpon, Reegent’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. June 8th, 1920. iy athe WL No. 207. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON,* June 15th, 1920. Prof. EH. W. MacBrips, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secrerary read a Report on the Additions to the Society’s. Menagerie during the month of May, 1920. Prof. J. KE. Duerpen, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks upon a series of Ostrich eggs. Miss Joan B. Proctor, F.Z.8., gave a réswmé of her papers. (1) ‘*On a Collection of Tailless Batrachians from Kast Africa made by Mr. A. Loveridge in the Years 1914-1919,” and (2) ‘On the Type-specimen of Kana holstt Boulenger.” Mr. R. I. Pocock communicated his paper ‘‘ On the External and Cranial Characters of the European Badger (eles) and the American Badger (Tawidea). * This Abstract is published by the Society at its offices, Zoological Gardens, Regent’s Park, N.W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, along with the ‘ Proceedings,’ free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Simpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sta Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 30 Dr. R. J. Trutyarp, M.A., F.L.S., gave an account of the Life-History of the Dragonfly, with special reference to Austra- lasian forms, and illustrated his remarks by a series of lantern- slides. This Meeting closes the Session 1919-1920. The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, October 19th, 1920, at 5.30 p.m. A special notice will be circulated early in October. The following Papers have been received :— J. H. Luoyp, M.8c., F.Z.8. Some Observations on the Structure and Life-History of the common Nematode of the Dogfish (Scyllium canicula). Wm. A. Cunnineton, M.A., Ph.D., F.ZS. The Fauna of the African Lakes; a Study in Comparative Limnology, with special reference to Tanganyika. W.N. F. Wooptanp, D.Sc., F.Z.S. On some Results of ligaturing the Anterior Abdominal Vein in the Indian Toad (Bufo stomaticus Lutkin). Haru Ram Meura, M.Sc. On the Sexual Phase in certain Indian Naididz (Oligocheia). 31 The Publication Committee desire to call the attention of those who propose to offer Papers to the Society, to the great increase in the cost of paper and printing. This will render it necessary for the present that papers should be condensed, and be limited so far as possible to the description of new results. Cominunications intended for the Scientific Meetings should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. ZooLocica Socrery or Lonpon, Recent’s Park, Lonpon, N.W. 8. June 22nd, 1920. 15. 16. Lig 18. 19, 20. 21. 22. 25. 25. PAPERS. The Life-History and Habits of two Parasites of Blow-flies. By A.M. Anrson. With an Introduction by Prof. H. Maxwexu Lerroy, F.Z.8. (Text-figures 1-20.) ...... A Revision of the Nematode Family Gnathostomide. By H. A. Baynis, M.A. Oxon., Assistant in the Department of Zoology, British Museum (Natural History), and Crayton Lanz, M.D.Lond., Lt.-Col. I.M.S. (ret.). (Dext-figures 140; Plates I- TPIS) ae SAU a a a Aa ar eg Age tts ct ae Yet Contributions to a Study of the Dragonfly Fauna of Borneo.—Part IV. A List of Species known to occur in the Island. By F. F, Larpuaw, M.A. (Oantab.), F.Z.8. RSet hon eay At pe aero gweia ah aicaiala'e ale wcin So sin alsa cls ao Ot aEM ete una a Maat aimee, eG On some new Therocephalian Reptiles from the Karroo Beds of South Africa. By Re-BRooM, M.D. DSe., HRS., O.M.Z.8. (Text-figures 1—9:) 2.) S).c5. cece se ees Chalicotheroidea from Baluchistan. By C. Forstar-Ooormr, M.A., EZS., Super- intendent of the University Museum of Zoology, Cambridge. (Plate I. and Text- EWG S17) ge Nene eee AG anne DEERE oe Om naa eR Ean GUce ac cee ao eemee Page 245 311 307 Fauna of Western Australia.—III. Further Contributions to the Study of the | Onychophora. The Anatomy and Systematic Position of West Australian Peripa- ‘toides, with an account of certain histological details of general importance in the study of Peripatus. By Wm. J. Dakin, D.Sc., F.Z.S., F.L.S8., Professor of Biology, University of Western Australia. (Plates I.-V.) ..... RANE NCiC NTRS te Mee art ee Notes on Marine Wood-boring Animals.—I. The Ship-worms (Teredinide). By W. T. Cauman, D.Sc. (Text-figures 1-11.) ........4.. RE SUIT cant eae e Report on Entozoa collected from Animals which died in the Zoological Gardens of London during Hight Months of 1919-1920. By G. M. Vevzrs, M.R.C.8., L.R.C.P., ‘F.Z.8., Beit Memorial Research Fellow, Demonstrator in Helminthology at London School of Tropical oe and Hon. Parasitologist to the Zoological Society of Ibe OM op gide,.cb de Gentes SO tag UA UM EA MOn am cena noon bop SCO uuunse de oo . On a Collection of Tailless Batrachians from Hast Africa made by Mr. A. Loveridge in the years 1914-1919. By Miss Joan B. Procter, F.Z.S. (Text-figures 1-4.) On the Type-specimen of Rana holst Boulenger. By Miss Joan B. Procrzr, BR Z.8. (UES TETRIS) Ota Bc GAH s Be Nn SIA ein EA RMe CEO ERO. OO OD DAT ea omni cerets On the External and Cranial Characters of the European Badger (Meles) and of the _American Badger (Tawidea). By R. I. Pocock, F.R.S. (Text-figures 19-25.) 405 41] PLATES. 1920, Parr III. (pp. 195-439). Plate Bayurs and Lane: 1.) oS } GiimthoshOmid ey sfc s oi veces ac oie ere oe VI. VII. VIII. / Forster-Coorer : I. Chaliaotherciden from Baluchistan . Daxin : He) iT] : TIL. oe Australian Peripatoides IV v.) Page 3oT NOTICE. The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in fowr parts, paged consecutively, so that the complete reference is now P. Z. 8. 1920, p.... The Distribution is usually as follows, but on account of abnormal conditions Parts I. & II. are issued together :— Part I. issued in March. SS aiadale * June. yoo LI september; LVR December, ‘ Proceedings, 1920, Parts I. & IT. (pp. 1-194), were published together on July 21st, 1920. The Abstracts of the ‘ Preceedings,’ Nos. 205-207, are contained in this Part. PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. | a 1920. (a0m 14 1991 > & . “oral mus av ie PART IV. contarntine Paces 441 to 656, witn 40 TExt-FiGuRES. DECEMBER 1920. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT ITS HOUSE IN REGHNT'’S PARK. LONDON : MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, alt CO., PATERNOSTER ROW. [Price Twelve Shillings. | LST OR CON TENTS, 1920, Parr 1V. (pp. 441-656). EXHIBITIONS AND NOTICES. Page The Sucretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months — of June, July, August, and September, 1920 .. ....c eee ce ee ee eee eee eee eee 653 Dy, P. Craters Mitcunit, O.B.H., M.A., LL.D., D.Se., FE.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a Double-tailed Lizard .......... 0s. e ee cee ee ce eee eee eee ee | 655 Mr. R. I. Pococx, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the skin of the groin of Tragelaphus bwxtoni csv. s cere cece ce cece teen ee eee cece eees eee eee nee eens 655 Mr. E. G. Bouzenesr, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, living specimens of Necturus.. 0. reece see e nce e eee eee eer e ee eee ees wi eieileidate foialeke a cele eae 655 Mr. T. A. Barns, F.Z.S. An account of his recent journey through the Forests of Africa in search of Gorilla and Okapi 2... sce cece cece ee ne ee ee estes eee poe Ge 656 The Sucrerary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of Oatober, TOQO. 2S coe asks tate mite wteiote Ramevelevertoaiagela, alelelleiace Wisje cle cline tiniest ae COED Mr. J. T. Cunninquam, M.A., F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of the Leech Trocheta, recently found in the Society’s Gardens ............+--++++-+00.. 656 Mr. F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a series of Cinemato- graph Films of Animals in the Society’s Gardens ......s. ee sess eee sees eee ee 656 Contents continued on page 3 of Wrapper. ZOOLOGICAL SOCI KTY OF LONDON. Yurs Society was founded in 1826 by Sir Sramrorp Rarriss, Mr. J. Sasine, Mr. N. A. Vigors, and other eminent Naturalists, fer the advancement of Zoology and Animal Physiology, and for the introduction of new and curious subjects of the Animal Kingdom, and was incorporated by Royal Charter in 1829. Patr HIS MAJESTY COUN On. THE KING. fan OIL. Aa HIS GRACH THE DUKE OF BEDFORD, K.G., E.R.S., Provitour Lis Tas Hon. Cucit Barina, M.A. Atrrep H. Cocks, Esa., M.A. Lr.-Cot. 8. Monexron-Corrman, M.D., F.R.S. Cuartrs Droummonp, Hsa., Treasurer. Hueu 8. Gransronu, Ese., M.A., F.LR.S.E. Sir Sipyey F. Harmer, K.B.E., Mew DSc. 7H Ris. Vice- President. Pror. Jamzus P. Hitt, D.Sc., F.RAS., Vice-President. Wittiam Hunrsman, Ese. Pror.HanustW. MacBripg,).sc., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice President Cot. Sin Haney McManon, G.C MG Kee: H. G. B. Meapu-Wanpo, Hse, Vice-President. P. Cmatmers Mrrcnent, Hse, CBE. MAS DiSe:, Jul De F.RS., Secretary. Tur Hart or Onstow, O.B.E. Masor Atperr Pam. Aprian D, W. Pottock, Hse, H.G. Tar Duxeor Rurtann, K.G. | Tus Marquis or Suigo, F.S.A., Vice-President. Masor Ricowarp S. Taytor. A. Trevor-Barrys, Hse., M.A. Awrpony H. Winertezp, lise., Vice-President. 2 The Society consists of Fellows, and Honorary, Foreign, and Corresponding Members, elected according to the By-Laws. It earries out the objects of its foundation by means of its collection of living animals, by its Library, and by its Scientific Publications. The Office of the Society, Regent’s Park, N.W.8, where all com- munieations should be sent, addressed to “The Secretary,” is open from Ten till Five, except on Saturdays, when it closes at OnE p.m. The Library, under the superintendence of Mr. F. Martin Duncan, F.Z.8., F.R.M.S. is open daily (except Sunday) from Ten a.w, till Five p.m.; on Saturdays, Ten a.m. till One p.m. The Library is closed from Good Friday to Easter Monday, and upon all other Bank Holidays. It is also elosed annually for cleaning purposes during the whole month of September. The Meetings of the Society for General Business are held in the Meeting Room at the Society’s Office on the third Wednesday of the month at 4.30 p.m. except in September and October. The Meetings for Scientific Business are held in the Meeting Room at the Society’s Office fortnightly on Tuesdays, except in July, August, September, and December and January, at half-past Five o'clock p.m. The Anniversary Meeting is held on the 29th of eel or the nearest convenient day, at Four p.m. The Society’s Gardens are open daily from Nine o’clock until Sunset. Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., F.L.S., is the resident Super- intendent and Curator of Mammals, Mr. D. Seth-Smith is Curator of Birds and Inspector of Works, Mr. EH. G. Boulenger is Curator of Reptiles, Miss L. K.Cheesman, F.E.S., is Curator of Insects. Appli- cafiens for anatomical material or facilities for work in the Prosectorium should be addressed to Dr. R. T. Leiper, Director of the Society’s Prosectorium. TERMS FOR THE ADMISSION OF FELLOWS. Frrirows pay an Admission Fee of £5, and an Annual Contri- bution of £3, due on the Ist. of January, and payable in advance, or a Composition of £45 in lieu thereof; the whole payment, including the Admission Fee, being £50. No person can become a Frttow until the Admission Fee and first Annual Subscription have been paid, or the annual payments have been compounded for. Fruitows elected in November and December are not liable for the Subscription for the vear in which they are elected. PRIVILEGES OF FELLOWS. Frttows have Personal Admission to the Gardens upon signing their names in the book at the entrance gate, and may introduce Two Companions daily. The Wire or Hussanp of a Fetrow can exercise these privileges in the absence of the Fellow. Until further notice, Frtnows will receive 40 undated Green Cards, available on any Sunday or week-day up to the end of February of the year following the year of issue, and 20 White Cards available on any week-day up to the same date. Twenty of the Green Cards may be exchanged for a book containing two Orders for each Sunday in the year. ‘Twenty White Cards may be exchanged for a book of dated Week-day Orders, each Order available for any day during the week except Sunday. Special ehildren’s tickets are no longer issued, but the Green and White Cards are perforated, and each half is valid for a Child under twelve years of agé. It is particularly requested that Fellows will sign every ticket before it goes out of their possession. Unsigned tickets are not valid. Frttows are not allowed to pass in friends on their written order or on presentation of their visiting cards. Frtrows have the privilege of receiving the Society’s ordinary Publications issued during the year upon payment of the additional Subscription of One Guinea. This Subscription is due upon the Ist of January, and must be paid before the day of the Anniversary Meeting, after which the privilege lapses. Frntows are likewise entitled to purchase these Publications at 25 per cent. less than the price charged to the public. A further reduction of 25 per cent. is also made upon all purchases of Publications issued prior to 1881, if above the value of Five Pounds. Fetiows also have the privilege of subscribing to the Annual Volume of ‘The Zoological Record,’ which gives a list of the Works. and Publications relating to Zoology in each year, for the sum of One Pound Ten Shillings. Separate divisions of volumes 39 onwards. can also be supplied. Full particulars of these publications can be had on application to the Secretary. Fentows may obtain a Transrerasie Ivory Ticknr admitting two persons, available throughout the whole period of Fellowship, on payment of Ten Pounds in one sum. A second similar ticket may be obtained on payment of a further sum of Twenty Pounds. 4 Any Fritow who intends to be absent from the United Kingdom during the space of at least one year, may, upon giving to the Secretary notice in writing, have his or her name placed upon the “dormant list,” and will then be called upon to pay an annual subscription of £1 only during such absence, but after three years must make a further application to be retained on that list. Any Frrntow, having paid all fees due to the Society, is at liberty to withdraw his or her name upon giving notice in writing to the Secretary. Ladies or Gentlemen wishing to become Fellows of the Society to) are requested to communicate with “The Secretary.” P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. Regent’s Park, London, N.W. 8. December, 1920. MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS. 1921. TUESDAY, FEBRUARY ...... 8 and 22. MARCH ......... 8 and 22. Be ZACP RIL Aaa nee Dd and 19. i NAY os eens 10 and 24. bi JUNE cleo. ft The Chair wiil be taken at half-past Five o'clock precisely. ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. Tne scientific publications of the Zoological Society of London are of two kinds—“ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and “ Transactions,” in quarto. According to the present arrangements, the ‘‘ Proceedings” contain not only notices of all business transacted at the sciea- tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings and recommended to be published in the ‘‘ Proceedings” by the Committee of Publication. A large number of coloured plates and engravings are issued in the volumes of the “ Proceedings,”’ to illustrate the new or otherwise remark- able species of animals described therein. Amongst such illustrations, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society's Gardens are often given. The “Proceedings”? for each year are issued in four parts, paged consecutively, during the months of March, June, September, and December. From January 1901 they have been issued as two half-yearly volumes, indexed separately. An “ Abstract of the Proceedings’ is published by the Society on the Tuesday following the date of the Scientific Meeting to whichit refers. It is issued along with the “‘ Pro- ceedings,” free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subseribe to the Publications, but it may be obtained on the day of publi- cation at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance. The ‘‘ Transactions” contain such of the communications made to the Scientific Meetings of the Society as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form. They are issued at irregular intervals. Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni- versary Meeting, are entitled to receive the Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less than the price charged to the Public. A further reduction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications issued prior to 1881, if they exceed the value of Five Pounds. Fellows also have the privilege of subscribing to the Zoological Record for a sum of One Pound Ten Shillings (which includes cost of delivery), payable on the Ist of July in each year; but this privilege is forfeited unless the subscription be paid before the 1st of December following. The following is a complete list of the publications of the Society already issued. ! TRANSACTIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Ato. 20 vols. and Index. Pricete Price to the Fellows. Public. Vols. I-IV. (out of print). Vol, Y., containing (67) Plates (ea(862=Go\in 2. 5) 4.93 Pe EY) PONT LS! 5 92 Pp) co (Chelte=69) SU Oe 2 IO). © Bee VLL, f 73 1 wan SOOO \ie es LO! A Ole eyanles onan) ap NBUUES s 82 » «+ (1872-74) 7853 IP) Uk 0) Siu Wil Da 5 99 moe (IStO=T iw Bae it GB Ge 2 © Xi, x 95 Feed CLONE) mere ae LO) OMS ey 0 Index! Vols. Xs) Quy. eee Gis33—/O) en. 10 an OOO Vol. -XI., containing 97 Plates .. (1880-85) .... 912 0 12 16 0 poe eee GTOTE 3 65 oo (Use) soeR Hats © 74 0 Ay ee GUN, A 62 oa (SID) Segaeon ie pada PE NOION SC ist AE i 8 CISSIE-9S) Seay ae on @ HO. © a ae ot VES :, 52 ye de (SOS 4901) ae aie des. (6: Ge lee) oe saan ates my so, CODISISOD agus) 1 ALO og oC WE, ai Wace iy oo (CSS =IS08) oe oS CNS Aa) » VIIL., yp) (4d jp tame LOO MERCER) 5 "4 SO) 5 8 0 Sp INO NC 5) ano woo (EOSICIO) se low @ pedis EN (0) Bae Oe pa Wed eo) py OLOIPETOTS) ORES te © y XXI].—Part 1. (¢ Plates & 12 Text- fod) GwinswhlG 2b ono g wala ay 3 0 0 now avie to offer for sale, at the reduced price of £30, sets of Vols. V._XVI. inclusive, and In consequence of a re-arrangement of the stock of the ‘‘Dransactions,’ the Society isf fos papers, of which a list can be supplied, at about one-fourth their published price. PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRESPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 2 vols. (Letterpress only). *Part I. 1830-31. 1 vol. 8vo., out of print. Sy Oty lees ay Sr Me eel ieee Baleares Nas Bs, O00. amos Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. First Series. Parts I—XV. (1833-1847). 8vo. 15 vols. (Letterpress only.) Price to Fellows : 4s. 6d. each part ; to the Public, 6s. Index 1830-1847. Price to Fellows: 4s. 6d.: to the Public, 6s. Parts I., VII.—-IX., XI., XIV., XV., out of print. SECOND SERIES. Parts XVI.-XXVIII. (1848-1860). 8vo. 13 vols. (Letterpress onjiy.) Price to Fellows: 4s. 6d. each part ; to the Public, 6s. Index 1848-1860. Price to Feliows: 4s. 6d. ; to the Public, 6s. The Parts of this series containing Coloured Plates are out of print. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 40 vols. and 4 Indices. Letterpress only. With Plates uncoloured. With Plates coloured. Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. Fellows. Publie. Fellows. Public. Giles 4 sar Od aarti am OSS oo... < Qs. Nan oll 2 See SOS MEO Calm ein ASK IGGL 2, -4ss Gee bes OS weceon SE RN Reet Giaca os Aon ine 0 AKG, IGS 6 4'e, Ge ease Osher 2 sets 9s. Jal BLDSis Rae 30s. 9d Ads. 1864 AS. (Shs a ioloiot EBS26 Bae alo 9s. Ta Oe eri p BBG Oh ores 45s.%* 1865 Ala’ (ihe on bo OSs eee 9s. See BES, Sl con, 4S 1866 Her (Bh cn a al OOS 4 & Sota Qs. NASSP 5 oh 060 BIS Oth cou, Gis ASG ats seers lai ees nan ise eae a 9s. 123.¥*. . Gos Bh oon. ans TUCO, i 6 2 Ce ere 9s. Ds SOSOO MeL OS HIS GOR Uae pari meian) Ved aiden SCI a 9s D5 Aah He BE8, Bh sie leis TUESHAO) seeh tae este nah Me ilies ee ae ae 9s 12s. eae, SUL sooo ine Hindiexe lS OUSISTOM seis. s 5 oe 2 ess Als (60h, n'a oc 6s. Tea aa kad eae a GLa end 14.0) Ae 9s IDS Re at amy Bh cose Cle LUCCA. Pe Open 6 Nanni echiea ee 9s HE ae Ae ib 308. 9d. .... 45s8.F Sone eee ROME Cue iiyy eet wes Dy 9s Ae ean Bae, BW soon Gas AS FAME Mita ry eee Neate 2055 9s SEMA Ss Res 36s 48s.F TRS ASS SES sales Bete Meats le pa I a 9s SC DS) aera 36s 48s ISSVAG) Ve ae RNS oo oth. cbt s Cae 9s sl sexe Geers 36s 485.7 TRIACS Ot ss ales tN ey ne 9s A DS. Maka eas, 36s A8s SUSY Mey 4 Go Sich Baie Os GOS RUSIR EEN Oe 9s MDS: 36s 48s TRAC) ils, alee cian Chee oe Nene Ieee ee as coe aanell se) So peepee 36s. seen A Sse SSOP A areas Web ce me Qs. MS ASSO) Ge Oa et 36s. aA SSS IndexsplS(I=lS8O oe es. AsncQan eigen 6s. les ts o Om entvolumess si 3./) Kachi))eei an .1eseysiis 36s. -.». 485, ldo SSIES OO aie clals AGS Qehs oot c 6s. ISOUNGCO, Wan wolltames Goon JOR Soocoaoco Sh seca ae 36s. sdon. Ges, ThnGlesx, ISCSUGCD Cee oa ea anaes Ass On aera OS: * No perfect copies in stock. t Out of print. PROCEEDINGS or tar GENERAL MEETINGS ror SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS or tue ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 32 vols. and Index. Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. NGOIENSLOR wenty volutes eer ierete rite ietttette tert iach) Les. ames Tindexs 1GOL VOLO) i. jctete topes es = oteiel el Mate seeetetey aie Rolo aot As. Gd. ..... 65. ISTH Olt BeSpeanb Mano ocanycytuoos Grebe Koo u se geno oumD TS sive pvaior 24s. Ao! oie! Eero Stride ich o's doo So oo adam 188.0 eee 24s. IGA in Ree ay ebia debe gucicd a e.oco0 0acch a aumgore LSsh ecce 24s. Ae hee UC) reer mn suena oon bod 0 QOS Sena NRK yee abv 24s CTS PRBS SC TLE WA Eas caus dal ah bd c.c\u'a\a 0 218 glade aaa 1Ss:\ 20e hae 24s. die UBM aor o8 Sid an Su cRa Ol Bcr A Yo ¢ S.o oo Cours URS) 5 5.0.0-¢ 24s CC en Bane omanicatieno bas gdodhc oe 66 00 Cd cao mmEeamIa IRSBR sin ode 24s, We ells onaecde cen ougdodor sadn 4 oo.054000qn sdb mUmD LS svete anes 24s CHG tare) Wena Aaa nies baron aq bicciono ado Sem oaeen 1Ssiy i dee aS Tee cpu eee SUN ches MASS eases oa boo 6 oo or amae: AEE Bek oe cian 6 24s. TRCN Seve ILE NW euaeg Oroksinb ao ction Sole 0S 0 6 iily kien eae TS Sener 24s. te Us fo timeouts domo 5 c0o sc ou ego poem ISG oo ceo 24s WY ay ooh beanie Go ooo aA agcesnds one RESP OE ie 5 nie a Tecra 9As. Dey WU Gel Banh amnn cememnccu oad pablo 4. CUM Ga maan Ost ahr eis 12s IC eS an eran Wl cies oy cobain ere tea con cle lo, 0.0 0:5, a1 0 See ea aa OS MSc aene 12s. Were sane] eee een as lrnes Pr oe, RIGS toed aad) 0 cro, 0'0'0 0 6 COMERS SEE ge oq00 12s. IRR ey Ime orma ao Sorin soca pad de sd 50d socgombmeE Wek aes 20, ie his Ue tee ene Seapine acedac goon} ond SeeomEe TOS ere 20s ISHS a cee matione ds Nmelb-c obiadc's 0%: 9 son's oMambeNe VOSS estan ae 20s. LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Cloth, 4s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Ninth Edition.) 8vo. 1896. Cloth, 6s. CATALOGUE OF THE LIBRARY of the Zoological Society of London (Fifth Kdition.) 8vo. 1902. Cloth, 6s. THE OFFICIAL ILLUSTRATED GARDEN GUIDE— 18th Edition (Revised)—with (1) a Railway and Street Map; (2) a Plan of the Grounds; (3) a short description of some of the principal animals in the Collection, with 52 Photographic Illustrations and Index. Price ls. in Stiff Paper Cover, postage 2d. THE HOUSE-FLY CAMPAIGN. 3rd Edn. Illustrated. §vo. 1916. 3d. PRACTICAL ADVICE ON THE FLY QUESTION. 8vo. 1915. 2d. ZOOLOGICAL RECORD.—Vol. 54, containing literature relating chiefly to the year 1917, was delayed owing to the War, but is nearly ready. Vol. 55, for the year 1918, is being prepared as usual. P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. Regent’s Park, London, N.W. 8. December, 1920. These publications may be obtained at Hee Socrzry’s OFFICE or through any bookseller. LIGATURING THE ANTERIOR ABDOMINAL VEIN IN INDIAN TOAD. 44] 26. On some Results of Ligaturing the Anterior Abdominal Vein in the Indian Toad (Bufo stomaticus Liitken). By W. N. F. Wooptanp, D.Sc. (London), ¥.Z.8., Indian Educational Service, Senior Professor of Zoology, Muir Central College, Allahabad. U.P., India. [Received June 1, 1920: Read October 19, 1920. ] (Text-figure 1.) Preliminary Statement. Most of the lower Vertebrata differ from the Mammalia in that the liver has conveyed to it a quantity of venous blood which has traversed the tissues of the legs and pelvic region, in addition to the venous blood which, as in Mammals, is derived from the gut-walls and contains the digested food products. This fact that in the lower Vertebrata the liver receives a portion of ordinary non-gut venous blood has not received the attention which its possible significance deserves. So far as I know*, only one author has ever offered an explanation, and this solely appertained to the coccygeo-mesenteric vein of Birds. Owen in 1841+ made the following observations: “The venous system of the kidneys is so arranged in birds that the blood can be distributed either to the portal system by the mesenteric vein [7.e. the blood brought to the kidneys by the femoral veins ean flow posteriorly through the substance of the kidneys in the so-called hypogastric veins and so enter the coceygeo-mesenteric vein], or to the pulmonary system by the vena cava and right side of the heart, according to the degree of rapidity with which the pulmonary or portal systems of veins are respectively supplied, or in other words, according to the activity with which the circulation in each of these systems may he going on at two different periods.... This disposition has been erroneously supposed to indicate that the urine was secreted from the venous blood in birds, as in reptiles and fishes; but the end attained by the venous anastomoses in question bears a much closer relation to the peculiar necessities and habit of life of the bird, and, so far as I know, has not hitherto been explained. There is no class of animals in which there may be, at any two brief and consecutive periods of existence, a greater difference in the degree of energy and rapidity with which the respiratory functions are performed than in birds. When the bird of prey, for example, stimulated by a hungry and an empty stomach, soars aloft and sweeps the air in quest of food, the muscular energies are then strained to the utmost, the heart beats with the most forcible and rapid * The author has not had access to literature in India. + “On the Anatomy of the Southern Apteryx,” Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. ii. 1841. Proc, Zoou, Soc,—1920, No, XXX, 30 A42, PROF. W. N. F. WOODLAND ON LIGATURING THE contractions to propel the current of blood along the systemic arteries, and the pulmonary vessels require the greatest possible supply of blood to serve the heart with the due quantity of arterialized fluid: the digestive system, on the other hand, is in a state of repose, and we may conceive the portal circulation to be at its lowest ebb. Suppose the Hagle to be glutted with his quarry and reduced to a state of torpor; the animal functions ave now at rest, but the organic powers concerned in the assimi- lation of the food are in full play, and the portal or hepatic circulation is as active as was the pulmonary a short time before.” And Owen further adds that ‘the anastomosis of the pelvic veins, in being the means of conveying common venous blood into the liver, goes to prove that the blood of the vene porte does not require any peculiar preparation by circulation in the spleen or other viscera to fit it for the secretion of bile.’ This explanation seems plausible, especially when we reflect that the common assumption made in nearly all modern text-books to the effect that the blood always flows anteriorly in the so-called hypogastric veins (also sometimes called the “renal portal” veims) of the bird is almost certainly wrong, it being, on the contrary, more than probable that the blood in these veins always flows posteriorly *, as conjectured long ago by Jacobson (1817), Jourdain*, and other authors. Butthis explanation evidently does not apply to animals like Amphibia and Reptilia, which are notoriously sluggish and yet pour into their livers a much greater proportion of non-gut venous blood than birds. Also in Mammals, which most resemble Birds in the alternating activity of the respiratory and portal systems, a communication between the post-renal and portal veins does not exist. Now a supply of ordinary non-gut venous blood to the liver may signify (1) that the venous blood is to enable the liver to obtain a greater supply of water than it would otherwise receive, or (2) that the liver is, in part, in these forms, an organ of excretion and supplementary to the kidneys. The first supposition naturally occurs to one when Amphibia are in question, since a toad or frog certainly never drinks water by mouth, but always absorbs it by the belly and thigh skin, and this water pre- sumably is taken to the liver by the anterior abdominal vein (and to the kidneys by the renal afferent veins), and this is probably the case in all Amphibia. Though in Fishes, Reptilia, and Birds there is no certain evidence of cutaneous absorption of water, yet it is well known that Snakes and Lizards frequently evince a desire to lie in water, and Fishes, Crocodiles, and Turtles of course habitually live in it. It may also be remarked that the anterior abdominal vein, or its equivalent, usually has factors from % his is a subject I hope to investigate in the near future. It is almost certain that these so-called hypogastric veins of birds are the homologues of the “ pelvic” veins of Amphibia and Reptiles and not of the “renal portal” veins, and if this be so, the blood must flow posteriorly in them. + M.S. Jourdain, “ Recherches sur la Veine Porte Renale,’ Annales des Sciences Nagurelles, 4 ser., Zoologie, Tome xii, 1859, p. 134. ANTERIOR ABDOMINAL VEIN IN THE INDIAN 'TOAD. 443 the walls of the urinary bladder, which, afterali, is a possible source of water. Finally, it is noteworthy that, for some reason or other, Reptiles and Birds (even when aquatic) conserve their water very eavefully, as we may realize when we note the semi-solid character of their urine*, the absence of sweat and mammary glands and their non-feetal rearing of offspring ; whereas Mammals, on the other hand, are very prodigal with water in all these respects. Hence it is possible that, comparatively little water being taken into the gut, the liver “arranges for” an accessory supply of blood in order to satisfy its water requirements. As to the liver, regarded as an organ of excretion in lower Vertebrata, I have no evidence. That in the Common Frog, however (and therefore in all other animals with anterior abdominal veins), the anterior abdominal vein supply to the liver is not essential to the life of the animal is proved by the abnormalities occasionally found’, in which the anterior abdominal opens into a pre-caval instead of into a hepatic-portal vein, the animal apparently being normal in all other respects. The Ligaturing of the Anterior Abdominal Vein in the Common Indian Toad. While in india in 1915 and 1916, I determined to ascertain the effects of ligaturing the anterior abdominal vein, though it is evident that this operation will not give results comparable with those to be found in the abnormalities just referred to, because in the latter the blood-flow in other veins is not interfered with, while in a toad with a ligatured anterior abdominal vein the blood, which would otherwise flow through this, is foreed to pass along the two renal afferent veins—the result being increased blood-pressure in the renal afferent veins and interference with the renal arterial circulation £. In all I performed thirty-four experiments. The method I finally adopted was to anzsthetize the toad with ether, cut through the belly skin and the underlying muscular body-wall for two or three centimetres, ligature the anterior abdominal vein in two places and remove the portion of the vein in between. Both the body-wall and the skin were sewn up with sterilized silk thread * Sharpe’s statement (Amer. Jour. Physiology, vol. xxxi.) that the water of the urine of birds is absorbed in the rectum, a thick paste of uric acid remaining, is in all probability incorrect—the semi-solid urine of birds and reptiles is found in this form in the ureters, and is so secreted by the kidneys. See Appendix in my paper “On the ‘ Renal Portal’ System (Renal Venous Meshwork) and Kidney Excretion in Vertebrata,” shortly to be published. + Woodland, W.N. F., Zool. Anzeiger, Bd. xxxv. 1910, p. 626. Also O’Donoghue, C. H., ibid. Bd. xxxvii. 1911, p. 36. ~ See my paper “On the ‘Renal Portal’ System (Renal Venous Meshwork) and Kidney Excretion in Vertebrata,’ Parts I. and II., shortly to be published. The results of double perfusion and other experiments prove that as the pressure in the renal afferent veins increases, the arterial flow becomes retarded, and above a certain point is stopped altogether. Ligaturing the anterior abdominal vein in the Indian toad more than doubles the amount of blood in each renal afferent vein. 30% 444 PROF. W. N. F. WOODLAND ON LIGATURING THE and the wound cleansed with weak carbolic acid, carbolic ointment being rubbed on the surface. While the wound was healing, 1 covered it with a pad of cotton wool, protected with a waterproof sheet, the four corners of which were drawn out and tied anteriorly above the scapulz and under the animal’s throat, and posteriorly over its back. The animals were given an occasional bath in shallow distilled water (the skin haying previously been well cleaned), but were normally kept dry, the pad protecting the wound from urine and fecal matter in the basin. Out of 11 toads operated on as above described (save that L only ligatured the anterior abdominal vein in one place) in 1915, one lived for ten days, one for fourteen days, one a day short of eight weeks, and two others were killed after eight weeks and eleven weeks respectively. 1 shall only record my examination of the three long-period survivors, all of which were operated on on October Ist, 1915, and the wounds healed by October 12th. A day or so later they were all active and feeding well. One, as already stated, died on November 26th, one day short of eight weeks after the operation. It was very thin, and had been ill during the previous week. It weighed at death (after subtracting weight of food in gut) 21°5 gms. The heart was normal in size (heart ratio =229°0*) ; the liver a trifle large (liver ratio=21°5 *). The liver was very diseased, being full of small cysts; the spleen was much enlarged and also full of cysts, and the fat-bodies very minute. Sex not recorded. ‘Tie anterior abdominal vein was found to be well ligatured and was quite empty; on the other hand, the renal afferent yeims and post-caval were very large, and the two kidneys (quite healthy) were gorged with venous blood and therefore rather dark in colour. It is important to note that a new anterior abdominal vein had not been formed. The kidneys, after as usual being slightly squeezed and all attached vessels removed, weighed together 0°230 gm., and were therefore apparently enormously enlarged (kidney ratio=93'5*, body-weight taken at death). . The toad (a male) which I killed on November 28th—eight weeks and one day after the operation—was perfectly healthy, being active and feeding well, and all the internal organs in perfect condition. In this toad I found to my surprise that @ new vein had been formed posterior to the ligature and entering the liver, also two or three small new veins coming from the muscles of the anterior ventral body-wall and opening into the principal new vein (text-fig. 1, B) 7. The body-weight (atter weight of food in gut subtracted) was 21°9 gms. The heart ratio was 199°3*; the liver (weighing exactly 1:0 gm.) ratio=23°9*; the kidney ratio=1648%. ‘The kidneys, therefore, were about normal in size. The remaining toad (a male) 1 killed on December 18th—cleven weeks after the operation—and this also was in perfect health mside and out. In this toad also a new vein had been formed to allow the ligatured anterior abdominal to become functional. The body-weight was 30:0 gms. The heart ratio=229'0*; the liver ratio=19°6 *; the kidney ratio=157°9*. The kidneys, therefore, were about normal in size. ‘ ody aoe. eee —for the heart (all vessels cut off and all blood washed out and dried) in these toads is 216°8 (determined in 29 toads); the normal ratio for the liver (squeezed and dried) was 284 (18 toads); the normal ratio for the kidneys (wt. of both kidneys, attached ureters and vessels being removed) was 237°5 (82 toads). J must add, however, that in two other lots of toads the average kidney ratios were 155°2 (10 toads) and 159°3 (6 toads). The kidney ratio (also the heart and liver ratios) shows great variations, not connected with the time of year or with sex. + Compare the “ rapid formation of a collateral circulation so that the blood could get round the ligature to the liver” (Starling, ‘ Principles of Human Physiology,’ 1912, p. 858) when in a mammal the portal vein was ligatured off from the liver and made to open into the posterior vena cava. In this case, however, the liver is deprived of blood from the gut and not merely of an additional supply of ordinary yenous blood, as in the toads with ligatured renal afferent veins, * The normal (average) ratio— ANTERIOR ABDOMINAL VEIN IN THE INDIAN TOAD. 445 Tn 1916 [ was unfortunate in this experiment, possibly owing fo my predilection for giving the animals a bath every morning, but probably also owing to the fact that in each operation I ligatured the anterior abdominal vein in two places and eut out a portion about half a centimetre in length in between. Out of 23 toads operated on only five survived for more than eleven days. That this was due largely to the mode of operation and not solely to the ligature of the anterior abdominal vein is shown Text-figure 1. A B A. Small regenerated anterior abdominal vein in a toad which was killed four weeks after the operation. LG, positions of the two ligatures, the intervening portion having been cut out in the operation. NV, new vein formed. B. Large regenerated anterior abdominal vein in a toad killed eight weeks and one day after the operation, which merely consisted of the vein being ligatured in one position. GB, gall-bladder ; other letters as in A. I cannot guarantee the absolute fidelity of these figures, since they have been copied from rather rough sketches made when I dissected the toads. by the fact that out of ten contro! toads in which an identical operation was performed, save that the exposed anterior abdominal vein was not ligatured, nine of them did not survive for longer than eleven days, and only one for six weeks and two days. OF the five survivors of the actual operation in 1916, one which survived eleven days had a kidney ratio (in all these ratios, unlike those of 1915, the weight of the body is that taken at date of operation) of 119°7; another which survived twelve days had a similar kidney ratio of 134°2; another survivor of two weeks and one day had a kidney ratio of 95:8. Only one toad completely survived the operation, and this was a female which I /illed four weeks after the operation. ‘The animal was then in perfect health inside and out, and in this case I found that a new vein had been formed to enable the anterior abdominal vein to continue to function (text-fig. 1, A). The animal weighed 23:4 gms. on the date of operation (July 22nd), but when killed 446 PROF. W. N. F. WOODLAND ON LIGATURING THE on August 19th only weighed 14°6 gms. (after allowing for weight of food in gut). All internal organs were quite healthy, and the renal afferent veins were very large, due of course to the small size of the newly-formed portion of the anterior abdominal. The heart had apparently become much reduced in size, or was naturally small, the ratio being (weight of body at date of operation) 325°0 ; the liver was also extremely small (ratio=67'2); and the kidneys were below the average size (ratio=260'0). Summarizing the results of these experiments, we may conclude that the ligature of the anterior abdominal vein caused either the death of the animal or the re-formation of the anterior abdominal vein: in no case did an animal survive in a healthy condition for a considerable length of time without a functional anterior abdominal vein. Conclusions. The fact that a new anterior abdominal vein was always formed in those toads which survived the operation described is no proof that the supply of blood to the liver by this vein is essential to the animal, because, as I have already pointed out, this feature is most certainly due to the fact that the arterial circulation in the kidneys is interfered with under the conditions of these experi- ments, and that is a sufficient reason for the formation of a new anterior abdominal vein. We have also seen that frogs can live without the blood in the anterior abdominal vein being added to that in the hepatic portal vein, and this fact by itself is good evidence for the view that the non-gut blood is not essential to the animal’s welfare. Two questions remain : (1) why should an anterior abdominal vein exist ? and (2) why should it normally open into the hepatic portal vein? The answer to the first question I have already indicated in a paper* published in 1906. In this paper I contended that in animals with “ portal” kidneys the flow of blood through the primitive posterior cardinal veins is considerably hindered by the kidney tubules invading the lumina of the two veins and subdividing them up into coarse networks of sinusoids (Shore +, Minott), and that the anterior abdominal vein is formed as an alternative route to relieve the congestion consequent on the formation of the “renal portal” system. Judging from recent measurements of the relative diameters of the renal afferent and anterior abdominal veins in Bufo stomaticus and Rana temporaria respectively, I find§ that in the Indian toad about three-fifths of the venous blood from the legs flows to the heart via the anterior abdominal vein and about two-fifths via the two renal afferent veins, and that in the frog (2. temporaria) about one-half of the blood flows by each of these two routes, from which we may conclude that the resistance to flow of the blood offered by the liver capillary system is in the toad about one-third and in the frog about one-half of that offered by the renal venous meshwork (‘renal portal” system) of each kidney. From other evidence$ * Woodland, W. N. F., Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1906, p. 886. + Shore, T. W.. Jour. Anat. Physiology, vol. xvi. (u.s.) 1901. * Minot, C.S., Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. vol. xxviii. (10) 1898, p. 265. § See Part Il. of my paper “On the ‘ Renal Portal’ System ete.,” shortly to be published. ANTERIOR ABDOMINAL VEIN IN THE INDIAN TOAD. 447 I have also concluded that the resistance offered to the blood traversing the hepatic portal system is very little more than that experienced by the blood when the anterior abdominal vein opens directly into a pre-caval vein, and this is supported by the fact that in such abnormalities (in which the anterior abdominal opens directly into a pre-caval) the renal afferent veins are of about the normal size. ‘The renal venous meshwork in both kidneys then offering considerable resistance to the passage of blood from the hind limbs and tail, I again suggest that this blood has sought an additional path by means of which it can reach the heart without traversing the “renal portal” systems, and this suggestion is in complete agreement with the view of morphologists that the anterior abdominal vein of Amphibia and Reptilia is a “new” structure, and has nothing in common with the vein which it so often resembles—viz., the umbilical vein. Since we have provisionally concluded that the blood in the anterior abdominal vein is of no use to the liver, and that the opening of this vein into the hepatie portal vein offers practically no more resistance to the passage of the blood than if it opened directly into a pre-caval, the answer to the second question must evidently be to the effect that the anterior abdominal vein opens into the hepatic portal vein merely because it is more convenient, the hepatic portal vein being more accessible than the pre-caval, and offering, as we have seen, but little more resistance to the flow of the blood. Occasionally, however (in ‘ abnormal” frogs), the ancestral connection of the anterior abdominal vein with a pre-caval vein is retained. It may beadded that in some animals (e.g-, im most Elasmobranchs) the posterior cardinal sinuses are so little broken up by the relatively small kidneys (Vialleton*) that a bypath for the blood (anterior abdominal vein) is unnecessary. * Vialleton, M. L., “ Caractéres lymphatiques de certaines veines chez quelques Squales.” C. R. Hebdom. des Séances de la Soc. Biol. Paris, Tome liv. 1902. LIFE-HISTORY OF THE COMMON NEMATODE OF THE DOGFISH. 449 27. Some Observations on the Structure and Life-History of the Common Nematode of the Dogfish (Seylliwm canicula). By J. H. Luoyp, M.Se., F.Z.8., Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator in’ Zoology at University College, Cardiff. [Received May 15, 1920: Read November 2, 1920.] (Text-figures 1-3.) Introduction. In the following pages an account is given of the parasitic Nematode, Proleptus scillicola, together with some observations on its life-history. The work was carried out, partly in the Zoolo- gical Department of the University of Birmingham and. partly at the Marine Biological Laboratory at Plymouth, towards the end of 1914 and the beginning of 1915, but until now I have been unable to write up my results for publication, owing to my absence on military service. J should like here to express my gratitude to Professor F. W. Gamble for his kindly criticism and advice during the course of this work. My thanks are also due to the Board of Studies in Zoology of the University of London for the use of their table at Plymouth, and to the Royal Society for providing a grant which enabled me to procure the necessary material. A description has been thought desirable because, although the worm is exceedingly common, no complete account of its anatomy exists, and its life-history has never been worked out. Proleptus scillicola occurs in the alimentary canal of Scylliwm canicula from the mouth to the pyloric constriction. It has also been reported from S. catulus (5), S. stellare (1), Raia clavata (1), and Raia circularis (1). I have only had the opportunity of examining one Scyllium catulus, and this specimen was absolutely free from infection. Other species of the same genus under a different generic name have been reported and briefly described as follows :— Spiropterina inflata (8) Linstow, attached to the wall of the stomach of Scylliwm immoratum; Spiropterina afr icana (6) Linstow, from stomach of Anguilla sp. (%); Spiropterina elegans (12) Orley, from the stomach of Heaacanthus griseus; Spiro- pterina dacnodes (4) Creplin, from the cesophagus of Raia clavate and the stomach of Squalus mustelus. The worms are white in colour, and occur either free or attached within their hosts; when attached, it is always by the tail-end. The females are considerably larger than the males, from which they are easily distinguished by the tail, which in the male is coiled. 450 MR, J. H. LLOYD ON THE STRUCTURE AND LIFE- HISTORY Historical. Some confusion appears to exist as to the correct generic name of the Common Nematode of Seylliwm canicula. The first generic name assigned was Proleplus by Dujardin (5) in 1845. He (distinguished two species-—Proleptus acutus and Proleptus obtusus, but as he gives neither description nor diagram of Proleptus obtusus, 1b may be considered invalid. In 1860, Molin (11) described a nematode under the name of Listiocephalus dacnodes, which should apparently ve referred to the genus Proleptus, as it differs considerably from the remaining species of /istiocephalus and appears to be wrongly placed. During the following year (1861) Van Beneden (2) described the worm under the generic name of Spiropterina. Previous to Van Beneden placing it in a separate genus, it was provisionally assigned by Creplin (4) to the genus Spiroptera, chiefly because its head-end bore some slight resemblance to the Spiropteras of Valpa, Hrinaceus, etc. In 1870, Van Beneden (1) mentioned the worm under the generic name of Coronilla, and distinguished three new species :— Coronilla scillicola, Coronilla robusta, and Csronilla minuta. Neither the new genus nor the new species were described, but six drawings were given, which referred indiscriminately to two of the species—viz., Coronalla robusta and Coronilla seillicola. Spiroptert ia appears to be the generic name by which the worm is most commonly known, but Linstow (7) has put forward a strong argument in favour of the name Pr oleptus on the ground of priority. For this reason I shall use the generic name /’ro- leptus, but as Dujardin’s species acutus evidently refers to a distinct species which occurs in Seylliwnr catulus, and his species obtusus is difficult to determine, I propose to retain Van Beneden’s specific name seillicola, aud shall describe the worm under the name of Proleptus scillicola. In addition to the foregoing, it has been briefly described by Linstow (9). My observations differ from those of Linstow in several respects, and his diagrams are inaccurate. MorpHouoey. (a) Haternal Characters. The body is surrounded by a very thick, transparent cuticle, which is finely ringed transversely. Proleptus scillicola possesses extraordinary vitality. I have kept specimens alive in normal salt solution for over 17 weeks, whilst Linstow (9) records the fact that “specimens which had been in Miiller’s fluid for 48 hours arrived in a living condition.” The best results for whole mounts were obtained with Looss’s fixative. Worms killed in this manner are straightened consider-’ ably and retain their transparency. Perenyi’s fluid proved to be the best fixative for animals which were to be sectioned, whilst Para-carmine was the most effective stain. OF THE COMMON NEMATODE OF THE DOGFISH. 45] The body is slightly attenuated towards the anterior end, and the head (text-fig. 1) is characterized by the presence of a peculiar cuticular collar. It was probably the presence of this collar which suggested to Van Beneden his generic name Text-figure 1. ‘bn (O06: N.R. Head of Proleptus scillicola. LETTERING OF FIGURES. A, Anus. Oes. (sophagus. Al.C. Alimentary canal. Ov.D. Oviduct. C. Cuticle. hae 58 Papille. CG: Cuticular collar. | i, Rectum. M0. Cloaca. _ R.BIW. Right bursal wing. C.W. Cuticular wing. RG. Rectal gland. Lh, Intestine. | SaSe Small spicule. LT. Lips. |. (i Uterus. LBW. Lett bursal wing. | Va. Vulva. LAS. Large spicule. | WV. Vagina. N.R. Nerve-ring. Coronilla. There are two rounded, protruding, lateral lips, each of which bears a single conical tooth. Linstow (9) mentions in addition ‘“interiorly a small pointed cone,’ but I have failed to find any evidence of this either in whole mounts or sections. The excretory pore is exceedingly small, and is situated in the 452 MR. J. He. LLOYD ON THE STRUCTURE AND LIFE-HISTORY mid-ventral line, almost as far distant posteriorly from the nerve- ving as the latter is from the anterior end. The “tail” of the male (text-fig. 2) is coiled usually in a single ring, but occasionally into a spiral of two rings. There is an egg-shaped bursa, to right and left of which the cuticle is drawn out into wing-like expansions, supported by eight costal papillz on each side. Van Beneden (2) states that there are six or seven papille on each side. These papilla are pedunculate in form and are arranged symmetrically in two rows. There is a single papilla at either end of each row ; between the extreme papillz are six others arranged in three pairs. One Text-figure 2. Lateral view of tail of male Proleptus scillicola, showing large and small spicules and costal papille. par is situated in the region of the cloaca, and the two remaining pairs are posterior to it. The pre-cloacal papillae are somewhat longer than the remainder. Linstow (9) bas figured three papille on each side of the cloaca, but after careful examination of many bursee, I have failed to discover the third papilla. Two copulatory spicules of unequal length are present, the left being approximately five times as long as the right. ‘The average length of the longer spicule is 2°125 mm. and of the shorter “41 mim. The longer spicule is curved towards the distal end, and at the beginning of the curvature there is a prominence on the convex OF THE COMMON NEMATODE OF THE DOGFISH, AD3 side. Linstow (9) has stated that the larger spicule is bent into a hook at its distal end, but [ have not observed this arrange- ment in any of the worms I have examined. It is covered with numerous transverse markings, which give it a striated appear- ance under a fair magnification, and Nenana to a point at its distal end. Both spicules are ensheathed in cuticle. The “tail” of the male ends bluntly, and in the neighbourhood of the spicules the cuticle is raised into rows of rounded eleva- tions on the ventral surface. The tail of the female (text-fig. 3) is bent at an angle to the body and is somewhat attenuated. In the region of the vulva the cuticle increases considerably in thickness cn the ventral surface and forms a pad. Measurements in the case of Proleptus scillicola are almost valueless, as there are wide variations not only in the sizes of individuals, but also in the proportions of different parts. The male varies considerably less than the female. Mature females vary in length from 32°17 mm. to 59 mm., and the tail measures from °395 mm. to ‘583 mm. The proportion of tail: total length varies from 1:75:47 to 1:146°6. Linstow has given this proportion as 1:38°7. The distance from the vulva to the tail-end varies from °887 mm. to 1:06 mm., and the proportion of ‘ Vulva to tail end”: total length varies from 1: 39-7 to 1:53:07. The males vary in length from 31:73 mm. to 36°2 mm. The tail measures from 1°03 mm. to 1°56 mm., and the proportion of tail: total length extends between 1:19°66 and 1:30°8. Lin- stow’s proportion is given as 1:21°6. It would appear that Linstow has based his proportion on measurements of a single worm of each sex. (b) Internal Anatomy. The alimentary canal is normal, consisting of an esophagus, intestine, and rectum. The osophagus is of unequal thickness, being approximately twice as broad behind the nerve-ring as it is in front of at.) In the female it varies in length from 3°69 mm. to 5°86 mm., and the Rroporlion of csophagus : total length varies from 1:8°17 to 1:11:52. In the male the cesophageal length fluctuates between 3-6 mm. and 4- 53 mm., and the proportion of cesophagus : total length from 1:7°32 to 1: 8°81. In es section the lumen of the alimentary canal is tri- radiate anteriorly, but towards the posterior portion of the intestine it becomes tetra-, penta-, or hexa-radiate. Rectal glands occur Around the anterior end of the rectum in both sexes. They are four in number and are symmetrically arranged. The female reproductive system is typical, and the vulva opens to the exterior, a short distance in front of the anus, on the ventral surface. The eggs are developed from a polynucleated 454 MR. J. H. LLOYD ON THE SLYRUCTURE AND LIFE-HISTORY mass of protoplasm, and acquire distinctness as they approach the oviduct. ; The ova vary in length from 47°5 m to 52, and in breadth from 28°75 w to 34:1 uw. The thickness of the shell varies from 6°25 « to 6-52 4. Asa rule a coiled-up larva is formed within the shell before the “ eggs” are extruded from the uterus. It is possible to burst the “eggs” under a cover-glass and set free the contained larvae, which average 201 w in length. They are slightly attenuated towards the head-end, which is charac- terised by two protruding lips as in the adult, but there is no cuticular collar. The tail ends in a point, and is bent at an angle to the remainder of the body, but exhibits no sexual differen- tiation. Text-figure 3. Tail of mature female Proleptus seillicola. The male reproductive system is of the usual type. The excretory system consists of two canals, which pursue a sinuous course, one in each lateral line. From each canal a single branch descends to the ventral surface, where they unite just before reaching the excretory pore. The nervous system consists of a well-defined cireumeceso- phageal ring which gives off numerous branches both anteriorly and posteriorly. Life- History. The literature dealing with the life-history of Proleptus scilli- cola is scanty. In 1865, McIntosh (10) described ‘“‘The Tre- matode Larva and Ascaris of the Carcinus menas.” He discovered two specimens of his so-called Ascaris, one of which was lost, but his description of the other in some respects agrees with that of Proleptus scillicola, OF THE COMMON NEMATODE OF THE DOGFISH. 455 In 1870, Van Beneden (1) stated that “Dr. MeIntosh has found asexual nematodes in the ‘liver’ of Carcinus menas, which appear to be the young of Coronilla (Van Beneden).” Again, in 1875, Van Beneden (8a) stated that “The ordinary crab of our coasts, Carcinus menas, is the vehicle of a nematode which becomes a Coronilla robusta in the stomach of a ray.” Vaullegeard (14) in 1896 veported the larva of Coronilla robusta (Van Beneden) from a number of crustaceans, but stated that it was rare. In addition to Carcinus manas, he discovered it in Portunus marmoratus Leach, Hyas araneus Linneeus, and Pagurus bernhardus Linneus, but found only oac example in each of the last three hosts. Later he found a dozen nematode larve in Portunus depurator Pennant (=P. marmoratus Leach). Linstow (9) mentions the discoveries of McIntosh and Vaulle- geard, and states that the latter distributed the preparations of the larve, which indubitably belong to the genus Spiropterina (Van Beneden). Heperimental, Following up the suggestion of Van Beneden, I have attempted to infect the Common Shore-Crab, Carcinus menas, with the larvee of Proleptus scillicola. The results so far have been disappointing, as I have succeeded in obtaining only one larva, which I may reasonably assume to have developed from eggs, taken in with mature females of Proleptus scillicola, on which the crabs were fed. During the course of these experiments I have dissected 100 crabs, of which 59 were utilised in the feeding experiments and the remainder in control experiments. Of the 59 crabs used in the feeding experiments, 8 were infected with Proleptus larve, 43 larve being found, Two of the 41 crabs used in control experiments were infected, six larvee being found. Owing to the fact that all the larvae, except one, found in the erabs used in the feeding experiments were as old or older than those found in the controls, 1 am bound to conclude that they occurred as the result of natural infection. The larva which I presume to be the result of my feeding experiments measured 1:85 mm. The length of the cesophagus was °35 mm., and the proportion cesophagus: total length was 1:5:28. There was no cuticular collar present, but the tail was bent at an angle to the remainder of the body. The older larve examined varied in length from 10°16 mm. to 20 mm., and the length of the cesophagus from 1:79 mm. to 2°68 mm. The proportion cesophagus: total length fluctuated between 1: 5:09 and 1: 8°29. In the majority of these older larvee the head-end was sur- rounded by tie cuticular collar which is so characteristic of the adult worm. Genital organs were absent, as was also differen- tiation at the tail-end. a 456 LIFE-HISTORY OF THE COMMON NEMATODE OF THE DOGIISH. I have dissected a number of specimens of Pagurus bernhardus, but have not found any larvee of Proleptus scillicola in them. Conclusions. The above experiments show that the larve of Proleptus scilli- cola undoubtedly occur in Carcinus menas, but my failure to produce an artificial infection seems to point to the fact that Carcinus is not the true intermediate host. It is possible, however, that Carcinus menas may play some part in the infection of the Dogfish. Seylliam canieula does not normally occur at a less depth than thirteen fathoms, whereas Carcinus mcenas rarely occurs below a depth of three to four fathoms. During the breeding-season, however, Dogfish come close inshore, and it is probable that some of its infection takes place at this season. Literature. 1. Bunepen, P. J. vAn.—“ Les Poissons des Cotes de Belgique, leurs Parasites et leurs Commensaux,” plate 38. Meém. Acad. Se. Bruxelles, 1871. 2. BrenepEN, P. J. van.—‘‘ Mémoire sur les Vers intestinaux.” Jompt. Rend. Acad. Sc. Paris, Suppl. 1861, pp. 270-271. 3. Brenepen, P. J. vAn.—Les Commensaux et leurs Parasites, 1875, p. 206. 38a. Benepen, P. J. vAN.—Animal Parasites and Messmates. Translation of 3. 1st English edition. London, 1875. 4. Creprin.— Spiropterina dacnodes.” Archiv fiir Naturgesch. 1851, p. 308. Dusarpry.— Histoire des Helminthes, 1845, p. 105, Linstow, Dr. O. von.—Mitteilungen aus der Zoologischen Sammlung des Museums fiir Naturkunde in Berlin. 1. Band, 2 Heft. 7. Linstow, Dr. O. von.—Archiy fiir miky. Anat. und Entwick. Band 60, 1902. 8. Linsrow. Dr. O. von.—Archiv fiir Naturgesch. Berlin, 1890. 9 0 Don Band 1, Heft 3, pp. 180-181, Tab. x. figs. v.—viii. Linstow, Dr. O. von.—Achiv fiir mikr. Anat., Band 58. Bonn, 1901, pp. 191-194, Tab. ix. figs. 27-30. . McInrosu, W. C.—‘‘The Trematode Larva and Ascaris of the Carcinus menas.” Q.J.M.S8. vol. vi. (new series), 1865, pp. 201-204. 11. Monin, R.—Sitz. k. Akad. Wiss. 1860, pp. 512-513. 12. OrtEy.—‘‘ Die Entozoen der Haien und Rochen.” Termés- zetrajzi Fiizetek, vol. ix., Budapesth, 1885, pp. 97-126 & pp. 216-220 (Spirop. elegans). 13. Srosstcu.—Note Elminth. ‘Trieste, 1893. 14. Vautiecnarp, A.— Bullet. Soc. Linnéenne de Normandie, A sér. t. x., 1896, pp. 50-53, bh ( ON THE SBPXUAL PHASE IN INDIAN NAIDID&. Ad 6 28. On the Sexual Phase in certain Indian Naididee (Oligo- cheta). By Haru Ram Méura, M.Se., Professor of Zoology, Benndn University, Beans: ae [Received June 15, 1920: Read November 2, 1920. | (Text-figures 1-3.) I have recently collected in the neighbourhood of Agra a large number of examples of the following species of Naididee and Tubificide, many of which are fairly common there :— Nais pectinata var. inequalis Stephenson. Nais communis Piguet, var. punjabensis Stephenson. Hemonais laurentii Stephenson. Cheetogaster orientalis Stephenson. Chetogaster punjabensis Stephenson. Devo linosa Leidy. Pristina longiseta Ehrbg. Branchiodrilus hortensis Stephenson. Branchiura sowerbyi Beddard. As is well known, the Naididze usually reproduce asexually by fission, and in many species the genital organs have never yet been described. As Stephenson remarks (3), if such descriptions “were available throughout the group, it can hardly be doubted that we should be able to judge better of the affinities of genera and species, and consequently to improve our classification ; since the diagnoses of species and genera, and the scheme of dassté- cation, ‘depend at present to an unduly large extent on one single set of characters, the form and distribution of the sete.” I therefore give an account of the sexual organs in two of the above species, WVais pectinata vav. ineoorlis and Branchiodrilus hortensis ; though the organs have been described in certain other species of Vais, we have as yet no account of them in any species of the genus Lranchiodrilus. All the species of Naididee which have been observed by Stephenson to become sexual in Lahore, considerably further north than Agra, do so from February to May; the rains are there later and scantier than further south, and May, June, and sometimes July, before the rains appear, when the ponds are dry and the ground baked hard, represents the most unfavourable season of the year for pond-life. In Europe these worms would seem usually to enter on the sexual phase in the autumn, before the rigours of winter. In Agra I found the sexual specimens deser hea below in the autumn—in this part of the country the rains are abundant from the latter part of June to September ; the ponds begin to dry up in October, and the cold weather * Communicated by J. SrmeireNnson, 1).Sc., F.Z.S. Proc, Zoou. Soc.—-1920, No. XX XI. 31 458 PROF, LWARU RAM MELLRA ON THE | appears, as in Kurope, to be the unfavourable season. Whether the sexual phase makes its appearance in spring or autumn, there- fore, it seems to be a measure of protection against approaching adverse conditions; the ova, quiescent or developing slowly within the cocoon, are probably able to withstand such conditions better than the adult animal. In the case of Vais pectinata var. inequalis, atter the attain- ment of the full sexual phase, the alimentary canal in several of my specimens was seen to degenerate; the sime phenomenon has been noticed by Stephenson (8, 4) in Dero limosa and Temonais lawrentit. Many specimens of branchiura sowerbyi, Dero limosa, branchio- drilus hortensis, and Hemonais laurentii were found living together in the mud of a pond near Sikandra. A similar curious association of Branchiura sowerbyi and a species of Branchio- drilus has been noted by Beddard (1) in the Victoria regia tank in the Royal Botanic Society’s Gardens in Regent’s Park ; and Branchiura sowerbyi, Branchiodrilus hortensis, and a species of Dero have been found associated by Stephenson under’ natural conditions at Lahore (2). These three are among the few genera of Oligocheeta which possess gills; in Hemonais lawrenti, the fourth worm which I found in the association, though there are no gills, the vascular system is, for one of the Naidide, particu- larly highly developed. NAIS PECTINATA Var. INZQUALIS Stephenson. Since Stephenson had only spirit specimens at his command, I prefix a short account of some features of the general anatomy of this worm. My specimens were larger than Stephenson’s, their usual length being 8-10 mm., but when the worms are fully extended it may reach 15-18 mm. The colour is light reddish brown. The prostomium is bluntly conical. The worms exhibit active wriggling movements. The number of segments varies consider- ably—trom 40 to 95. The ventral sete are 4-6 in a bundle, usually 5; the length of those in the anterior segments (ii.-v.) is 97-105 pw, of the rest 88-93 w. The dorsal hairs were 306-332, and the dorsal needles 106-112 4; there is a slight indication of a nodulus on the latter. The penial setie (text-fig. 1) are the modified ventral sete of the sixth segment. They are 4-6 in a bundle, 98-105 in length, and are somewhat swollen near the tip, which is usually not forked although it is slightly hooked. Only two sete were noted as being bifid at their free end, and in these the prongs were short. blunt, and of equal length. The whole bundle has somewhat the appearance of a fan, and arises to the inner side of the male genital aperture. Ordinarily the dorsal sete begin in the sixth segment, as SEXUAL PHASE IN INDIAN NAIDIDA. 459 usual in the genus. In sexually mature specimens, however, they begin in segment viii.; in one specimen there were needle sete only in the dorsal bundles of viii., but no hairs; in a few the sete only began in ix.; in two cases the sete were seen to be thrown off from segment viii. when a cover-glass was gently placed over the worm, The body-cavity contains a large number of rounded corpuscles, brownish in colour, and in addition there are a few colourless corpuscles filled with refractile granules. Ccelomie corpuscles were more numerous in specimens which had been kept in the laboratory for several days. They are few in the first six segments. Text-figure 1. A A. Penial seta of Nuis pectinata var. inequalis. X 540. B. Penial seta of Branchiodrilus hortensis. > 540. Text-fig. 1 drawn by camera lucida. The pharynx occupies segments 111.—v., and is diffusely covered by a small amount of chloragogen pigment, which extends right up to the prostomium. In a transverse section the cavity has the appearance of an inverted I’, owing to the presence of a median dorsal diverticulum ; this diverticulum and the dorsal wall of the pharynx are ciliated. On the upper and lateral surfaces of the pharynx are a number of pyriform cells, their narrow ends resting on the surface of the pharynx; these are arranged in groups of three, four, or more, and the groups are separated by strands of muscle which pass upwards from the pharynx to the body-wall. The cells are about 30 in length and 9 » in thickness ; they stain deeply with hematoxylin. The whole pharynx much resembles that of Hamonais laurentii (4). The gut is not distinctly differentiated into cesophagus, stomach, and intestine ; it is somewhat larger in segments vi.—vili., then narrow as far as xiv., after which it is continued as a fairly broad tube for some distance. Its epithelium is ciliated. The anus, is alt 460 PROF. HARU RAM MEHRA ON THE dorsal. Strong ciliary movements were seen in the posterior part of the gut, the direction being forwards; antiperistaltic con- tractions were also noticed to be taking place over some length of this part of the tube. The blood is yellowish, and without corpuscles. The dorsal vessel lies on the left side of the alimentary canal near the ventral surface as far as septum 5/6, where it becomes dorsal, and lies over the pharynx ; it is surrounded by chloragogen cells, or in the region of the pharynx by the pigment previously mentioned. It bifurcates near the anterior end of the animal, and the branches, turning ventrally, unite to form the ventral vessel at the level of the first ventral setal bundles. There are four pairs of lateral commissures in the pharyngeal regton, which form a plexus; behind this, from segment vi. onwards, there is a commissure on the anterior face of each septum,—in some specimens, however, these were only seen as far back as segment xvi. The body-wall is devoid of capillaries. The first nephridium les in segment vii. The cerebral ganglion is large and bilobed, deeply indented in front and behind. ‘The ventral nerve-cord has an irregular lobulated outline, ganglia not being clearly distinguishable. Text-figure 2. ce. 4) ie fll ty i} FOR OS aS ies A\- u.defr 3 yy. Genital region of Nais pectinata var. inequalis. Abr., atrium; ¢7.d., ejaculatory duct; fem.f., female funnel; ov., evum ; ovis., Ovisac ; sep. 4/5, 5/6, and 6/7, the septa between segments iv. and v., y. and vi., and vi. and vii. ; s.f, seminal funnel; sp.s., sperm-sac; spth., spermatheca; v.def., vas deferens; y., yolk; g, male aperture. X ca. 120. Text-fies. 2 and 3 are semidiagrammatic, and are compiled from several successive vertical sections. Genital Organs (text-fig. 2).—As usual in the Naidide, the gonads appear first, and disappear entirely before the rest of the genital apparatus has reached its full development. The testes are a pair of ovoid bodies attached to the posterior face of septum 4/5. The ovaries are similar in appearance in the living specimen, but smaller; they arise from the posterior face of septum 5/6. The seminal vesicle is formed soon after the appearance of .the gonads, as a backward bulging of septum 5/6, which later on, SEXUAL PHASE IN INDIAN NAIDIDA. 461 when distended with the male products, may reach as far back as seoment xii. The vas deferens, one on each side, is a short tube with only a single bend; in diameter it is 15 pu, except where it joins the atrium, where it is only 9; it has a uniform lining of cubical epithelial cells. It passes vertically downwards from the funnel on the posterior face of septum 5/6, and then after a slight bend enters the atrium on its anterior aspect close to the origin of the ejaculatory duct. The neck of the male funnel lies in the mouth of the sperm- sac (seminal vesicle). The funnels fill up the mouth of the sac, and are directed upwards and backwards just within it; they meet each other in the middle line above the gut by their inner margins, and their outer surfaces are fused with the contiguous part of the wall of the sac. They are cup-shaped, with everted lips, and are lined by columnar ciliated cells with prominent oval nuclei at the base. The greatest diameter of the funnel is about 45 p. The atria are ovoid chambers with their long axes vertical, lying one on each side of the seminal vesicle in segment vi. Hach is 80-90 » in height and 45-50» in breadth, and is lined by an epithelium of cubical cells with indistinct outlines and con- spicuous nuclei; outside the epithelium is a thin coat of circular muscular fibres, outside which again the peritoneum is indicated by a few scattered nuclei. The lumen may contain spermatozoa or only a little coagulum. The ejaculatory duct is short, about 30; its epithelium consists of closely packed columnar cells with large peripherally situated nuclei; it has a fairly thick investment of cireular muscular fibres. The duct may be in- vaginated into the base of the atrial cavity; it opens to the exterior in the depth of a short tubular depression of the ventral body-wall, about 15 in length, which is narrower at the surface, and broader above, where it receives the duct. There are no ‘‘ prostatic” cells in connection with vas deferens or atrium. A thick band of muscle-fibres runs vertically upwards from the ventral body-wall, lying internal to the atrium and supporting the setal sac containing the penial sete. The ovisac, formed by the backward bulging of septum 6/7, surrounds the sperm-sae which lies within it. It may reach back to segment xvi. ; it contains a large mass of yolk granules, which stain faintly with eosine; and in its hinder part a number of ova. The septa of the several segments behind the seventh retain a transverse position between the body-wall and the ovi- sac, fusing closely with the periphery of the latter. Large blood-vessels are seen closely applied to the sperm-sac and inner face of the ovisac. The female funnels are attached to the anterior face of septum 6/7 near the ventral parietes ; the cells lining it are small, and appear to be modified peritoneal cells containing little else than nuclei. In ‘one specimen the funnels were seen to open on the yentral surface at about the level of septum 6/7. They are seen 462 PROF, HARU RAM MEHRA ON THE only in specimens which have reached full sexual maturity, and considering the large size of the ova seem to be too minute to be of any functional importance. The spermathece occupy segment v., and their openings lie at the anterior edge of the clitellum immediately behind septum 4/5. The ampulla attains a maximum height of 105; its posterior surface lies near the mouth of the sperm-sac, while in front 1t may push forwards septum 4/5 so as to encroach on segment iv. The ampullze when distended are ovoid, and meet and press on each other in the middle line above the alimentary tube. The epithelium is low and flat, except near the duct where the cells are fairly high and cubical. There is a thin layer of circular muscular fibres, and a few periteneal cells on the outside. The spermathecal duct arises anteriorly instead of from the middle of the base of the ampulla; it is slightly oblique in position, cylindrical, about 45 in length; its lining consists of closely packed columnar cells with nuclei peripheral, and a fairly thick coat of circular muscular fibres surrounds this epithelium. The clitellum covers more than half of segment v., and all vi., vil., and vill.; to -the naked eye it is opaque white. The cells are four times as high as the ordinary surface epithelium, are vacuolated, and when fully developed lose their distinetness of outhne. The clitellum is absent from the regions of the body- wall between the spermathecal pores and the male apertures. The alimentary canal undergoes great degeneration in the sexually mature worm. Though known in Dero limosa and Hemonars laurentii, the phenomenon has not so far been observed in the genus Vais. In advanced stages of maturity the mouth becomes closed; the buceal cavity and anterior part of the pharynx lose their lumen and become reduced in size ; the pharyn- geal cells lose their distinctness of outline, and those of the ventral wall are reduced in size, low and cubical. Behind the pharynx the gut is comune! as a narrow band without a lumen as far as segment xil.; the cells lose their regular epithelial arrangement, and the solid cord is, seen in section, smaller than, or sometimes about the same size as, the ventral nerve-cord ; there may be small spaces here and there, filled with fluid; there are large blood-vessels around it, in close contact with it. Behind the sperm-sac there are small cavities in the solid cord of disintegrating cells; but after segment xvii. the intestine, though still narrower than in the normal worm, retains its proper form, and is iined with columnar cells surrounded by chloragogen cells; the lumen is either empty or contains some granular matter. Although the gut is thus degenerating in the anterior part of the body, the nephridia are normal, the blood-vessels are larger than usual, and the same is the case with the cerebral ganglion ; the specimens manifested the characteristic wriggling movements, and were thus in no way pathological. When such specimens were kept under observation for three days, their anterior portions, containing the genital organs, SEXUAL PHASE IN INDIAN NAIDIDA. 463 separated off as a sort of cocoon, while the hinder part of the animal lived for some time, but was unable to regenerate and ultimately died. It appears, then, that death ensues after the full attainment of the sexual phase, and the cocoon is probably the whole anterior region of the worm which has been separated off. BRANCHIODRILUS HORTENSIS Stephenson, Many examples of this species were collected during the last two weeks of October and the first two weeks of November, from the mud at the bottom of a pond at Sikandra; and of these nine were found to possess fully developed sexual organs (text- Text-figure 3. 2 & AT ee r Saad KS = = a — ———$SSSS ene ur | Sy rage aS em at Sp.S. sep.$/ femf£ Ss. Genital region of Branchiodrilus hortensis. The atria lie one on each side of the sperm-sac, and the vas deferens is seen running internal to the atrium of its side; the funnel lies far behind in the sperm-sac. Pr., prostate; the remaining letters as before. XX ca. 125. The clitellum occupies segments v.—viil.; it is opaque white in the living animal. It is about ‘05 mm. thick; the cells have a coarse reticular structure, the meshes of the network being clear spaces; the nuclei are indistinct. The clitellum is absent between the spermathecal openings and on the ventral surface in the anterior portion of segment v. It is formed after all the other sexual organs have been developed. ‘The testes had disappeared in all the specimens examined. The sperm-sac may reach as far back as segment xix, or Xx., in two cases to xxvi.; usually it extended to xviil. The male funnels are within the sperm-sac, some distance behind its mouth, and here they nearly fill up the available space. Their lips are everted, and their outer margin is attached to the wall of the sperm-sac, The width of the funnel is 90; its cells are high and ciliated, with nuclei at their base. The cells and cilia of the upper lip seem to be taller than those of the lower. The vas deferens is 30 » in diameter; it is a fairly long tube, about *2 mm, in length, and consists of two parts, a posterior 4.64 PROF. HARU RAM MEHRA ON THE, longitudinal and an anterior ascending portion, ‘The longi- tudinal portion passes forwards from the funuel, and is abbut 105» im length ; its last part lies over the upper wall of the sperm-sac. The tube then bends upwards; the vertical ascending portion, about 90 p in length, lies just bebind septum 5/6. Ina few specimens the longitudinal portion formed a distinct curve towards the ventral body-wall before rising to be continued into the ascending portion. The cells lining the vas deferens are about half as high as those of the funnel, have oval nuclei at the base, and are without distinet cell-outlines; there is a thin covering of muscle-fibres outside the epithelium. The tube enters the atrium on its anterior face much above the middle ; the ascending part of the duct as it opens into the atrium is surrounded by a thick coat of muscle-fibres, continued onto it from the muscular covering of the atrium ; the change from the cubical cells of the duct to the columnar cells of the atrium is sudden. A bundle of muscle-fibres directed upwards from the ventral -body-wall is attached to the ascending portion ; and a few fibres connect it above to the dorsal body-v ral behind septum 5/6. The atrium is a large pear-shaped body, taking up nearly the whole length of its segment, 230-240 w in height and about 190 » in length antero-posteriorly ; in only one specimen were spermatozoa seen in its interior. The epithelium is columnar, the cells 18» by 15, with oval nuclei lying at the base ; outside the epithelium is a thick coat of circular muscular fibres. The ejaculatory duct, about 78 4 in length, opens at the top of a tubular depression of the ventral body i yall ‘about 42 p in depth, and is capable of being everted, when it projects slightly as a short pseudo-penis. The epithelium of the duct consists of columnar cells with elongated nuclei, and has a thick investment of muscle-fibres. The “prostate” consists of a large mass of pear-shaped cells around the ejaculatory duct; the cells contain granular pro- toplasm and a large oval or rounded nucleus near the base. A few muscle- fibres surround and enter the mass of cells from the ventral body-wall. There are a few blood-vessels around the atrium and prostatic cells. Two bands of muscle-fibres, arising from the setal sae, are attached to the atvium behind. The male opening lies internal to and at the level of the ventral sete about the middle of segment vi The ovisac, fanned by the backward bulging of septum 6/7, and, as usual, enveloping the sperm-sac, is fil Jed with a large mass of spherical and elliptical yolk granules about 7-15 in diameter. The ova are fairly large, and lie in two or three masses. The female funnel, about 45 in height, lies over. the lower portion of septum 6/7 near the ventral Sparictes in segment vi No female opening was seen. The large spermathecz occupy the fifth seement.. The ampulla SEXUAL PHASE IN INDIAN NAIDIDA. 465 is somewhat heart-shaped, or ovoid and notched below where the duet arises. Its size varies somewhat ; in height it may be from 207 to 270, its length antero-posteriorly rather greater and its width rather less. ‘The ampulle ave filled with spermatozoa, and are so large as nearly to fill up the whole segment, the remaining organs occupying only a small space below their contiguous inner walls. The part of the ampulla anterior to the duct is somewhat bulged downwards, and is lined with columnar cells ; the part of the wall behind the duct is lined with cubical cells, which gradually decrease in height as they pass upwards on the posteri 10r wall; the rest of the ampulla i is lined by a very thin epithelium of attenuated cells whose outline is quite indistinct. Outside the epithelium there is a thin coat of circular muscular fibres— the only part of the wall visible over a large portion, on account of the thinness of the epithelium. The spermathecal duct leaves the ampulla below, nearer its anterior wall, and is about 130-140 p in height, including the depression of the body-wall where it opens to the exterior. The duct is narrow above and below, but somewhat swollen in the middle; its epithelium consists of narrow columnar cells having elongated nuclei. There is a thick covering of muscle-fibres outside the epithelium. The sper- mathecal opening lies internal to and at the level of the ventral set of the fifth segment, some distance behind septum 4/5. The penial setee are the modified ventral sete of segment vi. They are two or three in a bundle, somewhat hooked at the distal end, which is not bifid. In length they are about 132 the shaft consists of a distal narrow portion about 36 u long, and a proximal stouter part 96 » long; there is no distinct nodulus, but the distal narrow portion is bent outwards and thus not in a straight line with the proximal segment (text-fig. 1). References to Literature. 1. Bepparp, F. E.—‘ A New Branchiate Oligochete (Br anchiura sowerbyt).” Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. Exxi., 1892. 2. STEPHENSON, J.—“On Branchiura sowerbyt Beddard, and on a new Species of Zimnodrilus with distinctive characters.” Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. vol. xlviii. pt. 2, 1912. 3. STEPHENSON, J.—‘‘On the Sexual Phase in certain of the Naidide.” bid. vol. li. pt. 4, 1915 4, SrepuHEenson, J.—‘‘On Hemonais laurentii, sp. n., a represent- ative of a little-known Genus of Naidide.” Jbid. vol. li. pt. 4, 1915, Vs i J, ‘a f Vey , a iy , cp ON THE FLIGHT OF FLYING-FISHES,. 487 29. Observations on the Flight of Flying-Fishes. By HE. H. Hanky, M.A., Sc.D., Agra, India*. [Received August 4, 1920: Read October 19, 1920.] (Text-figures 1 & 2.) A point hitherto overlooked in the study of the flight of flying- fishes is that the air is suitable for their flight to very different degrees on different occasions. In this respect their flight resembles that of soaring birds. This statement may be illus- trated by the following examples. 1. Flight under unsuitable atmospheric conditions. On the Ist June, 1920, at about a quarter of an hour after sunset, the ship on which I was travelling across the Arabian Sea was disturbing groups of small flying-fishes at the rate of one or two groups per minute. The surface of the sea was either glassy o1 disturbed by ripples too small to be easily visible. Each fish, on emerging, jumped out of the water so far that, while the body was supported on the outstretched ‘“ wings,” the end of the tail was still immersed. This organ was thereupon wagged vigorously from side to side, as is usual when starting, thus forming a trail of ripples in the water. After proceeding thus for the unusually long distance of four or five metres, the fish raised its tail from the water and began to glide. The length of the glide made by each fish was, at first, about a metre, Within a few minutes a change was observed. The fishes of each group disturbed by the ship made shorter and shorter glides, until at length each fish fell into the water immediately it ceased to move its tail. One fish flapped its wings at starting, but made no better glide than the others. About half an hour previously, in sunshine, the ship had also been disturbing small flying-fishes, which had flown for such distances as are usual. Just before sunset the first symptoms of lessened suitability of the air for their flight were observed. The fishes began to show lateral instability. It may be noted that both vultures and flying-fishes are more apt to show lateral instability late in the afternoon than at other times of the day. The stage of lateral instability shown by the flying-fishes soon passed off and was replaced by one in which the course of each fish, instead of being a horizontal straight line, was undulating. Hach fish showed two or three alternations of gain and loss of height before falling into the water. This condition soon changed to that first described. * Communicated by C. Tater Ruean, F.R.S., F.Z.S. 468 DR. E. H. HANKIN ON THE In view of these gradual changes in the performances of the fishes, there seems to be no room for doubt that they wished to get away from the neighbourhood of the ship, by air and as quickly as possible, throughout, and that the air was getting progressively less and less fitted for their flight. On the other hand, it has been observed by me on many oceasions that the air remains suitable for the gliding flight of flying-fishes after sunset if wind is present. Flight wider fuily favourable atmospheric conditions. During the same voyage, in sunshine and in the presence of a hight ain flying-fishes were seen by me to fly at a uniform height hoe the water till they were out of sight. This was noted on two or three occasions. On a previous voyage I had seen a flight till out of sight under cloud in a monsoon wind, A binocular was used for these observations. Usually the longer flights appear to be between 200 and 400 metres in length. Ina flight of this kind the following phenomena may be noticed :—- The fore wings (pectoral fins) are usually in the “ flat” position, i. e. extended in the horizontal plane. Sometimes the wings are slightly inclined upwards. In this case the outer part of the wing a at a higher level than its base. This may be called the SOND) 7 ’ position. Rarely the wings are inclined very shghtly downwards. This may be deseribed as the ‘ down ” position. This latter disposition, which I was only able to see distinctly on my recent voyage, is probably that used for flight at highest speed, as in slow-speed flight the wings are inclined upwards to a strong degree. Thus in 1 respect of its wing-disposition the flying-fish re esembles the soaring vulture, for crn aries have their wings in the ‘“ up’ position for slow-speed flight and use the “ flat’ wing disposition for flight at high speed. 120. d.c., anterior region of cesophagus ; n7., nerve-ring ; p.c., posterior region of cesophagus ; ¢7., trident; va., vagina; vu., vulva. Six head-papille; the four submedian are very small and inconspicuous. The cesophageal trident has a length of 0-15 mm. ; its anterior stem is truncated. (Esophagus consisting of a short anterior region and a very long posterior region. The nerve-ring surrounds the anterior cesophagus about 0-25 mm. from the anterior extremity. Female 160-180 mm. long; the greatest breadth of the body is about 6°6 mm. The narrow anterior region of the cesophagus has a length of WORMS FROM MAMMALS AND BIRDS. 5O1 0°35 mm., the wider posterior region 8°8 mm. The anus is sub- terminal. Vulva 0°55-0°6 mm. from the oral extremity. The stout, muscular vagina runs straight backwards, and has a length of 25 mm. Oviparous. Hges thick-shelled, 0:045-0-05 x 0:035 mm., con- taining well-developed embryos. Text-figure 9. Diplotriena diuce, sp. n. Lateral view of anterior extremity of female. x 120. Lettering as in the preceding text-figure. DIPLOTRIANA DIUCH, sp. n. This worm was obtained from the body-cavity of the Diuca Finch, Diuca grisea; the material included both male and female specimens. Specific diagnosis.—Diplotriena: Body comparatively short, semi-transparent, tapering at both ends. The anterior extremity is narrower than the posterior. Cuticle thin, transversely ringed. Cephalic extremity with six very inconspicuous, flattened papille. Kach cesophageal trident has a length of 0:13-0:14 mm.; its anterior stem terminates in a fine point. CHsophagus 2:°5-4 mm. long, narrow throughout, and without division into anterior and posterior regions. The nerve-ring surrounds the cesophagus 0:2 mm. from the anterior extremity. 502 PROF. G. L. BOULENGER ON FILARITD Male 12-20°5 mm. long, with a maximum breadth of about 0°75 mm. Cloaca 0:06-0:07 mm. from the posterior extremity. Tail broad and rounded. ‘There are six pairs of inconspicuous, flattened papille ; four pairs are preanal, two postanal. Spicules unequal; the long spicule is straight and has a length of 0°72 mm., the short spicule is twisted and measures 0°45 mm. Text-figure 10. Diplotriena dince, sp. n. Posterior extremity of male, ventral view. X 75. 7., intestine; po., postanal papilla; pr., preanal papilla; sp., long spicule ; spi., short spicule. Female 30-43 mm. in length; the body attains a thickness of 0°'9 mm. Anus about 0°71 mm. from the rounded extremity. The vulva projects slightly from the ventral surface, 0°35 mm. from the cephalic end. Vagina short, 0-9-1 mm. in length. Oviparous. Eggs thick-shelled, measuring 0:045—0-05 x 0:03 mm. DIPLOTRIZNA FLABELLATA (v. Linstow, 1888). My material includes a single specimen of a female Diplotriana from the body-cavity of the Red Bird of Paradise, Paradisea rubra. 1 take it to be the same species as D). flabellata described from Paradisea apoda by v. Linstow in the ‘ Challenger’ Reports (1888). Specific diagnosis.—Diplotriena : Body short, more attenuated anteriorly than posteriorly. WORMS FROM MAMMALS AND BIRDS. 508 Cuticle transversely ringed. Cisophagus not divided into two regions, harrow anteriorly, increasing in width gradually behind the nerve-ring, the latter 0°3 mm. from the oral end. Trident 0°25 nm. long, its antevior stem truncated. 4 Text-figure 11. Diplotriena flabellata (v. Linst.). Lateral view of anterior extremity of female. X 120. Lettering as in the preceding text-figures. Female 44 mm. in length, with a maximum thickness of about 1 mm. Caudal extremity rounded, broader than the head. Position of anus not ascertained. Vulva prominent, 0°6 mm. from the anterior extremity; the thick muscular vagina has a length of 2 mm. Oviparous. Eggs thick-shelled, 0°04—0:045 mm. x 0:25 mm. INCERT SEDIS. FILARIA ARAMIDIS, sp. Nn. A single specimen of this species was obtained from the leg- muscles of the Cayenne Rail, Aramides cayennensis. In the absence of the male it is impossible to place the form in its 504 PROF. C. L. BOULENGER ON FILARIID proper systematic position; I have, therefore, retained it in the genus Filaria s.1. In some respects it appears allied to certain species known from the muscular system of Mammals, e. 9. ilaria scapiceps Leidy (Hall, 1916). Specific diagnosis—Filaria s.1.: Body comparatively short and thick, tapering nearly equally at both extremities. . Cuticle finely striated transversely. Text-figure 12. Filaria aramidis, sp.n. A, Anterior extremity; B. Posterior extremity. Lateral view. » 75. Lettering as in the preceding text-figures. ov., loop of ovary. Head rounded, bearing four very small submedian papille ; lateral papille not seen. (Hsophagus narrow and simple, z.e., not divided into anterior and posterior regions. Nerve-ring close to the anterior extremity. Female 25 mm. in length, with a maximum breadth of about lmm. Width of nead 0-2 mm. The esophagus has a length of 1-lmm. Posterior extremity rounded ; position of anus uncertain, about 0:15 mm. from the end of the body, WORMS FROM MAMMALS AND BIRDS. 505 Vulva 0°82 mm. from the anterior extremity; the slender vagina is directed posteriorly and has a length of 2°4 mm. Kees thin-shelled, measuring 0°03—0:035 x 0:02 mm. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Drestye, K. M. (1861).—“ Revision der Nematoden.” Sitz- ungsber. d. Kais. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xlii. 1860, pp. 595-736. Haut, M. C. (1916).—“ Nematode Parasites of Mammals of the Orders Rodentia, Lagomorpha, and Hyracoidea.” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Washington, |. pp. 1-258. Henry et Ozoux (1909).—“ La Filaire du Foudi.” Bull. Soc. Path. Exot. Paris, 11. pp. 544-547, Lrystow, O. von (1888).—‘‘ Report on the Entozoa collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-6.” ‘Challenger’ Reports, xxii. pp. 1-18. —— (1891).—‘ Veber Filaria tricuspis und die Blutfilarien der Kraihen.” Arch. f. Naturg. Berlin, lvii. p. 292. —— (1899).—** Nematoden aus der Berliner Zoologischen Samm- lung.” Mitt. a.d. Zool. Samml. d. Mus. f. Naturk. Berlin, 1. (2), pp. 1-28. Purmer, H. G. (1915).—‘ Report on the deaths which occurred in the Zoological Gardens during 1914, together with a list of the blood-parasites found during the year.” Proce. Zool. Soc. London (1), pp. 123-130. Ratiiuer, A., Henry, A., et Lanceron, M. (1912).—‘‘ Le genre Acanthocheilonema Cobbold, et les Filaires péritonéales des Carnivores.” Bull. Soc. Path. Exot. Paris, v. pp. 392-395. Srosstco, M. (1897).—“ Filarie e Spiroptere. Lavoro Mono- grafico.” Bull. Soc. adriat. di sci. nat. Trieste, xvii. pp. 11-162 Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920 No. XXXIV, 34 ON THE FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 507 32. The Fauna of the African Lakes: a Study in Compara- tive Limnology with special reference to Tanganyika. By Wiiitam A. Cunnineron, M.A., Ph.D., F.Z.8. ‘Received May 31, 1920: Read November 16, 1920.] (Text-figures 1-2.) InpDEx. Page SHONIC DIGS UL Ve Winco tetecs. sca saeerusee neared General Introduction .......... ttc nee LZ Systematic Account and Tisetis a Swetie 169." Aes. Sees General Discussion and Conclusions : 592 SUNITA REPRE Me aate sacs ois SAE dat abc: Seer ee GOO DUO crap lvaere ree sce va. comet! > lmberi As er 12 Congo, Zambezi. Fa My WAH ALUSz 6 or ceiibee Meech E Pen od opleunsamerenstcaene E Citharinus gibbosus ............ P Congo R. + For further details relating to the Pisces, see in particular the comprehensive ‘ Catalogue of the Fresh-water Fishes of Africa,’ by G. A. Boulenger (86), which is the authority on which, in the main, I have relied in preparing the adjoining list. It is necessary to make it quite clear that I follow Boulenger in regarding (1) the fishes obtained from that part of the Victoria Nile which lies between Lake Victoria and the Murchison Falls as belonging essentially to the lacustrine and not to the Nile fauna, and (2) the fish collected from the Upper Shiré River (as opposed to the Lower Shiré) as constituents of the fauna of Lake Nyasa. Dealing with the records in this sense, therefore, fishes have been described as eudemic in Victoria Nyanza when they have been taken in the Victoria Nile as well as in the lake itself, or even should they have been obtained only from the Victoria Nile. For Nyasa and the Upper Shiré the same principle is adopted. In a few cases also, fishes taken within the obvious drainage area of a lake ave included in the list, as it would clearly be illogical to omit them. All the instances, however, in which records are not actually from the lakes themselves, are specially indicated by a §. * Throughout this paper, wherever a tabular form has been adopted, an HE is used to indicate that the species referred to is endemic; P, that it is present in the lake named but known elsewhere. Gen. E implies that the genus is endemic. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself. See footnote above. - || This record needs confirmation. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. = eC Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward ,-. Other parts of Name of Species. yika. Nyanza. Nyasa. Nyanza. Nyanza. Kiva the ead. Family Cyprinip2. Labeo horie ae Je Nile. + mesops ube K Upper Shiré R. > Victorianus sheeneer ae E is Victoria Nile . » eylindricus ..... lr aE. Ve Abyssinia to fambezi. Discognathus johnstonii ...... Xe 12 K. Africa. Varicorhinus stappersil ...... o} tanganice ...... E Barbus tropidolepis Ba Sasi E >» lobogenys ws E Bo, MISLVUENSISE Siccuiocnacedis igi K > vradceliffii EK > altianalis ath Pp Rusisi R. 5 tergussonli ...... ae ste E » bayoni stee ES ae Victoria Nile. pee ECU AONAIIILS menses -e. a E 5 eurystomus .. E BPP NOAGESIN Gem vos/et tena: ee 10} co. wei DIET AHOVEOUNSS Conseonsecee i Me TNYASSH see sch sess dass E Bee OMM SHOR tee tote. oe-. E Sa UMUMNACWIAGUSE cee. ae ke ae: 12 AC Zambezi, Angola. Pe TIAUIIMNINLED acne a Pat sree 1 i. Africa. Soh MEPANTAMOSUS|...c0oten-- = J E. Africa, Natal, » thikensis Le kan es IP 2s E. Africa. Angola. PUES OUPILGI ee toe ccicerseasks 1p Ae Uellé R. > minchini E Malawa R. » tetraspilus iE » sexradiatus ‘¢ H PEP MUTATE oct suc sbeen stan ae y » apleurogramma ...... 9 » imnocens ae - : K. Afinga. Pe Team ODLEUVA) snes .)-> ee. 4} Pete UNOS OWNA <2. ce csear i » arcislonge E nop. WOSRWCOanonee ae Peal Vile. 9 trispilopleura- Sete P? | Abyssinia. » doggetti ey: E » latukiensis 13) magdalen E Barilius microcephalus......... st 3} ... . Upper Shivé. Pr IMTOO Gea cecasnenceneese 12 P , tanganice i PUCLOLep ISN yEe..c: E Engraulicypris sardella as y Upper Shiré. us argenteus ies EB 5 minutus ...... EH Family SrnuRIpz. Clatias anguillanis .....0.......: 5 Nile, Chad. Fe EDO OLR eye ed sco ces Ee SeeMMOSSAMUbIeUS: a. oss 12 se Ee Abyssinia, E. A‘rica. PMOL AZELAN Ort: seccfaiesse oe iP 12 Syria, Nile, W. Africa. pa GALSOMME eet eaeeelan'sioze 12 ... Uganda. 3 SUbMaALeINAbus) oo. ae 12 Cameroon, Ituri R, », liocephalus eee 12 aoe Ubanghi R. gf MURR, eos oc aman E Werner ......... Bane As Pp Uganda. Dinotopter us cunningtoni Gen. E Eutropius niloticus ee i Ie : Nile, Senegal. Schilbemaiysiuses seers, 1 Nile, Tropical Africa. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself. || This record needs confirmation. —— 526 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE ch hegt Tangan- Victoria ., Albert Edward 47,.. Other parts of Name of Species. yika. Nyanza. “ts Nyanza. Nyanza. LON the world. Bagrus bayad wages ae Nile, W. Africa, ny. GHEINEUDIS 53 chon cho wne one i ia 12 E. Africa. er OCMMAC HERE aye heyy eae 2 12 Nile. vy OLOSCIMIE Cremer es caice eee H rp NGAICHOMANINS cnoeceeecone ie K§ Upper Shiré R. Chrysichthys sianenna......... E Be GPPMUGL soonen sae E . Cranchueseeeee }2 Congo. 5 stappersii ...... E Me myriodon ...... 10) i NAINCNS joe cenone E 5 brachynema 0) Phyllonemus typus ............ Gen. E a Amphilius platychir. .......... 1p 12 Re K. Africa. Auchenoglanis occidentalis ... Ie 12 Nile, W. Africa. Synodontis granulosus ......... HK 3 GIRO — suosovoo0e00 0) Ee zambesensis ...... a6 i Zambezi, E. Africa. a melanostictus ... P Zambezi, Bangweolo, x multipunctatus ... E | Mwero. e WCEOINES oo usccosann E Malawa R. a afro-fischerl ...... E ie WIGAN snocbonnsoao ae ana 12 Nile, W. Africa. Malapterurus electricus ...... 12 12 Nile, Tropical Africa. Family CyPRINODONTID&. Fundulus teniopygus ......... ae 12 K. Africa. Haplochilus dhonti ............ K§ Be Lukuga R. 3 FOOTIE — oeanoenc 12 12 3 johustoni ...... abe P§ Nyasaland, Zululand. Lamprichthys tanganicanus.. Gen. E Family SERRANIDZ. ' Watessnuiloncusmee ieee eee ae 2 Nile, W. Africa. 6 WOKGRONEINS — scensocoossanse E > angustifrons E Luciolates stappersii. ......... Gen. H 3 IDIGVAOT s5nd00000 coon00 EK Family CrcHiip» +. iil ajpiats hiirariceee eee eee 12 Zambezi. np MOOSISENTMONGD, aoe oon oso oon zi PS§ an oe .. &. Africa, Natal. COPA OLICAY eerste a 12 he see 12 12 12 Syria, Nile, W. Africa. an COLE MOEN, Sob aco cee nus P§ PS§ KH. Africa. sp WEXPRNDINS cos censs0500 ano EH ee aan Victoria Nile. ee auromarginata ......... E > Squamipinnis ......... me i ... Upper Shiré. > Melanopleura ......... 12 12 12 W. Africa, Zambezi, op WRURKO So: Sas odesooscoase 1p Pp ; { Zululand. » adolphi-frederici ...... ee H oy | OAUTOUOTEN Sesecrsotede vac 12 Zambezi. a WHIDKENTISHIL,..scoces conten ses E 3 NOT Eras etc sos ee a) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself. + Quite recently, and since this section on the Pisces was completed, an important paper dealing with the classification of the Cichlids has been published by Regan (145). Entering on a revision of the fishes of this group, he deals in this introductory article with the Tanganyika genera. to revise my list in accordance with his views, and merely call attention to the paper in this place. Since he has not yet completed his investigations, I have not attempted It is clear that in this tabulation I am compelled to conform to the standard originally adopted, which cannot be brought into line with the suggestions put forth in the above-mentioned preliminary essay. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 527 Tangan- yika. Albert Edward Victoria Weisa “~~ Nyanza. Nyanza. Other parts of Nyanza. ~/ Name of Species. Civ : pecies Kivu, the world. —— AEilapia PELVierl .:.........:» humilior on pallid ates Sectteaeciso sc >> pappenheimni » Jacrimosa 54 nubila + macrops Sep NALIN sete acs eee 55 DAVONaeseseceees- ae 5 MN ETAU ORNS \s pop ece eanloe sec a SUM OUES ea scnraia dey tiles En ab REED La a yee len 9 aurata UN Seton sy Pleuwotenwtasesceses sc: > johnstonii ss) EebebLASWIONNG ee a2cc ene Spo at abl loti a hacrcoeeeee ease » lateristriga a lethrinus 35 MOSUUALA aera » . dardennil .... +» macrophthalma », brevis x mornata S66 bo5 5008eE » trematocephala ...... » boops Seaodeeneenee em erandoculisme 4-4-2: Petrochromis tanganice ...... 3 andersonil 35 polyodon 53 MNVASSEES faeries 35 fasciolatus...... Cunningtonia longiventralis .. Simochromis diagramma...... Tropheus moorii ............... an annectens ............ Asprotilapia leptura ............ Lobochilotes Jabiatus Docimodus johnstonii Haplochromis livingstonii 2 WEMUSEUS <<. c.-ccs< 5 SCMUPOLAN) ease se 3 nuchisquamulatus 3 HERON! —o.%5 02-2. s angustifrous ...... 5 ASHMAN se area. be 5 MODEL Ula seeeeecos ioe 3 Stanleyieue ssaasce =. 5 percoides............ 5 grauerl Bs strigigena ......... z desfontainesii... 9 ENINDERDICO! aq agancecen Paratilapial eesti essceecrcceo- n parvidens aS pfetteri ee ‘< PULE Rte aaa aes 3 modesta ............ 55 thumbergii ; 3 WitiIEIEY ” Respecdanade 5 compressiceps 55 longirostris = prognatha lool a: E Gen. E Gen. E Gen. E E Gen. Gen. E eoesiies) ferpesite>[ineiineie jae on te: bit: E E lesfesiie> mele tan esfeoleolacla- look lesfepiic>] a) mtd: oe P? || rot: Hoh HY: § Not actually recorded from the lake itself. || his record needs confirmation. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Rusisi R. Nyasaland. Nyasaland. Upper Shiré. Upper Shiré. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Nile, HE. Africa. Syria, Nile, Tunisia. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. Upper Shiré. Zambezi, Bangweolo, | Angola. Victoria Nile. Victoria Nile. == ~ —— 528 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE 7 ne Tangan- Victoria } Albert Edward j--_ Other parts of Name of Species. yika. Nyanza. Nyasa: Nyanza. Nyanza. ea the world. Paratilapia serranus ............ 12 ase aah 12 Victoria Nile. ‘5 cuiarti {| A Victoria Nile. ‘ bayoni E Ee Victoria Nile. a chilotes HS fe .. Victoria Nile. 5 pectoralis uae HS Victoria Nile. os maculipinna ...... i “ victoriana ......... E Victoria Nile. fe SAM GI see ete K a cinerea aaah H ae sprehies Fa crassilabris ..... EH Victoria Nile. a WHOGNO — scssssaarane KH vt Victoria Nile. cy retrodens ......... E Victoria Nile. 5 polyodon ......... a0) 55 Victoria Nile. 35 nototeenia a K 33 Ghia HAD, soann5 005 1) Upper Shiré. Bs rhoadesii ales K sp chrysonota ......... E 55 intermedia .. ee H a WORMIFAINE oon ac0 sooene 19) op dewindti............ H) 2 lukugee nae E§ os Lukuga k. ss THEOREM RAPEY soo nas eseo0n Hy 55 stenosoma H re microlepis ......... EK S leptosoma ......... E

|imels lesjiac) P Pp Pp Angoni Land. Tndia, Malay Pen. * Genera described as thalassoid, || Olim Ielania, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 545 Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward aa Other parts of yika. Nyanza. ’ Name of Species. Name of Species Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Nyasa. Family Limnmipz. Limnea natalensis ............ 12 S| CIYANSe teeeeaneeec 3) cundussume sees. Efe Msi oraicoullosiaessseses ess K pe TOUSK AYR ceer eee se A 1p Xs a age ... Egypt, Natal, sy LM ASSANAN eee tee ae He K (Angola. * randabelue sess 1) OUP stticasapa meanest a 2 Bis &. de ... HH, Africa. 5, succineoides ............ Be ae 1) PU ebLANSVersaliseecenesee- ae HE Ay LODIEXONEN soe pmnangospdhoose &e 0 Physopsis africana ee a ide 12 ae sh ... KH, Africa, Natal. FA OVOIGER ee ceenen ce nO 12 ax be she ... 4, Africa, 5 fanganyice ......... EK 1 Se ve) ee Navale P ... HH. Africa. lasHies}iae] Family PLANORBIDZ. Planorbis adowensis ............ is alexandrina ......... 3 ENOANBS) cco cbhconesoune = bridouxiana ......... 95 choanomphalus_... ss crawfordi ............ 53 eibbonsi “sae os J ial Bese censtacee at Pr lavigerianus ......... = INOMCE Libee eee 3 Stamll eye easeaces tera. i Sudamicus) -....2s..-:- 5 VWACUOMED Sadoepnenadants ae y a wis ie ... Abyssinia. 12 as ee ... Egypt. rd B: i 62 _.. Cape Colony. 1p fi eEeAunica: soliac)iae) bd: ee: we P oe ReeNule? Family ANCYLIDm. Ancylus stuhlmanni_......... an 1D) > tanganyicensis ...... E Shomulliesimpeee eee ae ene Lenses C2", (le) 5 1eh 6P. 2P. ee ee SIS; CTC), cadcaoasconecesbenuene PU ONL Be Tk Wee 9P. Gk: G12, 2P. (35) MSSISPECIES) 0.0 6. ct. ae d..e.2 COLL. 17 1OR 14 Ps 4b ORs ih SPs 2p (84) (28) (24) (13) (10) A list such as this, with 133 species, requires a somewhat detailed analysis to bring out the points of most interest and importance, although, indeed, the tabular form reveals the excep- tional nature of the Gasteropod fauna of Tanganyika. In the first place it will be noticed that no less than 84 species are recorded from Tanganyika, which is clearly an exceptional number. That this is so, is shown by a comparison with the known fauna of the two lakes which come nearest in size, for Victoria Nyanza can muster but 28 forms and Nyasa only 24. Thus Tanganyika contains three times as many Gasteropods as Lake Victoria and more than three times as many as Nyasa. Secondly, be it observed, that of the 84 Tanganyika species, no fewer than 76 are endemic, while correspondingly only 11 out of 28 are peculiar to Victoria Nyanza and 10 out of 24 to Nyasa. 546 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Of the smaller lakes, Albert Nyanza has 4 endemies out of a total of 13, Edward Nyanza 1 out of 10, while Kivu only contains two species, neither of which is dene In other words, more than 90 per cent. of the forms in Tanganyika are only known from that lake, while Victoria Nyanza has 39 per cent. of endemic species and Nyasa some 41 per cent. In the next place it must be emphasised once more that the greater number of the endemic species of Tanganyika are types which have been described as thalassoid—58 out of 76 belonging to that category. Thus there are more than three times as many thalassoid as non-thalassoid endemie species, actually some 76 per cent. having this characteristic appearance. Even when the non- endemic forms are added to swell the total, the shells having this marine aspect outnumber the normal series by more than two to one, there being respectively 58 and 26 species. The figures which refer to the genera are even more arresting than those which have been dealt with. Tanganyika alone con- tains one or more representatives of each of the 35 genera named in the table. The number of genera represented in Lake Victoria sinks to 11, but it is significant that this 1s due to the absence from that lake of the large total of 24 genera which are peculiar to Tanganyika. Of this total of 24, 23 are regarded as thalassoid, the single exception being the genus Weothawma, as already mentioned, Apart from these endemic genera, both Tanganyika and Victoria contain species belonging to the same 11 genera— those of the ‘normal African fresh-water fauna” to adopt Moore’s term. It is interesting to observe that while 28 species of these less specialised genera (including 11 endemics) occur in Victoria Nyanza, 25 (including 17 endemics) are found in Tan- ganyika. Lake Nyasa with 9 of these ordinary fresh-water genera comes next, and the other lakes follow with still smaller numbers. No endemic genera are to be observed outside Tangan- yika. It is thus clear that over and above the representatives of certain well-known fresh-water genera, there is, in Tanganyika, a whole series of unique Gasteropods which are not represented elsewhere. Tt may not be unprofitable to institute a comparison with the group of the fishes, in which alone so large a number of endemic genera is known. Tanganyika contains 25 endemic genera of fishes, as compared with 24 endemic genera of Gasteropods! but whereas with the fishes there are in addition 29 non-endemic genera represented, there are only 11 non-endemic genera of Gasteropods, Again, among the fishes there are a fou endemic genera found in the remaining lakes, while this is not the case with the Gasteropods. The comparison serves to show that while the actual numbers both of genera and species are less in the group now under discussion than in that of the fishes, it affords quite as conspicuous an instance of the peculiar Chavacher: of the Tanganyika fauna. The table of distribution already furnished now calls for more FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. HAT detailed examination. Among the Viviparide, Viviparus itself is represented in Tanganyika only by two (one doubtful) endemic forms. In Lake Victoria there is a series of 5 forms, 3 of which are peculiar to its waters. It is noteworthy that the widely dis- tributed species V. rubtcundus and V. wnicolor have not been obtained from Tanganyika. The genera Veothaumaand Lridouaia are of more interest, since they are entirely confined to Tan- ganyika. The latter genus has been regarded as exhibiting a thalassoid facies. Each i is represented by only a single species. The family Ampullariidz contains representatives “of the well- known genera calathus ae K net CULO Pgs Se aA ten Berohes ar E EPSP OERTALGIN Vee teceeenesr = E epsrandidiertyscs see eecea- tee a0) Pee lianitbecceuniee ase tes ao i bp JO utapecee nb cedrceeneee E, >, lypsiprymuus ......... K ” kirki sStendoopceo seo oncaog ig Nyasaland. 5, lechaptoisi E >, Hederi oe de K. Africa. » lourdeli E +, monceti E 5» mossambicensis ...... aes 12 Zambezi, E. Africa. ry TOUCOMO okdseenosoe Se E Py ueesimus) ee aoe Eee iM Ene et E P mDyASsacnsisnnes) a sth IY ‘if te Angoni Land. RP ROS GLANS yee centn ates. 1D a Ue anise sen tees she EH S stuhlmannii a Be we Ree i * Speaking of the fauna of Kivu, Moore refers to “one or two species of fresh- water bivalves, closely allied to the Unios found generally in the African lakes” (137, p. 129). Against this assertion is to be set the statement of the naturalist at the head of the German Central Africa Expedition, “ Ebenso scheinen lebende Lamellibranchier zu fehlen” (156, p. xiv). + The principal sources which may be consulted for information on the Lamelli- branchs are Smith (170) and von Martens (116). 5d2 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward Other parts of Name of Species yika. Nyanza. Nyasa. Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Unio tanganyicensis ......... E . ,, teretiusculus ......... ote Ne is 12 se R. Nile. Fy UINTONEOVNL eclancnop asabee E Burtonia bourguignati...... Gen. H 5 tanganyicensis ... K Brazzwea anceyl .............. Gen. EH Family MureLipa. WKH, AIEWEW. sasdsc oor oodeen ene AM 5H a0) » bourguignati .. ... ee IP a 83 ms Ki. Africa. Sy. GEROUNER), | ocongdsassandoo Pp ae ee a se N. Africa. Pe enilobicases torre rere: Hee ue x. Pp IP Heypt. », soleniformis ......... 10) » subdiaphana......... vols E Pleiodon spekei ...........-..- y Spabthakanceyiueessceres-seer sss sais E ye ulblkoy Gl nlmneeeesemaseoanas ems staan 12 aot ae as K. Africa. By ab auckattreninec steer a-tecr one ein E » mhyassaémsis ......... oe an E gota ez ai acernceerr cote ay E Moncetia anceyi_ ............ Gen. E Family AXTHERIID#. AMtheria elliptica ...........- 12 12 ya - abe Tropical Africa. BS eMMITES cocgeaacoasoor 4 5 3 4: 4, TH exeniitey “Gonobaseaceesan 3H, 5P. Uf 12s AP, 4P. 4 P. (8) 53 species .............. J4H,3P. 12H 6P, Tier, 2H 6P. 2H 3P. Gi. SCiieds) a 1), oC) The table of distribution in this case displays no outstanding features such as are to be seen in other groups. The not incon- siderable total of 53 species is reached, but the details of distribution have, in most cases, little significance. Firstly, it may be noted that the vast majority of the forms (there are only 4 exceptions) are on record merely from a single lake ; secondly, it is interesting to find that no species in the whole list occurs outside the African continent. Victoria Nyanza, as already stated, exhibits the largest number of types, viz. 18, but is closely followed by Tanganyika with 7 and by Nyassa with 13. Lakes Albert and Edward follow in the usual order with 8 and 5 species respectively. A fact which emerges from an examinaticn of these figures, is that the two lakes with the highest totals only contain about one-third of the number of species enumerated (Lake Victoria 35°9 per cent., Tanganyika 32 per cent.). Contrastec with this, the Gasteropoda of Tanganyika constitute over 63 per cent. of the total number of Gasteropods enumerated, while in other groups the corres- ponding figures for Tanganyika reach 80 per cent. and even 90 per cent. (Branchiuia). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 553 Tanganyika with 14 endemics out of 17 leads the way as far as endemic Lamellibranchs are concerned (82 per cent.), Lake Victoria coming near with 12 out of 18 (66 per cent.), while Nyasa has 7 out of 13 (54 per cent.). Even the smaller lakes have each two endemic species. It will be observed that the proportion of peculiar forms is very high in this group also; indeed, in some instances it is higher than in the case of the Gasteropods. Hndemic genera are known only from Tanganyika, three being retained in the list out of a larger number distin- guished by Bourguignat. The genus Moncetia of Bourguignat, inserted in the table as endemic, though not definitely rejected, is nevertheless considered by Smith as only doubtfully separable from Spatha (170, p. 101). A brief survey of the list of species will suftice, Corbicula radiata, a representative of the Cyrenide, is the only form which is on record from all the lakes concerned. It is a widely distri- buted African type, being known from other parts of East Africa and from the valley of the Nile——The family Spheeriide is represented by the genera Spherium and Hupera. It is some- what strange that the four species enumerated are all found in Lake Victoria, but not in Tanganyika or Nyasa. Sphervwm nyanze is known from Victoria, Albert and Kdward Nyanaas, as well as from other parts of the continent, but it is associated in Victoria with two additional species which are peculiar to that lake. Hupera parasitica, which is a Nilotic and N. African form, is at present only recorded from Victoria Nyanza.—In the family Unionide there are associated with the extensive genus Unio itself only the two closely related genera Burtonia and Brazzea, which are confined to Tanganyika. No fewer than 29 different species of Unio are enumerated, not one of which is on record from more than a single lake. ‘[anganyika exhibits 8 and Lake Victoria 7 endemic species. Of 7 types in Nyasa 3 are endemic ; of 5in Lake Albert 2 are endemic. Lake Edward, lastly, contains 2 forms, both of which are endemic.—In addition to three genera of wider distribution, the Mutelide contains the doubtful genus Moncetia, to which reference has already been made—a genus described as peculiar to Tanganyika. J/utela nilotica is the only species in the family recorded from more than one lake, it being found in both Albert and Edward Nyanza as well as in Egypt. Each of the bigger lakes exhibits a single endemic form of Jutela. he genus Pleiodon is only represented by P. spekei, confined to Tanganyika—it is one of the species named by Woodward from Speke’s original collection. Spatha is unrepresented in Tanganyika and the smaller lakes, but a series of three endemic forms is known in Nyasa.—Lastly, Wtheria elliptica, sole representative of the Aitheriide, occurs in 'Tangan- yika and Victoria Nyanza, but has not been recorded from the other lakes, although it is widely distributed in Tropical Africa. While a considerably smaller number of forms is involved here than was the case with the Gasteropods, there is yet an indication Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1920, No. XXX VII. 30 554 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE that fewer species occur in the smaller than in the larger lakes. With the exception of Tanganyika, the lakes are annie in order of size, and the figures for the species Tanganyika 17, Victoria 18, Nyasa 13, Albert 8, oa aware 5. Regarding Tanganyika as a lake apart, the remaining figures fit in satisfactorily with this suggestion. The features which are characteristic of the different lakes may be summed up in a few words. ‘Tanganyika alone contains endemic Lamellibranch genera. Spheriuwm, Hupera, and Spatha are unrepresented, but a number of endemic species of Unio are known.— Victoria Nyanza, with the largest total of species, displays, notwithstanding, little of interest. Most of the genera are represented, except those peculiar to Tanganyika, and a series of forms belonging to Spheriwm and Unio are to be observed.— Of Nyasa there is likewise little to record. The lake only contains species from the four well-known genera Corbicula, Unio, Mutela, and Spatha, 3 endemic types of the last-mentioned being an outstanding feature.—Both Albert and Edward Nyanza are similar in type to Nyasa, but contain a representative of Spherium and not Spatha. From this survey of the Lamellibranchs, the following points emerge :—No thalassoid types occur in Tanganyika, but that lake contains a number of endemic species, as well as three endemic genera. All the lakes show a high percentage of endemic forms, but in most cases these are merely species belonging to widely distributed genera. While Tanganyika does not exhibit in this instance so remarkable a series of unique genera and species as in the case of the Gasteropods and other groups, it retains never- theless a distinctness from the remaining lakes quite in keeping with its general character. MaAcruRA. The only Macrurous Crustacea which appear to occur in the big African lakes are the prawns, these being quite common types in the fresh-waters of the tropies. An examination of the forms now known to exist in the lakes of Africa reveals, how- ever, many points of interest. In the first place, no fewer than twelve species have been discovered in Tanganyika, of which ten were obtained for the first time by the Third Tanganyika Expedition. ‘This is in itself a large number of different species to be found within the limits of a single lake, but the interest is greatly increased when it is realised that all these forms occur in Tanganyika alone. This is the only well represented group in which such is the case. Again, with the exception of a single species of the well-known fresh-water genus Palemon, all the genera are equally to be regarded as endemic. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 555 Table of Distribution of Macrura *. Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward Other parts of es Baas Waiatesot = pebses? yika. a anza. Nyass. Ne Nyanza. the world. Family PALHMONIDZ. Paleemon moorei .............:- K Family Ary1pz. Caridina nilotica var. eracilipes Ripe re hates ra 2! ip P * P ; Asia, Australia. Limnocaridina retiarius ...... Gen. EH ss parvula...... a0) ie tanganyike ... iH a SIMMS | tees ss K ‘ Tatipesmcgess cs. i rs socius ......... E spinipes ...... 0) Limnocaridella alberti ......... 4¥ ui}e ce Gen, E Caridella cunningtoni ......... Gen, E sy minuta epee E Atyella brevirostris ............ Gen. E >) M longinostrist.:. 222-24. 0) 6 genera 3H, 1P. 1) TP. ide 1K, 1P. WP TM SHNGOS coon ssescessessesseas | pal qI0e id TED eee TUB e i} 12 The adjoining table shows at a glance the most striking feature of distribution, namely that while Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes = occurs in nearly all the big lakes of Africa, it is not found in Tanganyika, but is replaced there by 12 endemic species belonging for the most part to endemic genera. Lake Albert -also contains an interesting endemic form (obtained by the German Central Africa Expedition and described by Lenz (109, p. 132) and Bouvier (52, p. 575)) in addition to the above- mentioned widely distributed Caridina, while Kivu is the only lake of those at present under review in which prawns have not hitherto been observed. ‘The first species of prawn ever taken in the African lakes was + A detailed account of the Macrura of the Third Tanganyika Expedition is given by Calman (61), and forms the principal source of information on this group. * The species of prawn collected by Schubotz at Kassenje on Lake Albert was described by Lenz (109, p. 180) as Caridina longirostris Milne-Edwards. It is, however, commonly agreed that longirostris is identical with the earlier nilotica, so that, apart from the varietal name, this is the same form that occurs so widely distributed in Africa. Since the type described as Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes is certainly rather variable, it seems probable that the Lake Albert specimens are not sufficiently distinct to be recorded under a different name, and this is the view which I have taken in compiling the table of distribution above. For a discussion of these questions of synonymy consult the paper of Calman (61, p. 189 e¢ seq.) and the subsequent paper of de Man (110), which arrives at somewhat different conclusions. + I adopt the varietal identifications of Hilgendorf (100), Calman (61), and Lenz (109), bat it is only right to point out that de Man (110) takes a different view. He appears to consider that the form occurring in Lake Victoria is to be referred to the typical Caridina nilotica itself, and the form trom Nyasa to his newly estab- lished variety natalensis, The type Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes he records only from the islands of Celebes and Salayer in the Malay Archipelago. 37% 556 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE obtained in Victoria Nyanza by Stuhlmann in 1890 (100, p. 36). It was re-taken in the lake by Neumann, and more recently by Alluaud, by myself, and by Degen. From Nyasa a species of prawn was brought for the first time by my expedition. These species prove to be one and the same form—the Caridina nilotica var. gracilipes, to which reference has just been made. During the German Central Africa Expedition of 1907-08 this prawn was collected by Schubotz in both Lakes Albert * and Edward (109, p. 130). It is thus the only common species in the African lakes, while it has in fact a yet wider distribution, ranging in Africa from Natal to the Nile and extending into Asia and Australia. The eastward range of this type has indeed an additional interest on account of the well-marked resemblance noticeable in other groups between the Hast African and Indian faunas. Only the first of the twelve species enumerated from Tangan- yika can be compared at all closely with forms which are known from other parts of the world, and it has no very pronounced affinities. ‘The remaining eleven species belong to the group of the Atyide, and are not so nearly connected with types hitherto known. Moreover, in common with Limnocaridella alberti, they differ from all the other species of the family in having a smaller number of branchie +, which is a feature undoubtedly due to specialisation. To sum up then, there occurs in most of the great lakes of Africa only a single species of prawn having a very wide distribution. In Lake Albert this is associated with an endemic form, and in Tanganyika it 1s replaced by twelve other endemic forms, the majority of which are among the most highly special- ised members of the family to which they belong. Under thé circumstances, it is impossible to resist the suggestion that there is exhibited here something very similar to what was seen in the case of the fishes, and particularly the Cichlide. If the extra- ordinary variety of form, and high degree of specialisation, which is characteristic of the Cichlids of Tanganyika, may have been due to prolonged isolation and comparative freedom from com- petition, it at least seems not improbable that the remarkable Macruran fauna of the lake owes its origin to the same cause {. BRACHYURA. There are five different species of crabs now known from Tanganyika, of which one has been left unnamed for the present. In a manner closely corresponding with the case of the prawns, * See footnote above. + A. reduced branchial formula is also characteristic of the remarkable West Indian form for which Bouvier has established the genus Micratya (51, p. 181), formerly Calmania (50, p. 334). Bouvier regards this as allied to the Tanganyikan genera, but this view is not accepted by Calinan (62, p. 796). + An important paper dealing with the origin of the peculiar prawn fauna of Tanganyika was communicated by Bouvier to the International Zoological Congress at Monaco (52). Consult also Bouvier’s paper on the classification of the Atyidee (51). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. Otay while two species belong to a widely distributed and common fresh-water genus (Potamonautes), the remaining three, though members of the typical fresh-water group (Potamonidee), con- stitute a remarkable genus, which occurs only in Tanganyika. All the forms from the other lakes under review belong to well- known genera of the same family. No Brachyarans have as yet been reported from Albert Nyanza. Table of Distribution of Brachyura*. = ——.- a ers Tangan- Victoria , Edward j,,. Other ; Name of Species. yika. Nvanza) Nyasa Ri pante Kivu. fs ite: Family PoTAMONID#. Potamon (Potamonautes) inflatus ... + se IP ha ... Natal. s », orbitospinus iis Se E . », platynotus.. iE - eeSD ete sects: =e R rs oan SIDS 5 Mgreee aoe Py Potamon (Geothelphusa) _ berardi aes ct eee oes ae 1p Egypt, Abyssinia. 55 5 EET cncicoe 200 Je - P PK. Africa, Abyssinia. Potamon (Acanthothelphusa) = TUPD ATONE Leos goonbanseonce Aon! zee P a od ... Egypt, Abyssinia. Platythelphusa armata......... Gen. E re maculata... K i conculcata ... E 4 genera and subgenera... 1H, 1P. a Nee ible SEs iL Te: 1, GOCE erp ccotepenesd aan con, MUON whN ze N22, INDE ey DP Dike The table of distribution makes it clear that while each of the lakes in the list exhibits one or more representatives of the very well-known genus Potamon with its sub-genera, these types are associated in Tanganyika with three species of an interesting endemic genus. Both Nyasa and Tanganyika possess species of Potamonautes which are peculiar to themselves, but it is in Tanganyika alone among the big lakes that an endemic genus is found. All the species enumerated appear to be confined to the continent of Africa. Apart from the case of Tanganyika, it will be noted that (with the exception of Potamon (Potamonautes) orbitospinus from Nyasa), the forms from the different lakes are by no means con- fined to. them, and indeed are often of wide distribution. This whole series of types—types such as are known from all the tropical fresh-waters of the Old World—may be considered as the normal African group, and calls for little further remark. In the paper already cited (70, p. 263) the present writer expressed a conviction that the number of African species has been unduly multiplied, and the unnamed forms included in the + For further details concerning most of these forms, consult the Report on the Brachyurous Crustacea of the Third Tanganyika Expedition (70). 558 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE table are to be regarded as specimens which, in the existing state of our knowledge, it is impossible to identify. It is nevertheless clear that the precise distribution in the lakes of these repre- sentatives of the subgenera of Potamon is of little, if any, significance. In this connection it should perhaps be explained that the evounds of identification of the river-crabs are unsatisfactory on the whole, external characters of a compavatively trivial and fluctuating nature forming the basis of distinction. Systematists are thus on less sure ground than in the case, for instance, of the prawns, where a matter like the branchial formula affords more satisfactory evidence of affinity. Tanganyika, with no less than three species of the endemic genus Platythelphusa, is evidently a case sui generis. There are certain features in the anatomy of this unique genus which suggest that it-is of a somewhat primitive and unmodified character, but at the same time nothing to indicate that it is more definitely marine than the other members of the family to which it belongs. Further, it is only to be regarded as unspecial- ised in comparison with allied forms which have adopted a semi- terrestrial mode of life, so that it affords in reality no support for Moore’s view that Tanganyika is the altered remains of an ancient sea. The genus with its three distinct species is rather to be looked upon as one more example of variation and divergence, brought about, in all probability, by prolonged isolation. Finally, it may be noted that this lake, with five species, contains a larger number of different crabs than any of the others under consideration. Those groups of smaller Crustacea which are often associated under the heading Entomostraca, are (with the exception of the marine Cirripedia) well represented in the African lakes. In- formation concerning them is, however, for the most part, of fairly recent date, since such organisms would be overlooked by any but trained biologists, and the use of the tow-net in Central Africa has even yet yielded results which are but fragmentary and incomplete. All the earlier records are due to the zeal and energy of Stuhlmann, and concern in particular Lakes Victoria and Edward. In 1898-1900, extensive collections were made in Nyasa and its neighbourhood by Filleborn, and this material, together with a supply from Victoria Nyanza collected by Bor gert, forms the basis of a comprehensive treatise by Daday (76), in which the whole of the microfauna is dealt with. The collections made by the writer during the Third ‘Tanganyika Expedition have afforded information for the first time concerning the Entomostraca of Tanganyika, as well as providing additional records for Nyasa and Lake Victoria. Finally, the work of Schubotz during the German Central Africa Expedition has furnished further particulars relating to Lakes Kivu, Edward, and Albert. It may here be pointed out that these lower Crustacea, with OT ae FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 559 the exceptional opportunities they are known to possess for obtaining world-wide distribution, cannot afford evidence of the same value as the higher forms. When—as is particularly the case among the Cladocera—even specific forms of cosmo- politan range reappear in the great lakes, it becomes clear that the precise geographical distribution of such species is a matter of no great significance. At the same time, the possibility is not excluded that the lakes may differ in their suitability to harbour certain types, while it is highly probable that new types can and will develope in some cases, constituting species or even genera of an endemic nature. Thus a study of the distribution of these forms in the lakes of Central Africa is nevertheless not devoid of interest, and may indeed furnish testimony of some importance. HUCOPEPODA. The Hucopepoda so far observed in the lakes with which this paper is concerned reach the not inconsiderable total of 54 species. Of these, more than half (31) have been found in ‘Tanganyika, to which lake a large proportion exclusively belong. There is every reason to believe that further investigation will bring to light additional forms, particularly from Victoria Nyanza and the smaller lakes, which, in this respect, have received less attention than Tanganyika and Nyasa. Table of Distribution of Hucopepoda *. Other parts of on Tangan- Victoria ... Albert Edward 4,- Name/of Species. yika. Nyanza. See Nyanza. Nyanza. Eve the world. Family CentTROPAGID®. Diaptomus galeboides{ ... i Pp “eb Je * TONetHNE! coneesoee Be: oe K A africanus ...... ae: a 12 oe ae =. | Ey Adrica: 53 stuhlmanni ... Bic 0) 3 simplex ......... K FF cunningtoni ... he wits E $3 kreepelini ...... P EK. Africa. Family Harpacticip®. Canthocamptus schréder1 Ee E Attheyella decorata ......... IPS Asia, S. America. - erandidieri ...... P§ S. America, New Guinea. Dactylopus jugurtha ...... be 12 Asia, New Guinea. Schizopera inopinata ...... KE 55 Validione esc K 3 consimilis ...... iz 12 3 WNW atareeee aD) 55 minuticornis ... KE + Detailed information concerning a large proportion of these species is given by Sars (151). The other sources of most importance are Daday (76, p. 106) and Mrazek (139). For the Lernzid consult Cunnington (73). t I follow Sars (151, p. 34) in assuming that this form, which is one of the commonest and most characteristic species of Lake Victoria, is not identical with the Egyptian D. galebi Barrois, as supposed by Mraézek and Daday. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area, 560 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE Bae Tangan- Victoria , Albert Edward y,.. Other parts of HNJaHEH OM epee yika. Nyanza. ~Y*S** Nyanza. Nyanza. oN mi the world. Schizopera spinulosa ...... 13) ys fimbriata ..... wat a ree a0) are SCallavis) Seaeeuse E Tlyophilus perplexus......... KH Family CycLopip™. Cyclops aspericornis ......... ie los PS eA ie ... Hast Indies. > Jeuckarti -.. P P P 12 je P Cosmopolitan. >» emini Beas Sete ie 1 P a ae .. KE. Africa. pe eneglectuchcmemerre: P 12 Pp P IP P Senegal, Sumatra. pnbenellus: vtaeenremsce E 5 INLCEES cocoscondaonoc as P ee A of ... Cosmopolitan. np ETSTMBANBIS so.90> oon i SAV ATICATIS greyeeepete 12 12 P ae .... Hurope, New Zealand. VE Mm bLCOlON era wacern ce se IPS a ue ... E. Africa, Europe. sal) MERIOUUUSI eae Mee aan: E » cunningtonl ...... H ee pachycomluss se 10) f) serrulatus-p .-.- at PS P§ i P ... Cosmopolitan. » semiserratus ...... K by IBSNEOTENPERO). oo gascve 13) fy WDAOPBIETS 350 coo nen 000 bee PPM RR A . ... Cosmopolitan. ee ancushusmeees see JP Pp » stuhlmanni......... oor 2 ranispimus\eceeeeee EK 5p ESHIIONGI@S cca sooo 000 1 12 Ie Ee UACA UNIS eee E§ >» Ciliatus ae i eo GUTUSE se akraccececree Be i fy DEREMNOS codooaobocos 1 Ip Be as .. EH. Africa, Europe. » Phaleratus ......... tke PS§ P§ er si ... Cosmopolitan. > compactus ......... P§ : Central Africa, Pe olicanthnusyerseerre E Family ErGasinipH. Ergasilus kandti ............ Er ih are 0) e SDE ee eae bye 12 IP Ergasiloides megacheir... iH 5 macrodactylus K % brevimanus ... 12 1 P Family LERN#ZID2. Lernzocera diceracephala .. x’ Ps haplocephala ... P eb bi ae a ... Nile, Congo. 10 genera .....0ee cee 6 P. B12, Hil 3 P. le, 12, 54) species .........006-. “7, 22E,9P. 3E,10P. 46,19P: 1H,6P. 3 1 uke ; (31) (13) (23) (7) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. * As explained by Sars (151, p. 51 & 74, p. 82), this species has been wrongly identified with C. oithonoides G. O. Sars or with C. hyalinus Rehberg by other writers on African Copepoda. I adopt the new name introduced by Sars. + A number of the forms which succeed this in the list belong to the group for which C. serrulatus Fischer is the type. While the species C. serrulatus is recorded by Mrazek (189, p.3) for Victoria Nyanza, by Daday (76, p. 108) for Nyasa, and by van Douwe (80. p. 492) for Edward Nyanza, it is not unlikely that the specimens in question might rather belong to one of the species in the “‘ serrwlatus” eroup as described from the lakes by Sars, than to C. serrulatus, s. str. At present it is impossible to settle this point, so I take the course least open to objection and insert the records of Mrdzek, Daday, and yan Douwe as they stand, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 561 An examination of this long list of forms reveals in the first place the large proportion of the recorded species which has been observed in Tanganyika. ‘The latter lake contains 31 out of a total of 54 different forms, Nyasa contains 23, Victoria Nyanza 13, and the remaining lakes still smaller numbers. The contrast between the lakes is greater than is disclosed by these figures, for out of 31 species known from Tanganyika, 22 are peculiar to that lake, and in comparison only 4 out of 23 for Nyasa and 3 out of 13, for Lake Victoria. In the three smaller lakes there is only a single recorded species which is endemic, and that occurs in Albert Nyanza. Expressed in percentage form, th’s means that nearly 71 per cent. of the Copepods of Tanganyika are found in that lake alone, while of the species found in Nyasa only some 17 per cent. are peculiar to the lake, in Victoria 23 per cent., and in Albert 14 per cent. Excluding Tanganyika, it will be observed that only 8 of the forms recorded are endemic, so that with 22 endemic species, Tanganyika has nearly three times as many endemic Eucopepoda as the other lakes can muster between them. Turning now to the distribution of families and genera in the lakes, the genus Diaptomus, sole representative of the Centro- pagidee, calls for little comment. A single species of this genus occurs in Tanganyika, to which it is peculiar: it appears to be a most characteristic plankton form in that lake. Lakes Victoria and Nyasa each contain endemic species as well as types of wider distribution, so that the three big lakes may each be said to have their own particular forms. None of the species of Diaptomus in this list have been observed outside the continent of Africa. The representatives of the Harpacticide are of far greater interest. An endemic species of Canthocamptus has been re- corded from Victoria Nyanza, and widely distributed species of Attheyella and Dactylopus from Nyasa. It is on the genera Schizopera and Ilyophilus, at one time regarded by Sars as strictly marine, that interest really centres. The genus Schizopera is represented in the collections made by the writer by no less than 8 species, of which 6 are peculiar to Tanganyika and one to Nyasa, while one occurs in both Lakes Tanganyika and Victoria. The genus was established by Sars for the reception of a species found in a brackish-water lagoon on the Chatham Islands, while subsequently species have been obtained from the Caspian and from Egypt. It is obvious that such a genus can hardly be regarded as strictly marine. ‘Three questions suggest themselves in this connection. How does the genus come to be represented in the heart of Africa; how is it that brackish-water types are living there in perfectly fresh-water ; and how is it that so many different species are recognisable in Tanganyika ? Sars points out (151, p. 69) that the most obvious explanation would be to regard these as genuine “relict” forms, in which case the Tanganyikan species would be important memhers of Moore’s so-called “ halo- limnic” series. He rejects on general grounds the view advanced by Moore, and indicates transport by the aid of migratory aquatic birds -as sufficient explanation for this remarkable 562 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE discontinuous distribution. He asserts the probability that forms transported from brackish water would not be unable to survive in fresh water, and finally maintains that the several species occurring in Tanganyika have been produced by diver- gence during a period of isolation—a view entirely in accord with that already expressed in the case of other animal groups.—The genus //lyophilus is represented in Tanganyika by a single species which is endemic. The type species of this genus was described from the Baltic and has also been obtained near Christiania, so that the remarks concerning transport and establishment in fresh water are as applicable here as in the case of Schizopera. No fewer than 27 species, all belonging to the genus Cyclops, are enumerated under the family Cyclopide. It will be noted that Tanganyika again leads the way with 17 species, while Nyasa contains 13 and Lake Victoria 8: moreover, 11 of the Tangan- yikan species are peculiar to that lake, while the other two lakes each contain only a single endemic form. ‘The three smaller lakes possess fewer representatives, viz.:—Lake Albert 5, Lake Edward 3, and Lake Kivu only 2. All the latter are of fairly wide—some of cosmopolitan—distribution. The family Ergasilidee, which may be regarded as intermediate between the free-living and the highly degenerate parasitic Copepods, is represented by 5 species belonging to two genera. An endemic form of the genus Hrgasilus has been recorded from Albert Nyanza, and the genus has also been recognised both in Nyasa and Victoria. In Tanganyika it would seem to be replaced by the genus Hrgasiloides, described from material obtained by my expedition. ‘Two endemic species are on record from Tanganyika, while a third is found in that lake and also in Nyasa. The Lerneide with two forms of Lerncocera concludes the list. The two species were obtained by the Third Tanganyika Expedition from fishes in that lake, and while one proves to be endemic, the second was found to be identical with specimens in the British Museum collection taken on Nile fish. Reference may again be made here to the statement that the number of different animal forms existing in the lakes varies in proportion to the size of the latter (cf. pp. 535, 548). It is only when many forms are enumerated that such a comparison is justified, but in this case it may fairly be undertaken. Apart from Tanganyika, the lakes are arranged in the table in descend- ing order as regards size, and the total figures are as follows :— Tanganyika 31 (species), Victoria 13, Nyasa 23, Albert 7, Edward 3, and Kivu 2. It is very clear that Tanganyika is quite unique, but apart from that lake, beginning with Victoria Nyanza, the Copepods exhibit a regularly decreasing total with the exception of Nyasa, where the higher figure is probably due to the more thorough exploration of its water's. The distribution of Copepoda in the individual lakes may be summarised as follows :—Tanganyika, with 31 species, 22 of which are endemic, is clearly in a category by itself. Containing a FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 563 single species of Diaptomus which is peculiar to it, the lake is chiefly characterised by a number of remarkable forms belong- ing to the genera Schizopera and Ilyophilus, nearly the whole of which are not known elsewhere. Even of the cosmopolitan genus Cyclops, Tanganyika exhibits 11 endemic types, as well as others of wider distribution, while of the three species of Hrgasiloides, two are found here alone. ‘Two forms of the parasitic Lerneocera oceur in the lake, one of which is likewise endemic. The Copepoda of Lake Victoria are referred not only to fewer types, but form a much less interesting assembly. They comprise a single endemic species in each of the genera Diaptomus, Can- thocamptus, and Cyclops, but otherwise are forms of wider, often of world-wide distribution. A larger number of species is known from Nyasa, but out of 23, only 4 are endemic. Of the latter, two are species of Diaptomus, while there is a single endemic form of the striking genus Schizopera and one of Cyclops. Most of the remaining species are widely distributed, a considerable proportion being well-known forms of Cyclops. Nyasa contains a species of Ergasilus as well as Lrgasiloides brevimanus which is otherwise confined to Tanganyika. There is no reason to suppose that Nyasa will be found to contain so many more Copepoda than Victoria Nyanza when the latter lake has been equally well investigated. Seven species have been observed in Lake Albert, of which merely a single form (Zrgasilus kandti) is endemic. Apart from this and from a species of Diaptomus found also in Lake Victoria, the lake contains only representatives of the genus Cyclops, which are of fairly extended, and in some cases of the widest possible range. Lake Edward with 3 species, and Kivu with 2, come last in the series, and it should be noted that not only do they contain very few types of Copepoda, but that these types have little significance, being in each case widely distributed species of Cyclops. It is thus apparent that with increase in size the lakes exhibit an increase in the number of forms which they contain; that only in the larger lakes do endemic species appear; and, finally, that Tanganyika possesses a large number of unique types which may well have been produced during a period of prolonged isolation. BRANCHIURA. This small group of animals, which are parasitic for the most part on fish, was for long but poorly represented in the collections from the great lakes of Africa. The collections made by Stuhl- mann in Victoria Nyanza (184, p. 154) and Edward Nyanza (187, p. 47 & 188, p. 37) and by Fiilleborn in Nyasa (187, p. 47 & 188, pp. 37 & 44), resulted in a total of three species belonging to as many genera. To these may now be added no fewer than seven new species of Argulws which were obtained for the first time by the Third Tanganyika Expendition (72), while there are (57 ] 564 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE further records of distribution now available which make our knowledge more complete. It is safe to predict that future investigation will add to the localities in Africa from which these parasitic forms are known, even though it may not materially increase the number of recognised species. Table of Distribution of Branchiura *. Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward Other parts of Name of Species. Nyasa. yika. Nyanza. Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. IDONOVOS WATETET coo bonesoen P Pp 12) af oe Nile. Argulus incisus eeaeee KH >» Yubropunctatus ... K > personatus ......... K > exiguus Sante K 5) angusticeps......... EK » Striatus bt K ae eubescens) ee EK - op UAOANNUTG ungulata Monostyla bulla 53 lunaris fe hamata Lepadella ovalis ss acuminata ......... ip cristata 8 20. = patellaysa34) -3f.5.0.! Colurelllajcolunay see A adriatica 3 bicuspidata a deflexa 53 DHOUENBD ds scone Trichotria pocillum ............ Scaridium longicaudum ...... Redalitajmainal % cfs ae-ayeeass. Filima longiseta Tetramastix opoliensis ......... Trichocerca bicristata ......... “6 GUBRIA ik as sc FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. Tangan- — Victoria yika. Nyanza. P Pes JP 1p P 12 PS P Pp se 1p PS§ Ie P§ 1 oes P P 12 P§ 12) PS 1 P§ P a P§ P§ ies ES PS ee IP 1p PS§ P P 12 P§ Nyasa. Mtr MMM ror hor ho roo: Loe) 26) DIT IATL? =o we § rg Gm PDD PLIVLILLIL LIAL LIL eiigehine incline hae iaeiineigciige)igelineigeiae)iae) ma PS Albert Nyanza. P P 579 Other parts of the world. Cosmopolitan. Rhodesia, N. America. Cosmopolitan. Europe, N. America. Cosmopolitan. Asia, Europe. Cosmopolitan. Europe. New Guinea, $8. America. Cosmopolitan. ) 33 39 Asia, S. America. Kurope. Cosmopolitan. bE] Europe, N. America. Cosmopolitan. Europe, Asia. Cosmopolitan. 29 bb) Europe, N. America, Aastralia. Cosmopolitan. Europe. Europe, N. America, Asia. Europe, N. America. Europe. Cosmopolitan. Asia, America. Europe, N. America, Asia. Cosmopolitan. 33 Europe, America. Cosmopolitan. 33 Europe, N. America. Cosmopolitan, Europe, N. America, Australia. Europe, Asia. Cosmopolitan. Europe, America. Kurope. Cosmopolitan. 9? 2 oI Europe, Rhodesia. Europe, Asia, N. America. Cosmopolitian. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. 580 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE : : Tangan- Victoria Albert Other parts of Name of Species. vik a Nivenie Nyasa. Wyanza. vemcenide Trichocerca elongata ......... ab PS§ Cosmopolitan. 5 NEITANS sadopdlanebacees P§ ae Europe, N. America. 5 longiseta ...... 1S Cosmopolitan. s TEKH, “Gooocapoa tas PS he Europe, N. America. - rattus sochpptes Re P Cosmopolitan. a SClplOR a reeeeeeeer es ie P§ 5s s Stylataiescsren 1P 12 Europe, S$. America. Diurella stylata 12 Europe, N. America. » tenuior les Cosmopolitan. ae tienis tendered he PS . Syncheta oblonga............... P§ P§ Europe, N. America, Australia. at pectinata <2. ......... re P Cosmopolitan. THREAD os coo sos adones ae P§ is IPO ARADO, DOEABY 5.6580 co9s0e090 12 P Bi Sphyrias lofuana ......... ..... P§ a N. America. Asplanchna brightwellii ...... a 12 1? Europe, N. America, Australia. Be intermedia ...... iP ay Europe, N. America. Asplanchnopus multiceps P§ Cosmopolitan. Testudinella patina ............ ee P§ i a trilobaitall seee. oe P§ Australia. Order KH1IzoTA. Floscularia ringens ............ P§ Cosmopolitan. Limnias melicerta : Uae P§ 53 IP ADR, WANOGOA, oosscccx000050: P§ ae N. America. Sinantherina spimosa ......... sau PS§ Cosmopolitan. Conochilus hippocrepis_...... P§ a Collotheca ornata ............... 12 Europe, N. America, Australia. Order BDELLOIDA. IPiniloyabing, GuRBw) .2.co5qn9 000002 sos P§ Cosmopolitan. # CHOI eeeeer ee Le E§ MOSCOLAlg Nee er ee he P : Cosmopolitan. Rotifer macroceros Bite 1? - a4) NOTBUPDIS -ntys ons anode eco a P § 3 Pe avloarisiye .-etessecrss. PS§ P§ as 5p MOTIFS <6 ocenv a0 008 a P§ cn 42 venera 16P. ig}12 37 P. 4P, 105 species and subspecies... 1H,28P. 1H,24P. 1K,84P. 4P. (29) (25) (85) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. Attention has already been called to the fact that the Rotifera of Nyasa are in all probability better known than those of the other lakes. Of 105 forms enumerated, 85 are reported from that lake, while only 29 are given for Tanganyika, 25 for Victoria Nyanza, and 4 for Albert Nyanza. Examination of the Nyasa records shows that a much smaller total has been observed in the lake proper, and indeed it is the latter figure, compared with cor- responding figures.from the other lakes, which affords a truer basis of comparison than those given above, since the forms collected from the surrounding neighbourhood are almost unknown except for Nyasa. Disregarding Albert Nyanza—from which informa- tion is very meagre,-—the totals of those Rotifers taken within the limits of the lakes themselves are found to be:—Nyasa 22, 4 FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 581 Victoria Nyanza 21, and ‘Tanganyika only 8. Clearly there is little disproportion between Lakes Victoria and Nyasa, but Tan- ganyika shows a marked reduction in number. It is probable that the low figure for Vanganyika proper has some relation to the nature of the lake water, which appears to be somewhat un- suited to these organisms. Rousselet points out in his report on my collections (150, p. 794) that there is a striking difference between the scanty Rotiferan fauna of the lake and the far richer fauna which he observed in a small quantity of material from the Lofu River. Tanganyika water contains an unusual amount of magnesium salts, and though very little is really known concerning the influence of such salts on fresh-water organisms, this seems likely to be the cause of the dissimilarity between lake and river in this respect. he matter has already been discussed in some detail in connection with the complete absence of Cladocera from the lake (cf. p. 569). On examining the list of Rotifera more closely, it will be observed that with three exceptions, the forms are all known from other parts of the world, many of them, in fact, being cosmopolitan in their distribution. A single endemic species is enumerated from each of the three bigger lakes, but apart from Lecane lofuana described from the Lofu River, these are of only doubtful value. The facilities for dispersal which the Rotifers possess are well known, and quite account for this wide distri- bution. In the case of these organisms, therefore, no deductions of any value can be made from the presence or absence of a species in a particular lake, and the interest attaching to a com- parative table of distribution is, in consequence, small. Nor does a study of the actual genera and species occurring disclose feattres of much significance, although one or two com- ments may be offered. In all, 42 genera are enumerated, of which again the largest number is found in Nyasa. ‘Those best represented are Brachionus with 12 species, or well-marked varieties, 7'richocerca with 9 and Lecane with 6, while nearly all the more important genera are known from at least two of the lakes. Certain cosmopolitan species have been identified from all the four lakes under consideration. There is little to note in the way of unexpected forms or of types unaccountably absent. A subspecies of Brachionus—B. capsuiiflorus bidentatus,-—which was isolated from the Albert Nyanza material, is apparently very rare, having been observed only i in Calcutta andl more recently in Bulgaria. Furthermore, Rousselet has pointed out that the genus 1splanchna is recorded from the lakes, but has not been obtained in South Africa.—In conclusion, it will be observed that asin the case of the Cladocera — which are also of extended distri- bution,—there is no indication of an exceptional fauna peculiar to Tanganyika, or indeed to any of the lakes. GASTROTRICHA. Representatives of this group may eventually prove to be widely distributed in the African lakes, but at present there is 584 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE little information at hand concerning them. An account of cartain forms collected by Stuhlmann at Bukoba, Lake Victoria, is given by Collin (64), while other species which Fiilleborn obtained in the neighbourhood of Nyasa have been identified by Daday (76, p. 56). No Gastrotricha were observed by me during my expedition to the great lakes. The species* may be enume- rated as follows :—- 1. Lepidoderma squamatum. A species well known in HKurope and occurring also in North America. A single specimen was collected in a pool near the shores of Nyasa. 2. Lepidoderma hystrix. Under this name Daday deseribed a form obtained from the sane locality as the above. It has not been observed elsewhere. 3. Ichihydium macrurum. This type was described as new by Collin, but the species rests upon a diagrammatic figure and a very incomplete description. It was found at Bukoba, a station on the shores of Victoria Nyanza, and has not been re-discovered, so that it may be looked upon as a species of rather doubtful value. 4. Chetonotus formosus. This form, like the two species of Lepidoderma, has been identified from the vicinity of Lake Nyasa. Previous to this discovery it was only known from North America. 5. Cheetonotus pusillus. A single specimen of this type, hitherto only recorded from Paraguay, was isolated by Daday from material collected in the Mbasi River close to its entrance into Nyasa. Two species of Chetonotus are, according to Collin, among the Gastrotricha which Stuhlmann recorded from Lake Victoria, but in neither case has it been possible to identify them further. Brief notes made on the spot, accompanied in one case by a sketch, form all the information available. It is doubtful whether either of these types was observed in water from the lake itself. 6. Gossea pauciseta. Another species previously known only from Paraguay. Several specimens of this were obtained from a pond in the Nyasa district. On a survey of this list the following facts appear. Five species are on record from Nyasa, one of which is peculiar to that * Hor further particulars of these forms, consult Collin (64, p. 9) and Daday (76, p. 56). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN, LAKES. 583 lake. From Victoria Nyanza three different forms have been reported, of which one was described as new and has not been found elsewhere. The two remaining types were not specifically identified, and indeed all three species from this luke rest on a somewhat insecure basis. None of the recorded species occur in both Victoria and Nyasa, and it appears probable that none were actually observed in the waters of the lakes themselves. No Gastrotricha are known at present from any of the other African lakes. TURBELLARIA. There can be little doubt that Turbellarians are relatively uncommon in the lakes as well as in other parts of Central Africa. Stuhlmann, a careful observer, who had opportunities for collecting in many parts of the country, remarks on the scarcity of these organisms, and in particular on the scarcity of the fresh-water Dendroccels, which are usually common in ponds and streams (181, pp. 1262 & 1268: 182, p. 652: 185, p. 349). During my expedition to the great lakes, I only observed ‘Turbel- larians in Tanganyika. They were found on the under side of stones in shallow water, and all proved to belong to a single species of the well-known genus Planaria. Prior to the description of this Tanganyikan form by Laidlaw (107), the only work dealing with species from the lakes was that of Bohinig (17), who reported on the collections made by Stuhlmann. Untortu- nately, the accounts in this paper are based almost entirely on sketches and notes made on the spot, which often lack details of importance for systematic determination. Although the records must thus be regarded as of doubtful value, I msert them here without further comment. The following species * come within the scope of this survey :— 1. Planaria tanganyike. This is the type from Tanganyika to which reference has been made. It is the only species known from that lake and has not been obtained elsewhere. 2. Stenosiona leucops. A form known in Europe and also in North America. On the evidence of drawings, recorded from the neighbourhood of Bukoba, on Victoria Nyanza. 3. Stenostoma stuhlmanini. Described as new by Béhmig from Stuhlmann’s notes and sketches. Observed at Bukoba, Lake Victoria and unknown elsewhere. 4, Stenostoma gilvum. Another species based only on a drawing and a few notes and * Vor details, consult the above-mentioned papers: Bohmig (17) and Laidlaw (107). 584 DR. W. A. CUNNINGION ON THE recorded from the same locality as 8S. stuhlinanni. Nothing further is known of this form. Examples of two species of Séenostoma from Bukoba were among the material examined by Béhmig, but their unfavourable state of preservation did not permit of nearer identification. 5. Gyrator hermuphroditus. A pelagic Turbellarian collected in Victoria Nyanza is identified with this species by Bohmig. It is well known in Europe. 6. Vortex quadridens. This type is established merely on the evidence of ketalvas and notes by Stuhlmann. It is admitted that certain important features of the genital apparatus are unknown. Obtained from stagnant water at Bukoba, From the above it will be observed that Turbellaria are only recorded at present from Lakes Victoria and Tanganyika. From Victoria Nyanza and its neighbourhood five forms have been specifically identified, three of them being peculiar to the lake. There are, in addition, two types which are unnamed. ‘These records of Bohmig, however, need confirmation, as they are based on very meagre evidence. From Tanganyika a single endemic species 1s known, which belongs to the widely distributed genus Planaria *, No doubt farther representatives of this group will eventually be found in the great lakes, but they appear to be less common than might have been expected. There is no suggestion of a striking Tarbellarian fauna in Tanganyika and little indica- tion that such will be discovered in the future. TREMATODA. Practically nothing is known of the distribution of these exclusively parasitic animals in the lakes of Africa. Following the argument advanced in the section dealing with the Nematoda, it seems only logical to include such forms in a lake fauna. In the case of these organisms they may be obtained in the free- swimming larval stage, or infesting an intermediate Molluscan host or in their final vertebrate host. As far as I am aware, the description given by Daday (76, p. 39) of two Cerearia larvee from the neighbourhood of Nyasa is the only account which concerns any of the lakes. Both were found in material from ponds near Nyasa and were described as new larve, though it seems doubtful whether such determinations have much systematic value. They have received the names of ‘ Cercaria” schizocerca and “ Cercaria hoplophora 76, p. 288). * Tt seems clear that. Stuhlmann’s statement that Planarians cannot survive temperatures of over 25° C. (185, p. 349) is not universally true. The specimens I collected in Tanzanyika were taken in quite shallow water, where the temperature tends to be highest, vet my thermometer readings for the surface of the lake showed a higher average than 25°, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES, 585 In the course of my expedition I collected in Tanganyika a few Trematodes which are parasitic on fish. They constitute a new record for this lake, but have not yet been examined and deseribed. The specimens were taken from large Siluroids, in one case from the gill-arches, in another from the gut. CESTODA. As far as I have been able to ascertain, no records have been published of tape-worms from the lakes included in this survey, although Daday described two new larvee which he observed in Kast African Copepods. Different forms of tape-worm proved common in the gut of fishes examined for parasites by my expedition, and I succeeded in getting a considerable number of specimens. These all came from Tanganyika, where I had better opportunity than elsewhere to seek such organisms, but it is clear that systematic examination would not only bring to light enteric parasites from the fishes of other lakes, but would result in a far richer series from Tanganyika. My material has only received a preliminary examination, so that little information can yet be given as to the nature of the Tanganyika forms. A species which occurred abundantly in an endemic Siluroid proves to be one of the unsegmented Cestodes, and has been referred to the genus Caryophylleus. It has not been more fully identified. Almost all the remaining specimens come likewise from endemic fishes belonging to different genera of Cichlids and Siluroids. Thus it is quite probable that other species of tape-worm—-perhaps new forms—are represented in the collection. It is to be hoped that the investigation will shortly be completed. CQ@LENTERATA. The only representatives of this group at present recorded are the common fresh-water Hydra and the medusa which so stimu- lated interest in the fauna of Tanganyika. Stuhlmann obtained specimens of Hydra from Victoria Nyanza which resemble the common fH, fusca, though Weltner, reporting on this material, would not venture to identify the species in the absence of eggs (199, p. 2). Hydra has never been discovered in any of the other lakes so far as J am aware, which is perhaps rather strange. The Tanganyika medusa was described by R. T. Giinther under the name of Limnocnida tanganice * (94), and being peculiar to the lake, was, of course, regarded by Moore as one of the most striking halolimnic or relict forms. The significance of its occurrence in this lake in the heart of Africa, which communicates with the sea only by some thousand miles of river, broken by falls and rapids, was obvious, especially since the number of fresh- water medusx then known was very small. Discoveries made since Moore’s expeditions, however, have put a very different complexion * The specific name is that of Bohm, the discoverer of the medusa, who wrote it “tanganjice.” I follow Giinther (96, p. 651) and most subsequent writers in adopting tanganice as a more rational spelling. Proc, Zoou, Soc,—1920, No, XX XIX, 39 86 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE on the matter. Fresh-water jelly-fishes of other tiypes have been found in the Yang-tse-Kiang, in a lake in Egypt and in the Caspian, Moreover, the distribution of the genus Limnocnida itself has proved wider to an unforeseen extent. In August 1903 a medusa was discovered in the great Kavirondo Gulf of Victoria Nyanza and another in a fresh-water lagoon in the Niger delta. The specimens from Lake Victoria were submitted to Giinther, who pronounced them indistinguishable from the Tanganyika species, though he subsequently modified his view, and described them as ZL. tanganicew var. victorie (96, p. 651). The Niger medusee were reported on by H. T. Browne, who considered them undoubted specimens of L. tangunice (56: 57). In 1908, medusee were found in a tributary of the Zambezi. ‘These were regarded by C. L. Boulenger as specifically different from the Tanganyika form, and were named by him Zimnocnida rhodesiw (18, p. 429). The latter species has still more recently (1913) been obtaimed from another part of Rhodesia, where it occurred in a tributary of the Limpopo River (11). Remarkable as it was to find this genus so widely distributed in Africa, the discovery of a species in India in 1911 was more remarkable still (6). This type, which comes from streams in the Western Ghats, differs slightly from the African species, and was termed LZ, indica by Annan- dale (9). The bearing which these discoveries have on the problem of the origin of the Tangany ika fauna, needs little pointing out. There ean be no hesitation in deriving meduse from the ocean, and when Tanganyika was believed to be the only locality in the whole continent in which such organisms occurred, the lake was naturally regarded as unique, and the medusze were looked upon as strong evidence in favour of a marine origin for its fauna. In the light of present knowledge, this evidence becomes greatly weakened. If ZLimnocnida is to be regarded as a relict form, it has now attained so wide a distribution that its presence no longer singles out Tanganyika as a probable ‘ Reliktensee.” Moreover, it must be noted that the new records are none of them from the basin of the Congo, where the medusa should be forthcoming in accordance with Moore’s view of the origin of the lake.—The finding of a species of Limnocnida in India affords another example of those Afro-Indian affinities to which reference has more than once been made. Tt will be more satisfactory to postpone a consideration of the sources from which the medusa may have been derived, until the general discussion—which will follow this systematic account—of the zoological and of other evidence. PoRIFERA. Representatives of this group are known at present only from the three largest of the six lakes under consideration. Since however, fresh-water sponges are usually inconspicuous objects, it ds very probable that sooner or later specimens will be found FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 587 in the other lakes*, although Schubotz states that he completely failed to find any in Kivu (156, p. xiv). The species from Victoria Nyanza and Nyasa are quite ordinary forms, but those known from Tanganyika exhibit divergences of at least specific rank from the types cclleeted in any other part of the continent. Of the eight species enumerated in the adjoining table, seven helong to the cosmopolitan fresh-water genus Spongilld, the eighth—about which doubts have been raised —being referred provisionally to the genus Potamolepis. Table ee Distr abaition of Por Ls: Tangan- Victoria Ninn Other parts of Name of Species. : I yika. Nyanza. the world. Family SPonGILLIp sm. : Spongilla biseriata ...... ve is P Egypt. e (gohan. PS act ee ee Aun Gar CAnveLl sesso a Ve .. Hungary, India, Java. BS cunningtoni ... EK a MOOLENN enh ee.. 1) _ TANIGIER,, Gaede cae P§ White Nile. tanganyikee ... 1D) Potamolepis weltneri ... 13) SIspeciesweeeesceae sn bin, es ie, ibe § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. The distinctness of the fauna of Tanganyika is once more exemplified in the case of the sponges, and is shown graphically by the above list. While Victoria Nyanza and Nyasa each contain a single species of somewhat extended distribution, Tanganyika contains six other types, four of them (those occurring in the waters of the lake itself) being endemic. The forms from Lake Victoria and Nyasa, both of which were obtained for the first time by my expedition, do not call for much comment. Spongilla cartert, now known from Victoria Nyanza, is the only sponge from the lakes to occur outside the continent of Africa. While it ocew's in Kurope, its occurrence also in India and Java is noteworthy in view of the affinities of other African and Indian types to which reference has already been made. Five species of Spongilla have been recognised from the Tanganyika area, three of them—all endemic—from the lake proper, and the remainder from the Ugalla River, a tributary of the Malagarasi, which in its turn enters the lake. The forms from the Ugalla River, S. béhmii and SN. nitens, occur also in other parts of Africa. Following the usual procedure, from which it is perhaps illogical to depart, these species are inserted with an explanatory footnote in the Tanganyika column, but it may be pointed out that the * Sponge spicules were observed by West in tow-nettings made in Albert Nyanza (201). It is probable that these occurred in the sample obtained from near the bottom in about 30 feet of water. + The principal source of information on this group has been Kirkpatrick (105). where references to other authors are given. a0 588 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE district from which they come is some 200 kilometres or more east of the lake, and that they show East African rather than Tanganyikan affinities. The last of the forms enumerated—Potamolepis welineri—was established by Moore (187, p. 323), and regarded by him as peculiar to Tanganyika. Moore explains that a small specimen of this sponge was dredged in the lake from great depths during his second expedition *. It has never been adequately examined and described, but Weltner expressed the opinion that it was a distinct species, with a framework very similar to that of Spon- gilla béhmii. It was accordingly given the specific name welinert and placed provisionally in the genus Potamolepis. Kirkpatrick, who has also examined some of the material, expresses the view that these two species may possibly be synonymous (105, p. 222). It is perhaps well to leave the matter sub judice, particularly as no further supply of material has been forthcoming to aid in deciding this point. Moore’s comparison of the spicules of this sponge with those of the genus Reniera (which he misquotes “ Renieria”) does not strengthen his case. Instead of being “the old fossil genus ” (loc. cit. pp. 331: 354) it would be more accurately de- scribed as the recent marine and brackish-water genus—although fossil representatives also exist in the tertiary strata. In con- clusion it may be stated that despite the suggested resemblance of the spicules of Potamolepis weltneri to those of Reniera, the sponge fauna of Tanganyika consists essentially of fresh-water and not marine types, although the forms inhabiting the lake are peculiar to its waters. PROTOZOA. : It is to be regretted that the Protozoa of Tanganyika have not yet been investigated. There are, it is true, a few species to record, but these are principally forms belonging to the Phyto- flagellata, which are enumerated in the report on the Algee of my expedition (200). This is the more unfortunate, since a good deal of information on this group is forthcoming respecting Victoria Nyanza and Nyasa, although much is probably unknown. There is no reason to suppose that such a marked disproportion really exists between the Protozoan fauna of Tanganyika and those of the two other big lakes; indeed, the evidence afforded by many groups of animals suggests that Tanganyika is likely to lead the way with a larger and more unusual assemblage of species. An examination by a protozoologist of the extensive series of tow- nettings and other suitable material which I brought from the lake should go some way towards determining this point, and it is to be hoped that this will be carried out in the near future, From Albert Nyanza there are a few forms recorded among the * It may be mentioned in this connection that the species obtained by Moore’s first expedition were, through some misunderstanding, said by Evans to have come from a depth of 350 fathoms (82, p. 471). Moore himself states (127, p. 405) that on this expedition 1200 feet (200 fathoms) was the greatest depth at which be was able to dredge. ‘hese sponges are not in reality deep-water forms, for, during the third expedition, I found them living in quite shallow water at the lake margin FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 589 Phytoplankton, and from Edward Nyanza a single species of Rhizopod, but it is obvious that these lakes too are quite unexplored as yet. Nothing is known of the Protozoa of Kivu. Table of Distribution of Protozoa 7. N £ Specie Tangan- Victoria Nice Albert Edward Other parts of AMG ORNS PECIes: yika. Nyanza. ~“9*5* 9 Nyanza. Nyanza. the world. Class RHIZOPODA. Order Loposa. : Awnceb a proveuseeeaeres eee ee P i a iat Cosmopolitan. AGRLlAlapIcdiac.ssccetcseeeccs eet Ve BAG wee ae Ki. Africa. ay hy Gentatare caoeterteesc cs. ae “es PS ue ty Cosmopolitan. ‘ ReUP AISCOLMES ae ene ek ony P§ 12 “ A. Hurope, N.America, Australia. Foie ye] CAUMUICIIO meee pene co ataok oe E i Si ASCUILIC Ree nennen ape ane me 12 P§ Bs if Huvope, a America. “7 > DB} Nos . ite n UP SeVILULOAIS ee sete eas ste ie I Sas nee Cosmopohi an, ? Hyalosphenia papilio ......... sae P +S ie nd Europe, N. America. Quadrula symmetrica ......... # 12 PS e Se Europe, N America. Ditiueiaacuminataysesss-....0 | cos ae P§ ae Re Cosmopolitan. : 3 Constrictan..,.css.0 Sn oe PS A vehi Kurope, N. America. - (ONOIND) — Gen ocasecseanas ant Ae IE nts = Europe, N. America. is lobulossis.esscen a iE te ioe fee Cosmopolitan. ps Mimme tre aenseeeseeeeee a 1p) 283 a fe Kurope. _ 5 lobostoma ............ et a P§ 68 a Cosmopolitan. DyLOMINS Nae eee eee P Ve tee aa Cosmopolitan. _ . sa TUNGCOIENIEY Bo ohue accuse i in 12 1% 38 Europe, N.America, Australia, Centropyxis aculeata ......... 12 IP a me Cosmopolitan. : Webelaicanimnatalseeres deca s 12 Europe, N. America, Pie CONMATISE eases ihe eee: Fs 1p P§ te one Europe, N. America, Asia. og, LRAGXD AVI ODOT Boehesponsae Hee R ee ne a Europe, N. America. Lecquereusia spiralis ......... P§ Ps Cosmopolitan. Kuglypha alveolata ............ P§ ate Cosmopolitan. _ - COIVENEN Sanqnesseoncuee 6 : P§ Kurope, N. America, Australia. Trinema enchelys ............... 0. P PS§ Cosmopolitan. Cyphoderia ampulla ............ 1 PS§ Europe, N. America. Order HELIOZOA. Actinospheerium eichhornii... ... re P§ fee Af. Cosmopolitan. Raphidiophrys elegans ...... if P a ae ie Cosmopolitan. Clathrulina stuhlmanni ...... a iP ae Mee a East Africa. Class MASTIGOPHORA. Order EUFLAGELLATA. Ruclenaacuse ere. te je § Cosmopolitan. ae SPIO LAMENT eee tad a P§ Cosmopolitan. aes 4 : #3 VADISI 3 eas, pi 12 }e Cosmopolitan. Colactumicalwuomiieens.. o-oo: 12 Europe. - Trachelomonas annulata ...... P§ S. America. x6 hispida .. ... PS Cosmopoliton. 5 OUTS ae asecere ES ‘ : os volvocina PS§ Cosmopolitan. Lepocinelis ovum ............... PS§ Burope, Australia. _ Phacus longicaudus ............ P§ oe ase Europe, Asia, America. 3 a : 5, pleuronectes ............ : ae PS§ ye ao Cosmopolitan. ‘ Pandorina morum ............ a 12 \e Kurope, Asia, America. + The majority of these records will be found in the accounts given of East African forms by Schaudinn (154) and Daday (75: 76, p. 6), where further particulars are given. § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. 590 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE 5 : Tangan- Victoria a ad Albert Edward Other parts of Name of Species: yika. Nyanza. Nyeee: Nyanza. Nyanaza. the world. Kudorina elegans P a a Europe, Asia. Volvox africanus Ly ae ne E. Africa. > aureus P§ Europe. > globator PS Europe, Asia, America. Order DINOFLAGELLATA. Ceratium brachyceros ......... H es hirundinella ......... 12 see f an Cosmopolitan. ie macroceros Ags P Kurope, Asia. Peridinium africanum ......... IP Je oh berolinense......... 12 a6 Re: Europe. a imconspicuum “a P ve Cosmopolitan. 5 palatinum ......... P§ a Pa Europe. 5 quadridens.. P a Re Europe, Asia, 5. America. tabulatum ......... $5 1 Cosmopolitan. Per idiniopsis cunningtonil ... 0} Glenodinium pulvisculus Ip 1 1p Europe, Australia. Class CILIATA. Order CILIATA VERA. Enchelyodon farctus Pp ee Be Europe, N. America. Coleps hirtus .. P§ ue Sa Cosmopolitan. Loxophyllum meleagris | ida IP oe ae Europe, N. America. Trachelius ovum 12 kee se Cosmopolitan. Dileptus anser ee ey re &, Europe, America, Australia. Nassula sp. ct 12 Colpidium sp. ae ee P Parameecium aurelia : ts eas Cosmopolitan. Spirostomum ambiguum ...... By P te Cosmopolitan. Condylostomarspsueeee ee Stentor roeselit 1.0.0.0... We age a see Europe, America. Tintinnopsis ovalis 1p Europe. Uronychia paupera Ae HS§ Trichodina sp. iota eta EY Worticellanlunagisis ssn Be P§ Kurope, N.America, Australia. Ms microstoma ......... P 1P Cosmopolitan. f MOOD, so cseen0 Pp Ps Europe, America, Australia. Zoothamnium arbuscula ...... P§ Europe, America. CENT) oscana ony Ds PS Kurope. EKpisty lis anastatica IP PS§ Cosmopolitan. 53 brevipes ......... 12 Europe, S America. i plicatilis ue P§ Europe, N. America. ys WALT, oc nenesos 1p P§ Kurope. Opercularia nutans 1p i Europe, America, Australia. Cothurnia crystallina ......... P IPS Cosmopolitan. 60 incisa... 10) ie lobata a0) Order SucTORTIA. Podophyra sp. Portree ii Tokophyra cy clopum P§ Kurope, N. America, Acineta symbiotica 1 H. Atrica. > tuberosa Ps Europe, Asia. AS ISenera sco ae rerqaecn ae oles 5) 122, 34 P. 4P. oe Si/ DAC, sosnnccsoonvenceascon WSOP, AVBL BID, BIBLE. 4 P. LIP, (7) (87) (60) § Not actually recorded from the lake itself, but from within its drainage area. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 59] The most obvious comment on the table of distribution is the great Inequality in the totals recorded from the biggest lakes—an inequality which is obviously due in this instance to unequal investigation. Of the 87 species enumerated, 60 occur in Nyasa, 37 in Victoria Nyanza, and only 7 in Tanganyika. While it is impossible to predict what figures will be forthcoming when the Protozoa of the lakes are better known, the figures at present available are merely an index of this disproportionate investiga- tion. The records from Nyasa are the result of the extensive col- lections made by Fiilleborn, which were reported on by Daday (76). It will be noticed that more than half the species identified were not obtained in the lake itself, but came from river mouths, pools, and swamps in the vicinity. Victoria Nyanza has been less adequately explored in this direction, smaller collections being made by Stuhlmann and more recently by Borgert and others. In his book on the Tanganyika Problem, Moore devotes a few paragraphs to the Protozoa of the lake (187, p. 323). The two forms which he mentions by name—a Condylostoma anda large Infusorian which he refers with some hesitation to the genus Colpidiam— have been inserted in the table of distribution. He describes the latter organism as the cause of the yellow clouds which occur on the surface at times and make the water appear “as if tinged with a fine golden dust.” This effect was also observed by Livingstone, who thought the yellow scum to be of vegetable origin. [I have repeatedly observed the phenomenon myself, not only on Tanganyika, but on Nyasa, and without denying other possibilities, I can confidently assert that it is usually due to limnetic Alge. In conclusion, Moore remarks that he found some twenty types of Protozoa belonging to groups common in tropical fresh-waters. A consideration of the list of species shows that in the great majority of cases the forms are widely distributed if not cosmopolitan in range. There are very few endemic species enumerated—four in Lake Victoria, two in Nyasa, and one in Tanganyika—and most of these are of little interest. Peridini- opsis cunningtonti trom Tanganyika, and Uronychia paupera from Nyasa, are perhaps of more interest, since in each case they are only the second described species ‘of the genus. Forty-eight genera ave mentioned in the table of distribution, of which the. greatest number occur in Nyasa. This is a large proportion of genera to species, but is accounted for by the number of genera represented by only a single species. None of the genera are endemic. No good purpose would be served by commenting in detail on the genera and species in the list, but one or two further remarks on their distribution may be offered. As far as the Rhizopoda are concerned, the lists from Victoria Nyanza aad Nyasa may be reasonably compared, and they exhibita close degree of similarity. The well-known genera Arcella and Difflugia are each represented by a number of species. It is in the remaining groups that there 592 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE has been inequality of investigation, so that the Euflagellata, for example, are only represented in Lake Victoria by a couple of forms as contrasted with a large number from Nyasa. Volvow africanus is an interesting species which was established to recelve specimens brought by Leiper from Albert Nyanza. It can no longer be regarded as endemic, since it has been observed in another part of Hast Africa. he Dinoflagellates are recorded from four lakes, and a comparison may thus be instituted. Lake Victoria contains representatives of the genera Ceratium and Glenodinium*. The former genus is wanting in Tanganyika, where, however, Peridiniwm and Peridiniopsis replace it. In Nyasa, Ceratium and Peridiniwm occur; in Lake Albert, Peri- dintum and Glenodinium. It is particularly among the ciliated forms that a number of genera occur represented only by a single species. ‘The 7ichodina mentioned, which has not been specific- ally identified, is parasitic upon the Tanganyika jelly-fish. Since the latter, or a variety of it, is known from Victoria Nyanza, it may well be that a 7richodina accompanies the medusa there also, but I have no information on the subject. In conclusion, it only remains to point out that the Protozoa, as at present known, give no indication of an exceptional fauna peculiar to any lake. At the same time it is precisely in Tanganyika, if anywhere, that such might be expected, and that lake remains virtually unexplored in this direction. 4, GENERAL DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS. Having completed the systematic review of the animals at present known to occur in the lakes, the points of interest concerning their distribution may now be fittingly discussed. Far the most noticeable feature is that which has so repeatedly shown itself, namely the unique nature of the fauna of ‘Tan- ganyika. With a recorded total of over 400 different animal types, the Jake is clearly exceptional; moreover, no details of certain groups which are known to occur are yet available for incorporation. As this treatise is concerned so largely with Tanganyika, it may not be out of place to illustrate here in a graphic manner, the growth of knowledge concerning its fauna. The curve which follows may be regarded as approximately correct. It is clear that the labour of ascertaining the date of discovery or description of every type—even if possible—would be out of proportion to the value of such a record. The largest addition to the total (159 species in all) was made by the writer’s expedition, which obtained, moreover, practically all the infor- mation on the flora of the lake. * Virieux states that in the plankton which he examined he observed a specimen of Peridiniwn, but was unable to identify the species (197, p. 6). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. Text-figure 1. D983 Curve showing growth of knowledge of Tanganyika fauna. 500 400 —— Re) S 3 + Ke) ss 300 — - = i a S < 2 D = = S 200 ae ne :; S a % 9) 8 Ly s & 100 ree S Ry s Ss S S 0 cs 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 191d 1920 The relative peculiarity of each lake fauna, as far as totals only are concerned, can be best illustrated by giving the figures in parallel columns with the marks E or P against them. Tanean- yika. 57H, 111P. (168) Genera | Species 293 H, 109 P. (402) Victoria Nyanza. 2K, 137P. (139) 110#, 179°. (289) Albert Nyasa. Nyanza. 6H, 172P.|1, 47P. | (178) 86H, 275 P.| 9H, 58P. (361) | (67) (48) Edward | Nema Kivu. eau, 2 129 a 2 | (88) | (64) (23) An examination of these totals at once reveals the chief points in which the fauna of Tanganyika is distinct. the lake contains a more extensive series of forms (402) than any other. In the first place, In the second place, those types greatly predominate which are unknown elsewhere (293 out of 402). Both these points, viz. total number of species and corresponding number of endemics, are shown graphically for each lake in the following ? t=) ro) table :— 11H, 48 P. 41, 19 P. 594 DR. W. A. GUNNINGTON ON THE Text-figure 2. Table to illustrate richness of fauna and proportion of endemic species to the whole. 450 a 400 350 300 i lind 250 ee Hl jue ca 150 oe ; —_—— 100 E a VIC TORIA ALBERT EDWARO KIVU TWIG SES NYANZA NYANZA NYANZA The height of each column represents the total number of species 2 : : I , and the shaded portion the number of endemic forms. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 595 It will be observed that the total figure for Nyasa, though some way behind that of Tanganyika, is still very large. Since in many cases—e. g. fishes, molluscs, prawns—Tanganyika has a much richer fauna, such a result is perhaps a little surprising. It is worth while to recount the facts which explain this. Firstly, the group of the Cladocera is entirely absent from Tanganyika, but well represented in Nyasa and elsewhere. ‘This is probably due to the nature of the salts dissolved in the water, which appears also to have a restrictive influence on the Rotifera of the lake. Secondly, there are one or two groups of animals—notably the Protozoa and free-living Nematoda—almost uninvestigated as far as Tanganyika is concerned, although tolerably well known for Nyasa. Lastly, the collections made by Fulleborn extended to the waters surrounding Nyasa, while the rivers, ponds, and swamps in the neighbourhood of Tanganyika remain unexplored. This has greatly increased the records for Nyasa, particularly in the groups Rotifera, Protozoa, and Entomostraca. In the matter of endemic types, however, Tanganyika leaves Nyasa (and the other lakes) far behind, exhibiting an astonishing series of forms for which it is difficult to find a parallel. Hxpressing in percentages the figures already furnished, nearly 73 per cent. of the species in Tanganyika are peculiar to the lake, whilst Victoria Nyanza comes a poor second with 38 per cent., and Nyasa still further behind with some 24 per cent. The smaller lakes have not only smaller totals, but have a reduced proportion of endemic forms, namely 20 per cent. for Lake Kdward, 17 per cent. for Kivu, and only 13 per cent. for Lake Albert. Nor is this all, for the number of endemic genera which Tanganyika contains places it in a category by itself. No fewer than 57 out of 168 are regarded as peculiar to the lake, or rather more than one-third of the total. As against this, Nyasa has 6 endemic genera out of 178, and Victoria Nyanza 2 out of 139, while Lakes Albert and Edward each possess but a single endemic genus. Tanganyika alone among these lakes has a family which ean be regarded as endemic—that of the Tiphobiide (Gasteropoda). It is thus clear that Tanganyika exhibits by far the most striking series of endemic animals of any of the lakes under con- sideration—indeed, it must be recognised as one of the most remarkable lakes in the world. There are only two lakes, as far as I know, which merit comparison with Tanganyika in this direction, viz. the Caspian Sea and Lake Baikal. Unfortunately I have been quite unable to obtain trustworthy figures of recent date with which to compare the particulars now available for the African Jake. It seems probable, however, that Baikal even surpasses Tanganyika in the number of animal forms peculiar to its waters*. It appears that while relatively few groups are * Consult the series of monographs dealing with the results of the most recent scientific expedition—Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse einer Zoologischen Expedition nach dem Baikal-See unter Leitung des Professors Alexis Korotneff in den Jahren 1900-1902. Lieferungen 1-5. Kiew und Berlin 1905-1912. It is to be regretted that this work remains uncompleted, doubtless on account of the European war. 596 DR. W. A. CUNNINGLON ON THE represented, there is often a great richness of species within the groups. The fishes are far fewer than those of Tanganyika and only half of them are endemic, while the Mollusca agree pretty closely in the number of endemic types. On the other hand, there are most extensive series of Oligochetes and Turbellarians, andan extraordinary wealth of Gammarids, the species being in each case nearly all endemic. In the case of the Caspian, I am able to quote figures, according to which some 64 per cent. of the animal forms are found nowhere else in the world (155, p. 34). If this statement can be relied upon, the Caspian Sea, while sufliciently remarkable, is less so than Tanganyika, which has nearly 73 per cent. of endemic types. Returning to a consideration of the fauna of Tanganyika, other features revealed in the Systematic Account may be summarised in a few sentences. Those groups which are most conspicuous in possessing endemic genera and species are the Pisces, Mollusca (especially Gasteropoda), and Macrura, with the Brachyura following closely. The Copepoda and Ostracoda are well represented by endemic species (but not genera), with the Porifera and Polyzoa showing smaller numbers. While other groups with few endemic species, appear, by contrast, devoid of significance, there are only five of ali those represented in the lake—Mammalia, Crocodilia, Chelonia, Batvachia, and Coelen- terata—which do not contain endemic types. It may be added that certain endemic forms are held to exhibit a marine aspect and have been termed thalassoid (halolimnie according to Moore). Such are many of the Gasteropod molluses and perhaps a Polyzoon. In the same category comes the medusa, which, of course, is not confined to Tanganyika. The exceptional character of the Tanganyika fauna having been sufficiently emphasised, an explanation of this marked peculiarity must be sought. In other words, a general con- sideration of what Moore called the Tanganyika “ problem” must be undertaken. In order to appreciate the actual value of the purely biological evidence, it is necessary clearly tc understand the relations whieh exist between marine and fresh-water organisms. ‘The essential points may therefore be stated as briefly as possible *. In the first place, while certain organisms are characteristic of the sea and others of fresh water, the distinctions which exist between marine and fresh-water forms are neither very great nor very definite. Secondly, it may be emphasised that the barriers which tend to prevent a change of medium are not wholly insur- mountable. At the same time fresh-water types are usually recognised in consequence of certain structural peculiarities directly due to their mode of life. Such features should be excluded as far as possible when deciding the systematic position of an organism, for it is only thus that a true idea of its inter- % These matters are discussed at greater length in several recent papers. Consult Sollas (173), Cunnington (71), Gurney (97). FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 597 velationships—which are quite independent of habitat—can be obtained. The undoubted affinities existing between marine and fresh- water organisms are the direct result of a community of descent, for there is no escape from the conclusion that life had its origin in the ocean. Thus the forms now found in fresh-waters must have attained their present distribution in one of three ways :— (1) by a direct, active or passive migration from the sea; (2) by becoming terrestrial or swamp-loving in nature, and secondarily adapting themselves to life in fresh water ; (3) as a result of the isolation and subsequent freshening of some portion of the sea, due to movements of the earth's crust. Without speculating as to which of these methods has played the most important part, it may be pointed out that the salinity of the ocean has not been constant throughout the ages, but is doubtless greater now than in past geological times. Since certain types are known to have recently migrated from the sea, it is not hard to believe that many forms may have achieved the change during former epochs when the obstacles to be surmounted were somewhat less. It is hardly necessary to repeat that the view advocated by Moore assumes that the remarkable organisms found in Tanganyika have attained their present distribution by the third means, and have been modified from marine types in a basin cut off from the sea. Since the flora of a lake perforce exists under the same con- ditions as the fauna, it will be well, before proceeding, to make further reference to the plants of Tanganyika. The higher plants show no outstanding peculiarities. There are certainly 8 species of true aquatics which have been collected in Tanganyika alone among the lakes, but all these are well-known African—-or even cosmopolitan- -forms (ef Rendle, 147). On the other hand, the Alge of Tanganyika differ markedly from those found in the other big lakes, a number being endemic, while a few are usually marine or brackish in habit. In all, some 21 species and 5 varieties are described as peculiar to Tanganyika. It is, however, the phytoplankton of the lakes which affords the most interesting comparisons. The plankton of Tanganyika is much richer in species than that of either Nyasa or Victoria Nyanza. Out of a total of 85 species, more than 70 per cent. do not occur in the other two lakes, so that in this instance once more the features characteristic of Tanganyika are exhibited. The presence in the lake of brackish-water and quasi-marine Algee may perhaps be accounted for by a period of growing salinity prior to the estab- lishment of an outlet. (For further particulars consult the detailed Report on the Fresh-water Algze of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, 200). It is natural that a good deal of attention has been attracted to Tanganyika by the singular nature of its fauna, and it is not surprising that various suggestions have been offered in explanation of the facts. While it will be necessary to recount the several views which have been advanced, it is appropriate to 598 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE deal in the first instance with Moore’s hypothesis that Tanganyika represents an old Jurassic sea. This view, first put forward in a paper published in 1898 (131), was subsequently developed and the evidence detaiied at considerable length in “ The Tanganyika Problem,’’ 1903, (187). Being thus a widely known theory, it is only necessary to inquire how it accords with the facts which have since come to light. From the botanical and geological, as well as from the zoological side, more information is available than when this hypothesis was propounded, and it may at once be said that recent discoveries do not favour the theory. As the zoological evidence has been examined and discussed in the body of this paper, it is only needful to summarise the conclusions. Moore’s view rests in the main on his comparison of certain marine fossil shells of the Jurassic period, with those of Gastero- pods living in the lake at the present day—coupled with his deductions as to the anatomy and relationships of the latter forms. Tt has already been explained (p. 549) that, in the opinion of leading experts, neither of these claims can be substantiated. If the counparison with Jurassic fossils is held to be inadmissible, the period of the suppesed connection with the ocean remains in doubt, but while Moore subsequently declared that he attached no great weight to this comparison (138, p. 602), he still adhered to his view that the so-called halolimnic animals were truly marine or relict forms. As faras the molluscs are concerned, the opinion of Pelseneer is in direct conflict with this view, for he regards the halolimnic Gasteropods as emphatically fresh-water types. In this connection it may well be asked—-why are there no thalassoid Lamellibranchs in Tanganyika? There seems no obvious explanation of the fact, yet surely some members of this group would also exhibit a thalassoid appearance had they been relict forms from the ocean. This itself is evidence which tells against the view of a relict origin for the fauna. Nor do the other members of Moore’s ¢ group of halolimnic animals definitely support his contention. The medusa, once so important, and admittedly a marine type, has lost most of its significance. Not only are fresh-water meduse known to occur more widely than was formerly supposed, but the Tanganyika species has been found in the Niger and in Victoria Nyanza. The Decapod Crustacea—prawns and crabs—regarded in ‘ The Tanganyika Problem” as constituents of the halolimnic group, have been shown to belong to typically fresh-water families. Much stress was formerly la, id upon the incrusting gymnolematous Polyzoon Arachnoidea, but recent discoveries have modified its importance. Since the genus is now actually living in Asiatic seas, it can hardly be regarded as an ancient marine type persisting only in Tanganyika, but must rather be looked upon as a recent importation (cf. the analogous case of Victorella, p. 540). Finally the sponges belong to the. family Spongillide, a charac- teristically fresh-water assemblage. Thus, of the succession of FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 599 animals from different groups which constituted Moore’s halo- limnie series, none are accepted as peculiarly marine save the Polyzoon Ar achnoidea and the medusa. But more than this. The endemic animal forms have been described almost without exception as specialised and not primi- tive types. It is true that Moore regarded the remarkable Gasteropods as essentially primitive in nature, but this view is not shared by other writers (p. 550). If the halolimnic animals are indeed relict forms, they must have been cut off at some remote era—though it need not have been the Jurassic period— and ought in consequence to exhibit primitive rather than specialised characteristics. This review of the zoological evidence makes it clear that on such grounds it is impossible to justify the contention that Tanganyika was connected with the sea in Jurassic times, or indeed that a connection with the sea ever existed. It is there- fore necessary to inquire what light may be thrown on the subject by the evidence of geology. In his book, Moore maintained that resting on the Archean granites, gneisses, and schists which appear to constitute the basement rocks of the continent, three types of sedimentary rock are to be recognised. ‘The lowest of these consists of beds of sandstone and shale, which are not only well developed in the neighbourhood of the great lakes, but appear to extend over vast areas of the African interior, including a large part of the Congo basin. Then follow the beds discovered by Drummond _ north- west of Nyasa, and covering these in turn, white shelly deposits (Pleistocene) laid down by the lakes themselves. Drummond’s beds being regarded as Triassic in age and probably estuarine, fo) Moore considered the great beds of sandstone and conglomerate as evidence of an extensive ocean which at some still earlier period covered a great part of the lake regions of Central Africa (137, p. 65 et seq.). It is particularly to this last point that exception is taken by other writers on the geology of these regions, Some regard Drum- mond’s beds and the great sandstone series as of like age, and on the evidence of the fossils occurring in the former, regard the whole as beds of the lower Karoo (Trias)—or at least as a forma- tion of corresponding age, deposited under similar conditions. A very recent writer on the stratigraphy of this part of the continent (Behrend) speaks of the unfossiliferous conglomerates, quartzites, and sandstones which are particularly well displayed in the neighbourhood of the great lakes, as the “ Tanganyika System ” (14, p. 52). These beds he distinguishes as of different age from similar rocks occurring near Nyasa and in parts of the Congo basin, assigning them “to an earlier perilod—Devonian or even prior to that (14, p. 73 and Taf. iii.). While it may be that the relative age of these different strata is by no means conclusively fixed, these recent investigations show that Moore’s lowest series—the “ Old African sandstones” as he calls them—really 600 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE comprises two or more formations. In any case all the evidence goes to prove that these sandstones and conglomerates, whatever their age, were laid down under continental, i.e. fresh-water and terrestrial conditions, and thus afford no support for the view that the ocean formerly extended over these large tracts in the heart of Africa. There is yet another geological objection to the view that Tanganyika contains relict domme from an ancient sea, and that is, that the depression itself would not appear to date back to the remote times required by Moores hypothesis. There is every reason to believe that the extensive faulting which produced the Great Rift Valley took place in Middle “Tertiary times, and if this be accepted, the basin of Tanganyika was actually not in existence at the time when the Jurassic theory supposes it to have received its marine fauna *. Clearly the geological evidence does net favour a marine “relict” origin Bow the peculiar fauna of Tanganyika, and it has been shown that the testimony of zoology is against it. In order to be convincing, a theory must not run counter to the findings of either branch of science. Since it does not seem possible to accept the hypothesis put forward by Moore, alternative suggestions have now to be con- sidered. In the first place, it 1s important to point out that shells of the thalassoid Tanganyika genus Paramelania had been compared by White (202: 203) and Tausch (186) with those of the fresh-water Cretaceous genus Pyrgulifera some time before Moore drew his comparisons with marine Jurassic shells. It has been held by conchologists that the resemblance in this case is every whit as close as between any of the forms compared by Moore. This may constitute slender evidence on which to theorise, but it is significant that the beds from which the fossil type comes are not only more recent, but are fresh-water in character and not marine. Thus, if any value attaches to the evidence, it would suggest that the unusual molluscan genera should be regarded as the little modified representatives of a late secondary fresh-water assemblage rather than those of a much earlier marine one. This view, which implies that the thalassoid Gasteropods are relics of an ancient lake fauna preserved in this basin, obviously did not find acceptance by Moore. He urged against it the pertinent fact that in such a case, similar types, living or fossil, ought to be found in other areas, and yet they are conspicuously absent (137, p. 335). While agreeing that this constitutes a serious objection, the same objection, to my mind, may be raised with equal force against the marine Jurassic hypothesis. Reference has already been made to the fact that certain fossil Gasteropods from the Balkan Peninsula exhibit a considerable resemblance to some of the thalassoid types from Tanganyika * Certain geological experts, indeed, regard the Tanganyika basin as more recently produced than other parts of the Rift Valley system. FAUNA OF 'HE AFRICAN LAKES, 601 (p. 550). The forms in question, described and figured by Brusina (58:59), come from fresh-water Pliocene beds in Dal- matia, Croatia, and Slavonia, From this it might be argued that the lakes of the Mediterranean region which existed in Tertiary times were the source from which the Tanganyika Gasteropods have been derived. It is not unreasonable to suggest that com- munication was possible between these lakes and the region of Tanganyika by way of the valley of the Nile and the Great Rift Valley. While less objection can be taken to this view than to Moore’s, or even to the suggestion of a Cretaceous origin for the molluses, there are difficulties in accepting it as a complete solution of the problem. ‘To confirm this theory, either fossil forms of like nature should be forthcoming in some intermediate region, or (aS a communication to the nortli of Tanganyika is assumed) living types should be found in Lakes Kivu, Edward, or Albert. Since neither are known to occur, the case for ne source of origin is unsupported. Since the shells of the thalassoid molluscs have been held to resemble (1) marine Jurassic types of the Anglo-Norman basin, (2) in one instance a widely distributed fresh- or brackish-water genus from the Upper Cretaceous of Hungary and North America, (3) a series of fresh-water fossils from beds of Newer Tertiary age in Jugo-Slavia, the evidence afforded is so contra- dictory as to offer little guidance in determining the origin of the fauna of Tanganyika. It is a very natural suggestion that the thalassoid appearance of the Tanganyika Gasteropods is directly due to the size, depth, and quasi-oceanic conditions prevailing in such a lake*. That is to say, that a marine aspect has been produced in certain members of the ordinary African fresh-water series as the result of convergence. To those who have visited these lakes and realised their vastness this seems plausible, but the difficulty has then to be faced, that similar forms are not forthcoming in Nyasa and Victoria Nyanza. An hypothesis in which this view is introduced, but which has other novel features, was brought before the International Congress of Zoology in 1913 by Germain ( (87). He holds that previous writers have been wrong in considering Tanganyika by itself, and urges that a clearer under standing of the facts becomes possible on taking into account the organisms which inhabit neighbouring lakes and rivers. Dealing with the Prosobranch Gasteropods, which exhibit par eacellence a thalassoid facies, Germain asserts that while Tanganyika contains a much larger series of such forms than any other lake, it is not the sole locality in which they may be found. He considers that Lakes Mwero and Nyasa, as well as the Upper and Middle Congo, contain a number of Prosobranchs (chiefly Melantide) the marine aspect of which it is impossible to deny. Proceeding to discuss the * A corresponding suggestion has been made to explain the marine appearance of certain Crustacea and other organisms in Lake Baikal. Proc. Zoou, Soc.— 1920, No. XL. 40 602 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE geological aspect of the problem, he states that very extensive lacustrine deposits are actually known in Central Africa, reaching from the Congo basin to Tanganyika and from that lake to Victoria Nyanza on the one hand and Nyasa on the other. From such considerations he supposes that there formerly existed in east-central Africa a vast lake basin which united the Middle and Upper Congo with Nyasa and Tanganyika and_ probably Victoria Nyanza. Living in this region was a uniform fresh- water fauna specially rich in Prosobranchs. After the formation of the Great Rift Valley the lakes were isolated in their present basins, where modifications of the original fauna resulted from the new environment. Lake Tanganyika, possessing most nearly the characteristics of the ocean, became inhabited by molluses which have assumed (by a phenomenom of convergence) a marine aspect in the highest degree* With this conception I do not find myself wholly in accord. Without expressing an opinion on the nature of the Gasteropods of Nyasa and the Upper Congo region, there are two serious objections to its acceptance. In the first place, there is in- sufficient geological evidence for a lake basin so large in extent— the deposits in this area being probably terrestrial and fluviatile. In the second place, there is no reason why the conditions in Nyasa and Victoria Nyanza, which closely resemble those of Tanganyika, should not have produced an equally striking series of thalassoid Gasteropods in those lakes, and yet this is not the case. At the same time I am quite prepared to agree that the marine aspect of the molluscs is probably due to convergence. Another obvious suggestion is that the salinity of the water has been a determining factor in producing mavine-like forms. Here it is much less easy to come to a decision, for the question of increased salinity is of course directly associated with that of a period of isolation. But prolonged isolation itself, with the opportunity it affords of development free from competition with the outside world, is obviously a cause predisposing to the pro- duction of new characters. Where isolation and a gradual increase in salinity have coexisted, it is difficult to recognise which factor is responsible for a particular result. Experimental evidence is not wanting to show that certain salts, even in minute quantities, exert a profound influence on aquatic organ- isms, but it does not follow that a marime aspect would be produced as a result. West, indeed, goes so far as to assert that the Algz of Tanganyika which exhibit marine affinities may well have been produced by a gradual increase in the Salinity of the lake during an extended period of time (200, p. 191). Here, it is true, the two factors are inextricably associated, but if the suggestion is not unreasonable for the Algz, the surmise may be * Since this account has been in the press, a still more recent paper by Germain has reached my hands—‘‘ Histoire Océanographique des Lacs de l’Afrique Orientale.” Bull. Inst. Océanoer. Monaco, No. 369, 1920. In it, he adds little which is new, merely re- affirming the opinions expressed i in his earlier ar ticle, FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 603 hazarded that the thalassoid Gasteropod shells owe their nature to the same cause. Be this as it may, there are additiona] com- plications affecting the salinity of Tanganyika. It has been shown that Tanganyika had probably no outlet until a portion of the Nile basin became cut off and Kivu drained south into the lake (p. 515). It has also been pointed out that since Kivu water contains an excessive amount of magnesium salts, that lake is probably the source from which the high per- centage in Tanganyika has been derived (p. 570). If these probabilities be accepted, certain conclusions as to salinity follow. During the first period the salinity may well have been consider- able, though there is no evidence as to its nature. The lake subsequently freshened, but eventually its waters became rich in salts of magnesium. Thus any effect which the saline nature of the water may have exerted on the organisms of the lake may have been due to either of these conditions, or to a combination of both. As already suggested, there may even exist an irregu- larity in the outflow of the lake, due to the forming and breaking of dams in the bed of the Lukuga River (p. 515). If this be the ease, the salinity of Tanganyika has not only changed consider- ably in the past, but may still be changing materially from time to time. The view that Tanganyika owes its remarkable organisms—not merely the thalassoid forms—to a long-protracted period of isolation, has been advocated by several writers, and remains, on the whole, the most likely suggestion put forward, The ' possible effect of an increased salinity, which isolation would involve, must of necessity be coupled with this, but it is not regarded as the prime factor. This view has the positive advantage that it does not run counter to geological conceptions, but fits in with what is believed to be the past history of the lake. Testimony in favour of it is afforded by the very remarkable nature of the Cichlid fishes which Tanganyika contains. This group has long been known to show a. peculiar facility for colonising isolated and often saline waters, though the agency by which this is effected is not understood. What then more likel than that the Cichlids were among the earliest inhabitants of the Jake, where, without having to compete with other types of fish, they multiplied unchecked and became differentiated into new genera and species (cf. 26, p. 423). It is hardly necessary to point out that this isolation hypothesis does not assume that Tanganyika was stocked from any exceptional source. That is to say, the lake did not receive its fauna from an ancient sea, but in the same manner as the neighbouring fresh-waters, the original similarity of its fauna to those of the other lakes being secondarily lost by marked divergences of form consequent upon prolonged isolation. The marine aspect of certain Gasteropods would thus be regarded as merely due to convergence. Viewed in this light, the case of Tanganyika is closely analogous to that of oceanic islands, 40* 604 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE which, as isolated areas of land, are well known to possess faunas and floras largely peculiar to themselves, The last-mentioned hypothesis, even if satisfactory in the main, makes no attempt to account for the presence of the medusa in Tanganyika, and accordingly a few sentences are needed on this aspect of the question. In dealing with the distribution of African fresh-water fishes, Boulenger has discussed the problem of Tanganyika, and states that he cannot admit Moore’s contentions (26, p. 422). He refers to the inconclusive evidence afforded by the so-called halolimnie Gasteropods, and clearly regards the medusa (now known from other parts of the continent) as the only organism in the lake for which it is necessary to account in any special manner. He points out that paleontological evidence exists of a Middle Eocene (Lutetian) sea which extended over a large area in Northern Africa (vide also Hudleston 102, p. 352), and suggests that this would afford a rational explanation of the present distribution of the medusa in Africa. With this view Gravier is not in agreement (90, p. 221). He gives it as his opinion that the medusa may well have migrated from the sea at a recent epoch, especially should it possess a hydroid stage, as is held likely by Browne (cf. 56, p. 306). Its present distribution in Africa he explains by reference to the possibilities of intercommunication between the river systems. Having dealt at considerable length—as becomes its import- ance --with the fauna of Tanganyika and the views put forward to account for its very unusual character, 14 is now possible to proceed to a brief study of the remaining lake faunas. While there are smaller totals and fewer peculiar types, the bigger lakes at least are not devoid of interest. Victoria Nyanza, with 38 per cent. of endemic species, clearly has characteristics of its own, these being more prominent in some groups than in others. By far the most conspicuous group is the Pisces, containing, as in the case of Tanganyika, the largest series of forms. It comprises also over half the total number of endemic species and the only two endemic genera. 'The Mollusca again are noteworthy, but in this case the Lamellibranchs are more striking than the Gasteropods, exhibiting a larger pro- portion of endemic types. Of the few Ostracods recorded from the lake, 5 out of 7 are described as peculiar, and the Oligochete worms are represented by 6 species, 4 of which are endemic. Victoria is the only lake besides Tanganyika which contains the medusa, though this should perhaps be regarded as subspecifically distinct. It is only in this lake that the common Hydra is known to occur. Many groups are wholly without endemic representatives. Generally speaking, Lake Nyasa exhibits very similar features, but with rather fewer peculiar forms. Fishes constitute half the total number of endemics, and 5 endemic genera out of 6. A considerable number of molluscs are known, nearly half being a er ee FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 605 peculiar to the lake. Nyasa contains an endemic genus belong- ing to the Argulide, and the Ostracoda are well. represented, 8 species being endemic out of 17. It is strange that no aquatic snakes and no Polyzoa have yet been recorded ; on the other hand, Nvasa alone of the lakes under review contains aquatic tortoises referred to the Trionychidee. The three smaller lakes contain representatives of fewer animal groups, but it is possible that this is merely due to less syste- matic investigation.—Albert Nyanza displays only i3 per cent. of endemic forms, which are mostly Mollusca, while it has no endemic fish. The genus Limmnocaridella (prawn) is the only genus peculiar to the lake.—Hdward Nyanza contains a more interesting series of fish, with one genus and six species endemic. Only 3 molluscs are peculiar out of a total of 15, and there is little else which calls for comment.—In Kivu, representatives of only 6 groups of animals are at present lmown. to occur. While future exploration may bring other forms to light, the poverty of its fauna is probably connected with the exceptional salinity of the water. Out of a total of 23 species, there are 13 fishes, 3 being endemic, while the only other endemic type is an Oligochete worm. The apparent absence of the hippo- potamus and the crocodile is a point of some interest. Similarly no Lamellibranchs appear to occur, although two forms of Gasteropod are known. It is obvious that none of these lakes exhibit such striking forms as Tanganyika, and that while endemic types are not wanting, these are fewer in number and for the most part only specific in character. Apart from the presence of the medusa in Lake Victoria, there is nothing to suggest a special connection with the sea. In broad terms it may be said that the lakes contain the ordinary fresh-water fauna of Africa modified in varying degree in each case. Where such modification is con- siderable, as in Victoria Nyanza and less markedly Nyasa, it may well have been caused by a period of isolation proportional to the relative peculiarity of the fauna. It is more especially the fish- fauna of these lakes which is rich in endemic species and shows certain endemic genera, and from this evidence it would seem that Lake Victoria remained isolated for a longer period than Nyasa (ef. p. 536). If isolation be accepted as accounting for the remarkable fauna of Tanganyika, it is clear that a still longer period must have been necessary in that case to produce such notable results. There are certain other matters concerning the distribution of animals in the African lakes which are brought out by this com- parative survey. While representatives occur of most of those groups which may be expected in tropical fresh-waters, there are some interesting exceptions. It comes as a surprise to a Euro- pean naturalist to find no fresh-water Isopods such as Asellus, or Amphipods such as Gammarus, yet these familiar forms appear to be conspicuously absent from the tropical parts of Africa, 606 DR. W. A. CUNNINGYON ON THE though the genus Gammarus is recorded from the north and south of the continent. Why such types are wanting it would be idle to speculate, but the fact is also emphasised by Stuhlmann in more than one place (181, p. 1268: 182, p. 652). It is strange too, that among the intestinal parasites OF the fresh-water fish there appear to be no species of Hchinorhynchus, although they are common in the fish of European rivers. Daday, it is true, has described a larval form from a species of Ostracod taken in a small Hast African lake (76, p. 55). Thus, while Asel/ws and Gammarus are commonly the intermediate hosts, it is evident that the absence of these genera does not form a complete barrier to the distribution of Lehinorhynchus, and Daday con- siders that it will yet prove common in Africa. At present, however, the adult ferm is entirely unknown. Concerning the numerical distribution of species in the lakes, there is one point which calls for further notice. From a study of the lists of forms found in each lake, Moore believed that a definite relation existed between numbers and size. After reviewing the facts then at his disposal, he writes :—‘ It is thus obvious that from some cause or other the number of specific forms in an African lake is roughly proportional to the size of the lake itself” (137, p. 146). This does not mean that the smaller lakes are less well stocked with animals, but simply that the number of species they contain is less. The matter has already been referred to in the systematic section, and it has moreover been shown that the principle appears capable of extension to the number of genera and even families (pp. 535, 548). With the total figures for the six lakes now available, it is possible to test the correctness of this conception on a more extended basis. The totals for species and genera are therefore given in tabular form, with the lakes (apart from Tanganyika) arranged in order of size. Tangan- Victoria Albert Edward yika. Nyanza. Where Nyanza. Nyanza. Kivu. Number of Species ......... 402 289 361 67 54 23 i Generate tee, 168 139 178 48 35 13 Tanganyika, which heads the list, 1s in every sense to be regarded as a case apart, but the figures for the remaining lakes should accord with this law-—if such it be. A descending series is seen to exist: Nyasa it 1s true constitutes an exception, but, as already explained, its totals have been artificially swollen in certain directions ‘p. 595). Nyasa conforms to the rule in the case of the Pisces and Mollusca—it is the addition of many types of Rotifera and Protozoa which chiefly accounts for the large. total figure for the lake. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 607 A very similar result is arrived at on comparing the number of groups represented in the different lakes. From Victoria Nyanza downwards the decrease in size is accompanied by a decrease in the number of groups present. The figures (including Tangan- yika for comparison) are found to be as follows : Tanganyika 26 (groups), Victoria 25, Nyasa 24, Albert 15, Edward 14, ‘and Kivu 6. It is possible, however, that the low totals for the smaller lakes are, in part, a result ia less complete investigation. Knough has been said to show that Moore’s contention is substantially correct as far as these African lakes are concerned. It would be interesting to discover whether a similar relation between size and number of specific forms can be made out for other groups of lakes or even if it is a principle of general appli- cation. Moore makes a comparison, which would seem to be justified, between this phenomenon and that exhibited by the flora of oceanic islands, where the smaller the island,—although it may be as thickly covered with vegetation as any other area,— the fewer the species of plants which inhabit it. The last matter to be considered is the undoubted affinity which exists between certain African and Indian fresh-water types—an aflinity which has been noticed already, when re- viewing the groups in which it is most pronounced, ‘This inter- relationship i is exhibited in many groups of animals, and extends not merely to forms from the Indian Peninsula itself, but from the whole of that part of Asia, including the Malay Archipelago. An interesting account of these affinities is given by Annandale in a paper entitled “The African Klement in the Freshwater Fauna of British India” (10). So far as the present treatise is concerned, consideration is limited to those animals which are known to occur in one or other of the big African lakes. Briefly enumerating the cases, the Cyprinide and Mastacembelidze among the fishes indicate this affinity in a marked degree. The Polyzoa afford striking evidence, since the genus Arachnoidea is known from Tanganyika and East indienne seas, while in the case of Plumatella (Afrindella) tanganyike the actual species has been found in an Indian lake as well as in Tanganyika. Caridina nilotica with its varietal forms occurs in several of the African lakes, while it is widely distributed in Indian and Malay regions and extends still further east into Australia. Among the Ceelenterata a medusa has now been found in India which is generically identical with that from Tanganyika and Victoria Nyanza, while finally among the sponges Spongilla carteri from Lake Victoria is known in India and Jaya. This is not the place to discuss the geological evidence for a former land-connection between these areas, but the views commonly held can be stated in a few words. During the Carboniferous period, and persisting subsequently through the Permian and Triassic, there appears to have existed a vast tropical continent which extended from Brazil to Australia, embracing of course Africa and India. This continent is known 608 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE as Gondwanaland. In the ensuing period—the Jurassic—Gond- wanaland began to break up, but there is some evidence that in late Cretaceous or even early Tertiary times a land-bridge still existed between Hast Africa and the Indo-Malayan region, by way of the Seychelles and Maldives. he geological record is thus quite in keeping with the facts of distribution to which reference has been made. In bringing this study to a conclusion, it must be admitted that im many directions information is very limited. There is no doubt that the discovery of additional species is to be expected whenever a re-examination of any of the lakes occurs, but there are other points of considerable interest on which knowledge i 18 much to be desired. Despite the investigations of Moore in Nya: asa and Tanganyika, very little is really (nowt concerning the deeper regions of any of the lakes, and the existence of a distinct abyssal fauna is uncertain. In a paper dealing with the distribution of the molluses, Moore speaks of obtaining certain thalassoid forms in Tanganyika at a depth of 800-1200 feet (244-366 metres) (129, p. 171). He regarded these particular Gasteropods as a deep-water assemblage, but a more thorough examination may well reveal other animals which permanently inhabit the bottom muds. There is little doubt from an analogy with other deep lakes that the deeper waters of these African lakes are almost, if not quite, devoid of life. At the same time, further investigation may indicate a definite association of abyssal forms not only in Tanganyika, but in the other lakes under review.— Associated likewise with the distribution of organisms within the limits of the lakes are questions such as the vertical distribution of plankton forms, as ascertained by tow-nettings. During the Third Tanganyika Expedition my operations were practically confined to surface tow-nettings, but special tow-nets worked from suitable craft would afford the necessary information.—- Again, the seasonal variations of plankton organisms are almost unknown, although [ was able to detect a marked decrease in the quantity of material during the rainy season. Detailed know- ledge of this kind can only be gained by the aid of large collections extending over many months.—The distribution of local forms or varieties within the limits of a single lake was discussed by Moore in his book. He considered that certain well-marked varieties or even species were confined to particular areas in the greater African lakes (187, p. 149). My own observations lead to a different conclusion, and the matter undoubtedly merits further investigation. Lastly, there are some outstanding physical matters which are of importance on account of their relation to biological pheno- mena. Very little is known concerning the chemical impurities of the water in these lakes, and even the depth and general nature of the basin is imperfectly known save for Tanganyika, Victoria and Nyasa. Further knowledge is likewise desirable as FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 609 to water temperatures, seiches, and the possible occurrence of temperature seiches. It is clear, nevertheless, that from the facts already established, a reasonably tirue conception may be formed both as to the nature of the lakes themselves and that of the organisms which they contain. It has been the aim of this work to supply a connected account of these facts, based on the most recent particulars. Considering the difficulties which beset the investigator im a tropical climate far from civilisation, the amount of information available is not discreditable to those concerned. 5. SUMMARY. The special interest attaching to this comparative study of African lakes is due to the remarkable nature of the fauna of Tanganyika. That lake was discovered in 1858 by Burton and Speke, the latter bringing back with him shells considered to have a distinctly marine appearance. Subsequent collections emphasised this point, and interest was further increased by the discovery of a medusa by Bobm. A scientific expedition to investigate the fauna was despatched in 1895 in charge of J. E.S. Moore. The rich and unusual nature of the fauna then collected led him to formulate the hypothesis that Tanganyika represents an old Jurassic sea. . In order to test the validity of this hypothesis, a second expedition, on which Moore was accompanied by Fer- gusson, left England in 1899. The result was held by Moore to justify the theory, and he embodied his conelusions in a work entitled ‘‘ The Tanganyika Problem,” published in 1903. As the aquatic flora had not been taken into account, a third expedition was despatched to rectify that omission and make a further collection of animals. This left in 1904 in charge of the writer, returning in 1905. More recently still, in 1912- 13, the Belgian expedition of Louis Stappers visited the lake and obtained additional information. The scope of this paper includes, besides Tanganyika, the five adjacent lakes of most interest, viz. :—Victoria INiyamcaly Nyasa, Albert Nyanza, Edward Nyanza, and Kivu. All these, with the exception of Lake Victoria, occupy portions of the Great Rift Valley, which has probably been formed by trough-faulting on a stupendous scale. They lie in long narrow depressions bounded by escarpments rising to a height of two or three thousand feet above the level of the water. Nyasa and Tanganyika are very deep, the former reaching to over 780 metres and the latter to no less than 1435 metres. Victoria Nyanza has the largest area, but occupies only a shallow basin bounded by low hills. In all the lakes, but especially the largest, conditions are almost oceanic. Climatic differences are negligible, but water tempera- tures are uniformly high, showing an average of about 26°C. Analyses of the water have been made in very few instances. The water of Tanganyika, while fresh, is unusually rich in salts 610 DR. W. A. CUNNINGYON ON THE of magnesium, and that of Kivu contains excessive quantities of the latter as well as sodium salts. It is likely that the salinity of Tanganyika was greater formerly, and may still be subject to variation. Evidence exists of a considerable rise and fall in the level of the lake, yet it seems probable that rainfall and evapora- tion are very nearly balanced. There is reason to believe that Tanganyika had no outlet until it received an additional water supply from the Kivu basin, which was cut off from the Nile, and added to the drainage area: of the big lake by the formation of a voleanic dam in recent geological times. ‘Tanganyika would thus have been completely isolated and its waters more saline until an outflow was established. The present etHuent appears to have been formed as an affluent, its bed being finally captured by a tributary of the Congo. A periodic rise and fall in the lake level may be caused by a temporary damming of the bed of the effluent, indirectly due to irregularities in the rainfall. As regards fauna, it is probable that at the present time all the six lakes have received fairly equal investigation. Only strictly aquatic animals are considered in this paper, but forms obtained from the neighbourhood of a lake are included in the totals. ‘Tanganyika exhibits by far the most remarkable features, containing some 402 species of which 293 (nearly 73 per cent.) are endemic. Nyasa has a total second in point of size, but this has been artificially swollen by extra-lacustrine records which are wanting for other lakes. It has only 24 per cent. of endemic forms, while Victoria Nyanza with a smaller total has a larger percentage of endemics, namely 38 per cent. ‘lhe three smaller lakes show a great reduction both in number of types and number of endemics. Tanganyika is further distinguished in that 57 out of 168 genera are peculiar to its waters, whereas Nyasa can only muster 6 endemic genera and the other lakes fewer still. The fishes of Tanganyika are of outstanding interest, comprising 146 species, of which 121 are endemic. The most notable feature is the number and high degree of specialisation of the Cichlide, which with 27 genera (21 endemic) and 89 species (84 endemic) is the richest Cichlid fauna in the world. A species of incrusting gymnolematous Polyzoon occurs, such forms being mostly marine. There is a large molluscan fauna, and of the Gasteropods more than two-thirds exhibit a marine-like appearance. These are known as the thalassoid or halolimnie group and are without exception endemic. There are no thalassoid Lamellibranchs. Twelve species of prawns are known, typically fresh-water in character, but specialised and all peculiar to the lake. There is an endemic genus of crabs, with 3 species. The Eucopepoda, Branchiura, and Ostracoda are well represented, each showing a large proportion of endemic species. The Cladocera are con- spicuously absent from the lake and the Rotifera are relatively few in number. This may be related to the salinity of the water. The medusa originally described from Tanganyika has now been — ees FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 611 discovered in Victoria Nyanza and the Niger. There are four endemic species of fresh-water sponges. Only 5 groups of animals contain no endemic types. Tanganyika is one of the most remarkable lakes in the world, the only cases comparable being the Caspian Sea and Lake Baikal. Recent figures are difficult to ascertain, but while Baikal may even surpass Tanganyika in the number of unique animal forms, it appears that the Caspian is less striking. There is reason to believe that the relations between marine and fresh-water organisms are intimate and due to a community of descent. The barriers which prevent a change of medium are not insurmountable. Organisms originated in the ocean, and have attained their distribution in fresh water in various ways. Moore regarded many of the Tanganyika types as relicts from a former ocean. 3 The aquatic plants of Tanganyika are of less interest than the animals. The higher plants show no peculiarities, but the Algze differ from those of the remaining lakes. A number of species ave endemic and others are usually marine or brackish in habit. The phytoplankton is rich in species, and more than 70 per cent. of the forms do not occur in Nyasa or Victoria. Recent discoveries do not favour Moore’s hypothesis of a marine Jurassic origin for Tanganyika. Neither his comparison of shells from the lake with marine fossil shells, nor his views on the primitive nature of the halolimnic Gasteropods, have been accepted by leading experts. No members of his halolimnic group, save the Polyzoon and the medusa, can be regarded as peculiarly marine. The Polyzoon is allied to a species still living in Indian seas and the medusa is known from other parts of Africa. The endemic animal types are held to be specialised rather than primitive in nature. Geological evidence is not more favourable. The extensive beds of sandstone and conglomerate which occur in the lake regions were probably formed under fresh-water and terrestrial conditions. ‘hey are considered by some to be of Triassic age, but may belong to a much earlier period, 7. e. Devonian. Thus there is no support for the view that the ocean at one time extended over the Congo basin. Further, there is much to show that the trough in which Tanganyika les was not formed until Middle Tertiary times. A comparison has been made between thalassoid shells from Tanganyika and a fresh-water Cretaceous genus on the one hand and fresh-water Pliocene shells on the other. Since the thalassoid shells have been held to resembie types from such different sources, they offer little indication as to the origin of the lake fauna.—The quasi-oceanic conditions in Tanganyika may have produced an effect on the organisms it contains. Germain asserts that Gasteropods of marine aspect occur in other regions besides Tanganyika, and are derived from the fresh-water types of a former vast lake basin. On the present lakes becoming isolated, 612 DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE the conditions in Tanganyika produced a more striking series of such forms than elsewhere. This view is not regarded as accept- able.—It has been suggested that the salinity of the Tanganyika water has produced marine-like forms, but further evidence 1s needed.—The view that Tanganyika owes its remarkable organ- isms to a prolonged period of isolation is regarded as the most likely suggestion. It does not run counter to geological conceptions. This theory does not account for the medusa. Boulenger suggests that it may have survived from an Kocene sea in Northern Africa. Gravier considers, on the contrary, that it may be a recent migrant from the ocean. The faunas of the remaining lakes are of less interest. Victoria Nyanza is next in importance to Tanganyika. The most con- Spicuous group is the fishes, with a large proportion of endemic species. The Mollusca also are noteworthy. The fauna of Nyasa is similar in character, but with fewer peculiar types. There are, however, 5 endemic genera of fishes. The smaller lakes contain representatives of fewer animal groups as well as fewer species. Kivu is the extreme case, with only 23 species, of which 4 are endemic. ‘The poverty of its fauna may be associated with its exceptional salinity. Albert Nyanza displays the smallest pro- portion of endemic types, viz. 13 per cent. It is suggested that periods of isolation would account for the peculiarities of Victoria Nyanza and Nyasa. Certain animal types are unexpectedly absent from the African lakes. Such are the fresh-water Crustacea d sells and Gammarus and the fish parasite Eehinorhynchus. No explanation of this is forthcoming. The number of specific forms in these lakes appears to be proportional to the size. ‘This would seem to hold good also for the number of genera and families and even for the number of groups represented. It is possible that this principle is of general application. It is thought to be analogous to the phe- nomenon exhibited by the flora of oceanic islands. The affinity between African and Indian fresh-water types is recognisable in several instances among the inhabitants of the lakes. This affinity is explained by the former existence of a continent which embraced these countries in the Carboniferous and subsequent periods. Little is known of the deeper regions of any of the lakes. It remains to be discovered whether associations of abyssal animals exist in them. Neither the vertical distribution of plankton forms, nor their seasonal variations have yet been studied. Further information is needed on the salts dissolved in the water, the depth and nature of the lake basins, water temperatures, ete. It is nevertheless possible from established facts to form a true conception of the nature of the lakes and their organisms. FAUNA OF THE AFRICAN LAKES. 613 BIBLIOGRAPHY. [A number of references which are not cited in the body of this paper are included in the Bibliography in order to add to its general value. All the more important works on Tanganyika and its fauna are included, as well as the principal sources of information on the fauna of the other lakes. | 1. Apams, H. —“ List of the Shells collected by Samuel White Baker, Ksq., during his recent Explorations in Central Africa.” Proce. Zool. Soc. 1866, p. 375. 2. AnceEy, C. F. —“Résultat des recherches malacologiques de Mer. Lechaptois sur les bords du lac Nyassa et de la riviére Shiré.’ Mém. Soc. Zool. France, I’. vii. 1894, p. 217, 3. 5 “Sur quelques espéces de mollusques et sur un genre nouveau du lac Tanganika.” Bull. Soc. Zool. Prance, T. xix. 1894, p. 28. 4. ANNANDALE, N. — “Three Indian Phylactolemata.” Rec. Ind. Mus. vol. 11. 1908-09, p. 169. “ Kreshwater Sponges, Hydroids, and Polyzoa.” The ponges, Hy Fauna of British India. London, 1911. 6. “The Occurrence of a Freshwater Medusa (Limno- enida) in Indian Streams.” Nature, vol. lxxxvii. 1911, p. 144. the 3 “ Systematic Notes on the Ctenostomatous Polyzoa of Fresh Water.” Rec. Ind. Mus. vol. vi. 1911, p. 193. 8. is “ Gbservations on the Invertebrate Fauna of the Kumaon Lakes, with special reference to the Sponges and Polyzoa.” Rec. Ind. Mus. vol. vii. 1912, p. 129. 9. 5 “Preliminary Description of a Freshwater Medusa from the Bombay Presidency.” Rec. Ind. Mus. vol. vii. 1912, p. 258. 10. “The African Element in the Freshwater Fauna of British India.” IX* Congrés Internat. Zool. Monaco, 1913, p. 579. 11. Arnotp, G. ., and Levis alsteseiey C. L.—*On a Freshwater Medusa from the Limpopo River System, with a Note on a para- sitic Infusorian.” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1915, p. 71. 12. Bepparp, F. H. —“Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expe- dition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905.—Report on the Oligochwta.” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1906, vol. i. p. 206. 13. 3 “The Oligochzetous Fauna of Lake Birket el Qurun and Lake Nyassa.” Nature, vol. Ixxvii. 1908. p. 608. 14. Benrenn, F. —* Die Stratigraphie des éstlichen Zentralatrika unter Beriicksichtigung der Beziehungen zu Stidafrika.” Beitr. zur geol. Erforschung d. Deutsch. Schutz- gebiete, Heft 15, Berlin 1918. — Hirudineen Ost-Afrikas.” | Deutsch-Ost-Afrika, Bd. iv. Berlin, 1898. 16. Bocxretmann, A. yvon.—“ Versuch einer Monographie des Kiwu-Sees und seiner Umgebung als Begleittext zu Dr. Kandts Karte.” Beitr. Kolonialpolitik u. Kolonialwirt- schatt, Jahrg. 3, 1901-1902, p. 357. 15. BuancHarp, R. 17. Béunte, L. —‘Die Turbellarien Ost-Afrikas.” Deutsch-Ost- Afrika, Bd. iv. Berlin, 1898. 18. BouteneeEr, C, L. — “On a Freshwater Medusa from Rhodesia.” Quart. Journ. Mier, Sci, vol. lv. 1912, p. 427. 614 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. él. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. BouLEenceER, G. A. DR. W. A. CUNNINGTON ON THE —“Catalogue of the Chelonians, Rhynchocephalians, 22 and Crocodiles in the British Museum.” London, 1889. i “Report on the Collection of Fishes made by Mr. J. E.S. Moore in Lake Tanganyika during his expedition, 1895-96.” Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. xy. 1898, p. 1. “Second Contribution to the Ichthyology of Lake Tanganyika.—On the Fishes obtaimed by the Congo Free State Expedition under Lieut. Lemaire in 1898.” ‘Trans. Zool. Soe. vol. xv. 1899, p. 87. “Diagnoses of new Fishes discovered by Mr. J. KE. S. Moore in Lake Tanganyika.” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 7th ser. vol. vi. 1900, p. 478. “Diagnoses of new Fishes discovered by Mr. J. E. S. Moore in Lakes Tanganyika and Kivu.” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 7th ser. vol. vii. 1901, p. 1. “Third Contribution to the Ichthyology of Lake Tanganyika.—Report on the Collection ot Fishes made by Mr. J. E.S. Moore in Lakes Tanganyika and Kivu during his second expedition, 1899- 1900.” Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. xvi. 1901, p. 137. “Les poissons du bassin du Congo.” Bruxelles, 1901. “ 5 an DA ‘ ‘ . . a Rca a es Lat | i fy ; a MEL or geval Fit bigs eias! Pee: : q Oi col ate er ; ra Bk ek Ai rover aan TN «* i. bee taal “rath spas si eh UE * CALI ET EO! ; So . i f _ at : ee Male trakiegtd | es bela bi hy ange 2 aipliy ’ > veri ce Dey ot Z Separate cuptehine fothintt, Ltt tw \ * Ute Hh a if ng o ee avo as aw 6 iad thd i : reve ‘4 RS a 3 a ae OT Path: Shad: bon uptaean Be cB ant sy } Pay e) Se ‘ * ‘ f ah ve pr Th ef bas A ts i ny ‘ “pag he woah ge a Se aa. ‘ ° ea ' ‘ ' sty Kado wenl. Ue TOU O REDS iY Ais hi Filariid Worms from Mammals and Birds in the Society’s Gardens, 1914-1915. By ©. L. Bourenenr, M.A., D.Sc., F.Z.S., Professor of Zoology, SSL of the Pniniest, Maliore sn (bext-tipresy les) )ycciks avatsurte yates ais oe tcsthe Stat epee eet sale le The Fauna of the African Lakes: a Study in Comparative Limnology with special reference to eee By Wm. A. Ounnineron, M.A., Ph.D., F.Z.S. (Text- figures 1-2.).. Re air ree MI Ne cA rend cs SAS a en RUN RN Descriptions of the Adult, Larval, and Pupal Stages of a New Mosquito from Lord Howe Island, 8. Pacific. By Henry F. Carrer, Liverpool School of Tropical Mieditennerra Mext=tia ures il 32). aye ob tale is qe apalena cee sieve aacareroucbeuevsce ePelsneieinie orelisisieremete The Life-History and Habits of the Yellow Dung-Fly (Scatophaga stercoraria): a possible Blow-Fly Check. By G. 8. Correretn With a Preface by Professor MaxwrnnmneROv, HK. Z.S8. (Dext-floures L=04))) ci tsare sieve mistress toners orareo tele Remarks on the Respiratory Movements of Nectwrus and Cryptobranchus. By A, Witty, M.A., D.Se., F.R.S., F.Z.S. UMTS ARSE IS Ge cae Eke Ome ee ATTEN rE Cees By ae ab MT ar te aos aa List of Council and Officers eevevice © eee ee iad See oy As eee ¢ wo = 0 ie 8 oe 0 6.00 oe) ps) © op ale ale Alphabetical List of Contributors ..--.... Index of Illustrations .. versio it ahie (Uke: Cae aueVisnuNeieiaie) (ele, «ses /e. ce ea fells dre. se) 0 mB adie el eNeiiqiy a me wipy me tele! wlclisrhidse/ eel olf mic isin Nett Page 449 457 ' 467 475 491 623 629 649 NOTICE. The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in four parts, paged consecutively, The Distribution go that the complete reference is now P. Z. 8. 1920, p. is usually as follows, but on account of abnormal conditions Parts L. & II were issied together :— Part I. issued in March. Ilse kee June, IDG e seee, September. BBY December, ‘ Proceedings,’ 1920, Parts I. & II. (pp. 1-194), were published together on July 21st, 1920. Part III. on September 15th, 1920. The Abstracts of the ‘ Proceedings, Nos. 208-210, are contained in this Part. " : t eee ah | z RARI ni Hil l Per Rage fete ener